Home

DAQSTATION CX1000 User`s Manual

1. c Thermocouple DC voltage standard wire wire SSSSSeRs SSSSSsSsse LOH Por ot TEANS Cold junction Input terminals 0 C standard temperature device Model ZC 114 ZA 10 from Coper Electronics Co Ltd Reference Junction Compensation of Thermocouple Input As the measurement terminal of the CX1000 is generally at room temperature the actual output of the thermocouple is different from the values given on the thermoelectromotive force table based on 0 C The CX1000 performs compensation by measuring the temperature at the input terminal and adding the corresponding thermoelectromotive force to the actual output of the thermocouple Therefore when the measurement terminal is shorted equivalent the detector tip being 0 C the measured value indicates the temperature of the input terminal When calibrating the CX1000 this compensation voltage thermoelectromotive force of 0 C reference corresponding to the input terminal temperature must be subtracted from the output of the standard generator before application As shown in the figure by using the 0 C standard temperature device to compensate the reference junction at 0 C you can input the thermoelectr
2. Contact Input Prescribed operation such as stop run operation can be performed using contact inputs There are six contact inputs and numbers DIO01 to DIOO6 are used to select them IM 04L31A01 03E 1 25 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 5 Contact Input Output Related Settings Contact Input Information Registration You can select the information that is registered to the contact input from the following Name of Action Detection Action Stop all loop control operation Trigger Stops the operation of all internal loops Start all loop control operation Trigger Starts the operation of all internal loops Stop run control loops 1 and 2 Edge Starts stops the operation of each internal loop Remote local loops 1 and 2 Edge Switches the local remote operation modes of each internal loop Auto Man operation Edge Switches the auto manual operation modes of each loops 1 and 2 internal loop Cascade switching Trigger Switches the internal loops 1 2 to cascade operation Auto operation Trigger Switches the internal loops 1 2 to auto operation Manual operation Trigger Switches the internal loops 1 2 to manual operation Set target setpoint bits 0 to 3 Trigger Switches the SP to the specified binary value Start program operation Trigger Starts the program operation only on models with the program control option Reset program operation Trigger Resets the progra
3. Channel number measurement input terminal 6 5 4 3 2 1 During Loop Control with PV Switching LOOP2 LOOP1 l 1 l Channel number measurement input terminal gt 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 12 IM 04L31A01 03E 2 3 Wiring General Precautions When Wiring the Input Output Signal Wires A WARNING To prevent the possibility of electric shock when wiring confirm that the power supply source is turned OFF If a voltage greater than or equal to 30 VAC 60 VDC is going to be applied to the output terminals use round crimp on lugs with insulation covers to prevent the wires from coming loose for connecting the signal wires on all output terminals In addition use double insulated wires withstand voltage of 2300 VAC or more for signal wires to which a voltage greater than or equal to 30 VAC 60 VDC is to be applied and basic insulation wires withstand voltage of 1350 VAC or more for all other signal wires To prevent the possibility of electric shock attach the terminal cover after connecting the wires and keep your hands away from the terminals AN CAUT
4. K key lock Key lock icon KiNg e a a d R 4 30 ON TIMO OTIHIME wecvscsesccccsestessecarcrvecvessscasavesvesseceassisbesesetecaees 5 9 ON OFF Control iiir a 1 37 4 14 Operation MOE cceceeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeaee 3 4 6 19 L operation mode during program control s s s 6 19 language changing of operation status indication section eee 1 67 NOG Al ics A A amp eaten E EEE OUT e teensdons Aen stecoannecstesitwnnacavetee 1 2 6 3 local operation mode OUTPUT NigA Mit ssie dietetics eee 1 38 log display ccccssescsesessseescseeeseseeeees output low limit z logic COMPUTATION ececcecesscssssteescecsescsesceseteneees Output lower upper limit 0 0 eee 4 28 login logout output upper lower limit seeen rererere ren 1 32 login logout log output velocity limiter 0 eee ee cee ceee ner eeeeeeeteesteeeeeeens 1 36 logout ooann over integration prevention cccceeceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 35 opani n a eres anes ad ania sanssazaseaete overshoot suppression loop control with PV switching overview display 0c loop number overview display switching Of cccecseesseeseeeseeeeeeeeeees 6 7 lot number IOWSCUL eeen P low signal cutoff point lower limit Alarm cenci P eiea ri RR 1 32 4 28 6 10 lower limit on rate of change alarm cece eee 1 61 Paneli Loa
5. Measurement Alarm Option Terminal See the Input Output Terminals for the CX1000 Measurement Input Terminal Channel number measurement input terminal 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 10 IM 04L31A01 03E 2 3 Wiring Input Output Terminals for the CX1200 5 Control output terminal Output terminals for the loops 1 and 2 Control input terminal Input terminals for the loops 1 and 2 Control Output Terminal Symbols NO Normally opened NC Normally closed C Common mA Current output PULSE Voltage pulse output Control relay Relay Control current output contact output contact output voltage pulse output Transistor output Contact input i l l LOOP2 LOOP1 2 1 LOOP2 LOOP1 Control Input Terminal During Single Loop Control LOOP2 LOOP1 RSP PV RSP PV1 During Cascade Control LOOP2 LOOP1 RSP PV1
6. Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 1 System error Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer 2 Incorrect date or time setting See section 3 3 3 A disabled channel is selected See the Communication Interface User s Manual 4 Incorrect function parameter See the Communication Interface User s Manual 5 The input numerical value exceeds the set range Enter a proper value 6 Incorrect input character string Enter a proper character string 7 Too many characters Enter the correct number of characters 8 Incorrect input mode See the Communication Interface User s Manual 9 Incorrect input range code See the Communication Interface User s Manual 10 A disabled loop number is selected See the Communication Interface User s Manual 11 A disabled module number is selected See the Communication Interface User s Manual 12 A disabled input kind is selected See the Communication Interface User s Manual 13 A disabled pid number is selected See the Communication Interface User s Manual 14 A disabled segment number is selected See the Communication Interface User s Manual 21 Cannot set an alarm for a skipped channel See the Communication Interface User s Manual 22 The upper and lower span limits are equal See sections 4 8 and 7 1 23 The upper and lower scale limits are equal See sections 4 8 and 7 1 30 The partial boundary value exceeds the range of th
7. This operation saves the settings made in the basic setting mode Operation display MENU key or ESC key MENU key ESC key Control setting mode Common and measurement setting mode Basic setting Setting mode Conirol Set mode mode MENU key Press the FUNC Menu Press the FUNC Menu key for s s Menu key for 3 s MENU key or MENU key or k ftk ft ki ESC k Soft keys ESC key Soft keys ESC key oft keys ey Setup display Setup display Setup display 1 to 8 1 to 11 1 to 12 1 to 9 when program 1 to 11 Basic common and control is ON measurement settings 12 Basic control settings Menu This display is used to select the necessary setup items Selection Display for Control Related Setup Items ea o cae iy n roe Control alarm E Operation related parameters Zone PID PID parameters 1 2 3 4 Setting Display This display is used to set various parameters for the selected item Control Input Range Setting Display ea gt ke 3 SpanLower Upper ScaleLower Upper 1 66 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 16 Display Function Operation Display This display is used to monitor the operation status and carry out control operations such as running and stopping the operation Control Group Display Controller Style for Monitoring the Control Status and Performing Control Operations Display Construction The display consists of the opera
8. mrm Erm EEN During Loop Control with PV Switching LOOP2 LOOP1 i I PV2 PV1 RSP PV2 PV1 IM 04L31A01 03E 2 11 Bundi pue uoneyyjeysu D 2 3 Wiring Input Output Terminals for the CX1206 ia Control output terminal Output terminals for the loops 1 and 2 Control input terminal and measurement input terminal Input terminals for the loops 1 and 2 and measurement input terminals Control Output Terminal Symbols NO Normally opened NC Normally closed C Common mA Current output PULSE Voltage pulse output Control relay contact output Relay Control current output contact output voltage pulse output Transistor output l l Contact input LOOP2 LOOP1 2 1 LOOP2 LOOP1 Control Input Terminal During Single Loop Control LOOP2 LOOP1 m l Channel number measurement input terminal RSP PV RSP PV gt 6 5 4 3 2 1
9. Alarm output C Common FAIL MEMORY NO Normally Opened 04 03 02 01 NC Normally Closed NC NC NC NC NC NC c c c c c c NO NO NO NO NO NO Measurement remote input A4FR option _ FAIL MEMORY ALARM REMOTE 04 03 02 01 NC NC NC NC NC NC 6 3 c c c c c c c 7 4 1 NO NO NO NO NO NO 8 5 2 ALARM terminals 01 to 06 are indicated using 101 to 106 in the measurement alarm output settings see section 7 2 Setting Related to Measurement alarm _ REMOTE terminals 1 to 8 are indicated using numbers 1 to 8 in the measurement remote output settings see section 11 5 Setting the Measurement Remote Input INO TC a a There are no output registration settings for the FAIL and MEMORY terminals However the setting for outputting memory end Memory Alarm Time exists In addition FAIL output can be assigned to the DIGITAL OUT1 terminal of the control output terminal block In this case registration settings are required The control alarm output cannot be assigned to the ALARM terminal The control alarm output can be assigned to the DIGITAL OUT terminal of the control output terminal block The measurement alarm output can be assigned to the DIGITAL OUT terminal of the control output terminal block IM 04L31A01 03E 2 7 Bundi pue uoneyye su D 2 3 Wiring Terminal Arrangements of the Measu
10. The highest digit indicates the arrangement of the terminal block shown in the figure below the lower two digits indicate the terminal position within the terminal block 01 is the top right terminal and 36 is the bottom left terminal The terminals that cannot be used are indicated as __ Label on the Back of the Terminal Cover A character indicating the terminal function and a terminal symbol indicating the type of signal to be input output to each terminal are printed on the label on the back of the terminal cover The following figure is for the control measurement input terminal block For a description on the wiring method corresponding to each terminal see pages 2 10 to 2 12 Terminal symbol 2 8 IM 04L31A01 03E 2 3 Wiring Input Output Terminals for the CX1000 Measurement alarm option terminal block APY ay A6 ABR A4F amp feIS ASZFReIELE CAE APY aYROMmF7OvF DREBENTUET One screw terminal is shown in the figure below EM lt Unique terminal number A lt Chracters indicating the type of input output signal FACT MRL EOT ESO
11. plock GiSPlAY ciscciscccsssssstecesctassssseseadceieesseaseesdezerssssoeeseacertass 1 70 boundary n 8 22 brightness of display cccsssecsesseecesesssessseeseeesseeseees 3 13 DUIMOUL cece eee eee esse sees eeeeeeseesseeeseeeees 1 24 1 59 4 4 7 2 C calculation expression calibration 00 channel nsee channel assignment of channel display color characters entry OF ccsa ea Clearing of the memory cceceeeeeeceetteeetetteeeteaeeeteeaees CLOG CLOGiCoMpPUTATION 2 1 2 iiseseicsssoessiisiddeesiecceeessteasieeieies CLOG EMON or raer an E rS eaer EENT S COMMON iiinn a communication command log COMPUTATION secdstececskeechss Sccessaadexsiadenee bce lds diy Saa Esas ERES COMPUTATION ELTON cece cece ee eeeeee ete eeeeeeeaeeeteeeeeeeee 1 8 4 43 computation function 1 91 App 6 COMPUTATION ICON scssi anaa 1 70 computation starting stopping resetting of 0 0 10 4 Conditional expression eee eee eee cee eeeeeeeneeeeeees App 16 CONSTANT ccscssecsscscassscssccaccasecsassenancssaassasoeas sacassaadssaasaacasaaanse 10 3 contact input DIGITAL IN REMOTE wiring contact input registration Of c eee 4 7 contact input output 1 25 contact output DIGITAL OUT wiring cee 2 16 contact output LOOP1 to 6 Wiring cececeeeeeee eee 2 15 control action summary display Control constant oe eee eee reee cess cee
12. For 7 Program control parameters to appear p i you must set Control gt 1 Control action Input 4a Petane disatu setting gt Control mode to a mode other than Off and Program control to On For details Me e Tami on the procedure see section 4 1 Control gt Control action Vv 7 A ESC key Program control parameters 1 Program parameter setting 2 Event output setting 3 Aux Auto message Display position 4 Aux Event group To set a single pattern carry out steps to 8 To set multiple patterns repeat steps to 1 Pattern initial setting DISP ENTER key Program initial setting Program parameter E BET m 1 Pattern initial setting Al arois al END Segment setting method Time gt Pattern nane Pattern 1 Action loop Loop 1 CAUTION OFF You must press the DISP ENTER key to ESC key confirm the item indicated in yellow pias on the 1 Pattern initial setting display s ae a parties Eh before you can edit the pattern settings SERU Mn GILES pee j Select pattern number anG then change the settings 2 Pe x END Program parameter setting Pattern number 1 ESC key Program initial settins 1 Pattern initial setting DISP ENTER Pattern nunber e A P Segments 4 2 Wait action setting key A 4 Segment setting method Time 3 Pattern start setting ESC k Panterninene Pattern 1 4 Program pattern setting ey 5 Event setting q 6 Hysteresis PY event A
13. Does the input meet the specifications YES Is the range span setting appropriate No Change the range span setting See section 7 1 VES Move the input wire away from the noise source Ground the recorder NO e Ground the object being measured e Insulate the thermocouple and the object being measured e Use shielded cables for input e Change the integral time of the input A D converter see section 7 1 e Use the input filter rolling average See section 7 1 Are taking measures against noise YES e Attach the input terminal cover NO properly e Protect the input terminal from wind or fans Keep the temperature fluctuation YES near the input terminal small Is the environmental temperature kept constant e Wire correctly see section 2 3 NO Attach the terminal block correctly e Fasten the terminal screws correctly e Insulate the RTD from the ground YES e Replace burnt thermocouples Is the input wiring correct e Stop using the burnout function of NO other equipment e Ground the CX1000 and other Is the input wiring parallel with other equipment equipment at one point e Disconnect parallel wiring Use a double element TC for instance YES Is the RJC setting correct TC input NO Set it correctly See section 7 1 YES Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer IM 04L31A01 03E 12 13 Bunooys jqnoIL R Chapter
14. Fixed point control Select this mode if you wish to avoid the control OUT from reacting sensitively to the SP change causing a disturbance in the control such as in the case with a continuous fixed point control PV derivative type PID without output bump PV derivative type PID with output bump PV SP morron ENR ye SP x ONIN aaa PV OUT OUT IM 04L31A01 03E 1 3 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 2 Control Function Overview Control Parameters The following control parameters are available For each group you can enter up to eight sets of SPs and PID parameters as underlined below SP PID constant control output limiter ON OFF of the shutdown function manual reset value relay hysteresis control action direction preset output SP tracking PV tracking setpoint limiter output velocity limiter auto manual switching of the over integration prevention function anti reset windup ON OFF of the control output suppression function and SP ramp rate PID Selection Method The following two methods are available Target setpoint selection method A group up to 8 groups consisting of a SP and PID parameters is registered to a PID number SP number By specifying the SP number using keys on the front panel external contact input or via communications the SP and PID parameters are switched A PV Rise according to the setpoint ramp up setting No 1PID SP3 No 3PID
15. 3 16 IM 04L31A01 03E 3 8 Inserting and Ejecting the External Storage Medium Procedure This section explains how to insert and eject the external storage medium You can use one of three types of external storage medium floppy disk Zip disk or ATA flash memory card The type of external storage medium is specified at the time of purchase CAUTION If you turn ON OFF the CX1000 while a Zip disk is inserted in the drive the Zip drive may malfunction When turning ON OFF the CX1000 first remove the Zip disk from the drive Do not eject the external storage medium while the access lamp is illuminated This can damage the data Do not operate the floppy disk drive or Zip drive in a place with vibrations or shock The disk or drive may malfunction De For other information regarding the handling of the external storage medium see section 2 1 Handling Precautions Inserting the External Storage Medium 1 Open the front cover by pressing down on the knob that is located in the center of the upper section of the cover and pulling it forward Insert the external storage medium into the drive and press it until it clicks into place Floppy disk Zip disk ATA flash memory card 2HD 100 MB 4 to 440 MB 2 When the power switch is turned ON closing the front cover causes the CX1000 to search for an external storage medium in the drive If the external storage medium is detected an icon indicating the exi
16. START key USER key STOP key START STOP Key Starts stops the data acquisition to the internal memory The waveform display on the trend display is also started stopped For the operating procedure see section 9 1 Acquiring Measurement Data to the Internal Memory and Saving Data to the External Storage Medium On models with the computation function option this key is also used to start stop the computation and report For the operating procedure see section 10 2 Starting Stopping and Resetting the Computation USER Key Executes the function assigned to it For the procedure in assigning a function to the USER key see section 11 1 USER Key Assingment and Operation Key Operations in Basic Setting and Setting Modes Procedure Soft keys DISP ENTER key Arrow keys Selecting Setup Items on the Menu When the CX1000 enters setting mode a setting menu appears as shown in the figure below In this menu select the items you wish to set by pressing the soft keys To close this 43 Operation related parameters Zone PID PID parameters 1 2 3 4 Next 1 3 IM 04L31A01 03E 3 7 suoljeiodQ UOWWOZ pue s pon Aejdsiq syed jo sowenN e 3 2 Basic Key Operations Selecting Setup Items on the Setting Display 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate item box The soft keys corresponding to the item are displayed
17. 4 22 IM 04L31A01 03E 4 9 Control alarm This section explains the procedures for setting alarms for the control function Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt 2 soft key select Control alarm The following display appears GROUP 1 gt Oo He along 16 19 55 oF MEO Alarm Loop number 1 Type Standby Relay No Action Ifon PV High On On Dopa De enersg 2 on M 0f lott atf dotf SP number 1 Alarm value Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item box 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note For setup item boxes that require values to be entered a pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key is used 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Clearing Alarms When They Occur The following operation is valid only when Relay Behavior is set to Hold or Indicator is set to Hold 1 In operation mode press the FUNC key A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom
18. setting SP1 l No 1PID Fall according to the setpoint ramp down SPn Target setpoint number SP2 No 2PID Rise according to the setpoint ramp up setting zx Switch from SP1 to SP3 zx xz Switch from SP3 to SP1 Switch from SP1 to SP2 Zone PID method The measurement span is divided into a maximum of seven zones using reference points The optimum PID constant is preassigned to each zone and the PID constant in actuality other control parameters that are registered using the PID number are included is automatically switched according to the PV This method is suited for controlling equipment such as reactors in which the chemical reaction gain varies depending on the temperature Maximum value of measurement span Reference point 6 Reference point 5 Reference point 4 Reference point 3 Reference point 2 Reference point 1 Minimum value of measurement span Note If the current PV is here PID _ No 7 PID No 6 PID No 5 PID No 4 PID No 3 PID No 2 PID Se ol No 1 PID gt Time When performing program control operation on models with the program control option you will select between segment PID method zone PID selection OFF and zone PID method For a description on auto tuning which automatically sets the optimum PID constant see section 1 12 Tuning 1 4 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 2 Control Function Overview Alarm Output When the co
19. 1 Some of the items such as the input range or computation settings cannot be changed during control operation during data acquisition to the internal memory and during computation 2 However if the primary loop of cascade control is in operation you can switch to basic setting mode Power ON Display Transition Diagram Operation mode Operation display End soft key gt DISP ENTER key This operation saves the settings made in the basic setting mode 2 Cannot switch to the basic setting mode MENU key MENU key or ESC key Common and during data ESC key measurement acquisition Control setting mode setting mode apate tc Basic setting Setting mode Control Set mode mode Menu Press the FUNC key for 3 s 2 Menu T MENU key Press the FUNC key for 3 s 2 Menu Soft keys MENU key or ESC key MENU key or ESC key Soft keys oft keys ESC key 1 to 8 1 Setup displays Setup displays 1 to 11 Setup display 1 to 12 3 1 1 to 9 when program control is ON Procedure 3 1 to 11 Basic common and measurement settings 12 Basic control settings sort keys COUCICIC IC amp amp amp Y FUNC key MENU key ESC key 3 4 IM 04L31A01 03E 3 2 Bas
20. the falling edge of the signal signifies Local If program control is ON only on models with the program control option switching is performed between program operation and local operation In the cascade mode registration is allowed only for loops 1 and 3 Auto Man 1 and 2 lt not selectable during cascade control Select this when registering a contact input for switching auto and manual Man operation for each internal loop The rising edge of the signal signifies Auto the falling edge of the signal signifies Man Cascade1 2 lt selectable only during cascade control Select this for internal loops 1 2 when registering a contact input for switching from auto operation or manual operation to cascade operation Note ___ _ Cascade1 2 does not appear as a selection if the Control mode box under Control gt 1 Control action Input setting is not set to Cascade IM 04L31A01 03E 4 7 suoljeiad Q dnjas pajyejay uoun 017U09 g 4 3 Control gt DI DO SW registration Auto1 2 lt selectable only during cascade control Select this for internal loops 1 2 when registering a contact input for switching from cascade operation or manual operation to auto operation Man1 2 lt selectable only during cascade control Select this for internal loops 1 2 when registering a contact input for switching from cascade operation or auto operation to manual operation A single registration is possible per contr
21. Clear soft key Used when clearing the character string Move the cursor to the string you wish to clear and press the Clear soft key A a 1 soft key Selects the upper case A lower case a or value 1 The character that can be enter changes in the order shown below each time the A a 1 soft key is pressed However characters that cannot be entered are skipped The selected character is shown on the right side of the soft key display section Upper case A lower case a value 1 IM 04L31A01 03E 3 3 Setting the Date and Time Procedure This section explains how to set the date time and the daylight savings function of the CX1000 internal clock Opening the Setting Display Setting the Date and Time and the Daylight Savings Time Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Set mode Control gt MENU key switch to Set mode gt 8 soft key select Time From the operation display use the above keys to open the Time set dialog box Fe 01 17 OP EEMO YY MM DD HH MM SS DST 02 02 28 00 01 03 Input Setting Daylight Savings Time Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Set mode Control gt MENU key switch to Set mode gt 6 soft key select File DST DATAG Directory name Daylight saving time lt YY MM DD HH Summer On 02704707 02 Winter On ERG Setup Procedure Setting the Date and Time 1 Press the I
22. Continue initial setting Continue the operation before the power failure occurred Manual operation Start from the manual operation condition Auto operation only during fixed point operation Auto operation by continuing the operation before the power failure occurred Reset only during program operation Stop the program operation Note If the duration of the power failure is less than or equal to 2 s a short power disruption the operation before the disruption continues If the duration is between 2 to 5 s the behavior for a short power disruption or an extended power failure is carried out depending on the condition Select whether the initial PID constant in PID parameter settings see page 1 37 is optimized to temperature control pressure control or flow control Below are the initial values of PID constants Initial values for temperature P 5 0 240 s and D 60s Initial values for pressure flow P 120 0 20s and D 0s The following four control modes are available The mode is selected for each control loop Single loop control Basic control consisting of a single system of controller CPU PV 4 SP PID 4 OUT IM 04L31A01 03E suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 3 Basic Settings of Control Cascade control Control consisting of two systems of controller CPUs that uses the primary control output as the secondary control SP Continuous PID control is only possibl
23. Hour Every hour Day Every day at the Time hour on the hour Week Every week on the day specified by Day of the week at the Time hour on the hour Month Every month on the day specified by Date at the Time hour on the hour Date Day of the week Date is a setting used when Timeup type is set to Month Set the value in the range of 1 to 28 29 to 31 cannot be specified Date also appears when Timeup type is set to Hour or Day However the setting is valid only when Timeup type is set to Month Day of the week is a setting used when Timeup type is set to Week Enter the day of the week using the soft key Time hour Set the hour when the data is to be saved when Timeup type is set to Day Week or Month This setting is invalid when Timeup type is set to Hour Set the hour in the range of 00 to 23 Setting the Auto Save Interval Auto save interval The possible values from the following table is displayed as choices for the auto save interval The maximum auto save interval varies depending on the display update rate Sampling interval is determined from the display update rate the data type display data only display data and event data and the number of measurement and computation channels to be stored Display Update Rate DIV imin 2min 5min 10min 20min 30min 1h 2h 4h 10h Sampling 2 4 10 20 40 60 120 240 480 1200 interval s Auto save 10min 10min 10min 10min i
24. Meanings and Syntax of Equations for information on how to create equations 4 46 IM 04L31A01 03E 4 20 Control Constant Settings Style Number S3 or Later This section explains the setting procedure for constants used for PV SP computation analog retransmission and logic computation W01 W36 Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt 8 soft key select Control math setting 9 soft key when program control is ON gt 3 soft key Constant The following display appears CONTROL GROUP2 Gapa or Ealo 5 Constant Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item box 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note For setup item boxes that require values to be entered a pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key is used 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box IM 04L31A01 03E 4 47 suoljei9adoQ dnjas pajyejay uoun 017U09 eS 4 20 Control Constant Settings Style Number
25. 1 Press the NEXT 1 3 soft key 2 Press the TSP CHG soft key A menu for selecting the loop of which the target SP is to be changed appears The soft keys of each loop show the tag names of each loop INT 01 to INT 06 in the figure below INT 1__ INT 02 BACK 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the tag name of the loop you wish to change the target SP A pop up window for changing the final SP appears The window shows the current final SP INT 1 INT INT 81_ 20 0 H BACK 4 Change the target SP using the up and down arrow keys 5 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes To close the window without making any changes press the ESC key Press the BACK soft key to return to the original soft key menu Turning ON OFF the Pattern Waveform Display of Each Loop The operation is the same as program selection display For the operating procedure see page 6 12 IM 04L31A01 03E 6 17 uonesedo 01 U05 Bulunp suonesodo fo 6 4 Operations on the Program Selection Display and Program Control Display Only on Models with the Program Control Option Event Display Operation Style Number S3 or Later The operation is the same as program selection display For the operating procedure see page 6 15 ALL hmingdiw E Shows upper and lower limit values when events are displayed Pattern display ee events even those occurring from this point are displayed Time events Event display 3 Pv vents
26. 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed For each of the settings other than BCD code contact input registration see section 4 3 Basic Control gt DI DO SW registration DI DO SW registration Press the soft key corresponding to the program pattern number to specify Program Pattern Required Number Setup Procedure position Number Used of Bits BCD CX1000 CX2000 1 1 Ptrn 1 soft key Patrn 1 soft key Up to 3 2 Ptrn 1 3 soft key Patrn 1 3 soft key Up to 7 3 Ptrn 1 7 soft key Patrn 1 7 soft key Up to 9 4 Ptrn 1 15 soft key Patrn 1 15 soft key Up to 19 5 Ptrn 1 30 soft key Patrn 1 30 soft key Ptrn 1 30 soft key Patrn 1 30 soft key Up to 30 6 Be sure to set None for the PatternNo5bit If you place the cursor on DI001 and press the soft key that includes the maximum pattern number to be specified contact inputs of the required number of bits D1001 D1005 are automatically registered IM 04L31A01 03E 4 51 suoljeiadoQ dnjas payejay uoun 017U09 s Chapter 5 Program Control Related Setup Operations 5 1 Program Pattern Setup Procedure To set up program control follow the flow chart shown below MENU key switch to the Serting mode control gt Next 1 2 soft key Control group setting C Ten segment linearizer 1 0 a Program control parameters
27. 370 Command is not permitted to the current model e Maintenance and Test Communication Command Errors An English error message is returned via the communication interface It is not displayed on the screen Code Message 390 Command error 391 Delimiter error 392 Parameter error 393 No permission 394 No such connection 395 Use quit to close this connection 396 Failed to disconnect 397 No TCP control block IM 04L31A01 03E 12 7 BunooyseqnoiL R 12 1 Messages Other Communication Errors An English error message is returned via the communication interface It is not displayed on the screen Code Message 400 Input username 401 Input password 402 Select username from admin or user 403 Login incorrect try again 404 No more login at the specified level is acceptable 410 Login successful The special user level 411 Login successful The general user level 420 Connection has been lost 421 The number of simultaneous connection has been exceeded 422 Communication has timed out Note For information regarding the communication function of the CX1000 see the CX1000 CX2000 Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L31A01 17E Status Messages Code Message 500 Execution is complete 501 Please wait a moment 503 Da
28. 8 18 IM 04L31A01 03E 8 12 Measurement Function gt Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position Scale Position of Trend Displays Scale position Select the scale display position on the trend display from 1 to 6 When the trend waveform is displayed horizontally the right end is 1 and the left end is 6 When the trend waveform is displayed vertically the top is 1 and the bottom is 6 Select Off if you do not wish to display the scale Below is an example in which the position of the scale is offset for each channel When displaying the trend waveform horizontally Note 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 po 2 0 F amp F FE EEE ise falsk Eae LEJE E Beer E ef E 6E E E F fet u ou Be nated E aus k EE castes ELE E F E E HAE EEF EF FE FE FE E FE E2 02 0 2 0 2 02 02 0 When displaying the trend waveform vertically If the scales of multiple channels are set to the same position the scale of the channel assigned earlier to the group is displayed Example If the order of assignment of a group is 03 02 01 and the scale display position of all channels is set to 1 the scale of channel 3 is displayed at display position 1 Even if some of the scale display positions are skipped the scale is packed towards display position 1 Example Suppose the assignment of channels to a group is 01 02 03 and the display positions of the scales are set to 1 3 and 6 respective
29. C DI Level 1 to 1 Cont 1 to 1 Note e Relationship with the reference channel Even if the input types Volt TC RTD or DI or the measurement ranges between the difference computation channel and reference channel are not the same the difference computation is performed according to the following rules If the number of digits to the right of the decimal is different between the reference channel and the difference computation channel the number of digits to the right of the decimal of the measured value of the reference channel is matched to that of the difference computation channel and the difference is computed Example If the measured value of the difference computation channel is 10 00 and the measured value of the reference channel is 100 0 the computed result is 10 100 0 90 00 If the units between the reference channel and the computation channel differ unit correction is not performed Example If the measured value of the difference computation channel is 10 00 mV and the measured value of the reference channel is 5 00 mV the computed result is 10 00 V 5 00 mV 5 00 V If the Mode of the reference channel is set to Scale or Sqrt the scale value is used for the computation When set to Scale Select this mode when scaling the measured value to a value in an appropriate unit for the measurement Select the type input type from Volt TC RTD and DI Then set Range
30. DO 2 DIO 11 DIO 12 DO 2P DIO 12P Internal switches Displays the input status of the specified DI The status of the internal switches is displayed The status of the internal switches is output to 1 DO 1 ON is output when the internal switches are ON and 0 OFF is output when they are OFF You can output the ON and OFF statuses of the internal switches to separate DOs 1 ON is output from the ON output DO when the internal switches are ON and 0 OFF is output from the OFF output DO when they are OFF 0 OFF is output from the ON output DO when the internal switches are OFF and 1 ON is output from the OFF output DO when they are ON The same operation as the DO 1 is performed while displaying the input status of the specified DI The same operation as the DO 2 is performed while displaying the input status of the specified DI You can output the ON and OFF statuses of the internal switches to separate DOs A pulse signal having a 1 to 2 second pulse width is output from the ON output DO when the internal switches are ON and from the O OFF output DO when they are OFF The same operation as the DO 2P is performed while displaying the input status of the specified DI DO 1 DIO 11 DO 2P DIO 12P DO for ON output DO for OFF output output 1 to 2 seconds DOfororF 1 ON output 0 OFF 1 to 2 seconds 1 28 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 6 Target Setpoint Related Setti
31. Display data file event data file Display data file size 900 000 bytes Up to 75 000 data points Event data file size 300 000 bytes Up to 30 000 data points When using a Zip drive or an ATA memory card the file size varies depending on the storage capacity of the medium Sample length example Number of control loops 2 loops measurement channels 6 channels computation channel 0 channels Display data file only Display update rate min div 1 min 5 min 20 min 30 min 60 min 240 min Save interval s 2s 10s 40s 60s 120s 480 s Sample length Approx 13h Approx 69h Approx 11 days Approx 17 days Approx 34days Approx 138 days Event data file only Save interval Sample length Display data file event data fi Display data file Display update rate min div 1s Approx 13 h 1 min 5s Approx 69 h le 5 min 30s Approx 17 days 20 min 120s Approx 69 days 30 min 60 min 240 min Save interval s Sample length 2s Approx 10 h Event data file only Save interval Sample length Manual sampled data 1s Approx 3 h 10s 5s Approx 17 h Data Approx 2 days 40s Approx 8 days 30s Approx 4 days format ASCII 60s 120s 480 s Approx 13 days Approx 26 days Approx 104 days 120s Approx 17 days Trigger Key operation communication command or remote input Maximum number of data se
32. Floppy disk Zip disk ATA flash memory card Note If you are using a Zip disk and the ejection of the Zip disk is prohibited by the key lock function you cannot eject the Zip disk using the eject button Clear the key lock before removing the Zip disk For the procedure in clearing the key lock see section 11 2 Key Lock Procedure When the Zip Disk Cannot Be Ejected If the Zip disk cannot be removed by performing the steps given in Ejecting the External Storage Medium carry out the following steps to eject it 1 Open the front cover by pressing down on the knob that is located in the center of the upper section of the cover and pulling it forward 2 Insert a pin with a diameter of around 1 mm into the eject button hole and slowly press the pin in The Zip disk will be ejected Zip disk eject hole Eject button of the Zip drive Insert a pin 3 18 IM 04L31A01 03E 3 8 Inserting and Ejecting the External Storage Medium Formatting the External Storage Medium Use a formatted external storage medium The CX1000 formats external storage media as follows for the procedure in formatting the external storage medium see page 9 17 Floppy disk 2HD 1 44 MB Zip disk FDISK 1 partition hard disk format ATA flash memory card FDISK 1 partition hard disk format External storage media that are formatted using other instruments can be used on the CX1000 if the format is the same External storage medi
33. IM 04L31A01 03E 1 49 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 11 Program Control Related Settings Repeat Function This function repeats the operation over a section of the program pattern consisting of continuous segments To perform repeat operation you specify the repeat start segment repeat end segment and the number of repetitions repeat count Below is a program pattern in which the repeat count 1 repeat start segment number 3 and repeat end segment number 5 You can also specify an infinite number of repetitions SEG1 Program pattern for the 2nd loop TSP2 SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEG5 SEG3 SEG4 SEG5 SEG6 Program pattern for the 1st loop Same value TSPn Note gt Final target setpoint Repeat period repeat count 1 Repeat start Repeat end segment number 3 segment number 5 The operation when repeat action repeat start segment repeat end segment and repeat frequency including infinity are changed during program control is indicated below When changed to repeat OFF or when the segment number at that point is larger than the repeat end segment Repeat action is not performed regardless of the repeat action performed or not performed up to that point When the segment number at that point is smaller than the repeat start segment Repeat action is performed from the first repetition using the new settings regardless of the repeat action performed or
34. Logical computation AND OR XOR NOT Determines the AND logical product OR logical sum XOR exclusive logical sum of two elements NOT negation of an element and outputs O or 1 Statistical Computation TLOG SUM TLOG MAX TLOG MIN TLOGAVE TLOG P P Determines the sum SUM maximum MAX minimum MIN average AVE and maximum minimum P P at specified time intervals There are three timers for setting the interval Statistical computation control CLOG MAX CLOG MIN CLOG AVE CLOG P P Determines the maximum MAX minimum MIN average AVE and the difference in the max and min values P P of data measured at the same time Conditional expression control eq eq2 eq3 If the result of eq1 is not 0 eq2 is computed or if the result of eq1 is 0 equation 3 is computed If eq1 s computation results in an error a computation error occurs App 6 IM 04L31A01 03E Appendix 2 Supplementary Explanation of the Computation Function Computation Types That Can Be Used by the Computation Function Computation Measurement PV SP Analog Logic type computation computation retransmission computation Four rithmetical operations Yes Yes Yes No Power Yes Yes Yes No Exponent Yes Yes Yes No Square root Yes Yes Yes No Absolute value Yes Yes Yes No Common logarithm Yes Yes Yes No Relational operation Yes Yes Yes
35. Operation mode summary data Information of operation mode switching Internal control channel internal loop channel assignments The data of two loops is assigned to channel numbers as follows Loop 1 PV 101 Loop 1 SP 102 Loop 1 OUT 103 Loop 2 PV 104 Loop 6 SP 105 Loop 6 OUT 106 External control channel external loop channel assignments The data of 4 loops is assigned to channel numbers as follows External loop 1 PV 201 External loop 1 SP 202 External loop 1 OUT 203 External loop 4 PV 210 External loop 4 SP 211 External loop 4 OUT 212 Measurement Data e Display data and event data The measured computed control data can be written to two types of data display data and event data in the internal memory of the CX1000 Display data Data used to display waveforms on the CX1000 display Display data consists of maximum and minimum values of the measured or computed data sampled at the scan interval within the time period corresponding to one dot on the time axis on the display The display data that is saved can be likened to the conventional recording on the chart sheet and is useful for observations of long term changes The data is saved in binary format Event data Event data consists of instantaneous values of the measured computed control data at specified sampling intervals This is useful when you wish to observe the measured computed control data more in detail than display data If the sampling interva
36. Switching the Displayed Pattern in the Program Operation Display 1 Press DISP ENTER key in the program operation display to display the display selection menu 2 With Control selected press the Right arrow key to display a submenu Press the up and down arrow keys to select the pattern to display 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to display the selected pattern w Starting Program Control Start program control by displaying the program selection display selecting the pattern number PT NO soft key and starting the control RUN soft key You can only start the program control on the program selection display When you start the program control the program selection display switches to the program control display On the program control display run and reset the program control using a pop up window that appears by pressing the RUN RESET soft key Selecting the Program Pattern Start Segment If you wish to set the program control start segment to a value other than 1 select the start segment number using a number within Segments Set the value on the program selection display before program control The value is reset to 1 when you reset the program control Setting the Delay Time for Starting the Program Pattern Control If you wish to delay the starting of the program pattern control by a specified time set the time from program control start to program pattern control in the range of 00 00 00 to 99 59 59 Set the value
37. The following display appears The following figure shows an example of a display when display data is to be loaded A similar display appears when event data is to be loaded ee oD Load display data Directory File name Time 21928532 CDS 2002 02 19 20 53 21928542 CDS 2002 02 19 20 54 Operations on the Display 1 From the directories listed in the Directory name box select the directory in which the file you wish to load is located using the up and down arrow keys Root directory is denoted by A list of files in the selected directory is displayed on the right 2 Press the right arrow key to move the cursor to the file list section 3 Use the up and down arrow keys to select the file to be loaded To move the blue cursor back to the Directory name column press the left arrow key 4 Press the DISP ENTER key Waveforms are displayed on the historical trend display To return to the Save Load Clear data menu screen without displaying the historical trend press the ESC key Note The display data extension is cds the event data extension is cev Selecting Time or Batch Number Display When the Batch Header Option is Active 1 When batch headers are active the Batch and Time soft keys are displayed Press the key for the item you wish to display 9 10 IM 04L31A01 03E 9 5 Managing Files and Checking the Free Space on the External Storage Medium Procedure This se
38. cecceseeseeseeseeerenaeeereneeeeeneeeeeeanes 8 7 scale lower upper limit 4 21 scale number of digits displayed 8 20 Scale POSION saninin a cet 8 19 scan interval eee eececeeceeecesseseeeeeceesesneaeeeeeseesnenaes 1 58 7 2 screen image data Saving Of cece ceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 9 14 Sroa ake E tes ees 8 24 SEG TIME 6 17 segment edit eee cece eee ceeeeeee ce eeeeeceeeeeeeeeaaeeeesaaeeeenaeeeeees 5 3 SEGMENT NO Zoio aud ceded alee 6 13 segment NUMbEF n se 5 6 5 8 6 12 6 16 segment PID group NO s ssseessesssssnssssrensnsrnnennsenneneseneenenee 5 7 segment setting Method 00 ee eee eeeceeeceseteeeeneeeeees 5 3 SEGMENT TIME 74 as ann a r a Hire 6 13 segment time segments self diagnosis self diagnosis output ee ee cee ee ceeeeeeteeeeeetteeeeeeee 1 5 1 27 Setpoint limiter isna ed sea Gee ee aedeeth 1 30 settings initialization of setup data s ssssseesessseresrreriernrnsnne 1 90 setup data loading and saving of SOtUP MOE niorir si i a ri a nies Shuntresistor sc sits a saa ensued shutdown function single loop control snapshot s SOMKCYS mii eir e ra a reo svensteaatuaviesssneoed aE SP rata ILE 8 SP changing of SPhighliMit ssnin aa NG SP JOW IMIE ee e e aaraa e r e e SP NO SP number nsise SP number selection SOUICE 00 ceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 4 12 SP ramp down rate SP ramp up rate s e 1 30
39. gt 5 soft key select Display gt 1 soft key select Group set Trip line The following display appears Group set Group name GROUP 1 101 103 01 02 Position Color 108 il Red ws Eae Setup Procedure 1 With the cursor blue located at the Group number box select the group number for setting the trip line using the soft keys The cursor moves to the Group name box Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the On Off box under Trip line Press the On or Off soft key The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item If you select On set Position and Color using soft keys and character number input keys Repeat steps 3 to 4 to enter all the trip lines you wish Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item Setting the Trip Lines Group number Select the group you wish to set a trip line to from 1 to 6 For the procedure in setting the groups see section 8 3 Measurement Function gt Measurement Group Setup Operation Trip line Off On Turn On the trip line you wish to enable Position Enter the position in the range of 0 to 100 of the scale Color The initial color settings of colors are as follows Trip line no 1 red trip line no 2 green trip line no 3 blue Trip line no
40. over range 99999 Negative over range 99999 SUM When all of the data is measurement errors or Blank Sum value over range When the sum value exceeds approx 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 When the sum value is below approx 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 Item Data Condition of Computation Channels Report Output Value AVE When all of the data are computation errors or Blank Average value computation overflow MAX MIN When all of the data are computation errors Blank Maximum minimum When the maximum value exceeds 99999999 999999999 When the minimum value is 9999999 99999999 The decimal position that was specified when the span for the channel was specified applies to the maximum and minimum values For example if the span setting of the channel is 200 0 then 99999999 is output when the value exceeds 99999999 9 and 99999999 is output when the value is below 999999 9 SUM When all of the data are computation errors or Blank Sum value computation overflow When the sum value exceeds approx 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 When the sum value is below approx 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 IM 04L31A01 03E App 23 xipueddy Appendix 6 Initial Values Basic Setting Mode thernet Setup Mode Link Basic setting mode Hemory and trend Memory timeup 1 2 3 4 Next 1 4 thernet Setup Mode Link Basic setting mode 9 10 11 12 1 Alarm th
41. s manual consists of the following sections For details on the communications functions and the software DAQSTANDARD provided with the package see the respective manuals IM 04L31A01 17E IM 04L41B01 63EN and IM 04L41B01 64EN Chapter Title and Description 1 Explanation of Functions Describes in detail the functions of the instrument The chapters that explain the operation of the CX1000 only describe the operating procedures For more detailed information about the functions see this chapter Installation and Wiring Describes the installation and wiring procedures of the CX1000 Names of Parts Display Modes and Common Operations Describes the names of the parts of the CX1000 the basic key operations the basic operations carried out initially and how to use the external storage medium drive Control Function Related Setup Operations Describes setup operations related to the control function that are carried out before starting control operations Program Control Related Setup Operations Only on Models with the Program Control Option Describes the setup operations related to program control that are carried out before starting control operations on models with the program control option Operations during Control Operation Describes how to switch operation mode during control operation how to change the setpoints of setting mode how to tune the control parameters and the operations on th
42. the initial setting of the measurement operation display is White LCD brightness The brightness of the LCD can be set between eight levels The initial setting is 4 Backlight saver The lifetime of the LCD backlight can be extended by automatically dimming the light when there is no key operation for a certain amount of time The display returns to the original brightness with a key operation or an alarm occurrence The initial setting is set so that the backlight saver is disabled IM 04L31A01 03E 1 85 1 17 Data Storage Function Data Acquisition to the Internal Memory Control Data The following control related data can be acquired to the internal memory Control related data includes the PV SP and OUT of external loops created through Green series communications CM1 optional function in addition to those of internal loops Data Type Data Content Display data Maximum minimum values of PVs SPs and OUTs for every interval of acquisition to the internal memory Event data Instantaneous value of PV SP and OUT at every specified sampling interval Manual sampled data Data in ASCII format containing the time and PV at the time of key operation or remote input Alarm summary data Channel on which alarm is occurred alarm type and time of occurrence and release Event summary data Loop number at which the time event or PV event occurred and the time of occurrence and release
43. 105 Loop 2 OUT 106 Assignment of external control channels channels of external loops The data of four loops is assigned to channel numbers as follows External loop 1 PV 201 External loop 1 SP 202 External loop 1 OUT 203 External loop 4 PV 210 External loop 4 SP 211 External loop 4 OUT 212 Enter the measurement computation channels to be assigned to the selected group according to the following rules Enter the channel number using two or three digits Separate each channel with a period Use a hyphen to specify consecutive channels Example To assign CH1 to CH3 CH5 and CH101 enter 01 03 05 101 IM 04L31A01 03E s U9 U09 p erds q y BuiBueysy 104 suoijes0doO fe 8 3 Measurement Function gt Settings Related to Tag Display for Channels This section explains how to set and display tag names that can be displayed in place of channel numbers Procedure Opening the Setting Display Setting Tag Names That Is to Be Displayed in Place of Channel Numbers Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt MENU key switch to Set mode gt 2 soft key select Tag Moving average Alarm delay time The following display appears GROUP 1 i ba zoop 20 03 47 eo METIS First CH 61 Last CH a1 Tag TH 81 Hoving average Count 2 Alarm delay time 18 s Input Clear Copy Displaying Tag Names in Place of Channel Numbers Press the ke
44. 4 26 SPAN ieii ennas 1 21 1 59 4 20 7 3 span upper lower limit split window display square root computation a STS ESA wastes areata ncueatt tenes eave svaste sat shee 6 14 standard PID COntrol cccceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeees 1 3 standard signal 1 21 standby 4 24 Start c d na renin ies act ea eet tee ede i ae aie 5 5 start segment NUMDEF cece ee eeeeeeetteeeteteeeeeee 5 11 6 12 Start SlO Ps ecessvecevs e r E E START STOP key j Storage function i nunen e aa eia Style nNUMbEr 4 ha a Heese aes SS i SUFFIX SUM scale supervisor name switching Condition 0 ee eect eeeeeee cee eeee tect eeeteeeeeeeee switching hysteresis cccceeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee switching pattern number system information display 00 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeees T tag channel cceeceeceeeeceee cee ceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseeaeeeseeaeeeeieaees tag tag comment 4 212410 eile eee WAQS 2k Gene ee iia tte aete tiie target Setpoint snmssoreseiouriiini iiie target setpoint selection method target Setpoint tracking cc ceceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ten segment linearizer approximation 0 eceeeeeee 1 22 ten segment linearizer biasing 1 22 ten segment linearizer I O 4 32 ten segment linearizer mode ce eeeee cee eeeteteeettteeeteee 4
45. C Accuracy not guanteed 450 to 750 C 0 9 of rdg 16 0 C 750 to 1100 C 0 9 of rdg 6 0 C 1100 to 1900 C 0 9 of rdg 2 0 C W3Re W25Re Pt100 JPt100 0 3 of rdg 2 8 C 0 15 of rdg 0 3 C Measurement accuracy during scaling Accuracy during scaling digits measurement accuracy digits x multiplier 2 digits rounded up Fractions rounded up Reference junction compensation INT internal and EXT external switchable common to all channels IM 04L31A01 03E 14 8 General Specifications Reference junction compensation accuracy Maximum input voltage Input resistance Input source resistance Input bias current Type R S B W PR40 20 W3Re W25Re 1 0 C Type K J E T N L U PLATINEL 0 5 C only when measuring 0 C or above Voltage range less than or equal to 2 VDC and thermocouples 10 VDC continuous 6 V and higher voltage ranges 60 VDC continuous Voltage range less than or equal to 2 VDC and thermocouples 10 MQ or more 6 V and higher voltage ranges Approx 1 MQ Volt TC 2 KQ or less RTD input 10 Q or less per wire the resistance of all three wires must be equal 10 nA or less Common mode rejection ratio 120 dB 50 60 Hz 0 1 500 Q unbalanced between the minus terminal and ground Normal mode rejection ratio Effects of Operating Conditions Ambient temperature 40 dB 50 60 Hz 0 1
46. Data That Can Be Used in Equations Same as for PV SP computation Analog Retransmission If the control mode is Analog Retransmission you can set an equation for the control output The data that can be used for the equation and the computation is the same as for the PV SP computation IM 04L31A01 03E 1 95 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 20 Other Functions USER Key Key Lock One of the following actions can be assigned to the USER key The key is initially assigned Alarm ACK Actions That Can Be Assigned Name of Action Action Trigger Key trigger used to start acquiring event data to the internal memory valid only when event data is specified to be acquired to the internal memory and the trigger used to start the acquisition is set to key trigger Alarm ACK Clears alarm display relay output valid only when the operation of the alarm display or output relay is set to hold Math Starts stops computation only on models with the computation function M1 Math reset Resets computed data Resets the computed value to 0 Only when computation is stopped on models with the computation function option Manual sample Acquires instantaneous values of all channels to the internal memory Messages 1to8 Displays message 1 to 8 on the trend display and stores the message to the internal memory Snapshot Saves the screen image data to the external storage medium Key lock is a function used to prohibit key o
47. Do not execute auto tuning when controlling the following types of processes If you do malfunction may occur in the control process Control process with fast response such as flow control and pressure control e Process that results in adverse consequences when the output is turned on off even if temporarily e Process that results in adverse consequences if a large output change is applied to the control element Process that may cause adverse effects on the quality of a product when the PV exceeds the allowed fluctuation width Manual tuning 1 Press the arrow key A cursor appears in the control parameter display section 2 Select the control parameter you wish to change using the arrow keys 6 8 IM 04L31A01 03E 6 3 Tuning Operation 3 Press the DISP ENTER key The parameter modification pop up window appears Cursor INT 1 PU C Control parameter dislay section cur Window for changing parameters 4 Change the value using the up and down arrow keys The value changes continuously if you keep pressing the up or down arrow key With control computation constants W01 W12 only the mantissa of the exponential display is displayed and can be changed 5 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes To close the window without making any changes press the ESC key Changing the SP Number SP NO PID Number GROUP NO of the Tuning Parameter to Be Manipulated 1 Press the SP NO soft key
48. Do you want to store and make the new settings take effect 2 Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key The settings are saved and the CX1000 returns to operation mode If you select No and press the DISP ENTER key the settings are not saved and the CX1000 returns to operation mode In this case the settings remain unchanged Selecting Cancel and pressing the DISP ENTER key returns you to basic setting mode menu 3 8 IM 04L31A01 03E 3 2 Basic Key Operations Entering Values Procedure A value must be entered when setting items such as the date time and span lower upper limit In such cases a numeric entry pop up window appears as shown in the following figure Follow the procedures below to enter the value Press the arrow keys followed by the oS DISP ENTER key to select a character 200 0 1370 0 on the keyboard SP space lt gt or ENT oRBRaae lt Move to the left digit eee Move to the right digit 2M Confirm DISP ENTER key Arrow keys When a numeric entry pop up window appears enter the value using the arrow keys and the DISP ENTER key as indicated above Entering Characters Procedure Characters must be entered when setting items such as tag names and messages In such cases a character entry pop up window appears as shown in the following figure Follow the procedures below to enter the characters Press the
49. Energized de energized hold non hold switchable Set up to 4 alarm on each channel ON 0 5 of span OFF all channels and levels common switchable Status indication alarm type in the digital display section and common alarm indication when an alarm occurs Hold Non hold switchable IM 04L31A01 03E 14 5 z suonesio ds 14 4 Display Function Displayed unit 5 inch TFT color LCD 320 x 240 dots Display color Trend bar graph display Selectable from 12 colors Background White or black selectable Displays Control group display Number of displayed loops Up to 4 Number of displays 4 displays 4 groups Display styles controller style faceplate style and hybrid style Tuning display Up to 21 types of parameters can be assigned Trend display Direction Vertical or horizontal Number of displayed channels Up to 6 channels per display 1 group All channel trend display Up to 36 channels Number of displays 6 displays 6 groups Thickness Selectable from 1 2 and 3 dots Update rate Selectable from 1 2 5 10 20 30 minutes 1 2 4 10 hours division Program operation status display Displays the program operation status and the current PV simultaneously Number of displayed loops Up to 2 Number of displays 1 display 1 group Display update rate Digital display section 1 s Program display section Follows the trend update rate Number of displayed channels i tt Number of Control Loops Display CH
50. Input Output exceeds the range See section 4 11 149 Incorrect input I O data Input Output n 1 gt Input Output n See section 4 11 e Execution Errors Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 150 This action is not possible because sampling is in progress See section 9 1 151 This action is not possible during sampling calculating or controlling See section 9 1 152 This action is not possible because saving is in progress Wait until the saving ends 153 This action is not possible because formatting is in progress Wait until the formatting ends 155 The message is not written while sampling is stopped See sections 8 8 and 9 1 160 Cannot load the specified data Change the memory setting See section 9 3 165 Auto setting is not possible becase the target is not support Use manual setting instead of auto setting See the Communication Interface User s Manual 166 This action is not possible because communication protocol is not Set the communication setting to Master Modbus M See the Communication Interface User s Manual 12 2 IM 04L31A01 03E 12 1 Messages Operation Errors Errors Related to the External Storage Medium Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 200 Operation aborted because an error was found in media See the Communication Interface User s Manual 201 Not enough free spa
51. Last CH boxes 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the start and end channel numbers for setting the Rolling Average 3 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the entry boxes under Rolling average 4 Press the DISP ENTER key Setting the Rolling Average Rolling average To take the rolling average of the measured results select On initial value is Off Interval Select the sampling interval when taking the rolling average from the following 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s 10s 12s 15s 20s 30s 1min 2min 3min 4min 5min 6min 10min 12min 15min 20min 30min and 1h However if the scan interval is set to 2s the sampling interval cannot be set to 1s In addition if the scan interval is set to 2s and the sampling interval is set to an odd numbered sampling interval 1s 3s 5s or 15s the actual sampling interval is set to 2s 4s 6s or 16s respectively Number of samples Set the average count when taking the rolling average using an integer between 1 and 64 Note If the number of data points to be averaged has not reached the specified number of samples immediately after computation is started the average of the available data is calculated Computation error data is excluded from the rolling average computation If the computed data exceeds the upper or lower limit the data is clipped at the upper or lower limit and the rolling average is computed The upper and low
52. PV derivative or the secondary side of a cascade connection type PID The secondary side of a cascade connection refers to the secondary loop of which the cascade control mode is set to Cascade of the Auto Manual and Cascade selections PID parameters 8 sets loop Zone PID switch point Up to 6 Super function overshooting suppression Available Tracking function SP tracking and PV tracking Anti reset windup over integration prevention Control period 250 500 1000 ms Operation Mode Switching Remote local and program switching Manual auto and cascade switching Run stop switching Stop Outputs the preset output Auto tuning enable disable switching Principle Limit cycle method Selectable Range of Control Parameters Proportional band 0 1 to 999 9 Integral time 0 to 6 000 s Derivative time 0 to 6 000 s On Off control hysteresis width 0 0 to 100 0 of the measurement span Preset output 5 0 to 105 0 of the control output output when control computation is stopped when PV input is burned out and when measurement input is erroneous Selectable range of high low limit of the output limiter 5 0 to 105 0 of measurement span Shutdown function Output up to 0 mA of control output during manual operation at 4 to 20 mA output shutdown at less than or equal to 5 1 Output Velocity Limiter Off or 0 1 to 100 0 s IM 04L31A01 03E 14 3 suoneoyioeds 14 2 Co
53. The waveform of the past display data and event data in the internal memory can be displayed This function is called Historical trend Methods of Displaying the Historical Trend The following four methods are available in displaying the historical trend Display from the alarm summary Display from the message summary Display from the memory summary Display from the control action summary Display from the program event summary only on models with the program control option Recall from the screen menu Information Displayed on the Historical Trend Alarm information and scales are not displayed on the historical trend display The background color is the opposite of the trend Zoom factor of the time axis display color black or white using the display selection menu Time axis Channel No or tag name Waveform display channel display color Measured computed value a max or min value at the cursor position Measured computed value ip li ee max or min value over the entire display range This area is displayed using the channel display color Screen switch display Up arrow key Display the all data display see the next page Down arrow key Position of the newest Half screen display of current displayed data and historical trend see the next page Date and time at the right end on the time axis Date and time at the left end on the time axis Message
54. Unit symbol Can be set arbitrarily up to 6 characters Square root scaling Input ranges capable of scaling DCV Available range of scaling 30000 to 30000 Decimal place Can be set arbitrarily Unit symbol Can be set arbitrarily up to 6 characters 14 2 IM 04L31A01 03E 14 2 Control Function Control Mode Select from single loop control cascade control and loop control with PV switching Control Computation Function Continuous PID control on off control time proportional PID control PID control PID control Operation r PID Control Control mode Operation Status Method Output Bump Fixed point Local and not the secondary side of a cascade PV derivative control connection type PID Standard operation Remote or secondary side of a cascade Deviation PID connection derivativ type PID control mode Program Local and not the secondary side of a cascade PV derivative control connection or hold or soak type PID operation During program control excluding hold and soak Deviation or the secondary side of a cascade connection derivative type PID Fixed point Local and not the secondary side of a cascade PV derivative control connection type PID operation Remote or secondary side of a cascade PV derivative Fixed point connection type PID control mode Program Local and not the secondary side of a cascade PV derivative control Connection or hold or soak type PID operation During program control excluding hold and soak
55. and D 0s Auto tuning Select On initial value is Off to enable the auto tuning function of the PID constant Loop number The Control mode Program control and PID control mode parameters are set for each loop When changing these parameters this setting is used to select the target loop number 1 or 2 initial value is 1 Control mode Select a control mode of Single Cascade PVSwitching initial value is Single or Retrans Style Number S3 or later Select Off for the loops that are not to be controlled Different control modes except for Retrans cannot be specified on the two loops within the single control output terminal block If you specify Cascade both loops are set to Cascade Method set only when the control mode is set to PVSwitching Select the switching condition of the two PV inputs from Range PVHigh and Signal Program control set only on models with the program control option Turns On Off program control initial value is Off This setting applies to both loops within the single control output terminal block This setting is invalid for loops which the control mode is set to Off or Retrans Style Number S3 or later PID control mode Select either Follow up or Fixed point This setting is invalid for loops whose control mode is set to Off or Retrans Style Number S3 or later IM 04L31A01 03E 4 1 Control gt Control action Contents Initialized during Set
56. gt Control action iess irisi a a aa agaaa iiao 4 1 4 2 Control gt Input setting Burnout and RUC oo ec eeeeeececeeeeeeeeete sete seer eeteeteeeenneesiaeeeeeeeea 4 4 4 3 Control gt DI DO SW registration eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eects eeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeaeeseeenieesiaeeneeeena 4 6 4 4 Control gt AUX Remote setting Alarm mode SP No selection source 00 4 11 4 5 Control gt Output processing ecceececeeceeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeteeeeaeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeesneesaeeneees 4 13 4 6 GControlis Relaysiiiiaiciiact tench eaters adits aia asidia Adie iat 4 15 viii IM 04L31A01 03E Contents Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 16 4 17 4 18 4 19 4 20 4 21 Control gt TUNING setting eee cee eeeee cette cnet eee eeeeaeeeeee ce eeeaaeeeeeecaeeseeeeeeetaeeeeeesceeseeenaees 4 17 Control IMPUL FANGS 05 ahcssccdssbesseedscescscstjegessebsddendestedieesdseniessastedaieesesideseelieestipanntiehaes 4 19 COMMON AIAN srncie isinai a a aaa a aia a 4 23 Operation related parameters Zone PID eccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeecaeeseaeeeeeeeseeeeeeenaes 4 25 PID parameters ics cicc iecioicttcdiencgalices sobaccenecudasaccbnetinads E AET AE AA AEA A 4 27 Control group settingi seri ienero a aa a Taaa A E ES Ea e 4 29 Ten segment linearizer O oe eccceeceecceceeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeeeecaeeeeaeeeeeesaeseeeecieeseaeseeeessaeeneeeeaes 4 31 Contro
57. in which the PID constant is automatically switched according to the PV The segment PID method is used when a different PID constant is required in the same PV region when the temperature is rising and when the temperature is falling Segment PID method The PID constant of PID No 1 is used in the 5th segment SEGS5 SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEG5 SEG6 SEG7 gt lt lt No 2 PID No 1 PID No 3 PID Setting the Operation for Program Control Settings include the number of repetitions of the program pattern repeat function delay function wait function for the case when the PV cannot follow up the SP and alarm output event output assignments contact output can be assigned according to the program progression Operation Mode during Program Control The following 4 types of operation modes are available Program operation mode Condition in which control is carried out according to the program pattern Hold operation mode Condition in which the change in the SP according to the program pattern is forcibily paused through key operation or other factors Reset mode Condition in which program operation of all loops is stopped All event outputs are cleared off Local operation mode If you switch to local operation mode even during program control fixed operation is perfomed acording to the SP set locally RESET or all loop STOP Ee jy RUN PRG RUN or all loop STOP LOCAL end PRG a RES
58. lt CX gt Periodic_data lt 5 System E Mail Settings gt Parameter Initial Value System E Mail settings gt Recipient1 Off System E Mail settings gt Recipient2 Off System E Mail settings gt Include source URL Off System E Mail settings gt Subject System E Mail settings gt Header1 System E Mail settings gt Header2 lt CX gt System_waning lt 6 Report E Mail Settings gt Parameter Initial Value Report E Mail settings gt Recipient1 Off Report E Mail settings gt Recipient2 Off Report E Mail settings gt Include source URL Off Report E Mail settings gt Subject Report E Mail settings gt Header1 Report E Mail settings gt Header2 lt CX gt Report_data 11 Aux Time zone Parameter Initial Value AUX gt Tag Channel Tag AUX gt Memory alarm th AUX gt Language English AUX gt Partial Not Time zone gt Difference from GMT 0 App 28 IM 04L31A01 03E Appendix 6 Initial Values 12 Control Setup Node Control 1 Control action 2 Input setting 3 DI DO SW registration 4 AUX Alarm mode 5 Output processing 6 Relay 7 Tuning setting 8 External loop setting 1 2 3 4 Next 1 2 lt 1 Control action gt Parameter Initial Value Control action gt PID number 8 Control action gt Control period 250ms Control action gt Zone PID Off Control action gt Restart mode gt Fixed point Continue Contr
59. medium length lt gt lt gt ON ON OFF When the cycle time OFF is short 0 0 50 0 100 0 Cycle time Output display value Selecting the Analog Output Select the type of output current when current output is used from the following 4 20 mA 0 20 mA 20 4 mA and 20 0 mA 1 20 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 4 PV Input Related Settings Input Range PV Correction Input Type Select the input source for making input range related settings from the following Select RemoteSP when setting the remote input when you are performing remote local switching of the SP When using program control RemoteSP cannot be selected because remote input is not possible During single loop control or cascade control PV1 RemoteSP During loop control with PV switching PV1 PV2 RemoteSP PVrange Set process value 1 PV1 and process value 2 PV2 PVrange is used for loop control with PV switching when the input range of two PV inputs PV1 and PV2 is different and PV range conversion see page 1 23 is to be performed When set to PV range PV upper lower limits unit and PV switching lower upper limits PV lower limit if the input switching method is PV High are set in place of the following settings Measurement Mode Select from the following according to the type of input TC thermocouple RTD resistance temperature detector scale linear scale and 1 5 V Sel
60. or via communications see the CX1000 CX2000 Communication Interface User s Manual 7 10 IM 04L31A01 03E 7 3 Setting the Temperature Unit This section explains how to set the unit of temperature Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to the Setting mode Control gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 2 soft key select A D Temperature The following display appears A D Integrate Scan interval First CH i Burnout set RIC Temperature Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the Unit box under Temperature A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select Thf 6ox for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The box for the item you changed turns from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Setting the Temperature Unit Unit Set the unit of temperature to C Celsius or F Fahrenheit IM 04L31A01 03E 7 11 suoesado dnjes pos ejey UOI UNY JUSWsINSeS a Chapter 8 Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents 8 1 Using the Information Display Alarm Summary Message Summary Memory Summary and Control Summary This section explains the operations that you can perform when
61. press the ESC key Switching the Alarm Summary Display to Control Alarms Only Perform the following operation with the alarm summary display showing 1 Press the DISP ENTER key to show the display selection menu 2 Select INFORMATION using the up and down arrow keys and press the right arrow key to display the sub menu 3 Select ALARM CONTROL using the down arrow key To set the alarm back to the original display displaying measurement and control alarms select ALARM ALL by performing the procedures above EEE DIGITAL gt ALARM SUMMARY i ul sar FF overview tg INFOR i MATION ALL fie TREND ALARM lt CONTROL HISTORY JUMP TO HISTORY IM 04L31A01 03E 8 1 s U9 U09 p erds q y BuiBueyy 104 suoije19doO fe 8 2 Measurement Function gt Measurement Group Setup Operation This section explains how to rename the groups of trend digital and bar graph displays of the measurement function and how to register channels to those groups For the operating procedures of the control groups of the control function see section 4 12 Control group setting Setup Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt MENU key switch to Set mode gt 5 soft key select Display gt 1 soft key select Group set Trip line Group set Group name GROUP 1 CH set 161 163 61 62 Trip line Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cu
62. test Settina ext 3 3 Displays the current setting BINARY or BCD IM 04L31A01 03E 4 49 suoljei3adoQ dnjas pajyejay uoun 017U09 s 4 21 Settings for Switching the Program Patterns Using Contact Inputs with BCD Codes Version 3 20 or Later 2 Press th ANALOG 6 MATH 12 LOOP 2 MEMORY 1286808 OPTION AUX SETTING RS d22 DI BINARY ETHERNET ATA PROGRAM LARGE EXT LOOP LADDER OUTPUT TERMINAL SLOT1 PID PRODUCT HAC address 00 00 64 81 4E 0 ersion 3 22 Graphic B87002 3 02 Olconfig gt 3 Press the BCD soft key If BCD is currently specified the Binary soft key is displayed If binary specified the BCD soft key is displayed 6 MEMORY 12808008 OPTION AUX SETTING RS 422 DI BINARY ETHERNET ATA PROGRAM LARGE EXT LOOP LADDER OUTPUT TERMINAL SLOT1 PID MATH 12 PRODUCT HAC address 00 00 64 81 4E 0 ion 3 22 Graphic B870 ZC 3 62 Note The binary BCD setting is not saved to the setup file Thus the binary BCD setting does not change even if you load the setup data into the CX Moreover the binary BCD setting does not change when the CX is turned OFF The binary BCD setting cannot be changed using communication commands or a PC software application such as DAQSTANDARD Registering Contact Inputs When Using BCD Codes Opening the Setting Display MENU key switch to Set mode control gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch
63. written to the internal memory Weekly Report At the specified time of the specified day every week the average maximum minimum and sum values of the specified channels are determined from a week of data up to the specified time and written to the internal memory Monthly Report At the specified time of the specified date every month the average maximum minimum and sum values of the specified channels are determined from a month of data up to the specified time and written to the internal memory Report Data Output Example Hourly Report Number of the report data being displayed Number of report data in the internal memory Type of report Index 2 2 Kind Hourly Start Jan 09 2000 01 10 36 Start date time Timeup Jan 09 2000 01 15 31 Date time of the report ChUnit Sts Ave Hax Hin Sum 0i y 0 03 1 522 1 131 2 73545E 01 av snm 0 03 1 525 1 131 2 7417856 01 By 0 0383 1 522 1 131 2 73610E 01 oF 91 ae 25 70 50 44 Raat phe T Unit Report data status Average maximum minimum and sum Channel No or tag name Combinations of Reports That Can Be Created The reports created by the CX1000 can be set to hourly only daily only hourly and daily daily and weekly or daily and monthly Number of Measurement and Computation Channels That Can Be Assigned to the Report Up to 30 channels can be assigned to one repo
64. 03E 1 4 PV Input Related Settings Output b Ten segment linearizer approximation gt Input a Square root Computation of PVs The square root function is used in the case such as when the differential pressure signal of a restriction flowmeter such as an orifice or a nozzle is converted to a flow signal You can also set the low signal cutoff point for the square root computation Square root computation ON OFF setting ON or OFF the initial value is 1 0 Selectable range of the low signal cutoff of the analog input 0 0 to 5 0 the initial value is OFF 100 0 Slope 1 0 0 A Input 100 0 Low signal cutoff point 0 0 to 5 0 PV Range Conversion only during loop control with PV switching The PV range conversion is a function used to determine the PV range of the control function when the measurement range of the two input signal is different for the loop control with PV switching For example if the input range of the first input is O C to 500 C and the input range of the second input is 300 C to 1000 C the PV range conversion is used to convert the PV range of the control function to 0 C to 1000 C PV range a lt PV range of PV input 1 1 i 0 300 500 1000 C l PV range of PV input 2 eevee T IM 04L31A01 03E 1 23 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 4 PV Input Related Settings PV Tracking ON OFF Burnout The PV tracking functio
65. 03E s U9 U09 p erds q ay BuiBueysy 104 suonesado fe 8 12 Measurement Function gt Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position Scale Position of Trend Displays Setting the Number of Digits Displayed for the Scale Scale digit You can select Normal or Fine If you select Fine the scale value can be displayed using 3 digits when the scale value display is 2 digits For example if the scale range is 49 0 to 51 0 the scale values are displayed using 3 digits as shown below icc A A ica fc EN iar AA PE PE i 8 20 IM 04L31A01 03E 8 13 Measurement Function gt Setting the Partial Expanded Display on the Trend Display This section explains how to display the waveform using the partial expanded display function on the trend display Procedure Opening the Setting Display Enabling disabling the partial expanded display function Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 11 soft key select Aux Time zone The following display appears Setup Mode AUX Tag Channel Tag Hemory alarm lh Language English Partial Time zone Difference from GHT 4 Use Not Detailed setting of the partial expanded display The measurement channel partial expanded display cannot be selected on 0 measurement channel models An error message will appear if the zone graph or partial exp
66. 1 69 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 16 Display Function Block display When the event data acquisition area is divided into multiple blocks the block usage is displayed White blocks Blocks with no data Green blocks Block containing data that was acquired to the internal memory after starting the current acquisition of event data Gray blocks Blocks containing previous data 7 Icon indicating the external storage medium status If F and G are displayed alternately the external storage medium is being accessed If the icon is not displayed this indicates that an external storage medium is not inserted in the drive Other indications are as follows E The operation cover on the front panel is open G External storage medium waiting not being accessed H The green level inside the icon indicates the amount of the external storage medium used If the remaining amount falls to 10 or less the color changes to red Note The CX1000 detects whether an external storage medium is inserted in the drive when the operation cover is closed To prevent adverse effects from dust use the CX1000 with the door closed 8 Computation icon only on models with the computation option No computation mark is displayed No computation option or computation is stopped White computation icon Computation in progress Yellow computation icon Computation dropout occurred Note Computation dropout occurs when the computation process canno
67. 12 delay time for starting the program pattern contro DELAY UMizene eee eae AAs eit ees 6 14 delay upper limit alarm oo ccc ee eee eeeseeeeeeneeees 1 61 derivative TIMG iarsin seid ethan a ete eevee 1 32 4 28 detection iS Ses ee BOs o Ne eee ud ooo 7 9 10 7 deviation high amp low liMit eee eeee eee eee eeeee 1 38 deviation high limit 1 38 deviation low limMit oo cece cee reer eeeeeeeee eee eee eee 1 38 deviation within high amp low limits ee cece eeeeeeee 1 38 DI DO label ast DI DO status display c ccccceeceeeeesteeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 73 difference lower limit alarm ee eee errr ee eeeee 1 61 difference upper limit alarm 1 61 digital display cc eee cee ce ceee cece eeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeneaees 1 77 DIGITAL IN 2 16 DIGITAL OUT miinat annie eae ees 2 6 2 16 DIO operation control s sessssieeseeseeeseetrtttertretnnrtrernneen eene 1 28 DIO operation MOnItOrINg seeeeeeeeeeeeeereirrrrneeen 1 9 DIO operation monitoring function 4 37 DIO tyP sss cele ite 4 38 GIECU CONUS aaan oaeee Vena a EPa Ae NAE ESEE EA 1 33 directory NAME ussiisa aai 9 6 display color display data display data loading of GISPlAY GIFECHON Ai enrere panneau ae aiena anaren loata display update rate oo eee cee eres eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeel displays switching of divisions NUMBEE OF sinss i i aiea B c e mail transmission functi
68. 13 Maintenance 13 1 Periodic Inspection Check the operation of the CX1000 periodically to keep it in good working order Conduct the following inspections and replace worn parts as necessary Is the display and storage functioning properly In the event of problems see section 12 2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart Has the brightness of the LCD backlight deteriorated If replacement is necessary see section 13 3 Replacement of Parts IM 04L31A01 03E 13 1 aoueuaquIe y a 13 2 Calibration It is recommended that the CX1000 be calibrated once a year to assure its measurement accuracy For details regarding calibration contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for details Required Instruments A calibration instrument with an appropriate resolution is required for calibrating the CX1000 Recommended Instrument DC voltage standard YOKOGAWA Model 2552 or equivalent Main specifications Accuracy for the range of 20 mV to 20 V 0 005 Decade resistance box Yokogawa M amp C Model 2793 01 or equivalent Main specifications Accuracy for the output range of 0 1 to 500 Q 0 001 Resolution 0 001 Q For information on purchasing the calibration instruments contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Calibration Procedure 1 Wire the CX1000 and the calibration instrument as shown in the following figure and adequately warm up the instruments the warm up time of the CX1000 is at least 30 minutes 2 Check that the op
69. 14 13 14 8 General Specifications ce eecceeceeeeeeeeeee eee eeeee ences eaaeeeeee ea aeseaeeeeeeeeaeseeeeesieeeeaeeeeeetaa 14 16 14 9 Dimensional Drawings eccceseeeeeeeeeeene teense ee eeneeee sees eesaeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeaeessenaeeenneeess 14 20 Appendix Appendix 1 Supplementary Explanation of the Acquisition of Display Data Event Data to the Internal MEMO iscan a a a EA Ea EE EAEE A App 1 Appendix2 Supplementary Explanation of the Computation Function c cesses App 6 Appendix 3 Meaning and Syntax of Equations 0 ccccceeeeeceee sees eeeeeetieeeeeeeeneetaeeeeeeeea App 11 Appendix 4 Additional Explanation of the Report Function ccescceeeseeeeeeeeeerneeeeens App 17 Appendix 5 Data Format of ASCII Files 0 cc cc ceeeeeeteeene cere eeneeeeeeeeeesaeseeeeeneeteaeeeneeeea App 20 Appendix 6 Initial Values s ciccciscpagsatiecesensesieessenpedd ees tepasvesaseeddapesaties ance ueebaveesdeusiseedoeeatiee App 24 Appendix 7 Control Function Block Diagram eececceeeeceeeeeeteeeneeeneeettaeeeeeeeneeteaeeeneeeea App 39 Appendix 8 Explanation of Engineering Units EU and EUS ec eeeeeeeeeeteeetteeeteeeee App 45 Appendix 9 Program Control Worksheets 0 ccceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeenneetaeseeeesnaeseaeeeneee App 46 Appendix 10 Expression Examples ccccccscceeeestreeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeseneeeeeieeseenaeesnneeeeeneeene App 50 Index IM 04L31A01 03E xi Chapter 1 Explanation of Functions 1 1 CxX100
70. 2 Modbus master Communications Displays the Modbus status when the Modbus master function is used External loop Communications Displays the status of the external Green series communication communications See the CX1000 CX2000 Communication Interface User s Manual IM04L31A01 17E Soft keys FUNC key ESC key 1 Press the FUNC key As shown in the following figure menu assigned to the soft keys is displayed AlarmACK Message Hanual Logout T ext 174 sample T 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the function you wish to execute If Next 1 n where n is the number of menu lines appears at the right end of the menu this indicates that there are multiple lines of menus Press the Next 1 n soft key to view the next menu Press a soft key to execute the function assigned to it The result of the soft key being pressed varies depending on its function as is explained in later sections of this manual To clear the menu without executing functions press the FUNC or ESC key Key Operations on the Control Operation Display On the control operation displays such as the control group display and tuning display a soft key menu appears at the bottom of the display For the operating procedure see chapter 6 Operations during Control Operation 3 6 IM 04L31A01 03E 3 2 Basic Key Operations Operation of Other Keys in Operation Mode Procedure
71. 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item box 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note For setup item boxes that require values to be entered a pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key is used 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box IM 04L31A01 03E 4 45 suoljei9adoQ dnjas pajyejay uoun 017U09 eS 4 19 Logic Computation Settings Style Number S3 or Later Logic Computation Settings Setting Numbers Up to 12 logic computations can be set Select the numbers for the logic computations Relay Select the destination for the computed results DO001 DO006 Control output terminal block DO SW001 SW018 Internal switches Equation Follow the instructions in the equation pop up window to enter the equation using 120 characters or less The number of data that can be used in equations is 35 You can also use the control constants W01 W12 in the equation Measurement constants K01 K12 cannot be used You can use the following operators Computation Type Operator Logical operation AND OR XOR NOT Relational operation GT LT GE LE EQ NE Conditional expressions eq1 eq2 eq3 See appendix 3
72. 3 Press the DISP ENTER key Note _ While the keylock function is enabled a keylock icon see section 1 16 appears in the status indication section If you press a locked key while the keylock function is enabled a message This key is locked appears Releasing the Keylock 1 In operation mode press the FUNC key The soft key menu is displayed AlarmACk Message eN Keylock ext 1 3 sample 2 Press the Keylock soft key The password entry window appears 3 Enter the password using the soft keys and character number input keys mO Keylock cancel Password xn ABEDERGADE KLHNOPQRST UVWKY 288 9 2 2 ie 3 al 0 21S 456789 Sp Al Over 4 Press the DISP ENTER key Setting the Keylock Use Not To enable the keylock function select Use Password Enter the password for releasing the keylock Set the password using up to 6 characters Keylock Items Select Lock to apply the keylock function to the key select Free otherwise Keylock Items Operation keys other than the FUNC key arrow keys and character number input keys AlarmACK soft key MathSTART MathSTOP and MathReset soft keys Soft keys related to memory writing including Message Manual sample Trigger Save Display and Save Event soft keys E mail related soft keys including E Mail START E Mail STOP and E Mail test soft keys Prohibit data storage when an external storage medium
73. 30 ee EACE INT 01 PU INT 81 OUT 82 205 00 2 0 10 0 20 0 2 000 taR eP e a a ekkkk 164 81 11 6 156 2 8 168 Measurement Alarms Alarms can be generated when the measured computed data meets a certain condition When an alarm occurs you can have the information about the alarm displayed on the operation display Also you can output relay signals from the alarm output terminal ALARM on the measurement alarm option terminal block or the transistor output terminal DIGITAL OUT You can also turn the internal switches ON On the operation display the alarm status is displayed as alarm icons in the status display section and using methods such as the trend digital bar graph overview displays The detailed information about the alarms is displayed in the alarm summary Alarm Indication Example on the Overview Display Alarm type Channel No or tag name Cursor Area of channels on which an alarm Measured computed value is not occurring is indicated in green La os EEAS Alarm icon Area of channels on which an alarm is occurring is indicated in red 1 56 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 13 Measurement Function Overview Saving Data Alarm Summary Display Example Number of the alarm information displayed on the bottom line Number of the alarm information in the internal memory Alarm occurrence channel channel No or tag Alarm No 1 2 3 4 type H L h I R r T
74. 32 IMG ch ce ac tak ocd corer ca ETAT 9 5 10 13 time adjustment 2 eee cece cence eceeteee ceases teeaeeeteeaeeeeee 11 12 time event 5 8 time setting of 3 11 time zone changing Of s sesessesesrserresrserrerrnrrrerrnrrrerenrrees 3 16 timer number sisisi i a a 10 10 timeup ype r aaea a a ra a ee ar iai Taenia 9 5 Index 4 IM 04L31A01 03E Index TRO Gi sservi aie eae THOG Catal cssscssesscssess cssscsssssaresiessestnsisstssteetiesseatianeatsciss trend display trend line width trigger oaeiae WIP ING seceeeerenenteeaeer ewer tip line WICK sanun i troubleshooting TSP CHG TUNING EINN MEETA STT AAT TO eave eects eee tning display siisii r tuning display switching to tuning operation 0 tuning parameters ON OFF 0 c ccceeeeeteeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee TVPG ai 1 21 1 58 4 20 4 24 5 9 7 8 9 13 10 6 UMIt ee E E E EE E aes 1 21 4 22 10 3 upper limit on rate of change alarm 1 61 user ID USER key iinan a 1 96 3 2 3 7 USER key ASSiQnNMent 0 cccccecececeeceeeeeeeeeeeesaeeneeeaes 11 1 SON NAME cc cge cssceccnscs sacdaaae cease dese sseiecas aes casbaccadaedaastndcsezs 11 7 V value GMY Of saratana N 3 9 voltage pulse output ss ssssssrssssrsersnsssreseerasrnrseresneesasrnsee 4 14 wait operation j Welt CUMS ss face sesh ct cn ac5 ddsecoadecss abcess lecaneadcessciedasacsssactenadtansass ce Walt ZOMG cas ixsavecci
75. 4 yellow To change the color select from the following 16 colors Red green blue blue violet brown orange yellow green light blue violet gray lime cyan dark blue yellow light gray and purple IM 04L31A01 03E 8 13 s U9 U09 p erds q ay BuiBueysy 104 suoijes0doO fe 8 10 Measurement Function gt Changing the Channel Display Color This section explains how to change the waveform color on trend displays and the bar color on bar graph displays For the procedures in changing the background color of operation displays such as the control group display tuning display and measurement trend display see section 8 14 Measurement Function gt Setting the Display Direction Background Color Waveform Line Width Trip Line Width Grid and Scroll Time For the procedure in changing the trip line color of the measurement trend display see section 8 9 Measurement Function gt Changinging the Trip Line Of the Trend Displays The measurement channel display color cannnot be selected on 0 measurement channel models An error message will appear if the display color setting screen is selected Opening the Setting Display Colors When Assigning Channels of PV SP and OUT Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt MENU key switch to Set mode gt 5 soft key select Display gt 5 soft key select Control Color The following display appears Control Colo
76. 6 3 Tuning Operation This section explains how to perform auto tuning of PID constants manual tuning of control parameters and other operations on the tuning display Procedure Opening the Tuning Display The tuning display can be displayed using either of the following method Press the TUNING soft key on the control group display On the control group display or control overview display select CONTROL gt JUMP TO TUNING from the screen selection menu see page 6 1 Auto Tuning 1 Press the AUTO TUN soft key As shown in the following figure the auto tuning setup pop up window appears along with a warning message INT 1 When on off control is being used auto tunig can not be carried out Moreover do not perform auto tuning when controlling any of the following cases Control process with quick response such as flow control or pressure control Process where even temporary output on off results in inconvenience Process where a large output change at control element results in inconvenience Process where variations in PY may exceed an al lowable range adversely effecting product quality 2 Select the PID group for auto tuning using the up and down arrow keys If you select ALL all PID groups are targeted for auto tuning AUTO TUN GROUPIAT t gt NEXT 2 2 3 Press the DISP ENTER key to execute auto tuning CAUTION You cannot execute auto tuning during ON OFF control
77. Computed Data Like measurement channels up to four alarms can be assigned to each computation channel Acquisition of Computed Data to the Internal Memory Like measurement channels the display data or event data of computation channels can also be acquired to the internal memory and saved to an external storage medium In addition the instantaneous values and TLOG data of computation channels can be saved through manual sample operations The report function is one of the functions of the computation function option M1 It is used to compute the average maximum minimum and sum of each specified channel at the specified interval and writing the result to the internal memory Explanation of the report function is also given in appendix 4 Additional Explanation of the Report Function Read it along with this section Item Description Types of reports Select from hourly reports only daily reports only hourly and daily reports daily and weekly reports and daily and monthly reports Number of channels per report Up to 12 channels Computed data Average maximum minimum and sum Number of reports that can be Up to 40 acquired to the internal memory Data format ASCII format The reports are created every hour on the hour for hourly reports at the specified hour for daily reports once a day at the specified hour on the specified day for weekly reports once a week and at the specified hour on the h
78. Corporation be connected Connecting the input wires in parallel with other instruments may mutually affect the measured values If you need to make a parallel connection Turn OFF burnout Ground each instrument at a single common point Do not turn ON OFF the instrument during operation It may cause adverse affects on other instruments e Resistance temperature detectors cannot be connected in parallel 1 Turn OFF the power to the CX1000 and remove the terminal cover 2 Wire the signal wires to the terminals 3 Attach the terminal cover and secure it with screws Measurement Input Wiring Thermocouple input RTD input ABI Compensation lead y Sy KA NS ER A A 7 E z t gt mS Lead wire resistance per wire of 10 Q or less Make the resistance of z the three wires equal DC voltage input DI ON OFF input e DC current input A A A z i DC voltage input DI ON OFF input _ DC current input ZAO A i Shunt resistor Example For 4 to 20 mA input shut resistance values should be 250 Q 0 1 Note On the standard measurement input block RTD input terminals A and B are isolated on each channel Terminal b is shorted internally across all channels If you specified the three wire isolated RTD N2 option b terminals are isolated with each other 2 14 IM 04L31A01 03E 2 3 Wiring Contact Input DIGITAL IN REMOTE Wiring Co
79. Data browse function Memory status scale value 0 100 display ON OFF switchable scale up to 10 scales grid selectable from 4 to 12 divisions as well as hour min time year month day hour minute second trip line thickness selectable from 1 2 and 3 dots message up to 16 characters up to 8 types and alarm marks Displays data Display format 2 divisions or full display Time axis operation Reduce expand and scroll the display Automatic display switching function Interval 5 10 20 30 s and 1 minute LCD backlight saver function Time setting 1 2 5 10 20 and 60 minutes IM 04L31A01 03E 14 7 g suonesio ds 14 5 Storage Function External storage medium Select from the following storage medium drives when ordering 3 5 inch floppy disk 2HD PCMCIA ATA flash memory card 4 to 440 MB or CF card 32 MB to 512 MB adapter required Zip disk 100 MB or 250 MB Storage Function Stores internal control loop data PV SP OUT of internal loops external control loop data PV SP OUT of externally connected controllers measured data and computed data Internal control CH PV SP OUT of each loop 101 to 106 CH External control CH PV SP OUT of each loop 201 to 212 CH Stores 18 CH above 6 measurement CH and 12 computation CH as a data file Storage data type Data Type Recorded Items CH Loop and System Data Content Measurement computation internal control external control Measur
80. Determines the maximum minimum value of channel e1 App 14 IM 04L31A01 03E Appendix 3 Meaning and Syntax of Equations Equation Examples TLOG MAX 01 K01 SQR 02 Examples of Equations That Are Not Allowed TLOG AVE 01 TLOG AVE 02 Reason TLOG appears twice in one equation TLOG AVE ABS 01 Reason A computing element is used inside the parentheses CLOG Computation Control Computation Only measurement data and control measurement data can be used for CLOG computations In the following explanation e1 is measurement data or control measurement data You cannot write an equation that includes computation elements within e1 Also you cannot add 2 or more CLOG computations in one equation However in the following conditional expressions multiple CLOG computations can be used Up to 10 computation data items can be used CLOG MAX Max value Syntax CLOG MAX e1 e2 e4 e6 Conditions Calculates the maximum value from channels e1 e2 e4 e5 and e6 that were measured at the same time CLOG MIN Min value Syntax CLOG MIN e1 e2 e5 e7 Conditions Calculates the minimum value from channels e1 e2 e5 and e7 that were measured at the same time CLOG AVE Average Syntax CLOG AVE e1 e6 Conditions Calculates the average value from channels e1 through e6 that were measured at the same time CLOG P P Max value min value Syntax CLOG P P e1 e2 e5 e7 Conditions Calculates the minimum m
81. Function Numerical Display The range of displayed values of report data is from 9999999 to 99999999 excluding the decimal point The decimal point position corresponds to the position of the decimal point of the upper and lower limit span or upper and lower limit scale for scaling However special displays are used for cases given in the table below Measurement channel Item Data Condition of Measurement Channels Displayed Output Average value When all of the data are measurement errors or over range Blank Maximum and When all of the data are measurement errors Blank minimum values Positive over range 99999 Negative over range 99999 Sum value When all of the data are measurement errors or over range Blank When the sum value exceeds approx 3 4E 38 When the sum value is below approx 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 9 999999E 99 Computation channel Item Data Condition of Computation Channels Displayed Output Average value When all of the data are computation errors or computation overflow Blank Maximum and minimum values When all of the data are computation errors When the maximum value exceeds 99999999 When the minimum value is 9999999 Blank 999999999 99999999 The decimal position that was specified when the span for the channel was specified applies to the maximum and minimum values For example if the span setting of the c
82. IM 04L31A01 03E suoljeiadoQ dnjas pajyejay uoun 017U09 g 4 3 Control gt DI DO SW registration Snapshot Saves the current screen image data to the external storage medium Input a signal for at least 250 ms The snapshot function operates in all modes operation mode setting mode and basic setting mode Error messages even if they are displayed are not saved Note On models with the A6R or A4FR measurement alarm option terminal block the action from MemoryStart Stop to Snapshot can also be assigned to the measurement remote input For the procedure in assigning actions to the measurement remote input see section 11 5 Measurement Remote Input Setting If you wish to carry out operation only using contact input you can disable key operation such as by using the key lock function see section 11 2 4 10 IM 04L31A01 03E 4 4 Control gt AUX Remote setting Alarm mode SP No selection source This section explains the procedures for selecting remote inputs the alarm mode and the SP No selection source Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Setting mode control gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode 12 soft key select Control gt 4 soft key select AUX Alarm mode AUX Loop number E Remote setting Off Alarm mode ALWAYS SP No selection source Loop 1 On Loop 2 Off PUS
83. MAN 4 real CAS AUT Control output OUT Preset putput Output limiter Stop STP Run RUN Enabling Disabling Auto Tuning In PID control the optimum PID constant is set automatically when auto tuning see page 1 54 is performed Auto tuning is possible only during auto operation Contact input can be used to carry out operations such as running stopping operation switching operation modes changing SPs switching PV inputs during loop control with PV switching For a description on the possible operations see Contact Input Information Registration on page 1 26 1 6 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 2 Control Function Overview PV SP Computation Style Number S3 or Later You can use the specified computed result as PV or SP When PV SP computation is ON you can set the control analog input terminals to Cl01 Cl05 and set the range for each channel The SP is active when the control operation mode is Remote You can also use the control output value in the equation The constants that can be used are separate from the computation function W01 W12 When a computation error occurs you can treat the computed result as an overrange or underrange Computation is performed in synchronization with the control interval Analog Retransmission Style Number S3 or Later Output comes from the control output channels per the results of the specified equation The computed result is converted to a percentage of the output span rangin
84. MB Display data and event data Display data 0 9 MB Event data 0 3 MB Event data only 1 2 MB IM 04L31A01 03E App 3 xipueddy Appendix 1 Supplementary Explanation of the Acquisition of Display Data Event Data to the Internal Memory Maximum Number of Data Points per Channel When the type of data the number of measurement channels the number of computation channels number of internal control channels and the number of external control channels that are to be acquired to the internal memory are determined the maximum number of times data can be acquired can be derived from the internal memory size This number is referred to as the maximum number of data points per channel The maximum number of data points can be derived from the equations in the following table Data to Be Saved Maximum Number of Data Points Display data only 1 2000 000 bytes number of measurement CH x 4 number of computation CH x 8 number of internal control CH x 4 number of external control CH x 4 The maximum number is 100 000 Display data and event data Display data 900 000 bytes number of measurement CH x 4 number of computation CH x 8 number of internal control CH x 4 number of external control CH x 4 The maximum number is 75 000 Event data 300 000 bytes number of measurement CH x 2 number of computation CH x 4 number of internal control CH x 4 number of external control CH x 4 The maximum number
85. NO soft key A pop up window for switching the pattern number appears The window shows the current pattern number RUN PTNPT NO 2 SNEXT 174 2 Select the pattern number using the up and down arrow keys 3 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes To close the window without making any changes press the ESC key Setting Operation for Patterns That Start by Communications Command DI DO or Internal Switches Style Number S3 Or Later 1 Press the SET PTNO soft key The pattern number the same number as the pattern number that can be started from this screen selected by the PT NO soft key above is set Even if you change the pattern number with the PT NO soft key if you do not press the SET PTNO soft key the pattern numbers that start by communication commands DI DO internal switches are not changed Switching to the Overview Screen Style Number S3 or Later 1 Press the OVERVIEW soft key Among the loops of the displayed program patterns the screen switches to the overview screen including loops with small numbers Switching to the Control Group Screen Style Number S3 or Later 1 Press the CNTRL GRP soft key Among the loops of the displayed program patterns the screen switches to the group s control group screen including loops with small numbers Selecting Segments Press the left and right arrow keys The displayed pattern waveform shifts horizontally by one segment The SEGMENT NO SEGM
86. No Logical operation Yes Yes Yes No Statistical computation TLOG Yes No No No Statistical computation CLOG No Yes Yes No Conditional expressions Yes Yes Yes Yes Data That Can Be Used in Equations For TLOG computation only measured and computed data can be used For CLOG computation only control measured data and measured data can be used For all other computations all types of data can be used Measured Data 01 to 06 Specify the measured data using channel numbers If scaling is used the scaled values are used in the computation Computed Data 31 to 42 Specify the computed data using channel numbers Control Measurement Data CI01 to C105 Specify the control measurement data using control input channel numbers If scaling is used the scaled values are used in the computation You can use this data only in control computation when the PV SP computation function is ON Internal External Control Data 101 to 106 201 to 212 Specify internal control channels and external control channels using channel numbers Constants measurement computation K01 to K12 control compuration W01 to W12 The values assigned to K01 to K12 or W01 to W12 can be used as constants Enter the values as K01 to K12 or W01 to W12 in the equations Range of Constants maximum significant digits is 5 9 9999E 29 to 1 0000E 30 0 1 0000E 30 to 9 9999E 29 Communication Input Data C01 to C12 You can use values that are set through commun
87. No screw terminal is attached Measurement Alarm Option Terminal Symbols NO Normally opened NC Normally closed C Common A6 Alarm output 777 TT Y TJTdAH TO 06 05 04 03 02 01 A6R Alarm output Measurement remote input l A4F FAIL output Memory end output Alarm output l 04 03 02 01 IM 04L31A01 03E 2 9 Bundi pue uoneyye su D 2 3 Wiring A4FR FAIL output Memory end output Alarm output Measurement remote input 04 03 02 01 Measurement alarm option terminal block APY ay AG ABR A4F Kifcld A4ZFReIBELECERG APYaYROmMmF FOV DRBENTOET Measurement input terminal block CHOAIEATIIMF OT TOE To
88. OFF setting type of each event 16 events from the following Select Off for events that are not to be assigned Select Off initial setting for the number of the loops to which the event is not to be assigned On1 On Off Use On time and Off time On2 On Use On time only Ons Off Use Off time only On time Off time Set the ON time OFF time of the time event in hh mm ss format The selectable range is 00 00 00 to 99 59 59 Set On time lt Off time IM 04L31A01 03E 5 9 suoljeiad C dnjas payejay jo1j U0D weibolg po 5 7 Program Pattern Settings gt Hysteresis PV Event This section explains the PV event hysteresis setting procedure during program control Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt 7 soft key select Program control parameters gt 1 soft key select Program parameter setting gt 6 soft key select Hysteresis PV event The following display appears CONTROL GROUP2 _ M Gang coe Eal 5 Hysteresis PV event PY event Hysteresis Hysteresis s 39 a5 8 10 a5 8 11 8 5 8 12 058 8 5 8 14 8 5 8 15 058 16 958 onnaa wne n RRR Re Re ww Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value
89. Outputs i inere anana 7 8 10 6 relay OUtPUT NUMDET 00 eee cece cent ete eens eeteetaeeeeeenaes 4 24 REMILOG innein iret ante acta che aun ci ees 6 3 remaining segment time eceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeee 6 17 REMOTE LOMO 1545 AE ead tease Ate Aa N remote input 1 6 1 27 1 100 11 11 11 12 11 13 remote setting iica cose oe eceeee ee ee iene eed 4 12 Remote Local switching between cceseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 3 repeats hives eerie 6 12 6 16 repeat FrECUENICY csessesssccscssecssesssecessesssessteeecssenseessees 5 11 replacement period csscssessecssccssesseessseeseseeseeseees 13 4 report channel eee ceee cee eeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeees 10 13 report data 1 81 1 87 1 89 report FUNCTION eee 1 92 App 17 report function starting stopping Of 10 14 FEPOMAY POS ioanen eene e N 10 13 RSP input ani Bide eal ER A A 1 6 1 30 RSP input selection seeseeeseeeiresiriisrsrrerirrrrrrrrennrnsnrns 4 12 RST RUIN EEE EA AT 6 16 run auto cascade switching between eseeeseesrcrr 6 2 RUN RST EE EA E E E E A E run stop operation RUNS TR irnia naie n iaga aries vine S sample TALC viaoa ierse a ees aa i 9 3 samples number of esssssssssssssssrssrssssrisesrrrserrnsrrreesrnene 10 11 Sampling interval sissi i an aana 10 11 SAVE inmigrante aa dea a a a aenda save data scale display ON OFF
90. PV events events that already Currently occurring events are displayed in red occurred are displayed non occurring events are displayed in green GROUP PV events Pim ingdie 2m ing die Event names One part Time events event names Sim ing die One part event names Executing Several Program Patterns You can execute multiple program patterns whose loop numbers do not overlap Switching Pattern Numbers see page 6 13 1 Press the left or right arrow keys to switch the displayed pattern Switching from the Screen Selection Menu 1 Press the PT NO soft key in the program selection screen The pattern number switching pop up window appears The currently set pattern numbers are displayed in the window 2 Select a pattern number using the up and down arrow keys 3 Press DISP ENTER key to confirm the changed settings To close without saving press the ESC key Program Operation Start 1 Press the RUN soft key The program operation start pop up window appears 2 Press the DISP ENTER key The screen changes to the program operation display 6 18 IM 04L31A01 03E 6 4 Operations on the Program Selection Display and Program Control Display Only on Models with the Program Control Option Explanation Displaying the Program Selection Display 1 Press the SEL PNL soft key The screen changes to the program selection display Executing a Separate Program Pattern 1 Repeat the above procedure as necessary
91. Span Lower Upper as well as Scale Lower Upper and Unit after the conversion The selectable Range is the same as when other inputs are selected with the mode The selectable range of Scale is 30000 to 30000 The decimal point position can be set to X XXXX XX XXX XXX XX XXXX X or XXXXX The decimal point position is determined by the Scale Lower setting 7 4 IM 04L31A01 03E 7 1 Settings Related to Measurement Inputs Note Note The CX1000 converts the measured value to a value obtained by removing the decimal point from the value range specified by Scale Lower and Scale Upper In other words if the Scale setting is 5 to 5 the value is converted to a value within the span of 10 if the Scale setting is 5 0 to 5 0 the value is converted to a value within a span of 100 In this case the resolution of the value converted to a span of 10 is lower than the value converted to a span of 100 To prevent the display from becoming coarse set the Scale setting so that this value is greater than 100 as much as possible When set to Sqrt square root computation Select this mode when computing the square root of the DC voltage input and converting the computed result to a value with an appropriate unit for displaying Select the input range from 20mV 60mV 200mV 2V 6V 20V and 50V Then set Span Lower Upper measurement span
92. Suppose Expand and Boundary are set to 30 and 0 respectively The 0 to 30 below the boundary correspond to 6 V to 0 V and 70 to 100 above the boundary correspond to O V to 6 V Note If the range setting of a channel is set to Skip or if the span width is less than 1 digit partial expanded display cannot be used the Partial box is grayed 8 22 IM 04L31A01 03E 8 14 Measurement Function gt Setting the Display Direction Background Color Waveform Line Width Trip Line Width Grid and Scroll Time This section explains how to set the display direction of the trends bar graphs the background color the waveform line width the trip line width the number of grids and the automatic switching interval of the displayed groups Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt MENU key switch to Set mode gt 5 soft key select Display gt 4 soft key select View Direction _CD The following display appears Feb 19 go gt ERAL Leb Brightness fa on Horizontal Bargraph vertical Background Heasure White Control Black Trend line 2 dot Trip line 2 dot Grid 10 div Scroll time 5s Scale digit BEIEN Saver Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at
93. TIME Display the program pattern control start delay time Display soft key menu 2 4 Show the program control display valid only during program control Selected pattern number display Selected segment number display Selected segment time display Segment displayed at the left end Select the segment using the left and right arrow keys Switch the program pattern Display the window for starting the program control Soft key menu 2 4 Display soft key menu 3 4 Switches to control group display style number S3 or later Switches to overview display style number S3 or later Display the window for the selection menu for the event display method style number S3 or later Turns the event display ON OFF style number S3 or later Soft key menu 3 4 Display soft key menu 4 4 Display the ON OFF selection menu of program pattern display loops Switch full display split display Display the window for setting the program pattern control start delay time Display the window for setting the program pattern start segment Soft key menu 3 4 NEXT 4 4 Display soft key menu 4 4 Switch tag tag comment display Shift the displayed segment by 10 segments Shift the displayed segment by 10 segments 6 12 IM 04L31A01 03E 6 4 Operations on the Program Selection Display and Program Control Display Only on Models with the Program Control Option Switching the Pattern Number 1 Press the PT
94. Ten segment linearizer approximation ten segment linearizer bias PV input bias Program operation PV input bias PV input filter Program 3 Local NO4 a ESER SP ramp rate setting Note Does not function during program control Secondary loop Control computation section 1 SP1to8 Cascade Q 9 Auto manual Tracking signal Manual operation Control computation section 2 Auto cascade Auto Manual cas d Manual Preset output Output limiter PV event output he pits dh Time event output ____Stop Run switching Measurement alarm function 560006 PV Meas Meas Time Time event event alarm alarm event event 1 2 1 2 1 2 9 Run Stop vA Note There are 6 contact input terminals and 6 contact output terminals on a single control output terminal block The functions that can be assigned to each input output terminal vary depending on the control mode and whether program operation is enabled Primary loop i PV input filter SP 1 to 8 App 42 IM 04L31A01 03E Appendix 7 Control Function Block Diagram Loop Control with PV Switching Fixed Point Control Remote input Input type selection Unit selection Analog input range conversion Contact input Input type selection Input type selection Unit selection Unit selection Square root computation Analog input range conversion Analog input range conversion Square root computation Square
95. The value of control alarms corresponds to the SP number see section 4 9 If the SP number is changed the alarm value also changes accordingly Selection of the SP Number to Be Switched Using Contact Input Set loop 1 and 2 for switching the SP number using the contact input Set target setpoint bits 0 to 3 see page 1 26 Target Setpoint Tracking The CX1000 can perform operation according to the remote SP remote input received from an external source In this case it is foreseeable that the output value will drastically change when switching from a remote operation condition to a local operation operation according to the internal SP of the CX1000 condition or switching from program operation to local operation To prevent the output value from drastically changing the CX1000 has a function used to track the output from the remote SP to the local SP The operation image of target setpoint tracking is shown below When target setpoint tracking is enabled When target setpoint tracking is disabled A A Local SP yer Local SP gt n Remote SP i Remote SP gt is i PV 1 Ti A me A Time Switch from remote to local mode Switch from remote to local mode IM 04L31A01 03E 1 29 suon uny jo uoneuejdxg 1 6 Target Setpoint Related Settings Setpoint Limiter This function is used to limit the range in which the SP is to change The value is specified using EU 0 0 to 100 0 For a
96. With temperature variation of 10 C 0 1 of rdg 1 digit or less for Volt and TC ranges Excluding the error of reference junction compensation 0 1 of rdg 2 digits or less for RTD ranges Power supply fluctuation Other than P1 Magnetic field Input source resistance Other Specifications Clock Daylight savings Accuracy of clock Keylock function Login function Within 90 to 132 V and 180 to 250 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 digit or less With variation of 2 Hz from rated power frequency at 100 VAC 0 1 of rdg 1 digit or less P1 Within 21 6 ro 26 4 VDC AC 50 60 Hz for AC 1 digit or less With variation of 2 Hz from rated power frequency at 24 VAC 0 1 of rdg 1 digit or less AC 50 60 Hz and DC 400 A m fields 0 1 of rdg 10 digits or less With variation of 1 KQ 1 Volt range Ranges of 2 VDC or less Within 10 u V Ranges of 6 VDC or greater 0 1 of rdg or less 2 TC range Within 10 u V 100 u V when burnout is specified 3 RTD range Pt100 With variation of 10 Q per wire when the resistance of all three wires are equal 0 1 of rdg 1 digit With maximum difference of 40 mQ between wires Approx 0 1 C z suonesio ds With a calendar function Can be enabled The time can be adjusted by a remote contact 100 ppm excluding the delay that occurs at power up 1 s or less Can be turned ON OFF Password can be specified Log in by entering a user name user ID
97. YOKOGAWA communication protocol with program controllers made by other manufacturers z suonesio ds IM 04L31A01 03E 14 11 14 6 Communication Functions Green series communications Function for communicating with UT Series Controllers UT3 00 UT4LU0 UT5LI0 and UT750 by Yokogawa M amp C Corporation and other controllers UT Green series controllers with single loop heating cooling control UT750 and UP Series controllers with custom computation and controllers by other manufacturers 14 12 IM 04L31A01 03E 14 7 Options Program Setup Function PG1 and PG2 Program Setup Function Number of program patterns 4 PG1 and 30 PG2 Number of segments per program pattern Up to 99 Number of program segments Up to 300 total of all program patterns Number of program events Up to 800 Program repeat count Up to 999 or unlimited Segment time O min 1s to 99 h 59 min 50s Program pattern start stop Start stop hold and advance the program pattern through contact input or instrument operation Program pattern switching Switch using contact input or instrument operation Advance function Forcibly move to the next segment Wait function Wait time Off 0 min 1 s to 99 min 59 s Wait zone 0 0 to 100 0 of the measurement input span PID Parameter Switching Segment PID switching Can specify the PID parameter number to be used for each segment Zone PID switching PID parameter switchable thr
98. a computing equation has been assigned The sampling interval and the number of samples can be specified for each channel The maximum sampling interval is 1 hour the maximum number of samples is 64 Data That Can Be Used in Equations Data Description Measured data Measured value of a measurement channel or the control PV input Computed data Computed value of a computation channel Constants Set as constants K01 to K12 in the computation function Communication input data Values set using the communication function and written as C01 to C12 see the CX1000 CX2000 Communication Interface User s Manual Conditions of the Remote Input signal 0 or 1 of the remote control function written as DO1 to DO8 Control Terminals Handing of the Unit in Computations The unit corresponding to the measured computed data in the equation is not compensated In computations measured and computed data are handled as values without units For example if the measured data from channel 01 is 20 mV and the measured data from channel 02 is 20 V the computed result of 01 02 is 40 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 91 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 18 Computation and Report Functions Option Report Function Displaying the Computed Data The computed data that is assigned to computation channels can be displayed on various operation displays using trend waveforms bar graphs and numerical values just like measured data Alarms of
99. according to the specified PV zones Like in the case with PID control reference points 1 to 6 up to 7 zones for setting the zones correspond to the SP number 1 to 7 PID number on the setting display Relay hysteresis Control action direction Preset output Control Mode Selection ON OFF control output also allows single loop control cascade control and loop control with PV switching However for cascade control the secondary output is ON OFF control output but the primary output is the computed result obtained by the PID constant that is assigned to the primary loop Therefore a PID constant is assigned to the parameter of the PID number assigned to the primary loop IM 04L31A01 03E 1 37 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 10 Control Alarm Related Settings Alarm Operating Conditions Alarm Mode The following three types of alarm operating conditions are available for selection Alarm is always enabled lt initial value Alarm is disabled when operation is stopped e Alarm is disabled when operation is stopped or during manual MAN operation mode Alarm Type You can select the alarm type from the following Alarm action Alarm action Alarm type Open close relay contact status Alarm type Open close relay contact status Hysteresis Hysteresis Hysteresis a lt Close lt gt Deviation within PV high limit Open Close high amp low Open j i Open PV Alar
100. and Syntax of Computing Equations Read them along with this section Channel Numbers Dedicated to Computations The channel numbers dedicated to computations are 31 to 42 12 channels Computation Types and the Order of Precedence of Computations The following computations can be performed The order of precedence of computations in descending order is functions SQR ABS LOG EXP relational computation logical computation and statistic computation exponentiation logical negation multiplication division addition subtraction greater less relation equal not equal relation logical product logical sum exclusive logical sum Type Description Four arithmetic operation Addition subtraction multiplication x and division k Power y X SQR Square root ABS Absolute value LOG Common logarithm EXP Exponent y e Relational computation Determines lt lt gt or of two elements and outputs 0 or 1 Logical computation Determines the AND logical product OR logical sum XOR exclusive logical sum of two elements NOT negation of an element and outputs 0 or 1 Statistical computation Determines the average AVE maximum MAX minimum MIN sum TLOG SUM and maximum minimum P P at specified time intervals for the specified channels Rolling average Determines the moving average of the computed results of the channels to which
101. and number 6 Ten segment linearizer I O Input type mode and biasing or approximation input output values 7 Program control paramters only when program control is ON 1 Program parameter setting 1 Pattern initial setting 2 Wait action setting 3 Pattern start setting 4 Program pattern setting 5 Event setting 6 Event output setting 7 Hysteresis PV event 8 Repeat action setting 2 AUX Auto message Display position Auto message for program Run Reset Program display position and Auto change to program run display 3 AUX Event group 8 Detailed setting 7 when program control is OFF 1 Control function SP tracking PV tracking SP limiter output velocity limiter and anti reset windup auto manual 2 Hysteresis Alarm 3 DIO monitor and operation setting 4 DI DO label setting 9 Control math setting 8 when program control is OFF 1 PV SP math Retransmission 2 Logic math 1 when both PV SP computation and analog retransmission are inactive 3 Constant 2 when both PV SP computation and analog retransmission are inactive Control Operation Display In operation mode the following control operation displays can be shown Control group display This display is used to monitor the control status of multiple loops simultaneously including external loops You can select from three display styles as shown in the display example in the figure below If you include the measurement
102. and other information on a browser application Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 0 FTP client function Automatically transfers data files from the CX1000 to a server FTP server function File transfer and directory operation and file deletion on the external storage medium from a request by a PC on the network Real time monitor function Real time monitoring of CX1000 measured computed data is possible using a dedicated protocol Serial Communications Used for ladder communications Green series communications and Modbus communications Connection EIA RS 232 CX1 O 06 0 1 0 EIA RS 422 485 CX1 O 06 L1 2 00 Protocol Dedicated protocol or Modbus protocol Synchronization Start stop synchronization Transmission mode RS 422 485 Four wire half duplex multi drop connection 1 N N 1 to 31 Data rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 bps Data length 7 or 8 bits Stop bit 1 bit Parity ODD EVEN and NONE Communication distance RS 422 485 1 2 km Communication mode Input output of control and settings ASCII mode Measured data output ASCII binary mode Modbus communications Operation mode RTU MASTER or RTU SLAVE RTU MASTER Used for Green series communications Up to 4 loops can be connected RTU SLAVE Outputs measured computed data alarm status etc Ladder communications Data input output using BCD codes Ladder communication module of the FA M3 programmable controller by
103. and password IM 04L31A01 03E 14 19 14 9 Dimensional Drawings Unit mm Rear View Ethernet Power supply terminal Control output terminal block Measurement alarm option terminal block Control measurement input terminal block Dimensions before attaching the mounting bracket Thickness of the attachment panel 2 to 26 N cxK1DoOoO YOKOGAWA Dimensions after attaching the mounting bracket If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10 mm the tolerance is 0 3 mm 14 20 IM 04L31A01 03E Appendix Appendix 1 Supplementary Explanation of the Acquisition of Display Data Event Data to the Internal Memory This section explains in detail the function of the acquisition of display data event data to the internal memory It is a supplement to the information covered in Data Acquisition to the Internal Memory in section 1 17 Data Storage Function Acquisition Mode of Event Data Mod
104. and while the computation is stopped For all other cases applying the remote input signal produces no effect 11 12 IM 04L31A01 03E 11 5 Setting the Measurement Remote Input A6R option or A4FR option Manual sample Remote input signal Trigger 250 ms or more Write the instantaneous values of all channels to the internal memory once This excludes measurement channels set to skip and computation channels set to Off Panel1Load to Panel3Load Remote input signal Trigger 250 ms or more Loads the setup data file named LOAD1 PCL LOAD2 PCL or LOAD3 PCL stored on the external storage medium and activates the settings Setup data files named LOAD1 PCL LOAD2 PCL or LOAD3 PCL must be created and saved to the external storage medium beforehand Message to Message8 Remote input signal Trigger 250 ms or more Displays a message at the position corresponding to the time when the signal was applied on the trend display The displayed message is also written to the internal memory When data acquisition to the internal memory is stopped messages cannot be displayed or written Applying a remote input signal produces no effect Snapshot Remote input signal Trigger 250 ms or more Saves the current screen image data to the external storage medium The snapshot function operates in all modes operation mode setting mode and basic setting mode Error messages even if they are disp
105. arrow keys followed by the Single DISP ENTER key to select a character Bias on the keyboard SP space lt gt or ENT Filter Aeoeeanom lt Move to the left digit tiiti ttt ie Move to the right digit UW i2 88 ela ENT e 7 L501 2 3 Confirm 41516 8312 4 Sp Indicates the type of character selected Al Over Overwrite Insert mode indicator Switch overwrite insert mode Backspace Soft key operation Switch character type Delete sot keys DISP ENTER key Arrow keys IM 04L31A01 03E 3 9 suoljeiodQ UOWWOZ pue s pon Aejdsiq Sed jo sowenN e 3 2 Basic Key Operations When a character entry pop up window appears enter the value using the following key operation Arrow keys Selects characters symbols and operations DISP ENTER key Confirms the selected character symbol or operation DEL soft key Clears the character at the cursor position BS soft key Clears the character before the cursor position INS soft key Selects insert or overwrite Insert and overwrite mode toggles each time the INS soft key is pressed The selected mode is shown on the right side of the soft key display section Copy Paste soft key Used when copying character strings Move the cursor to the string to be copied and press the Copy soft key Move the cursor to the copy destination string entry box and press the Paste soft key
106. at the bottom section of the display 2 Select the item using the soft key The box for the item you entered turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item Range Filter off Pmi SpanLower 200 0 Upper Sq root off PT JPT To cancel the settings press the ESC key On the cancel confirmation window that appears press the DISP ENTER key with Yes is selected O want to cancel this setting Note If values or characters need to be entered the soft key menu displays Input For the procedure in entering values and characters see pages 3 9 to 3 10 Confirming Settings on the Setting Displays Press the DISP ENTER key The item you entered is confirmed and the item box turns white again The cursor moves to the first item box on the setting display Note If you attempt to confirm the setting by pressing the key on the setup display invoked by the Setting mode control gt Control Input Range command sequence a confirmation window with a message Do you really want to change the settings appears Switching from Setting Mode to Operation Mode Display setting menu and press the ESC key Switching from Basic Setting Mode to Operation Mode and Saving the Basic Settings Display basic setting menu and then carry out the following procedures 1 Press the End soft key A confirmation window containing the message Do you want to store and make the new settings take effect appears
107. average and the difference in the max and min values of data measured at the same time max 10 channels Measurement data and control input data can be used for this computation You can not set an equation inside the CLOG equation One CLOG only can be set within the PV SP equation The target data designation is delimited with periods You can use hyphens to express a continuous range of channels Conditions A different computation is performed depending on the computed results of the specified equation For eq1 eq2 eq3 if the computed result of eq1 is other than 0 eq2 is computed and if that result is 0 then eq3 is computed You can set a conditional expressions such as eq1 eq2 1 eq2 2 eq2 3 eq3 1 eq3 2 eq3 3 Equations may not be used simultaneously Data That Can Be Used in Equations The data that can be used in equations is the same data that can be used for the measurement computation function plus the following Control input channel data 2 loop models Cl01 Cl05 Constants however W01 W12 and the measurement constants KO1 K12 cannot be used Status of internal switches The status of the control relays DO001 DO006 Logic Computation The computed result is output to the DO or internal switch as a 0 or 1 Computation Type Computation Type Operator Logical operation AND OR XOR NOT Relational operation GT LT GE LE EQ NE Conditional expressions eq1 eq2 eq3
108. block diagram for each control mode see appendix 7 Switching between Remote REM and Local LOC Select whether control is executed using the SPs set on the CX1000 or using the external analog signal RSP as the SP lt PV input gt RSP input gt Analog signal y PV RSP SP Local emote LOC y REM pe Controller CPU Switching between Auto AUT Manual MAN and Cascade CAS When set to auto the control output value OUT is computed from the deviation between the PV input and the SP When set to manual the control output value OUT that is set manually is used rather than the computed control output value OUT Switching to cascade CAS is possible only when the control mode is set to cascade control In cascade control the primary PID control output is used as the SP of the secondary PID control Switching between Run RUN and Stop STP When the operation is stopped the control output value OUT is set to the preset value Single loop control PV input Cascade control PV PV input 1 V input Cascade primary Cascade secondary SP PV1 PV2 Manual operation Controller CPU Manual MAN Auto AUT Controller CPU 1 Cascade Rae Preset output Output limiter ariel Manual operation Controller CPU 2 Stop STP Run RUN p Manual
109. channel Error Blank Positive overrange 99999 Negative overrange 99999 Computation channel Error 999999999 Positive computation overflow 999999999 when the value exceeds 3 4E 38 Negative computation overflow 99999999 when the value falls below 3 4E 38 New line of CH TAG UNIT line In the following cases a new line is created and the CH TAG UNIT line is rewritten A measurement channel is changed to Skip from a range other than Skip A measurement channel is changed to a range other than Skip from Skip A measurement channel is changed from On to Off or Off to On The unit is changed The last four lines of the previous output example is an example when the unit of channel 4 is changed from mV to V IM 04L31A01 03E App 21 xipueddy Appendix 5 Data Format of ASCII Files Report File Format The hourly daily weekly and month reports are output using numerical values and strings in ASCII format delimited by commas Channel tags units average values maximum values minimum values and sum values of channels whose input range is set to Skip or computation channels that are turned Off are not output The data is appended to this file every time a report is created Format TTT T REPORT START TIME YYYY MO DD HH MICRLF Model Serial No IIIIIIIIIIIIIIII CRLF File Header HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH CRLF CH T
110. channels for the measurement function in the group you can also monitor the measured values on the measurement channels at the same time on this display Tuning display This display is used to optimize tune the control parameters such as PID constants Overview display This display is used to monitor the alarm status of all control loops IM 04L31A01 03E suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 2 Control Function Overview DI DO status display Displays the ON OFF status of the current contact input DI and contact output DO Internal switch status display Displays the current ON OFF status of the internal switches Control action summary display Displays a log of control actions such as operation run stop and auto manual operation switching On models with the program control function option additional displays are available such as 1 the program control display which can show the pattern and current PV accumulated on the screen during program operation and 2 the program event summary display which shows a log of time events and PV events that occurred during program operation Displays common with the measurement function include 1 the alarm summary display which shows a log of alarm occurrence status and 2 the memory summary display which shows the file information of the internal memory In addition the values of PV SP and OUT can be assigned to channels and the trends of these channels can be displayed along with t
111. control Select to register a contact input for resetting the program operation Hold lt selectable only during program control Select to register a contact input for holding the program operation Advance lt selectable only during program control Select to register a contact input for advancing the program operation PatternNo0O to 4bit lt selectable only during program control When registering as a contact input for switching the program pattern When specifying program pattern numbers in binary 5 contact inputs 5 bit binary are used to specify the pattern number 1 to 30 For example set PatternNo1bit and PatternNo2bit to ON to specify pattern number 6 Contact outputs that can be registered to PatternNoObit to PatternNo4bit are DI001 to DIOOS of the control output terminal block Only the required number of bits can be registered For example if only 2 bits are needed to make the switch register only PatternNoObit and PatternNo1bit If you place the cursor on DI001 and press the soft key that includes the maximum pattern number to be specified contact inputs of the required number of bits D1001 DI005 are automatically registered When specifying program pattern numbers in binary coded decimal BCD D64 version 3 20 or later For the setting procedure see section 4 21 Settings for Switching the Program Patterns Using Contact Inputs with BCD Codes Version 3 20 or Later IM 04L31A01 03E
112. data Cl101 C105 constants control computation W01 W12 and status of internal switches SW01 SW18 See page App 8 for the data that can be used with control computation and measurement computation You can specify a computing equation that performs relational computation on a computing element Example 01 LT ABS 02 Equation Examples 02 LT 03 If the measured value of channel 2 is less than the measured value of channel 3 the computed result is 1 Otherwise the result is 0 02 GT 03 If the measured value of channel 2 is greater than the measured value of channel 3 the computed result is 1 Otherwise the result is 0 02 EQ 03 If the measured value of channel 2 is equal to the measured value of channel 3 the computed result is 1 Otherwise the result is 0 02 NE 03 If the measured value of channel 2 is not equal to the measured value of channel 3 the computed result is 1 Otherwise the result is 0 02 GE 03 If the measured value of channel 2 is greater than or equal to the measured value of channel 3 the computed result is 1 Otherwise the result is 0 02 LE 03 If the measured value of channel 2 is less than or equal to the measured value of channel 3 the computed result is 1 Otherwise the result is 0 App 12 IM 04L31A01 03E Appendix 3 Meaning and Syntax of Equations Logical Computation Checks whether the two data values e1 and e
113. definition of the engineering unit EUS see appendix 8 Explanation of Engineering Units EU and EUS When not in program operation Limit the change in the SP When in program operation Limit the program setpoint Ramp rate Setting during Target Setpoint Switching e When the SP is changed When you do not want the SP to change rapidly or when you wish to change the SP ata constant velocity ramp rate you can set the velocity ramp rate SP ramp up rate or SP ramp down rate for raising or lowering the SP The specified velocity ramp rate functions in the following cases e When the SP is changed e When the SP number is changed When the CX1000 is powered up or recovers after a power failure The SP changes according to the specified ramp rate from the PV to the SP When the CX1000 is switched from manual operation to auto operation The SP changes according to the specified ramp rate from the PV to the SP e When the SP number is changed At the time of power up or recovery after power failure or when manual auto operation is switched SP old 2 SP i E s Preset ramp rate E i o i Preset ramp rate SP new i 1 PV f Time gt t Time gt Time gt SP change SP switching Power up or manual auto switching RSP Input The following figure shows an example in which the ramp up rate is set to 70 C minute and the CX1000 is operating at SP 1 500 C
114. during auto operation when operation is stopped or when the primary loop of cascade control is selected When the operation is stopped the preset value is output 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired control loop 2 Press the OUT soft key The OUT modification pop up window appears The window shows the current control output or 100 0 Window for changing the control output 3 Change the control output using the up and down arrow keys The control output changes to the specified value The value changes continuously if you keep pressing the up or down arrow key Note If Shutdown under PID parameter is set to On the next value below 5 0 is SD which indicates shutdown when you keep decreasing the control output 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to exit the operation of changing the control output Switching between Remote and Local Modes The soft key menu does not show REM LOC if Control gt 4 AUX Alarm mode gt Remote setting is set to Off Remote input cannot be used for the SP when the secondary loop of cascade control is selected or during program control Thus there is no remote local switching in these cases 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired control loop 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key followed by the REM LOC soft key A pop up window for switching between remote and local appears 20 0 REM LOC LocAL S Window for switching between remote and loc
115. eeeeeeees CONO gata sriid einernie aeinn de nutie control CirECON siisii control function block diagram control group IM 04L31A01 03E control group display cee eee eeeeeee COMMMOL MOUS siesienizies sists satiesis seeds axey tdasivaassei aay aioe control operation mode control output changing of control output limiter control output suppressing function eee 4 26 control output SUPPFeESSION 0 0 ee cece eee eere teeter eee 1 35 control output terminal block 2 6 control output type 4 14 control output wiring 2 15 Control parameter oeei elas 1 4 COMMNOL POO ARETE TATE TEATE controller style z CUPPONE UPUT oisi seiras raara eanan ne cnaassohaesediee ran CUrSOF TUMMING OFF ssas nsaan 8 8 CYClO TIME oiia eee 4 14 D DETAI T TET ART 1 32 4 28 6 10 data acquisition to the internal memory 1 86 9 2 App 1 data lengi wo cesssceccrseeeseei ctsece ens eosaieeerevaceretnbes 9 4 data Saving Of svesievecsirseite seitteeseteisets EEN 1 88 Index 1 53 Q o x Index data ty Pe svee cctecessestessecsnenseeecscuvasecenteotianesvecdesucuecencoteeneees 9 3 day day of the week 0 0 ee eee ce eeeeeeeteeeneeeneees 9 5 10 13 DB issn iaete eee de energize Decrease DELAY sassen hates erie 6 16 delay lower limit alarm c cect cee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeeees 1 62 delay time vst ee eee ie 6
116. effects on the measurement accuracy Wiring Procedure 1 Turn OFF the CX1000 and open the cover transparent for the power supply wires 2 Connect the power cord and the protective ground cord to the power supply terminals The proper torque for tightening the screw is 1 4 to 1 5 N m 12 4 to 13 2 inch Ibs 100 240V AC 50 60Hz 51VA M For P1 option specification Power cord Protective grounding cord 3 Close the cover transparent for the power supply wires and secure it in place with screws IM 04L31A01 03E 2 17 Bull pue uonejesul D Chapter 3 Names of Parts Display Modes and Common Operations 3 1 Names and Functions of Sections Front Panel YOKOGAWA Operation cover knob 3 4 Key operation cover knob 3 2 1 LCD Various screens appear in the LCD such as the control group display and setup displays For a description of each display screen see section 3 2 Basic Key Operations 2 Label Used to identify each channel Write the appropriate information on the label as needed 3 Keys Includes the left up and down arrow keys as well as the DISP ENTER key In operation mode these keys are used to switch between the operation displays In the setup screens where functions are configured the keys are used to select par
117. erds q y BuiBueysy 104 suoije19dO fe 8 12 Measurement Function gt Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position Scale Position of Trend Displays Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position and Scale Position of Trend Displays First CH Last CH Set the target channel common with the Zone setting Graph Division Set the number of main scale marks on the trend display and the number of scale marks on the bar graph from 4 to 12 In addition to the values of 4 to 12 C10 is available When C10 is selected the scale is equally divided into 10 sections by main scale marks and scale values are indicated at 0 30 50 70 and 100 positions on the trend display Note If the number of divisions is set from 8 to 12 scale values are displayed every other main scale mark In addition the upper and lower limits of the scale are always displayed at the ends of the scale Bar graph Set the base position of the bar graph when set to horizontal display to Normal or Center When the bar graph is displayed vertically the base position is fixed to Normal the bottom of the bar graph is the base position 2 000 2 000 ais pee m Base position Normal j The base position is either the left edge or the right edge of the display span ee oa whichever the value is smaller Base position Center The base position is the 50 It E Lo position of the display span
118. exceeds 99999999 Positive display overrange ap ATARKEN When the computed result is less than 9999999 Negative display overrange When the value in the middle of the computation Computation overflow ie exceeds approx 3 4 x 10 8 or below approx or 3 4 x 10 8 ex ebae During a computation error Error So eenenn Computation error occurs when perform the following computation X 0 SQR X LOG X If a channel number set to skip is entered in the equation When the stack of the equation see section 11 2 Error i is greater than or equal to 17 When the stack of the control equation is greater Error nl than or equal to 35 The rolling average of the computed result of the equation specified for the computation channel is determined and the result is displayed as computed data for that channel The sampling interval and the number of samples can be specified for each channel The maximum sampling interval is 1 hour and the maximum number of samples is 64 The initial setting is Off do not perform rolling average Up to 4 alarms can be set to each computation channel The alarm types are high limit alarm H low limit alarm L delay high limit alarm T and delay low limit alarm t The hysteresis is fixed to 0 Acquisition of Computed Data to the Internal Memory Display Data and Event Data Similar to measurement channels the computed data of computation channels can be acquired to the internal mem
119. failure 914 Channel 4 A D memory failure 921 Channel 1 A D calibration value error 922 Channel 2 A D calibration value error 923 Channel 3 A D calibration value error 924 Channel 4 A D calibration value error 930 Memory acquisition failure 940 The ethernet module is down 950 First module channel1 output calibration value can not write 951 First module channel2 output calibration value can not write 952 Second module channel1 output calibration value can not write 953 Second module channel 2 output calibration value can not write 954 Third module channel 1 output calibration value can not write 955 Third module channel 2 output calibration value can not write 990 Control AD calibration error 991 Analog output calibration error 992 PID module error 12 10 IM 04L31A01 03E 12 2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart When Nothing Operates Nothing Is Displayed Is the power supply properly connected Connect it properly See section 2 4 Supply power of the voltage frequency according to the specifications Is the power supplied properly See section 2 4 Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer When Problems Exist on the Display or Other Functions Move the input and communication wires away from the noise source Ground the CX1000 Use shielded cables for input and communication wires Insert a isolation transformer in the power line Insert a power line filter in
120. for Press Flow is O s Output lower upper limit Set the low and high limits of the control output operation range in the range of 5 0 to 105 0 where high limit gt low limit The initial low limit value is 0 0 the initial high limit value is 100 0 Shutdown When Control gt Output processing gt Control output is set to Current output and Analog output type is set to 4 20mA see page 4 13 set whether the shutdown function is used On initial value or Off M reset For the manual reset value set the output value when the PV the SP in the range of 5 0 to 105 0 initial value is 50 This setting is valid only when the integral action integral time is set to Off Relay hysteresis Set the hysteresis of the SP or program setpoint for ON OFF control in the range of EUS 0 0 to 100 0 of the measurement span initial value is 0 5 Then set the activation position of the hysteresis to Mid High or Low initial setting is Mid R D Set the direction increase or decrease of the output corresponding to the polarity of the deviation to Reverse initial setting or Direct Preset Set the fixed point output value when the operation is stopped in the range of 5 0 to 105 0 initial setting is 0 0 4 28 IM 04L31A01 03E 4 12 Control group setting This section explains the procedures for setting groups for the control function Procedure Op
121. input see section 11 5 Setting the Measurement Remote Inputs or via communications see the CX1000 CX2000 Communication Interface User s Manual 4 24 IM 04L31A01 03E 4 10 Operation related parameters Zone PID Procedure This section explains the procedures for setting the control output suppression function control operation related parameters such as the ramp rate time unit and zone PID related parameters such as the reference point and zone switching hysteresis Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt 3 soft key select Operation related parameters Zone PID The following display appears 18 18 42 ROU E Operation Loop number e Suppressing Off Reference 1 200 408 Ramp rate time Hour 2 200 00 SP ramp down On 3 200 00 266 68 4 266 08 SP ramp up On 5 200 00 200 00 6 266 00 Tag INT 81 Hysteresis 1 00 Tag comment TEST 1 Deviation n 1 08 Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item box 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note For setup item boxes that require values to be entered a pop up
122. is held and the amount of time the segment time is increased or decreased Example in which the segment time is increased A SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEG5 i Pattern before the PG C i i f remaining S f segment time is 4 increased ar V 4 Final SP i PA i 4 a i am G i Pattern dfter the i gt __ rem inid Remaining segment segment time is time increased __ increased i Time event ON OFF P Hold period Delay for the amount of time Timer stopped the timer was stopped Example in which the segment time is decreased A SEGI SEG2 Pe SEG4 ins Pattern after the remaining i segment time is decreased j 1 Na S a P i before th Final SP ae attern before the x Hiaasen remaining l i l A 1 segmenttimeis decreased f Remaining segment time decreased oe i Delay for the amount of time the timer was stopped oo Hold period L Timer stopped lt The time event also decreases by the amount the remaining segment time was decreased ON Ti t ime event JFF 1 52 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 11 Program Control Related Settings Note When the remaining segment time is decreased and the event action timer times out the time event is forcibly generated at that point Example in which the final SP is changed using the segment time ramp grade setup method The figure
123. is 30 000 Event data only 1 200 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 2 number of computation channels x 4 The maximum number is 120 000 Maximum Sampling Length The maximum sampling length can be determined from the time it takes to acquire the maximum number of data to the internal memory using the following equation Maximum sampling length maximum number of data points x sampling interval Calculation Example of Maximum Number of Data Points and Maximum Sampling Length Display Data Only Measurement channel 2 computation channel none internal control channel none external control channel none Data Maximum Number of Data Points and Maximum Sampling Length Display data Maximum number of data points 1 200 000 2CH x 4 bytes 0 x 8 bytes 0 x 4 bytes 0 x 4 bytes 150 000 However the maximum is limited to 100 000 data points Therefore the maximum number of data points 100 000 When the display update rate is 30 min div 60 s sampling interval Maximum sampling length 100 000 data points x 60 s 6 000 000 s approx 69 days Measurement channel 3 computation channel 6 internal control channel 2 external control channel 3 Data Maximum Number of Data Points and Maximum Sampling Length Display data Maximum number of data points 1 200 000 3CH x 4 bytes 6 x 8 bytes 2 x 4 bytes 3 x 4 bytes 150 000 When the display update rate is 30 min div 60 s sampling interval M
124. is below the alarm low limit Time Power up Alarm Mode You can set the condition for disabling the alarm output such as when the operation is stopped FAIL Output Self Diagnosis Output In addition to the alarm output described above the following relay contact signal for failure detection can be output from the control output terminal block FAIL output Output when a failure is detected in the CX1000 CPU When a failure is detected the CX1000 is put in the following condition Control Stopped preset output if in the middle of operation control output is off or 0 when power is turned ON Self diagnosis output Output when an input burnout A D converter failure or RJC failure occurs If an input burnout or A D converter failure is detected the control output is set to the preset output value For RJC PID control continues as though RUC is 0 C IM 04L31A01 03E 1 5 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 2 Control Function Overview Control Operation Mode Contact Input The following control operation switching is available The control operation can be switched using keys on the CX1000 control group display see page 1 14 using contact inputs or via communications For a description of the control operation modes on models with the program control option see Program Contro in the next section The control function block diagram in the explanation below is a simplified one Fora detailed control function
125. is physical damage contact the dealer from which you purchased them When you open the operation cover on the front panel a name plate is located on the back side of the cover Check that the model name and suffix code given on the name plate on the rear panel match those on the order YOKOGAMA lt gt cover Open the operation 4 MODEL and SUFFIX Suffix Code Optional Code Description Number of internal control loops 0 number of inputs for measurement 0 ch Number of internal control loops 0 number of inputs for measurement 6 ch CX1206 Number of internal control loops 2 number of inputs for measurement 0 ch Number of internal control loops 2 number of inputs for measurement 6 ch External 1 Floppy disk storage 2 100MB Zip disk medium ATA flash memory card Compact flash and adapter 250MB Zip disk Ethernet Communication Ethernet RS 232 serial interface port interface Ethernet RS 422A 485 serial interface port Displayed language Japanese English Options A6 6 measurement alarm outputs A6R 6 measurement alarm output 8 remote inputs A4F 4 measurement alarm outputs 1 FAIL output 1 memory end output A4FR 4 measurement alarm outputs 1 FAI
126. items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Setting Zone Lower Upper First CH Last CH Set the target channel common with the Graph setting Measurement channels 01 to 6 computation channels 31 to 42 internal control channels 101 to 106 external control channels 201 to 212 Zone Lower Upper Set the zone for displaying the target channel You can set Zone Lower and Zone Upper as a position when taking the maximum display width to be 0 to 100 in the following range Zone Lower 0 to 95 Zone Upper 5 to 100 where Zone Lower lt Zone Upper and Zone Upper Zone Lower 5 8 16 IM 04L31A01 03E 8 12 Measurement Function gt Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position Scale Position of Trend Displays This section explains how to set the scale division on trend bar graph displays bar graph base position and the scale display position of each channel on trend displays The scale division bar graph base position and scale position of trend displays cannnot be selected on 0 measurement channel models An error message will appear if the zone or graph setting screen is selected Procedure Opening the Setting Display Setting the scale division bar graph base position scale position of trend displays Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt MENU key switch to Set mode gt 5 soft key
127. limit of the output limiter BS2 measured value 2 input bias A3 alarm 3 setpoint MR manual reset FL2 measured value 2 input filter A4 alarm 4 setpoint PO preset output RT ratio setting P proportional band RBS remote input bias I integral time RFL remote input filter W01 to W36 control computation constant Applies to style number S3 or later BS1 FL1 BS2 FL2 RFL and W01 W36 cannot be selected when PV SP computation is ON Manual Tuning Operation On the tuning display as shown below you can select the parameter you wish to tune using the arrow keys and change the value INT 1 SP NO CTRL GRP NEXT 1 2 Auto Tuning the PID Constant on the tuning depay select the PID number you wish to auto tune and execute auto tuning A maenna When on off control is being used auto tunig can not be carried out Moreover do not perform auto tuning when controlling any of the following cases Control process with quick response such as flow control or pressure control Process where even temporary output on off results in inconvenience Process where a large output change at control element results in inconvenience Process where variations in PY may exceed an al lowable range adversely effecting product quality 1 54 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 12 Tuning Auto Tuning Auto tuning is a function that automatically measures the process characteristics and automatica
128. manually switch between DO ON 1 and OFF 0 Internal switch output has priority over alarm output and event output If the same DO is assigned to an internal switch and an alarm output alarms cannot be output When DO01 is assigned to SW01 When DO003 is assigned to the ON signal of SW02 and DO004 is assigned to the OFF signal Internal switch SW01 Internal switch SW02 AUTO amp o MAN AUTO o MAN x ia a OFF In the above cases even if D001 DO003 and DO004 are specified for alarm output the alarm signal is not output However FAIL and self diagnosis output take priority over the internal switch status output IM 04L31A01 03E 1 9 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 2 Control Function Overview Program Control Optional Function This function is used to ramp up or ramp down the SP according to a program pattern You can set multiple program patterns up to 4 on the PG1 option and up to 30 on the PG 2 option and switch among them according to the operating condition A program pattern consists of multiple program segments With style number S3 or later you can execute a program pattern while a separate program pattern is executing as long as the operating loops do not overlap There are two methods in selecting the PID constant in program control One is the segment PID method in which the PID constant is switched every segment according to the program pattern setting the other is the zone PID method
129. measurement span are EU 0 and EU 100 respectively EUS Unit indicating the amount of percentage the value occupies against the width of the measurement span using engineering units Below is an example of values converted to EU and EUS If the measurement span is set to 200 to 1200 C EU 20 is 80 C and EUS 20 is 280 C EU 0 EU 20 EU 40 EU 100 200 C 80 C 360 C 1200 C 200 C 80 C 360 C 1200 C lt gt lt gt EUS 20 EUS 20 i 280 C 280 C lt gt EUS 100 1400 C i IM 04L31A01 03E App 45 xipueddy Appendix 9 Program Control Worksheets Device Name Pattern initial setting Pattern number Segments Segment setting method Pattern name Operating loop Loop 1 Loop 2 Wait action setting Time Ramp Below are conveninent worksheets for setting program control parameters The excel file program_worksheet_e xls containing these worksheets is available in the english directory on the accompanying CD ROM CX1000 CX2000 Electronic Manual L mm ative a E E a Pattern start setting Start target setpoint Loop 1 Loop 2 Repeat action setting Repeat frequency Repeat start segment Repeat end segment Start code Starting target setpoint start p PV1 ramp prioritized sti p PV2 ramp prioritized sti p PV time prioritized start App 46 IM 04L31A01 03E Appendix 9 P
130. minute Expression 31 31 01 K01 31 GE K02 K02 K01 60 unit of time of the measured flow on channel 1 scan interval or in this case 60 sec 1 sec 60 K02 1000 reset if the integrated value exceeds this value Explanation 31 01 K01 calculates the integrated value on channel 1 When the value of channel 31 is smaller than 1000 the value of 31 GE K02 is 0 The value of 31 GE K02 K02 is 0 When the value of channel 31 is 1000 or higher the value of 31 GE K02 is 1 The value of 31 GE K02 KO2 is 1000 1000 is subtracted from the integrated value and integration continues Scan interval Channel 1 l gt 1000 4 4 L E Integration Channel 31 m LI l gt Time C The portion exceeding 1000 is carried over and the value is reset J App 50 IM 04L31A01 03E Appendix 10 Expression Examples a N Applies a Lowcut and Highcut to Measured Values and Integrates Them Function Cuts sets to 0 measured values on channel 1 that are negative or greater than 15 and integrates them Expression 31 01 GE K01 AND 01 LE K02 01 32 TLOG SUM 31 K01 0 K02 15 Explanation When the value of channel 1 is negative 01 GE K01 is 0 When the value of channel 1 exceeds 15 01 LE K02 is 0 Therefore when the value of channel 1 is negative or exceeds 15
131. mode and basic setting mode Many of the settings in basic setting mode are prerequisites for the settings made in control and common and measurement setting modes Therefore enter these settings first Mode Types Description Main Operations Possible Operation mode Mode used to monitor and control the operation Contains a display that shows the control status a display for turning the control and a display for displaying the measured computed data etc e Switch the control operation mode Change the control parameters Display measured computed data Save or abort the saving of the data Control setting Mode used to set control related parameters that are changeable Set the operation of control functions mode during operation Common and Mode used to set parameters common to control and measurement Set the operation of the measurement and measurement related parameters that are changeable during measurement functions setting mode operation Set items related to data storage Set items related to the display format Basic setting Mode used to set basic items such as the control mode input Set basic items of each function mode format and save format of measured data You cannot switch to the Set communication parameters setup mode basic setting mode while control operation is progress while data is being acquired to the internal memory or while computation is in progress
132. mode control gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode 12 soft key select Control gt 3 soft key select DI DO SW registration DI DO SW registration Hodule CTRL1 DI Renmote Local2 futo Manl ProgramRun Hold Trigger TRL1 DICTRL1 DO INT SW1 INT SW2 INT SW3 Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Saving the Settings 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed 4 6 IM 04L31A01 03E 4 3 Control gt DI DO SW registration Registering Contact Inputs Module Select the terminal block for contact input settings from the list below The contact input number in the Relay Operation settings field will change per the selected terminal block CTRL1 DI control output terminal block 1 DI001 DI006 CT
133. n 1 n 1 to 98 Wait zone Wait zone Transits to the next segment SEG n 1 when the wait zone is reached Wait time Operation when the PV does not reach the wait zone within the wait time If the wait time elapses before the PV reaches the wait zone the operation switches from wait mode to run mode at that point even if the PV has not reached the final SP and transits to the next segment However if the wait time is set to 00 00 00 the wait operation continues until the PV reaches the wait zone SEG n SEG n 1 n 1to 98 Final SP K Wait zone Wait zone The PV has not reached the wait zone but the program transits to the next segment when the waittime has elapsed Wait time Note If the wait time is changed during wait operation wait operation continues using the new wait time including the wait time that has already elapsed If the new wait time is equal or shorter than the wait time that has already elapsed the wait operation ends at that point If the wait time is changed from 00 00 00 to some other value during wait operation the wait operation starts at that time using the new wait time Wait within the Segment If the PV falls outside the wait zone specified with respect to the current SP when the program operation is within the segment the operation enters wait mode and the program operation is delayed For wait operation within the segment wait operation continues un
134. next item Note _ The Item name is set using the pop up window that appears by pressing the Detail soft key On the pop up window set Item ID and Item name Select Item ID using the soft key menu Enter Item name by pressing the Input soft key and using the character number input keys Setup Node Cink e Tuning setting Loop number 1 Item ID Item name 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item IM 04L31A01 03E 4 17 suoljesiado dnjas payejay uoljOUNY 07u09 s 4 7 Control gt Tuning setting Saving the Settings 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed Setting Tuning Parameters Loop number The parameters to be tuned are set for each loop When changing these parameters this setting is used to select the target loop number 1 or 2 initial value is 1 On Off Set the parameters that are to be displayed on the tuning display to On set the parameters that are not to be displayed to Off Item name Under the initial settings the tuning parameters are set as follows The numbers indicate the order of items on the tuning displ
135. no effect Hold Non hold of Alarm Indications You can select the following behavior when the alarm switches from the activated condition to the released condition Clear the alarm indication with the release of the alarm non hold Hold the alarm indication until the alarm ACK operation is performed hold The initial setting is Non hold Alarm Icon Indication Example When indication is set to non hold When indication is set to hold Occurrence Occurrence Alarm Release i Release Blinking Red icon Blinking red icon Red icon red icon Blinking TE alia green icon la Indication None o None E Alarm ACK Alarm ACK sale Eae oD Alarm icon Note The non hold hold setting of the alarm indication also applies to control alarms Showing Hiding the Alarm Display Style Number S3 or Later You can select whether or not to display alarms when they occur When not displaying alarms the alarm is output but not retained in the alarm summary IM 04L31A01 03E 1 65 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 16 Display Function Display Types and Switching Operation As indicated in the following figure key operation is used to switch the displays Power ON Operation mode End soft key gt DISP ENTER key
136. not seem to fit make sure you are inserting it right side up CF card For the general handling precautions of the external storage medium see the instruction manual that came with that medium CAUTION If you turn ON OFF the CX1000 while a Zip disk is inserted in the drive the Zip drive may malfunction When turning ON OFF the CX1000 first remove the Zip disk from the drive Do not eject the external storage medium while the access lamp is illuminated This can damage the data Do not operate the floppy disk drive or Zip drive in a place with vibrations or shock The disk or drive may malfunction IM 04L31A01 03E 2 1 Bulli AA pue uONeye SU D 2 2 Installation Installation Location Install the CX indoors in a location that meets the following conditions The environment of the installation location is described in section 14 8 General Specifications Instrumentation Panel The CX1000 is designed to be installed in an instrumentation panel panel mount type Well Ventilated Location Install the instrument in a well ventilated location to prevent the temperature inside the instrument from rising For the panel cut dimensions when arranging multiple CX1000 see the next page Also when other instruments are arranged on the panel allow adequate space between them Location Where Mechanical Vibration Is Small Select a location with low mechanical vibration for installation Horizontal Location W
137. npuriype Maximum Maximum 6 Internal loop 2 loops of PV SP and OUT Green series 12 an aba ls 4 loops of PV SP and OUT Measurement CH 6 Computation channel 42 option Bar graph display Direction Vertical or horizontal Number of displayed channels Up to 6 channels per display 1 group Number of displays 6 displays 6 groups Scale Selectable from 4 to 12 Reference position End or center Update rate 1s Digital Display Number of displayed channels Up to 6 channels per display 1 group Number of displays 6 displays 6 groups Update rate 1s Overview display Number of loops Control Up to 6 loops Number of channels Measurement Up to 18 CH including computation CH Measured values and alarm statuses of all channels 14 6 IM 04L31A01 03E 14 4 Display Function Information display Tag display Jumps to the trend display of the section specified by the cursor Alarm summary display Log of alarms Event summary display Summary of the program event status Control operation summary display Summary of the control operation condition Message summary display Time and content of the message Memory summary display Files in the internal memory Number of characters displayable Up to 16 characters measurement channels Up to 8 characters control loop tags Up to 8 characters control tag comments Characters displayable Alphanumeric characters Other displayed information
138. of the display 2 Press the AlarmACK soft key i vu U ou U ov Manual Hath larmAck Message saaple START miNext 1 3 Note This operation can be assigned to the USER key For the procedure in assigning a function to the USER key see section 11 1 USER Key Assinmment and Operation This operation is common with measurement alarms IM 04L31A01 03E 4 23 suoljeiado dnjas payejay uoljOUNY 07u09 eS 4 9 Control alarm Setting Control Alarms Loop number The setup items for control alarms are set for each loop When changing these parameters this setting is used to select the target loop number 1 or 2 initial value is 1 Off On Up to four alarms can be registered per loop Set only the alarms that are to be used to On Type Select the type of alarm from the following Displayed symbols are indicated in parentheses PV high limit alarm PVH PV low limit alarm PVL deviation high limit alarm DVH deviation low limit alarm DVL deviation high amp low limit alarm DVO deviation within high amp low limits alarm DVI SP high limit alarm SPH SP low limit alarm SPL output high limit alarm OTH and output low limit alarm OTL Standby This setting is valid when Type is set to PV High PV Low Deviation High Deviation Low Deviation H amp L or Dev within H amp L Set whether to standby On or Off Relay Output Number Up to four alarms can be registered
139. of the input as well as Scale Lower Upper and Unit after the conversion The selectable range of Scale is 30000 to 30000 The decimal point position can be set to X XXXX KX XXX XXX XX XXXX X or XXXXX The decimal point position is determined by the Scale Lower setting You cannot set the same value to Scale Lower and Scale Upper The CX1000 converts the measured value to a value obtained by removing the decimal point from the value span specified by Scale Lower and Scale Upper In other words if the Scale setting is 5 to 5 the value is converted to a value within the span of 10 if the Scale setting is 5 0 to 5 0 the value is converted to a value within a span of 100 In this case the resolution of the value converted to a span of 10 is lower than the value converted to a span of 100 To prevent the display from becoming coarse set the Scale setting so that this value is greater than 100 as much as possible Setting the Moving Average First CH Last CH Select the range of channels for setting the moving average Moving average Select the sampling data count of the moving average from 2 to 16 IM 04L31A01 03E suoleiedg dnjes palejey uolouny juewssnseoyy a 7 2 Settings Related to Measurement Alarms This section explains how to set alarm related parameters such as alarm output ON OFF alarm output type and alarm delay and
140. on the program selection display before program control The value is reset to 00 00 00 when you reset the program control Operation Mode during Program Control The following operation modes are available during program control Of the operations shown in the figure below RUN STOP and PRG LOG switch operations are carried out on the control group display For these operations see section 6 1 Operations on the Control Group Display Switching Displayed Information and Control Operation Modes RESET or eg OSD SIOF _ Local operation Reset mode mode RUN PRG RUN LOCAL end LOC or program or all loop STOP I 1 Program operation Release HOLD mode Hold operation mode i HOLD ee ee PRG RESET program end During program control In the figure reset mode refers to the status in which the program control of all loops is stopped When program control is started all loops enter program control mode When in reset mode you cannot set specified loops to program control mode IM 04L31A01 03E 6 19 uonesedo 01 U05 Bulunp suonesodo fo 6 4 Operations on the Program Selection Display and Program Control Display Only on Models with the Program Control Option However you can switch specified loops to local mode or stop the operation after program control is started In addition even when certain loops are in local mode the operation of all l
141. only when the key login function is used Message string Cursor Select a message using the cursor and select INFORMATION gt JUMP TO HISTORY on the display selection menu to display the data historical trend containing the selected message Control Operation Display gt Memory Summary The information pertaining to the display data and event data in the internal memory is displayed e By selecting the display data or event data using the arrow keys the historical trend display can be recalled For a description on the historical trend display see Control Operation Display gt Historical Trend in this section The number of manual sampled data TLOG data M1 option and report data M1 option residing in the internal memory are displayed For models that have the alarm output relays option the ON OFF status of the relays are also listed Number of data points in the internal memory maximum number of data points that can be acquired in the internal memory Date time when the newest data was acquired sa OE p 0050 Feb 19 23 23 20 TLOG DATA caaa4o0 REPORT DATA 0a40 SPE DATA DISPLAY DATA EVENT om j Start Time End Time Data Factor Data type switch usin mp Fob 19 23 23 44 Feb 19 23 24 10 14 Salina left and right arrow keys Feb 19 23 22 48 Feb 19 23 25 20 17 Power Dan Feb 19 23 19 48 Feb 19 23 22 30 G2 Stor e Display data Event data Date time when F
142. operation while writing to memory or even during measurement computation Remote Bias Only When SP Is Selected for PV SP Turn the setting ON to add a constant value bias value to SP and set the bias value within EUS 100 0 to 100 0 Settings can be changed during control operation while writing to memory or even during measurement computation Computation Error Set whether to apply the computed value to the upper limit value over or the lower limit value under if the computed results in an error Over Use the upper limit value of the PV range for the PV and SP value is displayed Control operation stops and preset output occurs Under Use the lower limit value of the PV range for the PV and SP value is displayed Control operation stops and preset output occurs Note Just after the power is turned ON PV SP computation may begin before measurement control channels are finalized In such cases the PV SP computed results are indefinite and control PID computation is not performed If the power outage recovery is set to continuous and an outage occurs or an instantaneous outage occurs 5 seconds or less the previous value is output If the power outage recovery is set to manual or automatic and a power outage occurs the preset value is output If errors occur on the control input channels used in the equation burnout AD converter abnormality reference junction compensat
143. parameter setting gt Event setting s nssnnsrneennrnnernnennrrnrrnnrnnrnnnrnnrnnnrnnnnnne nne 5 8 Program Pattern Settings gt Hysteresis PV Event esesseeseesseeeseireirseisrrssrrsrrssrssrrsns 5 10 Program parameter setting gt Repeat action Setting 0 ccccceceeeeeseeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeneeeees 5 11 Event Output Settings 2 0 0 eecccceeeeeeeeeeceeeceeee ene eeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeecieeseeeseeeesaeseeeesieeeeeeneees 5 12 AUX Auto message Display position ce eeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeenaeeeeenaeessneeeetsaeeesenaeeetnnenens 5 14 AUX Event Group Settings Style Number S3 or Later 00 0 eceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeaes 5 16 Operations during Control Operation 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 Operations on the Control Group Display Switching Displayed Information and Control Operation Modes c cisiatidens Ades atinndis tea a aa e EN NRE Ea a E EENAA 6 1 Switching Displays on the Overview Display ccccceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeneetiaeeneeeeaa 6 7 Tuning Operation secsi sites dete endl aes eetneeri ee 6 8 Operations on the Program Selection Display and Program Control Display Only on Models with the Program Control Option 0 ecccceeeeeeecteeenee eee eeeneeeeeeecieeseeeeeneeeeaeeeeeeena 6 12 Measurement Function Related Setup Operations 7 1 7 2 7 3 Settings Related to Measurement INputs sesssesseesseieeetrenestestnesttstrntinstnntnsinstnnnn nernet 7 1 Settings Related to Measur
144. per control loop For each alarm turn ON OFF the relay output and select the contact output number when using relay output from the list below DO001 to DO006 SW001 to SW018 Internal switch Style number S3 or later Note The contact output is output from the terminal indicated as DIGITAL OUT on the label on the back of the terminal cover For the relationship between the contact output numbers and the DIGITAL OUT terminals of each terminal block see page 2 6 Action Indicates whether the relay output is energized or de energized according to the Relay Action Behavior setting under Control gt 6 Relay see page 4 16 SP number Alarm value The control alarm outputs correspond to SP numbers 1 to 8 Select the SP number 1 to 8 and register alarm values for the four alarms of each SP number The selectable alarm values vary depending on the specified Type alarm type as follows PV high low limits SP high low limits EU of measurement span 0 0 to 100 Deviation high low limits EUS of measurement span 100 to 100 Deviation high low limits within deviation high and low limits EUS of measurement span 0 to 100 Output value alarm 5 0 to 105 0 Clearing Alarms AlarmACK If the AlarmACK operation is performed all alarm indications and relay outputs are cleared However this operation is invalid if the alarm indication output relay behavior is set to Nonhold Alarms can be cleared using remote
145. range TC The peak value including the signal must be less than 1 2 times the measuring thermal electromotive force RTD 50 mV or less Common mode noise 50 60 Hz 250 Vrms AC or less for all ranges Maximum noise voltage between channels 50 60 Hz 250 Vrms AC or less Mounting position Up to 30 of backward tilt angle allowed no tilt to the left or right Warm up time At least 30 minutes after power up Altitude 2000 m or less Transport and storage conditions Ambient temperature 25 to 60 C Humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation Vibration 10 to 60 Hz 4 9 m s Shock 392 m s or less packaged condition Safety and EMC Standards Safety CSA Certified by CSA22 2 No 61010 1 Installation category II Pollution degree 2 Measurement category II UL Certified by UL61010 1 CSA NRTLI C CE Complies with EN61010 1 1 Installation category Overvoltage category describes a number which defines a transient overvoltage condition It implies the regulation for impulse withstand voltage Il applies to electrical equipment which is supplied from the fixed installation like distribution board 2 Pollution degree describes the degree to which a solid liquid or gas which deteriorates dielectric strength or surface resistivity is adhering 2 applies to normal indoor atmosphere Normally only non conductive pollution occurs 8 Applies to measuring circuits connected to low voltage installation and elec
146. reason for the abort request 285 FTP data connection error Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 285 Character String and Details SOCKET Failed to create a socket for the transfer connection BIND Failed the transfer connection command CONNECT Failed the transfer connection LISTEN Failed the transfer connection reception ACCEPT Failed to accept the transfer connection SOCKNAME Internal processing error RECV Failed to receive data over the transfer connection SEND Failed to send data over the transfer connection 286 FTP file transfer error 1 See the CX1000 CX2000 Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L31A01 17E 2 Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer 3 These errors may occur if the network experiences trouble during the data transmission bad cable connection duplicate addresses network equipment failure 12 6 IM 04L31A01 03E 12 1 Messages Note The FTP client function on the CX1000 has a timer function that drops the connection if there is no data transfer for two minutes If the server does not respond within this time period the transfer fails If the FTP client function on the CX1000 detects a file with the same name at the destination the file is transferred with the last character 8 character of the file name changed For information regarding the FTP client function of the CX1000 s
147. reflash alarm is set 101 to 103 become dedicated reflash alarms regardless of the number of alarm output relays Therefore relays 101 to 103 operate as OR logic see AND OR of Alarm Output Relays and non hold see Hold Non hold Operation of Alarm Output Relays regardless of the settings made in AND OR of alarm output relays and Hold Non hold operation of the alarm output relay IM 04L31A01 03E 1 63 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 15 Measurement Function gt Measurement Alarm Related Settings AND OR of Alarm Output Relays When a single alarm relay is shared among multiple alarms you can select either condition below to activate the alarm output relay AND Activated when all assigned alarms are occurring simultaneously OR Activated when any of the specified alarms is occurring Set the alarm output relays for taking the AND logic in the following fashion I01 first relay to Ixx where xx is the relay number The value is initially set to None no AND relay Channel 1 _ k Alarm I chamei f gt LL AND is rc E Alarm output relay Nojo ee ee When the reflash alarm is turned ON 101 to 103 operates as reflash alarms They are fixed to OR logic operation Specifying AND produces no effect Energized De energized Operation of Alarm Output Relays You can select whether the alarm output relay is energized or de energized when an ala
148. soft key corresponding to the user to be logged in IM 04L31A01 03E 11 5 suolouny 13410 JO suoneado a 11 3 Key Operation Login Logout 3 If UserID Use Not is set to Use in the key login settings a User ID entry window appears Enter the User ID and press the DISP ENTER key User name userl Password ABCDEFGHIJ KLMNOPQARST Uvwuxyzg EE E A E E 4 5 6 E Sp Al Over 4 A password entry window appears Enter the Password and press the DISP ENTER key User name userl User ID i Aaa lt SERRE UVWXY2R A HA Re DB 23 456789 Sp ENT If the password is correct the user is logged in and the user name appears in the status indication section as shown below Note _ __ When starting stopping the acquisition of the display data event data to the internal memory the user name is written to the respective files The user name when writing messages is also written to the internal memory Logout Operation Manual Logout 1 Press the FUNC key The soft key menu is displayed 2 Press the Logout soft key The user name in the status indication section disappears Auto logout If the auto logout function is enabled users are automatically logged out when there is no key operation for 10 minutes in operation mode Note If the CX1000 is switched from basic setting mode to operation mode the CX1000 is ina logged out condition 11 6 IM 0
149. specify the waveform display zone of each channel The measurement channel zone cannot be selected on 0 measurement channel models An error message will appear if the zone or graph setting screen is selected Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt MENU key switch to Set mode gt 5 soft key select Display gt 3 soft key select Zone Graph 6 soft key select Control Zone Graph or 8 soft key select Math Zone Graph The following display if Zone Graph was selected appears If Aux Time Zone gt Partial is set to Use Zone Graph in the menu appears as Zone Graph Partial and the setting display shows the Partial entry box Feb 13 2009 20 23 16 BO MEMEO Lower Upper Division 10 Bar graph Normal Scale position 1 Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change The selections are displayed at the bottom section of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change NOID oe I The Zone Lower Upper is set using the pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the
150. t Date and time when the alarm occurred Date and time when the alarm was released The measured data can also be saved to external storage media such as floppy disks 2HD Zip disks 100 MB or 250 MB and ATA flash memory cards 4 to 440 MB External storage medium One of the following types CX1000 specified at the time of purchase Floppy disk g lt gt Zip disk ZB SS gt ATA flash Za memory card The data that has been saved to an external storage medium can be displayed on a PC using the DAQSTANDARD for CX software that comes with the package The data can also be loaded into the CX1000 to be displayed Communication Function By using the Ethernet interface that comes standard with the CX1000 the data can be transferred to a server on a network client function The data stored on the CX1000 s external storage medium can also be read from a PC on the network server function Si PE V Data on the external S storage medium Primary econdary The communication functions using the Ethernet or serial interface are not covered in this manual See the CX1000 CX2000 Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L31A01 17E IM 04L31A01 03E 1 57 suolouny jo uoneuejdxg 1 14 Measurement Function gt Measurement Input Related Settings Integration Time of the A D Converter Scan Interval The CX1000 uses an A D converter to convert the sampled analog signal to a dig
151. the register address the upper and lower limits of value range and the decimal point position can be changed for each tuning parameter in addition to the name BS1 FL1 BS2 FL2 and RFL cannot be selected when the PV SP computation is ON 4 18 IM 04L31A01 03E 4 8 Control input range This section explains the procedures for setting PV input related parameters for the control function such as range span scale bias and filter Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt 1 soft key select Control input range The following display appears The following figure is an example when Control mode is set to Cascade SpanLower 200 0 Pwi Upper 1370 0 Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item box 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note For setup item boxes that require values to be entered a pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key is used 4 Press the DISP ENTER key A confirmation window appears If you change any of the parameters besides Bias and Filter other parameters related to t
152. the Average Value Function Averages the measured values on channel 1 every 5 minutes and displays the result Scan Interval 1 second Channel 31 ar counter Expression 31 31 31 LT K02 K01 fite a 32 32 31 NE K01 01 g 33 32 31 Channel 33 34 33 31 EQ K02 34 31 NE K02 average value Kors Channel 34 K02 300 average every 5 min gt Time i 5 minutes Explanation Channel 31 is a counter that increments by 1 every scan interval It counts from 1 to 300 and then repeats Channel 32 integrates the measured values on channel 1 until channel 31 reaches 300 Channel 33 calculates the average value of channel 1 Channel 34 displays the value of channel 33 when channel 31 is 300 and holds that value until the next time channel 31 becomes 300 XX 4 App 52 IM 04L31A01 03E Index A ACCESS LAMP aisian iii irii asiaasi ea 3 2 accessories GPtignal sssniiarsaeai iis v acessories standard 0 ceeceeceseceeesessseeeeeceeseeseaeeeeeeeeseeees ACTION oaeee ADVANGE iste cnnnshecidiinauadnntnan nadine AdVANC 2acccecsceshcesc sts cestgaesacdeesanediensens cas tanesasaceeacesdenttsaasase alarm n alarm control alarm delay alarm hysteresis ANIM ICON TEET alarm indication alarm MOQ sninn aaa alarmi ON Off sesa i E alarm operating conditions 1 38 alarm output eee cece ceee ee eetee ee eeeee este eee eeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeete 1 5 alarm relay OUtDUL sissies tirrin cived
153. the DISP ENTER key to show the display selection menu OVERVIEW is highlighted 2 Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu 3 Select CURSOR OFF using the up and down arrow keys 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the change Switching to Trend Display or Bar Graph Display 1 Select the desired channel using the arrow keys 2 Press the DISP ENTER key to show the display selection menu OVERVIEW is highlighted 3 Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu 4 Select JUMP TO TREND or JUMP TO BAR using the up and down arrow keys FF OVERVIEW CURSOR OFF INFOR JUMP TO TREND e HaTION JUMP TO BAR 5 Press the DISP ENTER key to switch to the trend or bar graph display 8 8 IM 04L31A01 03E 8 6 Measurement Function gt Operations When Displaying the Historical Trend This section explains the operations that you can perform when displaying the historical trend For a description on the displayed contents when the historical trend is displayed and other operations not described below see pages 1 87 to 1 82 Zooming in or out on the Time Axis 1 Press the DISP ENTER key to show the display selection menu TREND HISTORY is highlighted 2 Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu 3 Select ZOOM or ZOOM using the up and down arrow keys 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to zoom in or zoom out on the time axis Changing the Displayed Group on the Historical Trend Displ
154. the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box IM 04L31A01 03E 8 23 s U9 U09 p erds q y BuiBueysy 104 suoijes0doO fe 8 14 Measurement Function gt Setting the Display Direction Background Color Waveform Line Width Trip Line Width Grid and Scroll Time Setting the Display Direction Background Color Waveform Line Width Trip Line Width Grid and Scroll Time Direction Trend Select the display direction of the trends from Horizontal Vertical initial value and Horizon2 If Horizon2 is selected the trends and scale are arranged vertically and the numerical display section arranged horizontally rab 19 2002 23 10 02 GOP EEMO Direction Bar graph Select the display direction of bar graphs from Horizontal or Vertical Background Measure Select the background color for measurement displays such as the trend display digital display bar graph display and information display from White initial value and Black Control Select the background color for control displays such as control group display tuning displ
155. the external storage medium a message confirming file overwrite appears To overwrite the file select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key Loading Setup Data 1 Select the file to be loaded from the file list of the external storage medium using the up and down arrow keys 2 Press the DISP ENTER key The setup data is loaded When the data is loaded the settings are changed and the CX1000 returns to the operation display Saving Setup Data All the setup data of both modes setting mode and basic setting mode are stored Set the file name using up to 8 characters The following character strings cannot be used AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK and strings containing spaces A pcl extension is automatically added to the file name of the setup data The size of a setup data file is approximately 170 KB approximately 25 KB if no program control settings are present at maximum Loading Setup Data Loading the setup data in basic setting mode loads all of the setup data of Set mode and basic setting mode Loading the data in Set mode loads only the setup data of Set mode If the contents of the loaded setup data are invalid refer to the error message log that appears by pressing the FUNC key and soft keys For the procedure of displaying the error message log see section 11 4 Displaying Logs Checking Operations and System Information Display Checking the System Specifications A pcl extension is automatically added to the
156. the value of channel 31 is 0 Channel 32 integrates the measured value of channel 31 1 ee 01 GE K01 0 1 ee iY 01 LE K02 0 Measured value of channel 31 0 15 Measured value of channel 1 L J S Setting a Margin around the Value Measured upon Occurrence and Release of Alarms Alarm Hysteresis Function An alarm occurs when the value of channel 1 is 55 or higher Once the alarm occurs it is not released until the value of channel 1 falls below 50 Expression 31 310R01 GE K01 AND01 GE K02 K01 55 K02 50 Set an upper limit alarm on channel 31 with an alarm value of 1 Explanation When the value of channel 1 gradually increases to 50 or higher 01 GE K02 becomes 1 When the value of channel 1 increases further to 55 or higher 01 GE K01 becomes 1 The value of channel 31 becomes 1 and an upper limit alarm occurs on channel 31 When the value of channel 31 is 1 it remains at that value even if the value of channel 1 falls in the range from 50 to 55 If the value of channel 1 decreases further to below 50 the value of channel 31 becomes 0 The upper limit alarm on channel 31 is released 1 ee eee en eee 01 GE K02 0 1 LELLE E EIA AE emai E E Sao oe 01 LE K01 0 Alarm o currence iin telease 1 PAEPAE EPE SAAE Measured value of channel 31 0 50 55 7 Measured value of channel 1 J IM 04L31A01 03E App 51 xipueddy Appendix 10 Expression Examples a Displaying
157. to hold Time adj Trigger Adjusts the internal clock to the nearest hour Math Edge Starts stops computation only on models with the computation function M1 Math reset Trigger Resets computed data of measurement channels Resets the computed value to 0 Only when computation is stopped on models with the computation function option Manual sample Trigger Acquires instantaneous values of all channels to the internal memory Load setup data 1to3 Trigger Loads the setup data file saved to the external storage medium Messages 1 to 8 Trigger Displays message 1 to 8 on the trend display and stores the message to the internal memory Snapshot Trigger Saves the screen image data to the external storage medium Note The actions above can also be registered to the contact inputs of the control output terminal block Ifthe same action is performed using keys of the CX1000 communications and contact input the newest operation input is valid regardless of the method This is also true between control contact inputs and measurement remote inputs Method of Detecting the Remote Input Signal The above actions are carried out on the rising or falling edge of the remote input signal edge or the ON signal lasting at least 250 ms trigger For contact inputs the remote signal rises when the contact switches from open to closed and falls when the contact switches from closed to open For open collector signals
158. to 2 s Displayed Information The following items can be displayed Function Description Display direction The bar graph can be displayed vertically or horizontally Reference position When the bar graph is displayed horizontally the starting point of the bar reference position can be set to standard Left or right end of the scale whichever the value is smaller or the center Display color The displayed color of bar graphs can be specified for each channel The display color is common to the trend display color Scale display Main scale marks are displayed for each channel You can select the number of divisions created by the main scale marks from 4 to 12 This is common with the number of scale divisions of the trend display 1 78 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 16 Display Function Control Operation Display gt Overview Display A list of measured computed values and alarm conditions of all measurement computation channels is displayed You can move the cursor to select a channel and display the trend or bar graph of the group containing the selected channel For the procedure in displaying the overview display see section 8 5 The type of alarm that is occurring Channel selection cursor Measured or Area of channels on which an alarm computed value is not occurring is indicated in green ee td 154 0 mw Area of channels on which an alarm is occurring is indicated in red Channel No or
159. to change the SP number Press the Group No soft key to change the PID number A pop up window for changing the SP number or a pop up window for changing the PID number appears 2 Change the SP number or the PID number using the up and down arrow keys 3 Press the DISP ENTER key To close the window without making any changes press the ESC key Switching Run Stop and Auto Manual and Changing the Control Output These operations are the same as the operations on the control group display AuSee section 6 1 Operations on the Control Group Display Switching Displayed Information and Control Operation Modes Reverting to the Control Group Display or Control Overview Display If the tuning display was displayed from the control group display the soft key menu shows CTRL GRP If it was displayed from the control overview display the soft key menu shows OVERVIEW To return to those displays press the appropriate soft key IM 04L31A01 03E uonesedo 01 U05 Bulunp suonesodo fo 6 3 Tuning Operation Manual Tuning Set the parameters to be tuned using Control gt Turning setting For the procedure see section 4 5 Control gt Tuning setting The initial settings of the tuning parameters are shown below The numbers indicate the order of items on the tuning display starting from the upper left corner The characters indicate the item names tuning parameter name In addition to the tuning parameters below DR con
160. to provide the service Check that the server is in a condition in which service can be provided IM 04L31A01 03E 12 5 BunooyseqnoiL R 12 1 Messages Code Message 283 FTP command was not accepted Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 283 Character String and Details USER Failed user name verification Check the user name setting PASS Failed password verification Check the password setting ACCT Failed account verification Check the account setting TYPE Failed to change the transfer type Check that the server supports the binary transfer mode CWD Failed to change the directory Check the initial path setting PORT Failed to set the transfer connection Check that the security function is disabled PASV Failed to set the transfer connection Check that the server supports PASV commands SCAN Failed to read the transfer connection settings Check that proper response to the PASV command is received from the server 284 FTP transfer setting error Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 284 Character String and Details MODE Internal processing error LOCAL Internal processing error REMOTE The destination file name is not correct Check that you have the authority to create or overwrite files ABORT File transfer abort was requested by the server Check the server for the
161. using the trigger or rotate mode when the acquisition start trigger is set to external trigger and when the CX1000 is in the trigger wait state For all other cases applying the remote signal produces no effect AlarmACK Remote input signal Trigger 250 ms or more Releases the alarm indication and relay output option This is the same function as when the AlarmACK soft key is pressed TimeAdjust Remote input signal Trigger 250 ms or more Adjusts the internal clock of the CX1000 to the nearest hour depending on the time when the remote signal is applied Time When Signal Is Input Modified Time 00 min 00s to 01 min 59s Truncates the minutes and seconds Example 10 hours 01 min 50 s becomes 10 hours 00 min 00 s 02 min 00 s to 57 min 59s The time is not changed 58 min 00 s to 59 min 59s Rounds up the minutes and seconds Example 10 hours 59 min 50 s becomes 11 hours 00 min 00 s MathStart Stop Remote input signal Rising edge signifies start falling edge signifies stop Starts stops the computation This is valid only on models with the computation function option If the computation is started applying a rising signal produces no effect If the computation is stopped applying a falling signal produces no effect MathReset Remote input signal Trigger 250 ms or more Resets the data on all computation channels This is valid only on models with the computation function option
162. when the difference in the measured values of two channels exceeds the difference upper limit alarm value Difference lower limit alarm can be set on difference computation channels only An alarm occurs when the difference in the measured values of two channels falls below the difference upper limit alarm value Upper limit on rate of change alarm can be set on measurement channels only The rate of change of the measured values is checked over a certain time interval An alarm occurs if the rate of change of the measured value in the rising direction exceeds the specified value Lower limit on rate of change alarm can be set on measurement channels only The rate of change of the measured values is checked over a certain time interval An alarm occurs if the rate of change of the measured value in the falling direction exceeds the specified value Upper limit on rate of change alarm Lower limit on rate of change alarm Change in f Pus the measured Measured T value Measured value 2 value Amount of change Amount of change T in the setting T2 T4 T in the setting T2 T1 2 i y N change in the measured value t1 t2 Time t t2 Time Interval Interval to ty t2 t1 The alarm value of the rate of change alarm is set using an absolute value The interval is derived using the following equation and set using the number of sampled data Interval Scan i
163. window that appears by pressing the Input soft key is used 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box IM 04L31A01 03E 4 25 suoljeiadoQ dnjas payejay uoun 017U09 a 4 10 Operation related parameters Zone PID Setting Operation Related Parameters Loop number The setup items of Operation related parameters are set for each loop When changing these parameters this setting is used to select the target loop number 1 or 2 initial value is 1 Suppressing function Select whether to use the overshoot suppressing function Overshoot or Off This function operates only during PID control However the function does not operate if the integral time or derivative time or both are set to Off Ramp rate time unit Set the unit of time when setting a ramp grade per unit time to Hour Minute or Second SP ramp down rate SP ramp up rate Set this item to On initial setting is Off to decrease or increase the setpoint at a constant rate of change as opposed to a rapid change when the SP is changed When set to On set the value that is to change per ramp rate time unit in the range of 1 digit to EUS of measurement span 100 Tag Tag comment Set the tag name or tag comment of each control loop using up to 8 alphanumeric characters Setting Parameters Related to Zone PID The
164. zone PID see section 4 10 Operation related parameters Zone PID Restart mode Fixed point Select the action of the fixed point control loop after recovering from an extended power failure from Continue Manual Auto initial value is Continue Continue Continue the operation before the power failure occurred Manual Start from a manual operation condition control output is set to preset output Auto Start from an auto operation condition start the control output from preset output and resume control computation based on the preset output Program lt Only on models with the program control option Select the restart mode recovery behavior the CX1000 will enter when recovering from a power failure when program operation is performed Select Continue Manual or Reset initial value is Continue Continue Continue the operation before the power failure occurred Manual Start from a manual operation condition control output is set to preset output Reset Start program operation from a reset condition control output is set to preset output Initial PID Select Temp or Press Flow initial value is Temp for the initial value of the PID constant see page 4 28 Below are the initial values of PID constants The PID constant is also initialized to the following value when Initial PID is changed Initial values for temperature P 5 0 240 s and D 60 s Initial values for pressure flow P 120 0 20s
165. 0 Reset off Action Off i 2 3 Selecting the Timer and Sum Scale Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Setting mode control gt MENU key switch to Set mode gt 11 soft key select Math set3 Tag TLOG Rolling average Alarm delay time The following display appears eb 1 eb 19 2002 _21 09 3 First CH 31 Last CH 31 1 e e TLOG Timer No Sum scale s Rolling average Off Alarm delay time 18 s Operations on the Display Setting the timer 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the entry boxes under Timer TLOG 2 Press the soft key to set the values 3 Press the DISP ENTER key Selecting the Timer and Sum Scale 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the First CH and Last CH boxes Press the soft key corresponding to the start and end channel numbers for setting the TLOG computation Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Timer No or Sum scale box under TLOG Select the value using the soft key Press the DISP ENTER key N ie oa A 10 8 IM 04L31A01 03E 10 4 Setting TLOG Computations Saving the Settings in Basic Setting Mode 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed Setting Timer for TLOG Computation Mode Select either Relati
166. 0 Overview The CX1000 consists of a control function and a measurement function The control function executes control through PID control and ON OFF control The measurement function displays and acquires measured data and control output data Control Function The CX1000 supports thee control modes single loop control cascade control loop control with PV switching and analog retransmission It can handle up to two loops of PID control In addition the UT Series controllers made by Yokogawa M amp C Corporation can be connected and controlled simultaneously as external loops four loops max You can check the control status on the controller style and faceplate style displays and the hybrid style display that is a mixture of the two styles Furthermore the overview display allows monitoring of all control loops including external loops In addition the CX1000 provides auto tuning of PID constants as well as manual tuning which enables you to adjust the control parameters such as PID constants while checking the control status Measurement Function In addition to the measured data for the control function the CX1000 can acquire up to six channels of measured data The data can be displayed as waveforms numeric values and bar graphs The measured data along with the control data can be stored to a floppy disk Zip disk or ATA flash memory card using the built in drive Conceptual Input Output Diagram PC Univers
167. 00 2 00 3 00 MIN 0 00 1 00 2 00 3 00 SUM 0 000000E 01 1 000000E 04 2 000000E 04 3 000000E 04 App 22 IM 04L31A01 03E Appendix 5 Data Format of ASCII Files Note If the status of the data of measurement computation channels is as shown in the following table status E and O are output in the report Data Condition Status Common to measurement and computation channels Measurement error or computation error E For measurement channels Positive overrange O Negative overrange O For computation channels Positive computation overflow when the value exceeds 3 4E 38 O Negative computation overflow when the value falls below 3 4E 38 O The data of computation measurement channels that resulted in measurement computation errors when determining MAX or MIN are not applicable The data of computation measurement channels that resulted in measurement computation errors overrange or computation overflow when determining AVE or SUM are not applicable The report output values of AVE MAX MIN and SUM are as shown in the following table depending on the data condition of the measurement computation channels Item Data Condition of Measurement Channels Report Output Value AVE When all of the data is measurement errors or Blank Average value over range MAX MIN When all of the data are measurement errors Blank Maximum minimum Positive
168. 00 communications and contact input the newest operation input is valid regardless of the method This is also true between contact inputs and measurement remote inputs If a program start trigger activates through contact input during program hold hold mode is cleared Contact Output FAIL Output Self Diagnosis Output and Event Output Output Terminal Selection There are six contact outputs and numbers DO001 to DOOO6 are used to select them Setting the Relay Action Hold Set whether to energize or de energize the output relay when outputting failure detection found by FAIL or self diagnosis and events In addition set whether the relay output is turned OFF when the condition is appropriate for releasing the output or hold the relay output until an alarm ACK operation is carried out In the settings select the behavior from deenergize hold deenergize nonhold m6 energize hold and energize non hold In the case of a transistor open collector output the signal is switched from Off to On during output for an energize setting and from On to Off during output for a de energize setting These relay actions are the same as the alarm output relay actions of the measurement function For details on energize de energize and hold nonhold see Energized De energized Operation of Alarm Output Relays and Hold Non hold Operation of Alarm Output Relays on page 1 63 FAIL Output This is the setting for
169. 03 K01 Span Lower Span Upper Unit Type Value Rly No Detec 6 00 on r fon 31 32 EE 34 Next 1 3 Setting the alarm delay Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Setting mode control gt MENU key switch to Set mode gt 11 soft key select Math set3 Tag TLOG Rolling average Alarm delay time The following display appears GROUP 1 DIF o Feb 19 2002 21 07 47 AA EENT Sa UX TLOG Timer No 1 Sum scale Off Rolling average Off Alarm delay time 10 IM 04L31A01 03E 10 5 uodo uoHoUNY uoneyndwos y YM sj pon UO AjUC suoneiodo palay uolnsuny wodey pue uonejndwog 10 3 Setting Computation Channel Alarms Setup Procedure Setting the alarm 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the First CH and Last CH boxes 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the start and end channel numbers for setting the alarm 3 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the Math alarm 1 to 4 boxes 4 Press the On soft key corresponding to the alarm you wish to select Type Value and Relay On Off entry boxes appear 5 Use the arrow keys to move the each of the entry boxes and select the alarm type alarm value and relay output On Off using the soft keys If Relay On Off is set to On the Number box appears 6 If Relay On Off is set to On select the relay output number from 101 to 106 D0001 to D0006 and SW001
170. 04 suonesado E 8 4 Measurement Function gt Operations When Displaying Trend Digital and Bar Graph Displays This section explains the operations that you can perform when displaying the trend digital or bar graph display Procedure Switching Trend Digital and Bar Graph Displays Using the Display Menu 1 Press the DISP ENTER key to show the display selection menu 2 Select Trend Digital Bar using the up and down arrow keys Using Arrow Keys Press the down arrow key to switch the display in the following order trend digital bar graph trend and so on Press the up arrow key to switch the display in reverse order Changing the Displayed Group Using the Display Menu 1 Press the DISP ENTER key to show the display selection menu 2 Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu 3 Select the desired group using the up and down arrow keys fw TREND p GROUP 1 GROUP 3 GROUP 6 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to show the specified group Using Arrow Keys Press the right arrow key to rotate the groups among group 1 to group 4 Press the left arrow key to switch the displayed group in reverse order Automatic Switching 1 Press the DISP ENTER key to show the display selection menu 2 Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu 3 Select AUTO SCROLL ON using the up and down arrow keys ull Bar FE over ig INFOR p MATION fue TREND DIGITAL OFF HISTORY AUTO SCROLL ON 4 Pre
171. 0s 3 Trend Save interval Message File User key DST Parameter Initial Value Trend Save interval gt Time div 1min Trend Save interval gt Auto save interval 1h USER key gt Action AlarmACK 4 Message Parameter Initial Value Message gt Characters No 1 to No 8 Space IM 04L31A01 03E App 35 xipueddy Appendix 6 Initial Values 5 Display CONTROL GROUP Feb 19 Display 1 Group set Trip line 2 Color 3 Zone Graph 4 View Direction L D 5 Control Color 6 Control Zone Graph 7 Hath lt Color gt 8 Hath Zone Graph 1 2 3 4 lt 1 Group set Trip line gt Parameter Initial Value Group number 1 Group set gt Group name GROUP1 Group set gt CH set 01 06 Group set gt Trip line gt No 1 to No 4 Off lt 2 Color gt Parameter Initial Value Color gt CH1 Red Color gt CH2 Green Color gt CH3 Blue Color gt CH4 Blue violet Color gt CH5 Brown Color gt CH6 Orange lt 3 Zone Graph gt Parameter Initial Value First CH 01 Last CH 01 Zone gt Lower 0 Zone gt Upper 100 Graph gt Division 10 Graph gt Bar graph Normal Graph gt Scale position 1 lt 4 View Direction _LCD gt Parameter Initial Value View gt Direction gt Trend Vertical View gt Direction gt Bar graph Vertical View gt Background gt Measure White View gt Background gt Control Black View gt Trend line 2 dot View
172. 1 the previous value for channel 101 PV of loop 1 can be used On the other hand a previous value cannot exist in cases such as immediately after the power is turned ON If no previous value exists the above computation result is treated as invalid data and this invalid status continues in an infinite loop When computing using a value from the previous iteration of the computation be sure to use conditions and internal switches that do not result in infinite loops When computing using a value from the previous iteration of the computation for analog retransmission if a previous value does not exist set the computed result to revert to the range lower limit value App 16 IM 04L31A01 03E Appendix 4 Additional Explanation of the Report Function This section is a supplement to the information covered in Report Function in section 1 18 Computation and Report Functions Option For a description on the data format see the next section appendix 5 Data Formats of ASCII Files Types of Reports and Their Details Types of Reports Hourly Report Every hour on the hour the average maximum minimum and sum values of the specified channels are determined from an hour of data up to the current hour and written to the internal memory Daily Report At the specified time every day the average maximum minimum and sum values of the specified channels are determined from a day of data up to the specified time and
173. 1 03E 1 3 Basic Settings of Control Zone PID method In the zone PID method the measurement span is divided into a maximum of seven zones using reference points The optimum PID constant is preassigned to each zone and the PID constant in actuality other control parameters that are registered using the PID number are included is automatically switched according to the PV The number of reference points that can be specified is PID group number 2 As shown in the figure below if the PID group number is 7 the number of reference points is 5 Ifthe number of reference points is 5 there are 6 zones For example if zones 1 through 6 correspond to PID numbers 1 through 6 and if the PV is within the zones of reference points 3 and 4 the control parameters of PID number 4 are selected The control parameters of PID number 7 which cannot be assigned to a zone are selected when the deviation between the SP and PV becomes greater than the preset reference deviation Maximum value of measurement span Reference point 5 No 6 PID No 5 PID Reference point 4 No 4 PID Reference point 3 No 3 PID Reference point 2 No 2 PID Reference point 1 No 1 PID Minimum value of measurement span Restart and Restart for Program Control Initial PID Control Mode Select how the CX1000 is to behave when an extended power failure occurs during control operation power failure period of 5 s or more and the power recovers
174. 1000 or an external reference junction compensation function When using an external reference junction compensation set an appropriate reference junction compensation voltage For example if the reference junction temperature of the external reference compensation is To C set the reference compensation junction voltage to the thermoelectromotive force of the 0 C reference of To C 1 24 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 5 Contact Input Output Related Settings Contact Input Output Terminal The contact signal is input or output from the control output terminal block indicated in the following figure Control output terminal block As shown in the following figure contact input terminals DIGITAL IN and contact output terminals DIGITAL OUT are arranged on the control output terminal block There are two types of contact outputs relay output and transistor output For the connection procedure of the signal wires see section 2 3 Wiring Relay contact output Transistor output Contact input DIGITAL OUT DIGITAL OUT DIGITAL IN LOOP2 LOOP1 2 1 LOOP2 LOOP NO NO NO LNO mA mA 5 3 4 1 NC LNC C C PULS PULS 6 4 5 2 C C C C C C 6 3 CTRL OUT CTRL OUT
175. 11 4 Displaying Logs Checking Operations and System Information Display Checking the System Specifications Procedure Explanation Open the log display when checking the following operation information Error message login logout log communication command log FTP file transfer log E mail transmission log and Web browser operation log To check the specifications of the CX1000 number of inputs internal memory size options MAC address and firmware version number open the system information display This section explains how to display the above information Opening the Log Display and System Information Display 1 In operation mode press the FUNC key 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key A soft key menu including the Log soft key appears E Mail likes test BE ext 3 3 3 Press the Log soft key The following soft key menu is displayed Login and Web soft keys appear only when those functions are being used Error Commu P Se ESS Web 2ilaen ESE Error message FTP file System Web browser log transfer log information operation log Communication Login logout log E mail transmission command log log 4 Press the soft key corresponding to the display you wish to show Error Message Log 002 002 Time No Message Jan 31 2881 07 23 33 218 Media has not been inser Jan 31 2081 07 23 23 661 Measured data have been t t Error code Error message Date time when the error
176. 2 remote input status of measurement alarm option terminal block DO1 DO8 contact input output status of control output terminal block DI001 DI006 DO001 DO006 control measured data CI01 Cl05 constants control computation W01 W12 and status of internal switches SW01 SW18 See page App 8 for the data that can be used with control computation and measurement computation Equation Examples Addition 01 02 Determines the sum of the measured values of channel 1 and channel 2 Subtraction 01 02 Determines the difference of the measured values of channel 1 and channel 2 e Multiplication 01 KO3 Multiplies constant KO3 to the measured value of channel 1 e Division 01 KO2 Divides the measured value of channel 1 by constant K02 Note By setting an equation similar to the one shown below you can determine the accumulation of a specified channel in this case channel 01 and make the result the computed value of computation channel 31 The computing equation of computation channel 31 31 01 Power and Other Computations The data that can be used in equations is as follows measurement data 01 06 computation data 31 42 control data 101 106 201 212 constants KO1 K12 communication input data CO1 C 12 remote input status of measurement alarm option terminal block DO1 DO8 contact input output status of control output terminal block DI001 DI006 DO001 DO006 control measured data Cl01 Cl05 constants control computati
177. 2 e1 only for NOT are zeroes or non zeroes and computes according to the conditions The data that can be used in equations is as follows measurement data 01 06 computation data 31 42 control data 101 106 201 212 constants KO1 K12 communication input data C01 C12 remote input status of measurement alarm option terminal block DO1 DO8 contact input output status of control output terminal block DI001 DI006 DO001 DO006 control measured data CI01 Cl05 constants control computation W01 W12 and status of internal switches SW01 SW18 See page App 8 for the data that can be used with control computation and measurement computation You can specify a equation that performs logical computation on a computing element AND Logical Product Syntax Condition Explanation OR Logical Sum Syntax Condition Explanation e1ANDe2 If the two data values e1 and e2 are both non zeroes the computed result is 1 Otherwise it is 0 e1 0 e2 0 e1 0 e2 0 e1 0 e2 0 e1 0 e2 0 e10Re2 gt e1ANDe2 0 gt e1ANDe2 0 gt e1ANDe2 0 gt e1ANDe2 1 If the two data values e1 and e2 are both zeroes the computed result is 0 Otherwise it is 1 e1 0 e2 0 e1 0 e2 0 e1 0 e2 0 e1 0 e2 z0 gt e10Re2 0 gt e10Re2 1 gt e10Re2 1 gt e10Re2 1 xipueddy IM 04L31A01 03E App 13 Appendix 3 Meaning and Syntax of Equations XOR
178. 2 loops TC e RTD etc Control output e Relay Voltage pulse Object of e Current Controls control and i e SSR Magnet switch etc The UT Series controllers made by Yokogawa M amp C Corporation can be connected via the serial interface and controlled simultaneously as external loops four loops max see the CX1000 CX2000 Communication Interface User s Manual Analog Input for Loop Control PV input and remote setpoint input RSP are available as control signal inputs You can select thermocouple resistance temperature detector standard signal or DC voltage for both PV input and RSP input The RSP input is used as a terget setpoint SP There are five input terminals on the control measurement input terminal block When PV SP computation is OFF each input terminal is assigned depending on the number of loops used and the control mode see next page as shown in the figure below Control mode setting LOOP Logri Measurement input terminals During single loop control gt RSP Pv RSP PV E a oO Oo E E During cascade control gt PV RSP PV E E E a E E During loop control with gt pv2 pvi RSP Pv2 Pvi a a a a E E PV switching PV PV1 PV2 PV input RSP RSP input not used during program control 1 unused terminal When PV SP is ON the numbers Cl01 Cl02 C103 C104 and CIO5 are assigned
179. 2002 02 28 22 57 TEST 2 PCL 2002 02 28 22 58 Loading Setup Data When loading the data in Set mode loading only the setup data of Set mode Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt MENU key switch to Set mode 7 soft key select Save Load Clear data gt 2 soft key select Load settings Display Operation in basic setting mode Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 7 soft key select Load Initialize gt 1 soft key select Load settings The following display appears The following figure shows the display that is shown in Set mode In basic setting mode only the display title is different Mat oo90 20 51 15 mec ea ORES o Load settings File name Time ABC PCL 2002 02 19 20 49 CDE PCL 2002 02 19 20 58 Note If you attempt to load the setup data and the external storage medium does not contain the setup data a message There is no setting file appears 9 8 IM 04L31A01 03E 9 3 Saving and Loading Setup Data Operations on the Display Saving Setup Data 1 Enter the file name in the File name box up to eight characters 2 Press the DISP ENTER key The setup data is saved to the external storage medium The saved file is displayed in the file list section on the right side If the file with the same name exists on
180. 21 Stopping the Report Function 1 Press the STOP key The following dialog box appears for confirmation h What do you want to stop HentHath 2 Select Mem Math or Memory using the left and right arrow keys 3 Press the DISP ENTER key When data acquisition to the internal memory computation report function stops the memory operation indicator icon changes from run indication to stop indication Note If you clear the data in the internal memory see section 9 7 report data is cleared along with other data display data Report data is stored to the external storage medium at the same time as when the data is written to the internal memory For the procedure in setting the storage method see section 9 1 If you stop the report function the report file on the external storage medium is closed If you start the report function again the data is saved to a new file 10 14 IM 04L31A01 03E Chapter 11 Operations of Other Functions 11 1 USER Key Assignment and Operation This section explains how to assign an action to the USER key and how to use the USER key after the action has been assigned Procedure Opening the Action Assignment Setting Display for the User Key Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Setting mode Control gt MENU key switch to Set mode gt 3 soft key select Trend Save interval User key The following display appears GROUP 1 lt
181. 3 TETE PV range lower upper limit 4 21 PV switching lower upper limit we 4 21 PW AGACKING 2 2502552500202 TAE eee cassteseesass acess 1 24 PV SP COMPUtATION iseina 1 95 4 41 PV SP computation function 0 cc eeeteeeteetteeeteeetees 4 12 R N EV D cs ese IAEE EEEE SE E EEA eee 4 28 nonhold sesssiesesiissssiesisesisiiserisiinriisiniriatinarissinnisrinrrenna 1 65 AMP onssssssssissssssiessresinsnnsrininnnrinrnnrintnnnninnennninnnnternnenntnnnnnnee nenn 5 7 NUMDED oo eeesecesceecscecececceceevececcssseeecaceeeeees 4 30 7 9 10 7 11 7 ramp rate tiMe UNIt ccececeeeeeeesseesesceesetseeneeeeeees 4 26 5 7 FAMP SOAK select eee ceeeseeseeecteeseee cee eeseteeseesscseesetseecneneee 5 6 FANG e EE EEEE ET 1 21 1 59 4 20 7 3 IM 04L31A01 03E Index 3 53 Q o x Index rate of Change alarm ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseaeeeeee 7 10 ratio SOtING nesses eid eee en A edad 4 22 TEAM PANS seesi annei aO eana E R 3 3 reference deviation sssssesssssrrersssrsercrnrrenssnernnre 1 32 4 26 reference point 1 17 1 31 4 26 reference TIME sosisini aii r flaskial rm insanin a aa relay snes ecstatic relay action behavior relay contact output re relay hold csc Sete wee te eee ee ees relay NYStSKeSIS sc cicascdsieseesedsedesevedecsecteessedendeutdeeseccedesedses relay hysteresis value and activation point 0 0 08 4 28 relay
182. 3 Setting Computation Channel Alarms Number Set the output relay number when performing relay output The selectable output relay numbers are as follows When outputting the signal from the ALARM terminal of the measurement alarm output terminal block 101 to 106 Displayed even when none of the A6 A6R A4F and A4FR options of the measurement alarm output terminal block is specified When outputting the signal from the DIGITAL OUT terminals 1 to 6 of the control output terminal block DO001 to DO006 When outputting to the internal switches SW001 SW18 select from SW001 SW018 style number S3 or later Note The terminals that can be set to alarm outputs are referred to as relay outputs in the settings Actually two types of terminals can be set to alarm outputs relay output terminal and transistor output Only ALARM terminals 1 to 6 of the measurement alarm output terminal block and DIGITAL OUT terminals 1 and 2 of the control output terminal block are relay outputs In addition to alarm outputs of measurement computation channels the following outputs can also be assigned simultaneously to the DIGITAL OUT terminals of the control output terminal block and DIGITAL OUT terminals of the control DIO expansion terminal block Control alarm FAIL only the DIGITAL OUT terminal 1 of the control output terminal block Self diagnosis only the DIGITAL OUT terminal 1 of the control output terminal
183. 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Saving the Settings in Basic Setting Mode 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed IM 04L31A01 03E 11 11 suolouny 13410 JO suoneado a 11 5 Setting the Measurement Remote Input A6R option or A4FR option Measurement Remote Action Select the action to be assigned from the following Select None if you are not assigning any action MemoryStart Stop Remote input signal Rising edge signifies start falling edge signifies stop Start Starts the acquisition of the display data event data to the internal memory and the report function computation function option Stop Stops the acquisition of the display data event data to the internal memory and the report function computation function option Ifthe data acquisition is started applying a rising signal produces no effect If the data acquisition is stopped applying a falling signal produces no effect Trigger Remote input signal Trigger 250 ms or more This input is used as an external trigger for starting the acquisition of the event data to the internal memory This is valid only when acquiring the event data to the internal memory
184. 4 3 Control gt DI DO SW registration PVSwitching 1 and 2 lt Selectable only during loop control with PV switching Select to register a contact input for switching the input for each internal loop during loop control with PV switching The rising edge signifies PV2 the falling edge signifies PV1 Note PVSwitching1 or PVSwitching2 does not appear as a selection if the Control mode box under Control gt 1 Control action Input setting is not set to PVSwitching MemoryStart Stop Starts stops the acquisition of the display data event data to the internal memory and the report function computation option function The rising edge of the signal indicates start the falling edge indicates stop If data acquisition is started applying a rising signal produces no effect Likewise if data acquisition is stopped applying a falling signal produces no effect Trigger Acts as an external trigger used to start the acquisition of event data to the internal memory when in trigger mode or rotate mode Input a signal for at least 250 ms AlarmACK Clears the alarm indication and relay output This is the same function as when the AlarmACK soft key is pressed Input a signal for at least 250 ms TimeAdjust Adjusts the internal clock of the CX1000 to the nearest hour depending on the time when the remote signal is applied Input a signal for at least 250 ms Time the signal is input Time modification 00 min 00 s t
185. 4L31A01 03E 11 3 Key Operation Login Logout Setting Key Login Use Not To enable the key login function select Use Auto logout On Automatically logs the user out if there is no key operation for ten minutes Off The user stays logged on until the user manually logs out UserID Use Not Set whether to use the User ID when logging in Use Not If Use is selected the User ID entry box appears Number Select the user registration number from 1 to 7 Off On Select whether to enable On or disable Off the key login function of the user corresponding to the registration number User name Enter the user name using up to 16 alphanumeric characters You cannot specify quit as a user name In addition the user name cannot be set to all spaces If the user name already exists a message This username is already registered appears In this case change the user name to a unique name User ID only when UserID Use Not is set to Use Enter the user ID using up to 4 alphanumeric characters Password Set the password using up to 6 characters Enter setup Select whether to allow the user that has logged in to enter basic setting mode Enable Disable Note You cannot set all users to Disable If you attempt to do so the user with the smallest registration number is automatically changed to Enable at the time the setup data is saved IM 04L31A01 03E suoloun 13410 JO suoneado a
186. 50 23 or meme 5 Header is Directory name DATAA Save data All Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change suoleiedg peo anes ed pe IM 04L31A01 03E 9 1 9 1 Acquiring Measurement Data to the Internal Memory and Saving Data to the External Storage Medium Note Header and Directory name are set using the pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Saving the Settings in Basic Setting Mode 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed Starting the Acquisition to the Internal Memory Press the START key When data acquisition to the internal memory starts the memory operation indicator icon changes from stop indication to run indication as shown below al GROUP 1 lt 0 Feb 19 2002 20 47 425 gt ta GROUP 1 em zh 171
187. 52 38 Key DOWN Jan 31 06 51 21 Screen TREND GROUP 2 Jan 31 06 50 28 Message 155 Listart onstation information Error code See chapter 12 Operation type Date time when the operation was carried out on the Web screen E mail Transmission Log 004 004 Time Type No Recipient Error Jan 31 06 16 49 Alarm 264 1 Some recipients a Jan 31 06 16 19 Alarm 1 HS Jan 31 06 16 17 Fail 1 2 H S uu Jan 31 06 15 53 Alarm 1 HS Recipient recipient address message Recipient 1 recipient 1 2 recipient 2 Error code See chapter 12 E mail type Date time of e mail transmission IM 04L31A01 03E 11 9 suolouny 13410 JO suoneado a 11 10 11 4 Displaying Logs Checking Operations and System Information Display Checking the System Specifications System Information Display Number of measurement inputs measurement channels Number of computation channels Number of internal control loops ANALOG 6 HATH 12 LOOP 2 MEMORY 1288882 Internal memory size OPTION 2 i Communication interface ETHERNET ________ External storage medium Poa ance oo LARGE Types of optional functions CADDER t PROGRAM LARGE SMALL Program control outeur ERINA EXT LOOP Green series communications LADDER Ladder communications PRODUCT HAC address 00 00 64 81 4D 28 T f terminal block 1 Version 4 82 Graphic B87002 1 B1a ype ole al9loe PID Exists Alarm Measurement alarm M
188. 6 ti ONERA 29 47 5 de cr ema haat Stopping the Acquisition to the Internal Memory 1 Press the STOP key 2 Use the left and right arrow keys to select Memory or Mem Math in the confirmation window that appears what do you want to stop HenHath Select Mem Math if you wish to not only stop the acquisition to the internal memory but also the computation assigned to computation channels If the model does not have the optional computation function M1 a confirmation message Do you want to stop storage appears Select Yes If the batch header option is active 1 the batch information is also displayed 3 Press the DISP ENTER key When data acquisition to the internal memory stops the memory operation indicator icon changes from run indication to stop indication Saving Data Using the Soft Key Menu That Appears by Pressing the FUNC Key If you press the FUNC key when Save under Memory is set to Auto and the acquisition of the display data to the internal memory is started Save Display appears in the soft key menu If you press the FUNC key when the acquisition of event data to the internal memory is started in the free mode Save Event appears in the soft key menu Press these soft keys at any time to store the display data or event data to the external storage medium For the operation of the FUNC key see page 3 6 IM 04L31A01 03E 9 1 Acquiring Measurement Data to the Interna
189. 99999999 9 and 99999999 is output when the value is below 999999 9 Sum When all of the data are computation errors or Blank computation overflow When the sum value exceeds 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 When the sum value is below 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 Displaying and Saving Report Data The report data in the internal memory can be displayed on the LCD of the CX1000 In addition the report data in the internal memory can be saved to an external storage medium The figure below shows an example of an hourly report Number of the report data being displayed Number of report data in the internal memory Type of report Index 2 2 Kind Hourly Start Jan 89 2688 G1 18 36 Start date time Timeup Jan 09 2000 61 15 31 Date time of the report ChUnit Sts Ave Hax Hin Sum i y 6 853 1 522 1 131 2 73545E 01 a2 V 0 03 1 55 1 131 2 741755E 1 5 Y 8 893 1 522 1 131 2 73610E 51 ois 25 70 60 44 SASRA T Unit Report data status Average maximum minimum and sum Channel No or tag name IM 04L31A01 03E 1 19 Equations for Control Computation Style Number S3 or Later PV SP Computation When PV and program control function is OFF you can set an equation for SP of the loops set to remote SP Computation Type Measurement computations other than TLOG computations CLOG You can calculate the max value min value
190. A window appears for you to confirm the saving of the new settings Note 7 If you carried out the procedure above without changing the settings a save confirmation window with only No and Cancel appears If you select No and press the DISP ENTER key the display returns to the Program control parameters menu If you select Cancel and press the DISP ENTER key the display returns to the previous condition Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key and save the settings The display returns to the Program control parameters menu 5 2 IM 04L31A01 03E 5 2 Program parameter setting gt Pattern initial setting Program Initial Setting Pattern number Select the number of the desired pattern from 1 to 30 1 to 4 for models with PG1 option Segments Set the number of segments to use in the program pattern of the selected number in the range of 1 to 99 However the total number of segments of all patterns must not exceed 300 segments Set the value to 0 for the program pattern of an unused number Segment setting method Select segment time setup method or segment time ramp grade setup method If you change this setting the program pattern setting corresponding to the pattern number is initialized Pattern name Enter the pattern name using up to 16 alphanumeric characters Segment edit mode If you select Delete the segment corresponding to the number selected by Edit segment number is de
191. A01 03E Chapter 7 Measurement Function Related Setup Operations Settings Related to Measurement Inputs 7 1 This section explains how to set parameters related to measurement input of the measurement function such as A D integral time scan interval and range Procedure Opening the Setting Display When Setting the A D Integral Time Scan Interval Etc Burn out and RJC settings cannnot be entered on 0 measurement channel models the setting menu is not displayed Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to the Setting mode Control gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 2 soft key select A D The following display appears A D Integrate Scan interval First CH a1 Last CH Burnout set Off RJC Internal Temperature Auto 5BHz 6BHz 188ms When Setting the Range Range settings cannnot be entered on 0 measurement channel models An error message will appear if the range or alarm setting screen is selected Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to the Setting mode Control gt MENU key switch to the Set mode gt 1 soft key select Range Alarm The following display appears c gt EE a e First cH E Last CH or Range Hode Type Range Span_L Span_U Scale voit 2v 2 000 2 000 Scale _L Scale_U Unit When Setting the Moving Average The moving average setting cannot be entered on 0 measurement
192. AC address Note Firmware version option NONE None If the information is displayed using red characters on the system information display there is a possibility that the CX1000 has malfunctioned In such case contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Even if the transmitter power supply output terminal block TPS4 option is installed None is displayed at SLOT4 under OUTPUT TERMINAL IM 04L31A01 03E 11 5 Setting the Measurement Remote Input A6R option or A4FR option This section explains how to assign a particular action to the remote input terminal REMOTE of the measurement alarm option terminal block Opening the Operation Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Setting mode Control gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 8 soft key select Option The following display appears Setup Node Remote No Action 1 Trigger AlarmAack TimeAdjust HemoryStart Stop Trigger Alarmack oana UUN None Memory Trigger AlarmAck Next 1 5 Operations on the Display 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change
193. AG cccccecccecccccce ceccccccceccccce ccccecccceccccccc CRLF UNIT uuuuuu uuuuuu uuuuuu CRLF yyyy mo dd hh mi eeeeeeee eeeeeeee eeeeeeeeCRLF AVE nnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnnnnnnCRLF MAX nnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnnnnnnCRLF MIN nnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnnnnnnCRLF SUM nnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnnnnnnCRLF TTT T Title HOURLY DAILY WEEKLY MONTHLY YYYY MO DD Year month day the report function was started HH MI Time the report function was started TIT Serial number of the CX1000 16 characters HHH H File header 32 characters 666 446 Channel number or tag name 16 characters uuuuuu Unit 6 characters eeeeeeece Status E Error error detection O Over overrange computation overflow detection P Power failure power failure occurrence Cc Change time change present yyyy mo dd Year month day of report hh mi Time of report nnn n Average maximum minimum and sum 13 digits File Output Example Below is an example of a daily report of 4 channels DAILY REPORT START TIME 2000 01 31 20 00 Model Serial No 12A338617 n File Header Processl Lot2 CH TAG CH01 CH02 CH03 CH04 UNIT V BN yV N s 2000 01 01 00 00 crv cv crv c AVE 0 00 0 10 0 20 0 30 MAX 0 00 1
194. Appendix 2 Supplementary Explanation of the Computation Function This section explains in detail the computation function It is a supplement to the information covered in Computation Function in section 1 18 Computation and Report Functions Option and 1 19 Equations for Control Computation Style Number S3 or Later For a description on how to create equations see appendix 3 Meaning and Syntax of Equations Channel Number to Which the Computation Results Can Be Assigned The computed results can be assigned to channel numbers 31 to 42 By selecting these channel numbers on the trend display you can check the computed results by viewing the trend Types of Computations In the table below y represents the computed result X and n represent the measured data of a measurement channel and a constant For details see Data That Can Be Used in Equations Type Syntax in the Equation Description Four arithmetic operation Determines addition subtraction multiplication and division Power Determines the power y X Square root SQR Determines the square root Absolute value ABS Determines the absolute value Common logarithm LOG Determines the common logarithm y log1ox Exponent EXP Determines the exponent y e Relational computation LT LE GT GE Determines lt lt gt or of two EQ NE elements and outputs O or 1
195. Contact Output DIGITAL OUT Wiring Relay contact output of the control output terminal block NO 0 Bre 250 VAC 1 Aor N 30 VDC 1 A resistive load fe O Transistor output of the control output terminal block Connection example _ for a transistor output a NIE x S 6 4 AT VDEISO MA 3to6 Pull up resistor a S 4 Cc oN S Cc e _ Relay Output Specifications Output format Relay contact Contact rating 250 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 A or 30 VDC 1 A resistive load Transistor Output Specifications Output format Open collector output Contact rating 24 VDC 50 mA Contact Output ALARM FAIL MEMORY of the Measurement Alarm Option Terminal Blocks Wiring NC gt 250 VAC 3A 250 VDC 0 1 A resistive load 9 a NO Relay Output Specifications Output format Relay contact Contact rating 250 VAC 50 60 Hz 3 A or 250 VDC 0 1 A resistive load 2 16 IM 04L31A01 03E 2 4 Connecting the Power Supply Precautions to Be Taken When Wiring the Power Supply Make sure to follow the warnings below when wiring the power supply Otherwise electric shock or damage to the CX1000 may result A WARNING To prevent the possibility of electric shock when wiring confirm that the power supply source is turned OFF To prevent the possibility of fire use a power line or cord that is equivalent to 600 V PVC insulated wire A
196. Control function 2 Hysteresis Alarm gt 3 DIO monitor and operation setting 4 DI DO label setting 1 2 3 4 IM 04L31A01 03E App 33 xipueddy Appendix 6 Initial Values lt 1 Control function gt Parameter Initial Value Control function gt Loop number 1 Control function gt SP Tracking On Control function gt PV Tracking Off Control function gt Target setpoint limiter gt Lower 200 0 Control function gt Target setpoint limiter gt Upper 1370 0 Control function gt Output velocity limiter Off Control function gt Anti reset windup Auto lt 2 Hysteresis Alarm PV event gt PV event available only when program control is ON Parameter Initial Value Hysteresis Alarm and PV event gt Alarm gt Loop number Hysteresis Alarm and PV event gt Alarm gt Hysteresis 1 to 4 1 7 8 Hysteresis Alarm and PV event gt PV event gt Hysteresis 1 to 16 0 5 lt 3 DIO monitor and operation setting gt Parameter Initial Value DIO monitor and operation setting gt DIO entry number 01 DIO monitor and operation setting gt On Off Off lt 4 DI DO label setting gt Parameter Initial Value DI DO label setting gt Module CTRL1 DI DI DO label setting gt Label DI001 to DIO06 DI001 to DIO06 9 Control math setting 8 when the program control function is OFF CONTROL GROUP2 joo or EAL a Control math setting 1 PU SP math 2 Log
197. Dland DO only DI or DO Displayed using the specified color when DI is ON Displayed using the specified color when DO is ON Tag Tag comment Displayed using the oy specified color when Gres DO or DI is ON Label for ON Displayed using the Displayed using the Label for OFF specified color when specified color when DO or DI is OFF DO is OFF Displayed using the specified color when DI is OFF on Zo Output value DIO operation monitoring function Analog retransmission 1 72 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 16 Display Function Control Operation Display gt DI DO Status Display Contact ON OFF red ON green OFF Contact number DI input DO output or label name style 3 or later Contact displays with numbers DOXXxX indicate the alarm output status not the ON OFF status of the output For example if the energize de energize setting of an alarm output relay is set to de energize the indication turns red when an alarm occurs to indicate that it is de energized Contorol Operation Display gt Internal Switch Status Display Style Number S3 or later ON OFF red ON green OFF Internal switch number aor EAL sy E E a a Cl Cl E s m m IM 04L31A01 03E 1 73 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 16 Display Function Control Operation Display gt Control Action Summary Display Number of the control operation information displayed on the bottom line Number of
198. E 1 Abridged paper manual Connection Guide 7 Precautions onthe Use IM 04L31A01 72E 1 Paper stating the precautions of the CX1000 CX2000 CX1000 CX2000 IM 04L31A01 91C 1 Gives a description of pollution control Control of Pollution Caused by the Product Installing DAQSTANDARD IM 04L41B01 66EN 1 Describes the installation procedures 8 External storage medium A1053MP 1 100 MB Zip disk provided only when the A1056MP B9968NL external storage medium suffix code is 2 250 MB Zip disk provided only when the external storage medium suffix code is 5 ATA flash memory card 32 MB CF card adapter capacity model of CF card may vary provided only when the external storage medium suffix code is 3 Optional Accessories Sold Separately The following optional accessories are available for purchase separately When you receive the order check that all contents are present and that they are undamaged For information and ordering contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Part Name Part Number Model Q ty Note 3 5 floppy disk 7059 00 10 2HD Zip disk A1053MP 1 100 MB A1056MP 1 250 MB ATA flash memory card B9968NL 1 32 MB 32 MB CF card adapter capacity and model of CF card may vary Shunt resistance 4159 20 1 250 Q20 1 for the screw terminal 4159 21 1 100 Q 0 1 4159 22 1 10 Q 0 1 Mounting bracket B9900BX 2 IM 04L31A01 03E How to Use This Manual Structure of the Manual This user
199. ENT TIME and the target SPs of each group corresponding to the segment shown at the left end are displayed To shift 10 segments at a time press the 10SEG or 10SEG soft key Press the up arrow key to show the pattern waveform overview window as shown in the figure below You can select segments as described above while showing this pattern waveform overview window To close the pattern waveform overview window press the down arrow key Indicates the pattern waveform display area move using the left and right arrow keys using a rectangular frame Pattern waveform overview window Display of the segment number segment time at the left frame line position IM 04L31A01 03E 6 13 uonesedo 01 U05 Bulunp suonesodo fo 6 4 Operations on the Program Selection Display and Program Control Display Only on Models with the Program Control Option Turning ON OFF the Pattern Waveform Display of Each Loop 1 Press the NEXT 1 3 soft key 2 Press the DSP LOOP soft key A menu used to turn ON OFF the pattern waveform display appears The soft keys of each loop show the tag names of each loop INT 01 and INT 02 in the figure below INT 1 INT 02 BACK 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the tag name of the loop you wish to turn ON OFF INT 01__ INT INT 02_ OFF SJ BACK 4 Select ON or OFF using the up and down arrow keys 5 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes To close the window witho
200. ET program end E or program v fe Q o 33 a8 o e o 5 o I IS O o S O m o T o a o ze oO 2 2 o 3 o a oO Ae e e m k a l l i l i ee M M M A M M ee M a a During program control Since the remote input cannot be used for the SP during program control there is no remote local switching operation IM 04L31A01 03E 1 2 Control Function Overview Flow of Setup Procedure Below is a standard flow of setup procedure in executing control for the first time using auto operation C Power ON D Basic settings include the following parameters Basic settings Basic settings Basic control settings Section 1 3 PID control or N OFF control Set in ONOFF control PID conirol i ana le v input related settings Section 1 4 Vv y C Set SP D Set SP Section 1 6 C Contact inputouiput D Section 1 5 A 4 Set relay hysteresis D Set PID parameters Section 1 7 Vv y Set other control D C a related Section 1 10 Vv nea Startatestrun Operating condition p Auto tuning A l C Manual tuning Section 1 12 Control output suppression gt Section 1 8 e Other adjustments Parameters that cannot be changed during operation section 6 1 When using program control set the items that include Program con
201. Exclusive OR Syntax e1XORe2 Condition If the two data values e1 and e2 are zero and non zero or non zero and zero the computed result is 1 Otherwise it is 0 Explanation e1 0 e2 0 gt e1XORe2 0 e1 0 e2 0 gt e1XORe2 1 e1 0 e2 0 gt e1XORe2 1 el z0 6220 gt e1XORe2 0 NOT Logical Negation Syntax NOTe1 Condition The result is the inverse of the status of data e1 zero or non zero Explanation e1 0 gt NOTe1 1 e1 0 gt NOTe1 0 Equation Examples 01 020R03 GT 04 Determines the OR of the computed results of 01 02 and 03 GT 04 TLOG Computation The data that can be used in TLOG computation is only measured data computed data or control data In the explanation below e1 is used to represent a measurement or computation channel You cannot specify an equation that contains a computing element inside e1 In addition only one TLOG computation can be specified in a single computing equation TLOG MAX Maximum Value Syntax TLOG MAX e1 Condition Determines the maximum value of channel e1 TLOG MIN Minimum Value Syntax TLOG MIN e1 Condition Determines the minimum value of channel e1 TLOG AVE Average Value Syntax TLOG AVE e1 Condition Determines the average value of channel e1 TLOG SUM Sum Value Syntax TLOG SUM e1 Condition Determines the sum of channel e1 TLOG P P Maximum Minimum Value Syntax TLOG P P e1 Condition
202. HHHHH CRLF CH TAG Cccccccecccccccce ccccccccccccccce Cccccceccceccccccc CRLF UNIT uuuuuu uuuuuu uuuuuu CRLF yyyy mo dd hh mi ss nnn nnn nnn CRLF III 1 Serial number of the CX1000 16 characters HHH H File header 32 characters ccc c Channel number or tag name 16 characters uuuuuu Unit 6 characters yyyy mo dd Year month and date the setup file was created due to setting changes hh mi ss Time the setup file was created due to setting changes nnn n Measured computed value measured value 8 digits computed value 10 digits File Output Example Below is a manual sample example of channels 1 2 3 and 4 MANUAL SAMPLE DATA Model Serial No 12A338617 i File Header Processl Lot2 a CH TAG CH01 CH02 CHO3 CH04 UNIT V any u y ny u 2000 01 01 01 08 43 0 000 0 000 0 000 1 400 2000 01 01 01 08 48 0 000 0 000 0 000 1 400 2000 01 01 01 09 15 0 000 0 000 0 000 1 400 CH TAG CH01 CH02 CH03 CH04 UNIT V ON ON Ne lt 2000 01 01 01 15 30 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 014 2000 01 01 01 18 12 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 014 App 20 IM 04L31A01 03E Appendix 5 Data Format of ASCII Files Note Output when error data overrange data or computation overflow data is detected Measurement Computation Channels Data Output Measurement
203. IM 04L31A01 03E 1 81 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 16 Display Function Operations on the Historical Trend Display The waveform can be scrolled along the time axis using the left and right arrow keys for horizontal display or up and down arrow keys for vertical display The time axis can be expanded or reduced using the display selection menu TREND HISTORY gt ZOOM or ZOOM You can display all the data points on the historical trend display in a section of the screen all data display When you move the cursor yellow line using the left and right arrow keys for horizontal display the date and time of the acquisition of the data at the cursor position are displayed By pressing the down arrow key for horizontal display after moving the cursor to return to the original display you can change the display position within the entire data In the display that appears the data at the cursor position is shown at the right end of the display Cursor All data piai Date and time at the cursor position You can display the information of the file displayed on the historical trend through the display selection menu operation Historical Trend gt Memory Information ON File name and data type Serial No of the instrument that sampled the data Start end time and user name User name is displayed only when the key login function is used When batch header is active Half Screen Display Only When Di
204. ION Ifa large pulling force is applied to the input output signal wires connected to the CX1000 the terminal or signal wire may become damaged To prevent this from happening fix all the wiring cords to the rear of the installation panel To prevent fire use signal wires having a temperature rating of 70 C or more Do not apply a voltage exceeding the following value to the input terminals Otherwise damage to the unit may result Maximum input voltage Voltage range less than or equal to 2 VDC and thermocouples 10 VDC Voltage range between 6 and 50 VDC 60 VDC Maximum common mode noise voltage 250 VACrms 50 60 Hz e The CX1000 is an installation category II product Use the following circuit voltage for the connection to the alarm FAIL Memory End output terminal When the connection is to Mains Circuits primary AC power source circuits 150 V or less When the connection is to circuits derived from Mains Circuits secondary circuits 250 V or less Mains Circuits voltage is less than 300 V and connection must be used by isolation transformer It is recommended that crimp on lugs with isolation sleeves for 4 mm screws be used when connecting the input output signal wires to the terminals CIDLO For 4 mm screws Ensure that noise does not enter the measurement circuit Keep the measurement circuit away from the power supply cable power supply circuit and ground circuit It is desirable that
205. K Alarm ACK Occurrence Alarm Release Blinking Blinking indication indication Channel Tag Channel display Green R reen Green R reen area color ed Green Gree ed Gree Green Green When all the alarms occurring on the channel is acknowledged alarm ACK 1 84 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 16 Display Function Alarm Summary Display A list of the most recent alarms can be displayed Up to 120 sets of alarm information can be stored to the internal memory When the number of alarm information exceeds 120 the information is overwritten from the oldest information By scrolling the screen using arrow keys the alarm information in the internal memory can be displayed You can select arbitrary alarm information and show the historical trend of the display data or event data that contains the alarm information For the operating procedure see section 8 1 Number of the alarm information displayed on the bottom line Number of the alarm information in the internal memory up to 120 Control loop name tag tag comment channel number or tag Alarm No 1 2 3 4 Alarm type See page 4 24 for the meaning of the control alarm symbols see page 7 8 for the meaning of the measurement alarm symbols Control alarms PVH PVL SPH SPL OTH OTL DVH DVL DVO DVI ETC see Note below Measurement alarms H L h I R r T t suon uny jo uoneuejdxg Date Time when the alarm occurred Date Time w
206. L output 1 memory end output 8 remote inputs Mi Computation function N2 Three wire isolated RTD input for measurement P1 24 VDC AC power supply driven PG1 Program control number of program patterns 4 2 PG2 Program control number of program patterns 30 2 BT1 Batch header 1 Only one can be specified at once on the CX1000 and CX1006 2 Either one can be specified on the CX1200 and CX1206 NO Instrument Number When contacting the dealer from which you purchased the instrument please give them the instrument number IM 04L31A01 03E Checking the Contents of the Package Standard Accessories ae The standard accessories below are supplied with the instrument Check that all contents are present and that they are undamaged T lt r LS No Name Part Number Model Q ty Note 1 Terminal screws 5 M4 2 Mounting bracket B9900BX 2 For panel mounting 3 DAQSTANDARD DXA120 1 Software for setting the CX and displaying data CD ROM used to install DAQSTANDARD 4 CX1000 CX2000 B8700MA 1 CD ROM containing the PDF files of this electronic manual manual the CX1000 CX2000 Communication Interface User s Manual DAQSTANDARD for CX User s Manual and other files 5 CX1000 Operation IM04L31A01 04E 1 A guide providing simple explanations of Guide control related operations for the CX1000 includes a chart of setting values 6 CX1000 Installation and IM04L31A01 73
207. L31A01 03E 3 1 Names and Functions of Sections Rear Panel The terminal block that is installed in the rear panel varies depending on the specification you made at the time of purchase Protection covers are attached in the locations where no terminal blocks are installed O 6 o Power supply terminal Protective grounding terminal for the P1 option specification RS 422 485 serial interface port only when specified Ethernet port RS 232 serial interface port only when specified Control output terminal block or Measurement alarm gt option terminal block OSS LILIES Control measurement input terminal block Power supply terminal Protective grounding terminal For a description on how to connect the input output signal wires power supply and transmitter power supply output wires and how to use the VGA output terminal see chapter 2 Installation and Wiring For a description on how to use the communication ports see the CX1000 CX2000 Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L31A01 17E IM 04L31A01 03E suoljeiodQ UOWWOZ pue s pon Aejdsiq syed jo sowenN e 3 2 Basic Key Operations Switching Operation Modes The CX1000 has four operation modes operation mode control setting mode common and measurement setting
208. Measurable Range DCV Only linear scaling allowed RTD Standard signal 1 R S B K E J T N IEC584 1 1995 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1995 2 W W 5 Re W 26 Re Hoskins Mfg Co ASTM E988 3 L Fe CuNi DIN43710 U Cu CuNi DIN43710 4 Pt100 JIS C1604 1997 IEC751 1995 DIN IEC751 1996 JPt100 JIS C1604 1989 JIS C1606 1989 5 Measuring current i 1mA Range Measurable Range 20 00 to 20 00mV 60 00 to 60 00mV 200 0 to 200 0mV 2 000 to 2 000V 6 000 to 6 000V 20 00 to 20 00V R 50 00 to 50 00V 0 0 to 1760 0 C s 0 0 to 1760 0 C B 0 0 to 1820 0 C K 200 0 to 1370 0 C 200 0 to 800 0 C J 200 0 to 1100 0 C T 200 0 to 400 0 C N i 0 0 to 1300 0 C w2 0 0 to 2315 0 C L s 200 0 to 900 0 C u s 200 0 to 400 0 C PLATINEL 0 0 to 1400 0 C PR40 20 0 0 to 1900 0 C W3Re W25Re Pt100 4 0 0 to 2400 0 C 200 0 to 600 0 C JPt100 4 1 to 5V 200 0 to 550 0 C 1 000 to 5 000V IM 04L31A01 03E 14 1 a suonesio ds 14 1 Input Section Specifications Measurement Input Number of inputs 6 channels Scan interval 1 2 s 2 s when the A D integral time is set to 100 ms Input type DCV DC voltage TC thermocouple RTD resistance temperature detector DI operation log DCA DC current by adding an
209. N time and OFF time are specified in terms of the time elapsed from the start point of the specified segment You can specify a time exceeding the segment time of the specified segment and event action A SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEG5 Program pattern for the 2nd loop TSP2 Program pattern for the 1st loop i TSPn Final SP Time event 1 eS E S OFF time Time event 2 o o o o ee ON time OFF time Time event 3 o S e S eee l ONtime OFF time Note The event information of the time event is retained even after the segment to which the time event is assigned During the hold and wait operations the time event count is temporarily stopped With the ramp prioritized PV start if a pattern starts partway through a segment the time event also starts partway through 1 48 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 11 Program Control Related Settings PV Event This function outputs preset alarms such as PV alarms and deviation alarms during program operation PV events operate only within the specified segment The following table shows the types of PV events Hysteresis can be specified for each event Relay action Relay action Event type Open close relay contact status Event type Open close relay contact status Hysteresis Hysteresis Hysteresis gt Close lt gt _ Deviation within Open Open PV high limit Open Clo
210. Off Relay gt Self diagnosis Off Relay gt DO001 to DO006 Energize Nonhold lt 7 Tuning setting gt Parameter Initial Value Tuning setting gt Loop number 1 Tuning setting gt 01 to 21 01 to 12 On 13 to 21 OFF Tuning setting gt 01 to 21 gt Item ID 01 SP 02 A1 03 A2 04 A3 05 A4 06 P 07 08 D 09 OH 10 OL 11 MR 12 PO lt 8 External loop setting gt Setup Node External loop setting 1 Basic setting 2 Parameter address setting 3 Tuning setting 1 2 3 Parameter Initial Value 1 Basic setting Loop number Ext1 Comm Off On Off 2 Parameter address setting Loop number Ext PV Input 40003 SP Setting 40004 OUT Output 40005 Control mode 40008 Remote Local 40008 Operation STOP RUN 40205 Alarm staus 40011 SP number 40010 PID number 40009 Auto reading 40008 3 Tuning setting Tuning setting gt Loop number Ext1 Tuning setting gt 01 to 21 Off App 30 IM 04L31A01 03E Appendix 6 Initial Values Setting mode Control C ONTRC IL GROUP2 _ ee lr 6 816 PID parameters Setting mode Control a Control math setting CONTROL GROUP2 o En 86 IE 3 1 Control input range Parameter Initial Value Input range gt Loop number 1 Input range gt Input type PV1 Input range gt Mode TC Input range gt Range K Input range gt Span Lower limit 200 0 Input range gt Span Upper limit 1370 0 Input range gt Squa
211. Off Up to four members 1 to 4 can be assigned to a group Set members that are not to be displayed on the control group display to Off Kind Set the type of member to Int Loop Ext Loop Meas CH or DIO DIO monitor and operation function Number Select a number for each type set to the members The selectable numbers are displayed on the soft key menu according to the specifications of the CX1000 that you are using Internal loop 01 to 02 External loop 01 to 04 Measurement channel 01 to 06 DIO 01 to 12 4 30 IM 04L31A01 03E 4 13 Ten segment linearizer I O This section explains the procedures for setting parameters related to the ten segment linearizer output for the control function Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt 6 soft key select Ten segment linearizer 1 0 The following display appears CONTROL GROUP2 __ es Pll es or E ee e 1 Control function Loop number Ea SP tracking On PY tracking Off Target setpoint limiter Lower 200 0 Upper 1370 0 Output velocity limiter Off Anti reset windup Auto Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor m
212. P TO HISTORY from the display selection menu to display the historical trend of the data containing the selected Note Fora description of the program control display and program selection display see section 6 4 Operations on the Program Selection Display and Program Control Display With style number S3 or later you can select to display PV event types as PVE 2 digit event number tag name event type or PVE 2 digit event number pattern name 1 74 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 16 Display Function Control Operation Display gt Trend Display Displayed Information and Display Direction In addition to the waveforms of measured computed data PVs SPs and OUT of internal external control loops are also assigned to channels and displayed The display direction of the waveform can be set to horizontal or vertical as show in the following figure Numeric values can be displayed along with waveforms Note For a description of the assignment of internal control channels internal loop channels and external control channels external loop channels see channel assignment explanation on page 1 86 suolouny jo uoneuejdxg ie pisititiitiris 0 4 1 2 2 Cositisiit iit iss 0 5 1 5 2 Pisitisi it rit z 3 Scale Lialia lirada pioritiivitiiis Droits tir bits 3 5 21 4 ririitiiis Cisitisrifiiiitiiiy im n div Display update rate Message message m
213. PV events GROUP PV events malaria T300 onntinrat 1370 0 T S m So T PEG1 SS _ _ E TEZ Event names One part Time events event names ohm rey 1370 0 One part event names 3 Press the EV KIND soft key A pop up window for selecting event to be displayed appears EV ON OFF EY K EV KIND GROUP Ea NEXT 274 4 Set the events to be displayed using the up and down arrow keys 5 Press the DISP ENTER key IM 04L31A01 03E 6 15 uonesedo 01 U05 Bulunp suoneiado fo 6 4 Operations on the Program Selection Display and Program Control Display Only on Models with the Program Control Option Displayed Information and Operations on the Program Control Display Display of time per division Set mode gt 3 Trend Save interval gt Time div gt Time div setting Program Cursor indicating the program execution position pattern name Control pattern number display display Tag Tag comment display Preset pattern waveform dotted line PV waveform N solid line N N Control segment g number display Control mode SEGMENT NO display SEGHENT TIHE PV SP and OUT display Displays wait time when in wait mode _ Repeat frequency and repeat count values i Repeat segment range Remaining time display of HOLD blinking Hold mode the control segment WAIT Wa
214. RL1 DO control output terminal block 1 D0101 D0106 INT SW1 internal switch SW01 SW 6 INT SW2 internal switch SW7 SW12 INT SW2 internal switch SW13 SW18 For a description on the terminal arrangement see page 2 6 to 2 7 Set the contact input information for each contact input terminal DIOO1 to DIO06 of the control ouput terminal block For a description of the terminal arrangement see page 2 6 Contact input information registration Select the contact input information for each contact input registration number from the following For a description on the method of detecting contact inputs see page 1 24 AllControlStop Select this when registering as a contact input for stopping the control operation of all internal loops AllControlStart Select this when registering as a contact input for starting the control operation of all internal loops ControlStart Stop 1 and 2 Select this when registering a contact input for starting the control operation of each internal loop The rising edge of the signal signifies Stop the falling edge of the signal signifies Run For a control output terminal block up to two loops that can output signals can be registered per block In the cascade mode registration is allowed only for loops 2 Remote Local 1 and 2 Select this when registering a contact input for switching remote operation and local operation for each internal loop The rising edge of the signal signifies Remote
215. ROUP2 pong j ceal Program initial setting Pattern number Segments at a Segment setting method Time Pattern 1 ort Pattern name Action loop Loop 1 Remaining segments 368 Remaining events 868 Note To carry out setup related to program control you must press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the settings on the pattern initial setting display even if there are no changes The Segment edit mode entry box appears only if you set Segments to a value other than 0 and select a Pattern number that you have saved in the past The Edit segment number edit box appears when you set Segment edit mode to Insert or Delete Setup Procedure 1 6 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Press the ESC key to return to the Program parameter setting menu To continue with program pattern setting press the 1 to 6 soft keys to display each setting display without carrying out step 6 Press the End soft key
216. S3 or Later Constant Settings Constants You can specify the constants used in equations Constants have 5 significant digits excluding the decimal point When setting an exponent use a mantissa of 5 digits or less and an exponent of 2 digits or less The setting range is as follows 9 9999E 29 to 1 0000E 30 0 1 0000E 30 to 9 9999E 29 Numerical Display Method The display method is determined by the numeral For 100000 lt W 0 0001 0 0 0001 W lt 100000 a normal numeral is displayed Otherwise an exponent is displayed However even for 100000 lt W 0 0001 or 0 0001 W lt 100000 if the number has 8 characters or more including the decimal point an exponent is used Significant Digits With constants for control computations the significant digits of the input numeral is retained For example if 0 010 or 1 00E20 is input 0 010 or 1 00E20 results However in the following cases the final O after the decimal point is insignificant When anormal input value was automatically converted to an exponent When a value input in exponential display was automatically converted to a normal value When 0 00000 was entered reverts to 0 The four places after the decimal remain as is 4 48 IM 04L31A01 03E 4 21 Settings for Switching the Program Patterns Using Contact Inputs with BCD Codes Version 3 20 or Later Procedure In addition to the binary representation that was conventionally used t
217. SP CHG display a menu for selecting the loop of which the target SP is to be changed Behavior of the Cursor Indicating the Program Execution Position Before program control is started the cursor is at the left end of the waveform display section After program control is started the cursor moves to the right and indicates the program execution position PV waveforms are not displayed until you press the START key to start the data acquisition to the internal memory After the cursor moves near the center of the waveform display section the cursor display position stops and the waveforms move This is to display both the past and future sections of the waveforms When the pattern end is neared the cursor moves to the right When the pattern ends the cursor is at the right end of the waveform display section Display When in Hold Wait Operation and When Released When program control is in hold or in wait status segment time stops and the preset pattern waveform no longer moves However PVs continue to be updated When program control hold or wait is released waveforms are redrawn for the past section based on the PVs and SPs For the future section waveforms are redrawn based on the pattern settings If the pattern is changed while program operation is held the corresponding preset pattern is redrawn Event Display Style Number S3 or Later The screen splits into the program selection and program operation displa
218. SP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed IM 04L31A01 03E 11 15 suolouny 13410 JO suoneado a 11 7 Setting the Batch Information BT1 option Application name Enter the application name up to 16 characters Supervisor name Enter the supervisor name up to 16 characters Manager name Enter the manager name up to 16 characters Batch number Enter the batch number up to 16 characters Lot number Enter the lot number 0 9999 Auto increment Automatic increment of the lot number Set whether or not to automatically increment the lot number to the next lot number when the data acquisition to the internal memory is complete On Automatically increment the lot number when the data acquisition is complete Off Do not change the lot number Note The lot number after 9999 is 0 Disp information Displayed information of the stored data Set whether to display the batch number and lot number or the date and time of file creation on the memory summary display data load and event data load screens Batch Display the batch number and lot number Time Display the date and time of file creation 11 16 IM 04L31A01 03E 11 8 Setting the Batch Information BT1 option Procedure This section explains how to set the items that are attached to the data acquired in the internal memory In addition you can set whether or not to use the following functions Automatically increment the lot n
219. SP math Off CLOG error Error Event output setting Separate Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box A OQ Saving the Settings 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed suoljeiadoQ dnjas payejay uoun 017U09 Se IM 04L31A01 03E 4 11 4 4 Control gt AUX Remote setting Alarm mode SP No selection source Remote setting Alarm mode and SP No selection source Loop number The Remote setting and Alarm mode parameters are set for each loop When changing these parameters this setting is used to select the target loop number 1 or 2 initial value is 1 Remote setting lt only when program control is OFF Select Remote initial value is Off to set the PV input to remote input If Control mode is set to Cascade this box is not disp
220. Switch to PV1 When PV1 gt PV switching upper value Switch to PV2 Switching through control input Signal on the setting display Input is switched using PV switching loops 1 and 2 see page 1 26 as follows Contact input is OFF Switch to PV1 Contact input is ON Switch to PV2 Process value 1 x PV input 2 Analog Retransmission Outputs the specified computed result instead of the computed PID value from the control output terminal In control setting mode you can set the equation output span unit and method of processing computation errors for the loop specified for analog retransmission Unlike the 3 control modes above control functions such as upper lower output value and preset output are not supported Program Control ON OFF only on models with the program control option Select whether to use the program control function For a description on the settings for program control see section 1 11 Program Control Related Settings 1 18 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 3 Basic Settings of Control PID Control Mode There are two PID control modes standard PID control mode and fixed point control mode To control the output so that the PV reaches the new SP quickly after the SP is changed select standard PID control mode To perform a continuous fixed point control select fixed point control As shown in the figure below the control behavior varies depending on the selected PID control mode There ar
221. T 82 RUN STP Window for starting and stopping operation 3 Select RUN or STOP using the up and down arrow keys 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes To close the window without making any changes press the ESC key Switching between Auto Manual and Cascade Control You can only switch to the cascade mode on the secondary loop of cascade control 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired control loop 2 Press the Mode soft key The MODE selection pop up window appears INT 1 INT 82 MODE selection window 3 Select AUT auto MAN manual CAS cascade using the up and down arrow keys 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes To close the window without making any changes press the ESC key Changing the SP 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired control loop 2 Press the SP soft key The SP modification pop up window appears The window shows the current SP Window for changing the target setpoint 3 Change the SP using the up and down arrow keys The value changes continuously if you keep pressing the up or down arrow key 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes To close the window without making any changes press the ESC key 6 2 IM 04L31A01 03E 6 1 Operations on the Control Group Display Switching Displayed Information and Control Operation Modes Changing the Control Output The following operation cannot be performed
222. TE TEET front panel sauces aa eee FTP file transfer log AINEA E E E E EE AON E FUNC key operation oo ecceceeseseeeseeeeeeneeeeeeneeeseeeeaeeneeeas 3 6 functional ground terminal sseseessesesriesiirerrreeerrrerrrrereen ii group NaMe sissioni a ea 4 29 8 3 Group NO as Mess as e S T AA 6 10 Group NUMDEN siiente adiaiiis 4 29 8 3 laete lE EE EA E E E E Seeestaseaees hig limitala lM veccscecce ceva carte ae erie historical trend display historical trend Switching to cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 8 1 HOLD ien a a flv ieee aeea es Se boas TOLD ad EENES E tees TAE E hold Operation sssscsiinasiniiiiiiioiii hold operation mode z hybrid Style tiesinio iia h st rSiS aiaia aeaa a Saians image data Increase indicator hold ccceeeeeeeereeee 7 10 information display Switching Of ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 8 1 aliate LE PUD oe seek coo cons Soaks AA T initial values initialization cower eee inputiilten 2 ccue ene dle ae input range eee input switching condition input type nsec installation location eee cece eeecteeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteteeeeteeaeeeeaes installation procedure ee ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeetneeeeeeaes integral time internal switch interval ltem NAME 00 cece cee ceee cette cette eee eeee eet caeeetetaeeeteeaeeeeeeaeeeeee Index 2 IM 04L31A01 03E Index
223. Time proportional PID voltage pulse output e Current output continuous PID control output e On off control relay contact output Time Proportional PID The result of PID computation is output using a pulse width of an ON OFF signal that is proportional to the time The pulse width is calculated using the following equation with the cycle time control output period see next section taken to be 100 Pulse width Control output x cycle time You can select relay output or voltage pulse for the output type Current Output Continuous PID Control Output The result of PID computation is output using a current analog signal that is proportional to the computed PID value There are four types of output current On Off Control Relay Contact Output The on and off signals are output using a relay according to the polarity of the deviation between the SP and PV Set the cycle time control output cycle for the time proportional PID in the range of 1 s to 1000 s Setting a short cycle time enables precise control However the life of the output relay and the input contact on the control element may be shortened because the number of ON OFF operations increases In general the cycle time is set around 10 s to 30 s for relay output You can select the cycle time for each loop ON OFF When the cycle time is long ON Ratio of the ON time OFF When the cycle time is of
224. User s Manual Model CX1000 C X1006 CX1200 CX1206 DAQSTATION CX1000 n vigilantplant YOKOGAWA IM 04L31A01 03E 6th Edition Yokogawa Electric Corporation Notes Trademarks Revisions 6th Edition June 2010 YK Thank you for purchasing the CX1000 This manual describes the functions excluding the communications functions installation and wiring procedures operating procedures and handling precautions of the CX1000 To ensure correct use please read this manual thoroughly before beginning operation The following manuals are also provided in addition to this manual Read them along with this manual Electronic Manuals Provided on the Accompanying CD ROM Manual Title Manual No Description CX1000 CX2000 IM 04L31A01 17E Describes the communications functions of the Communications Interface CX1000 CX2000 using the Ethernet serial interface User s Manual Paper Manuals Manual Title Manual No Description CX1000 Opration Guide IM 04L31A01 04E A guide providing simple explanations of control related operations for the CX1000 includes a chart of setting values CX1000 Installation and IM 04L31A01 73E Describes concisely the installation Connection Guide procedures and wiring procedures of the CX1000 Precautions on the Use of IM 04L31A01 72E Precautions regarding the use of the CX1000 CX2000 the CX1000 CX2000 The same information is written on pages ii and iii of this user s manua
225. WG 18 or better Make sure to ground the protective ground terminal through a grounding resistance of less than or equal to 100 before turning ON the power Use crimp on lugs with isolation sleeves for 4 mm screws for power supply wires and protective grounding wires To prevent the possibility of electric shock make sure to close the cover transparent for the power supply wires Furnish a switch double pole type to separate the CX1000 from the main power supply in the power supply line In addition make sure to indicate that the switch is a power control for the CX1000 on the switch and the ON OFF positions of the switch Switch Specifications Steady state current rating 1 A or more inrush current rating 60 A or more Use a switch complied with IEC60947 1 3 Connect a fuse between 2 A and 15 A in the power supply line Do not add a switch or fuse to the ground line SSS Use a power supply that meets the following conditions Item Not P1 Option Specification P1 Option Specification Rated supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC 24 VDC AC Supply voltage range used 90 to 132 180 to 264 VAC 21 6 to 26 4 VDC AC Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz For AC 50 60 Hz Permitted supply voltage frequency range 50 60 Hz 2 For AC 50 60 Hz 2 Maximum power consumption 39 VA 100 V 51 VA 240 V For DC 23 VA For AC 37 VA Note Do not use a supply voltage in the range 132 to 180 VAC as this may have adverse
226. XX X or XXXXX The decimal place is determined by the scale low limit setting Note Range and measurable range for voltage input Range Selectable Measurement Span Range 20mV 20 00 to 20 00 mV 60mV 60 00 to 60 00 mV 200mV 200 0 to 200 0 mV 2V 2 000 to 2 000 V 6V 6 000 to 6 000 V 20V 20 00 to 20 00 V 50V 50 00 to 50 00 V Values such as alarm values are set using engineering units EU or EUS based on the measurement span For an explanation on engineering units EU and EUS see appendix 8 Explanation of Engineering Units EU and EUS For current inputs a shunt resistor is attached to the input terminal to convert the signal to voltage input The following table shows the available shunt resistors For example a 250 Q shunt resistor is used to convert the signal to 1 to 5 V for 4 20 mA input Name Model Resistance Shunt resistor 415920 250 Q 0 1 for screw terminals 415921 100 Q 0 1 415922 102 0 1 PV range Lower Upper limit setting when Input type is set to PVrange during loop control with PV switching Set the value in the range 30000 to 30000 maximum value gt minimum value maximum value minimum value lt 30000 PV switching Lower Upper limit setting when Input type is set to PVrange Set the value within the input range If Control gt 1 Control action gt Method is set to Range set PV switching Upper Lower if Method is set to PVHi
227. a of formats other than those listed above cannot be used IM 04L31A01 03E 3 19 suoleiodg uoWWOD pue sepoyy Aejdsiq syed jo soweN e Chapter 4 Control Function Related Setup Operations 4 1 Control gt Control action Procedure This section explains the procedures for setting control operation related parameters such as control cycle zone PID selection and control mode Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Setting mode control gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 12 soft key select Control 1 soft key select Control action The following setting display appears When PV SP computation is OFF PID number a Control period 258ms Zone PID off Single Restart mode Fixed point Continue Pre anan fontinue Program control Initial PID Temp off Auto tuning Off PID control mode Follow Up il 2 3 4 Next 1 2 Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from
228. a to the internal memory over the specified period data length the event data in the internal memory is stored to the external storage medium in binary format The following figure shows the operation when the acquisition area in the internal memory is divided using the trigger mode 1st block 2nd block Last block Data acquisition Data acquisition Data acquisition AMN AN i AN Trigger i Trigger i Trigger i Stop condition met Trigger wait Condition met _ Trigger wait condition met gt Saved to the external Saved to the external Saved to the external storage medium storage medium storage medium Manual sampled data The first time manual sample is executed a manual sample data file is created on the external storage medium Data is added to this file every time manual sample is executed The data is saved in ASCII format Note If an external storage medium is not inserted in the drive during auto save mode the unsaved data is saved the first time manual sample is executed after an external storage medium is inserted TLOG data The first time TLOG data is created a TLOG data file is created on the external storage medium The data is appended to this file at the specified interval If the number of TLOG data points saved exceed 400 a new file is created on the external storage medium The data is saved in ASCII format Report data The first time report data is created a repo
229. able range of upper lower limits 5 0 to 105 0 where upper limit gt lower limit 105 0 Upper limit of output Actual output change range Lower limit of output Variable range leuw ay Wo ndy no jenjow Lower limit of limiter Upper limit of limiter Vv Vv 0 5 0 105 0 Original variable range Selectable range 5 0 lt lower limit of limiter lt Upper limit of limiter lt 105 0 1 32 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 7 PID Parameter Settings Shutdown Function ON FF can be specified only during manual mode using 4 to 20 mA current output The shutdown function closes the control value fully set the output to 0 exceeding the dead band of the control valve positioner When this function is turned ON the control output is set to 0 mA if the manual control output becomes 5 0 Manipulated output 20 0 mA Output 100 0 g display value 3 2 mA 0 0 mA Note The output high limit alarm is not activated even if the control output becomes 0 mA due to shutdown Manual Reset Value valid only when the integral action is Off The manual reset value is the output value when the PV is equal to the SP For example if the manual reset value is set to 50 the output value is set to 50 when PV SP Selectable range of manual reset value 5 0 to 105 0 Control Direction The control act
230. actor causing the end of data the data acquisition acquisition ended Sampling count Date time when the data acquisition started Cursor Select the data using the cursor and select INFORMATION gt JUMP TO HISTORY on the display selection menu to display the historical trend of the selected data On models with the optional BT1 batch header the batch number and lot number for each file can be displayed in place of the date and time the data acquisition ended 1 80 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 16 Display Function Control Operation Display gt Report Data Optional Function Report data residing in the internal memory can be displayed The report function is used to write the average minimum maximum and sum at specified intervals for the specified channels Reports can be made hourly daily weekly or monthly Number of the report data being displayed Number of report data in the internal memory Type of report Index 2 2 Kind Hourly Start Jan 9 2888 01 10 36 ____________ Start date time Timeup Jan 9 2088 1 15 31 _ Report date time ChUnit Sts Ave Max Hin Sum aly 8 053 1 522 1 131 2 7354886401 a2 Y 8 053 1 525 1 131 2 7417886 01 aU 8 053 1 522 1 131 2 73610E 01 4 52 91 239 70 60 44 1 56344 L l Unit Report data status Average maximum minimum and sum Channel No or tag name Control Operation Display gt Historical Trend Display
231. aes 9 15 Chapter 10 Computation and Report Function Related Operations Only on Models with the Computation Function Option 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 Assigning Computation Channels and Setting Computing Equations Constants and Tags i asier iioii Paa E EA A O OAT 10 1 Starting Stopping and Resetting the Computation cee eee eee eee eee eeeeees 10 4 Setting Computation Channel Alarms 0 c cece ce cece eee ceee tee eter tee eteeteee tent teeteeeeaeenaes 10 5 Setting TLOG Computations 00 0 0 eect eee eee ceee cee center eee tee eee te ete snee settee teeeeaeeaaes 10 8 Setting the Rolling Average eeccecceeeseceeeeeceeteeee cee eeeaaeeeeeesaeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeesnaeeneeeneee 10 11 Creating Reports sisseth tis irene stbic Heist peas ascetics N 10 12 Starting Stopping the Report FUNCTION 0 0 0 eceeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeneeeteeeneeee 10 14 Chapter 11 Operations of Other Functions 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 USER Key Assignment and Operation 0 cecccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeneeesaeeeeeeenaeeseeeenaees 11 1 Key LOCK initia eerie ai ee a eee 11 3 Key Operation Login Logout cceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeesaeeseeeeeaeesaeeeeeesnaeeeeeeneees 11 5 Displaying Logs Checking Operations and System Information Display Checking the Systemi Specifications srei i a a a e a aaa aa A 11 8 Setting the Measurement Remote Input A6R
232. al 3 Select REMOTE or LOCAL using the up and down arrow keys 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes To close the window without making any changes press the ESC key IM 04L31A01 03E 6 3 uonesedo 01 U05 Bulunp suoneiado fo 6 1 Operations on the Control Group Display Switching Displayed Information and Control Operation Modes Switching between Program and Local Control only on models with the program control option The soft key menu does not show PRG LOC if Program control is set to Off 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired control loop 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key followed by the PRG LOC soft key A pop up window for switching between program and local appears The window shows the current control output 20 0 PRG LOC LOCALIS Window for switching between program and local 3 Select PROGRAM or LOCAL using the up and down arrow keys 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes To close the window without making any changes press the ESC key Switching to Tuning Display 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired control loop 2 Press the TUNING soft key For the operations on the turning display see section 6 3 Tuning Operation Switching to the Program Selection Screen 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired control loop 2 Press the PROGRAM soft key The display switches to the program selection screen fo
233. al Etc Integrate common to the control input and measurement input Select the integral time of the A D converter Select from Auto 50Hz 60Hz and 100ms Auto The CX1000 automatically detects the power supply frequency and switches between 16 7 ms 60 Hz or 20 ms 50 Hz 50Hz The integral time is fixed to 20 ms 60Hz The integral time is fixed to 16 7 ms 100ms The integral time is fixed to 100 ms the scan interval is 2 s Scan interval You can select 1s or 2s However if Integrate is set to 100ms the scan interval is fixed to 2s 1s cannot be selected First CH Last CH Select the range of channels for setting the burnout and RJC Burnout set Set the burnout action for the measurement inputs Select Off Up or Down initial value is Off This setting is valid only for thermocouple inputs Off Burnout action Off Up When the thermocouple burns out the measured result is set to positive overflow Down When the thermocouple burns out the measured result is set to negative overflow RJC This is the reference junction compensation setting for thermocouple inputs Select either Internal or External initial value is Internal This setting is valid only for thermocouple inputs Internal Uses the reference junction compensation function of the CX1000 External Uses the external reference junction compensation function If set to External a box for entering the refe
234. al control output for 2 loops Select current voltage pulse or relay output Control contact input 6 inputs Control contact input Relay output 2 outputs Transistor output 4 outputs LAN Ethernet oc 98 B a CX1 000 Controllers up to 4 loops Serial interface port RS 422 485 232 such as the FA M3 O 100 VAC to 240 VAC by YOKOGAWA O 24 VDC AC P1 option Select one from the following option terminal blocks Control output terminal block Loops 1 and 2 LL b Measurement alarm 5 e Option terminal block ER sl ouput output remote input PD 2 Ri Can be installed in place of output A6R option Magnet SSR Contact Contact the control output terminal block Measurement alarn output Measurement alarm switch input output output FAIL memory 6 fone 6 a puts FAIL memory end output end output remote A4F option input output A4FR option 5 universal measurement inputs Control measurement input 6 universal measurement inputs terminal block 1 Control input terminals Measurement input terminals CH1 to CH6 f IM 04L31A01 03E 1 1 suolouny jo uoneuejdxg 1 2 Control Function Overview Control Signal Input Output As shown in the following figure the CX1000 can control up to two loops Conirol PV input number of analog inputs 5 Up to
235. alarms OFF when they occur When turned OFF they are not retained in the alarm summary Setting the Alarm Delay When Type is set to T or t First CH Last CH Select the measurement channels for setting the alarm delay The target channels also apply to Tag and Moving average settings Alarm delay Set the alarm delay using an integer in the range of 1 to 3600 s Note Ifthe scan interval is 2 s and you set an odd value for the alarm delay it will operate at the specified period 1 s Example If the alarm delay set to 5 s the function will operate at 6 s For a description of the alarm delay setting of computation channels see section 10 3 Setting Alarms on Computation Channels You can select internal control channels and external control channels for First CH and Last CH However these channels do not have alarm outputs and therefore the Alarm delay setting is not available Setting the Alarm Relay Output and Alarm Details The relay action when outputting the relay from the DITIGAL OUT terminal of the control output terminal block is set on the setup screen in Control gt 6 Relay For the setup procedure see section 4 6 Control gt Relay Reflash Set whether to enable On or disable Off the reflash alarm function of the alarm relay output Relay AND Select the relays that are to operate using AND logic Set the range of relays from the first alarm relay to tak
236. aller number the maximum selectable PID number is decreased accordingly Note The parameters that are registered to a single PID number include the PID constant output lower upper limit control action method preset output value shutdown function ON OFF and manual reset value Inthe zone PID method a single PID number is assigned to each zone zone specified by reference points 5 and 6 is assigned a PID number of 6 for example When the zone changes the parameter switches to the control parameters assigned to the PID number and the output is controlled accordingly PID Number Assignment The PID number assignment operation varies depending on the PID selection method When using the target setpoint selection method The SP number and PID number are synchronized By switching the SP number the control parameters PID parameters in the settings such as the SP and the PID constant are changed to the control parameters registered to the corresponding PID number When using the zone PID method PID numbers are assigned to each zone beforehand When the PV changes and becomes a value of a different zone the output is controlled automatically using the PID parameters of the PID number that is assigned to that zone The following settings are required when using this method Reference Points As shown in the following figure reference points 1 to 6 up to 7 zones are specified to divide the measurement span into zones The numbe
237. alue is show as Reference Junction Compensation When measuring the temperature using a thermocouple the reference junction compensation can be used You can select whether to use the reference junction compensation provided by the CX1000 or an external reference junction compensation If you are using an external reference junction compensation you will also set the reference voltage The initial setting is set so that the reference junction compensation provided by the CX1000 is used When using the external reference junction compensation set an appropriate reference junction compensation voltage As in the example in the following figure if the reference junction temperature for the external reference junction compensation is To C set the thermoelectromotive force of the 0 C reference for To C as the reference junction compensation voltage External reference junction compensation Hold the contact point of the thermocouple and copper wire at TO C Copper wire Thermocouple Te IM 04L31A01 03E 1 59 CX1000 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 14 Measurement Function gt Measurement Input Related Settings Moving Average New data New data i 15 0mV 10 0mV 10 0mV 15 0mV 10 0mV Pee Cleared Cleared a fF O N Moving The moving average is used to suppress the effects of noise that is riding on the signal The input signal of the measurement channel is set t
238. alues using the soft keys and character number input keys 3 Press the DISP ENTER key Constant 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the desired constant KO1 to K12 under Constant you wish to change 2 Enter the constant using the soft keys and character number input keys 3 Press the DISP ENTER key Tag 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the First CH and Last CH boxes 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the start and end channel numbers for setting the tag 3 Move to the Tag box using the arrow keys Enter the tag using the soft keys and character number input keys 5 Press the DISP ENTER key a 10 2 IM 04L31A01 03E 10 1 Assigning Computation Channels and Setting Computing Equations Constants and Tags Assigning Computation Channels First CH Last CH You can assign channel numbers 31 to 42 as computation channels The range of numbers here is used to set the range of channels for setting the computation function Math Off On Turn ON OFF the computation function for the computation channels specified by First CH and Last CH Calculation expression Set the equation up to 40 characters according to the description given on the equation pop up window For a description on how to create equations see appendix 3 Meaning and Syntax of Computing Equations Span Lower Upper Set the upper and lower limits of the computation span range of computed values Selec
239. ameters and to confirm new settings 4 Operation Cover If you need to insert or remove the external storage medium you can open the operation cover by pressing down on the operation cover knob that is located at the upper section of the cover and pulling it forward Make sure to have the operation cover closed at all times except when handling the external storage medium A For the names and functions of parts of the operation section see the next page 5 Key Operation Cover This cover is opened when you access the keys other than the arrow keys and the DISP ENTER key The key operation cover opens by pulling the key operation cover knob at the upper left corner of the cover forward For the names and functions of parts of the key operation section see the next page For a description on how to operate the keys see section 3 2 Basic Key Operations IM 04L31A01 03E 3 1 suoleiodg uOWWOD pue sepoyy Aeidsiq Sued jo soweN pe 3 1 Names and Functions of Sections Operation Section Floppy disk drive Zip drive ATA flash memory card drive N H L IG co e y y l y m Ch 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 Drive for external storage medium Depending on the specification you made at the time of purchase a floppy disk drive a Zip drive or an ATA flash memory card drive is installed Eject button Zip disk acc
240. and PV event and time event are turned OFF IM 04L31A01 03E 1 45 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 11 Program Control Related Settings Wait Operation PV A Program Local operation a operation n 1to 99 Last segment After the last segment ends SEG n the operation continues under fixed point control using the local SP specified beforehand Local SP gt Time Time event EVn Reset Mode End When the segment set to reset mode end is terminated program control enters the stop reset status and the operation of each control loop is stopped Note When creating the program pattern data is created so that the segment set to Local or Reset is the last segment of program control This function is used to pause the program operation when the PV cannot track the SP The program is paused to stop the change in the SP and waits for the PV to track the SP When the PV tracks the SP the program operation is automatically resumed This function has the following two types of operation Wait at the time of segment switching Wait within the segment The operation is set using the wait zone which is the deviation width used to determine the tracking level of the PV input and the wait time which is the time until the wait zone is reached Up to 5 groups of wait zone and wait time combination can be specified The wait operation applies to each loop Therefore if the PV of any loop does not reach the wait zo
241. and a switch is made to SP 2 640 C SP switching SP1 SP 2 SP 2 640 C g 4 7 SP1 500 C 70 C minute Temperature rise time 2 minutes A ee AEE Arete In addition to the value specified on the CX1000 the value determined from the analog signal that is input to the RSP terminal of the control input terminal block can be used as the SP The input setting for the remote input analog signal is carried out in the same fashion as the input setting for the PV input See section 1 4 PV Input Related Settings When using the SP of the remote input select REMOTE through the local remote switching operation on the operation display The switching operation can also be carried out using the contact input see section 1 5 Contact Input Output Related Settings Note The remote input function can be used only when program control is not used To use this function the program control ON OFF setting setting available only on models with the program control option must be set to OFF and Basic Control Settings gt Contact Input Registration gt Remote Input Selection must be set to REMOTE 1 30 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 7 PID Parameter Settings PID Number PID parameter group number The PID number can be set for each loop When the PID group number setting is 8 you can select the PID number from 1 through 8 However if the PID group number is set to a sm
242. anded setting screen is selected Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt MENU key switch to Set mode gt 5 soft key select Display gt 3 soft key select Zone Graph Partial 6 soft key select Control Zone Graph Partial or 8 soft key select Math Zone Graph Partial The following display appears Feb 19 2002 20 31 55 6a MERZA O First CH 101 Last CH 101 Zone Partial on Lower og Expand EJ Upper ioa Boundary 6 1 Graph Division fia Bar graph Normal Scale position 1 Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note Expand and Boundary under Partial are set using the pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key s U9 U09 p erds q y BuiBueysy 104 suonesado E IM 04L31A01 03E 8 21 8 13 Measurement Function gt Setting the Partial Expanded Display on the Trend Display 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Saving the Sett
243. ark time and message Trip line Channel No or tag name Numerical Measured or computed value _ display section Unit digital display Alarm mark section 2 8 1 2 a4 u Elora Miti dana iria a EE laaa T aaa OT a 3 0 1 8 3 6 U A Orri tii t ritiliiitiiti tis 3 5 1 pipitisii titi ETETE ENEN B63 44 Waveforms of all channels that are set to display the trend Data of the selected group Y ROR 2 23 45 06 AA Displayed Info Description Message Messages specified by the user can be displayed at arbitrary points in time For example by displaying a message when a certain operation is carried out the point at which the operation is carried out can be seen visually Displayed messages are saved Trip line You can display a line to indicate a particular value of interest trip line for each group You can select the thickness of the displayed line from three types 1 2 or 3 dots Up to four trip lines can be displayed on a single group Scale A scale appropriate for the measured item can be displayed for each channel The number of divisions of the display scale created by the main scale marks can be set to a value in the range 4 to 12 divisions also applies to the bar graph display Medium and small scale marks are displayed in between the main scale marks You can select whether or not to display the sca
244. as been assigned ends the i program operation is paused hold operation Local Mode End When the segment set to local mode end is terminated program control enters the stop reset status and each control loop operates in the local mode constant SP The SP that is used varies depending on the ON OFF condition of target setpoint tracking as follows In addition when the operation enters local mode PV event and time event are turned OFF When the target setpoint tracking is ON When the program operation of the last segment ends the operation is set to local mode constant SP as shown below At this point the final SP of the last segment is used continuously as the SP in local mode The local SP can be specified beforehand However if the target setpoint tracking is ON the PV tracks to the final SP of the final segment regardless of the local SP PV A Program Local operation operation E Last segment SEG n n 1to 99 After the last segment ends the local SP is set to the final SP of the last segment regardless of the local SP specified beforehand and the operation continues under fixed point control Local SP gt Time Timeevent EVn When the target setpoint tracking is OFF When the program operation of the last segment ends the operation is set to local mode constant SP as shown below next page At this point the output is controlled using the preset local SP
245. asic alarm settings An alarm occurs if the rate of change of the measured value in the falling direction is less than or equal to the specified value Delay high limit alarm T An alarm occurs when the measured value remains above or equal to the alarm value for the specified delay Delay low limit alarm t An alarm occurs when the measured value remains below or equal to the alarm value for the specified delay 1 Can only be specified on difference computation channels 2 Can only be specified on measurement channels Value Set the alarm value for the selected alarm type Relay On Off Select whether relay output is enabled On or disabled Off If On is selected the Number entry box appears 7 8 IM 04L31A01 03E 7 2 Settings Related to Measurement Alarms Number Set the alarm output relay number When outputting the relay from the ALARM terminal of the measurement alarm option terminal block A6 A6R A4F A4FR select from 101 to 106 When outputting the relay from the DIGITAL OUT terminal of the control output terminal block select from DO001 to DOO06 For the correspondence between the output relay numbers and the positions of the terminals of the terminal blocks see pages 2 6 and 2 7 When outputting to the internal switches SW001 SW18 select from SW001 SW018 style number S3 or later Detection Style Number S3 or Later Select whether to display alarms ON or not to display
246. at appears after error code 281 Character String and Details MAIL Internal processing error STATUS Internal processing error TIMEOUT Internal processing error 2 PRIORITY Internal processing error NVRAM Internal processing error 282 FTP control connection error Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 282 Character String and Details HOSTNAME Failed the DNS lookup search the IP address corresponding to the host name Check the DNS setting and the destination host name TCPIP Internal processing error UNREACH Failed to connect to a control connection server Check the address setting and that the server is running OOBINLINE Internal processing error NAME Internal processing error 2 CTRL The control connection does not exist Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time period IAC Failed to respond in the TELNET sequence Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time period ECHO Failed to transmit data on the control connection Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time period REPLY Failed to receive data on the control connection Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time period SERVER The server is not in a condition
247. ata 1 to 3 Trigger Loads the setup data file saved to the external storage medium Messages 1 to 8 Trigger Displays message 1 to 8 on the trend display and stores the message to the internal memory Snapshot Trigger Saves the screen image data to the external storage medium Method of Detecting Contact Inputs The above operations are carried out on the rising or falling edge of the contact signal edge or the ON signal lasting at least 250 ms trigger The remote signal rises when the contact switches from open to closed and falls when the contact switches from closed to open For open collector signals the remote signal rises when the collector signal voltage level of the input terminal goes from high to low and falls when the collector signal goes low to high Rising and falling edges Rising j Falling Trigger 1 26 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 5 Contact Input Output Related Settings Note For a description on how to register contact inputs see Setup Items of section 4 3 Basic Control Settings gt Contact Input Registration On models with the measurement alarm option terminal block A6R or A4FR the actions from Start stop to Snapshot can also be assigned to the measurement remote input For a description on the assignment of actions to the measurement remote input see Measurement Remote Input on page 1 100 If the same action is performed using keys of the CX10
248. ates and or other countries Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Company and product names that appear in this manual are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective holders The company and product names used in this manual are not accompanied by registered trademark or trademark symbols and 1st Edition March 2002 4th Edition November 2003 2nd Edition April 2002 5th Edition May 2007 3rd Edition June 2003 6th Edition June 2010 All Rights Reserved Copyright 2002 Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM 04L31A01 03E Safety Precautions About This Manual This manual should be read by the end user Read this manual thoroughly and have a clear understanding of the product before operation This manual explains the functions of the product YOKOGAWA does not guarantee that the product will suit a particular purpose of the user Under absolutely no circumstances may the contents of this manual be transcribed or copied in part or in whole without permission The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors or omissions please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Precautions Related to the Protection Safety and Alteration of the Product The following safety symbols are u
249. ath reset soft key The data of all computation channels is reset to 0 This operation can be assigned to the USER key Clearing the Computation Dropout Indication In operation mode press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu and press the Math ACK soft key Math ACK appears on the soft key menu only when a computation data dropout occurs the computation icon turns yellow When cleared the computation icon returns to a white color Note Computation data dropout occurs when the computation process cannot be completed within the scan interval If computation dropout occurs frequently lessen the load on the CPU by reducing the number of computation channels or setting a longer scan interval When computation data is written to the internal memory the data immediately before the computation dropout is substituted as the computation data of the scan interval when dropout occurred 10 4 IM 04L31A01 03E 10 3 Setting Computation Channel Alarms Like measurement channels alarms can be output based on the values of the computation channels This section explains how to set the alarms Procedure Opening the Setting Display Setting the alarm Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Setting mode control gt MENU key switch to Set mode gt 9 soft key select Math set1 Expression Alarm The following display appears aE ox 16 bed Last CH Hath on Calculation expression 01
250. aximum sampling length 15 000 data points x 60 s 9 000 000 s approx 174 days Event Data Only Measurement channel 4 computation channel none internal control channel none external control channel none Data Maximum Number of Data Points and Maximum Sampling Length Event data Maximum number of data points 1 200 000 4CH x 2 bytes 0 x 4 bytes 0 x 2 bytes 0 x 2 bytes 150 000 However the maximum is limited to 120 000 data points Therefore the maximum number of data points 120 000 When the sampling interval of event data is 1 s Maximum sampling length 120 000 data points x 1 s 120 000 s approx 33 hours App 4 IM 04L31A01 03E Appendix 1 Supplementary Explanation of the Acquisition of Display Data Event Data to the Internal Memory Measurement channel 3 computation channel 6 internal control channel 2 external control channel 3 Data Maximum Number of Data Points and Maximum Sampling Length Event data Maximum number of data points 1 200 000 3CH x 2 bytes 6 x 4 bytes 2 x 2 bytes 3 x 2 bytes 30 000 When the sampling interval of event data is 1 s Maximum sampling length 30 000 data points x 1 s 30 000 s approx 7 hours Display Data and Event Data Measurement channel 2 computation channel none internal control channel none external control channel none Data Maximum Number of Data Points and Maximum Sampling Length Display data Maximum
251. aximum value from channels e1 e2 e5 and e7 that were measured at the same time Sample Equation CLOG MAX 01 02 C104 C106 K01 SQR 02 Example of Equation That Cannot Be Used CLOG AVE 01 03 05 CLOG AVE 02 04 06 Reason 2 CLOGs cannot be used in a single equation CLOG AVE 01 ABS 01 Reason Computation elements used inside the parentheses If Computation Data is Abnormal You can select the method for processing CLOG computed results if the computation data is abnormal data burnout error AD error SKIP Skip any abnormal computation data and complete the computation Failure diagnostics are output ERROR CLOG computed results in an error IM 04L31A01 03E App 15 xipueddy Appendix 3 Meaning and Syntax of Equations Conditional Expression Control Computation eq1 eq2 eq3 Syntax Cl01 GT W01 C102 C103 Conditions If control measurement data 1 is greater than constant W01 control measurement data 2 become the computed results and if control measurement data 1 is not greater than W01 control measurement data 3 becomes the computed result Example of Equation That Cannot Be Used Cl01 GT W01 C102 Cl03 W02 Reason Combined with other operators Nesting Conditional Expressions You can substitute conditional expressions for the eq1 eq2 and eq3 in the expression eq1 eq2 eq3 For example you can set a conditional expressions such as eq1 eq2 1 eq2 2 eq2 3 eq3 1 eq3 2 eq3 3 You can nest
252. ay overview display DI DO status display and program display from White and Black initial value Note The background color of the historical trend is set opposite to that of the trend display Trend line Select the line width of the trends from 1 2 and 3 dots Trip line Select the line width of trip lines from 1 2 and 3 dots Grid Select the number of grids to be displayed in the waveform display area of the trend display Select from Auto 4 to 12 If 4 to 12 is selected the grid is displayed so that the display width is divided into 4 to 12 sections If Auto is selected the same number of grids as the number of scale divisions of the first assigned channel of the group is displayed Scroll time Select the interval used when automatically switching the trend digital and bar graph displays from 5s 10s 20s 30s and 1min The displayed group rotates among group 1 to group 6 8 24 IM 04L31A01 03E Chapter 9 Data Save Load Operations 9 1 Acquiring Measurement Data to the Internal Memory and Saving Data to the External Storage Medium This section explains how to set the acquisition of measurement data display data event data manual sample data TLOG data only on models with the computation function option M1 and report data only on models with the computation function option M1 as well as how to set the storage of data to the external storage medium and how t
253. ay and All Channel Display 1 Press the DISP ENTER key to show the display selection menu TREND HISTORY is highlighted 2 Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu 3 To change the displayed group select the group from GROUP 1 to GROUP 10 using the up and down arrow keys To display all channels select ALL CHANNEL To set the display back to group display from ALL CHANNEL select GROUP CHANNEL in this step FF overview GRO aI gt Piso TREND nik ALL CHANNEL HISTORY INFORMATION ON 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to switch to the all channel display Displaying Memory Information 1 Press the DISP ENTER key to show the display selection menu TREND HISTORY is highlighted 2 Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu 3 Select INFORMATION ON using the up and down arrow keys H 7 UP 6 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to show the memory information To clear the displayed memory information press the DISP ENTER key or an arrow key 2E Bem IM 04L31A01 03E 8 9 s u uo p erds q y BuiBueysy 104 suoneado E 8 7 Measurement Function gt Changing the Display Update Rate of the Trend Display This section explains how to change the display update rate of the trend display Procedure Setup Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt MENU key switch to Set mode gt 3 soft key select Trend Save interval User key The followin
254. ay data 5 Load event data 6 File list 7 Delete 8 Format 9 Clear data 1 2 3 4 Parameter Initial Value 1 Save settings 2 Load settings 3 Save data 4 Load display data 5 Load event data 6 File list 7 Delete 8 Format 9 Clear data 8 Time Parameter Initial Value Time set 9 Math set1 Expression Alarm Parameter Initial Value First CH 31 Last CH 31 Math range gt Math Off Math Alarm gt 1 to 4 Off 10 Math set2 Constant Parameter Initial Value Constant gt K01 to K12 11 Math set3 Tag TLOG Rolling average Alarm delay time Parameter Initial Value First CH 31 Last CH 31 Tag gt Tag 31 TLOG gt Timer No 1 TLOG gt Sum scale Off Rolling average Off Alarm delay time 10s App 38 IM 04L31A01 03E Appendix 7 Control Function Block Diagram Single Loop Control Fixed Point Control Contact input Input type selection Unit selection Analog input range conversion Square root computation Ten segment linearizer approximation ten segment linearizer bias PV input bias PV input filter Remote input filter Ratio bias computation SPito8 Local Alarm1 Alarm2 Alarm3 Alarm4 Alarm1 Alarm2 Note There are 6 contact input terminals and 6 contact output terminals on a single control output terminal block The functions that can be assigned to each input output terminal vary depending on th
255. ay starting from the upper left corner The characters indicate the item names tuning parameter name In addition to the tuning parameters below DR control direction H relay hysteresis BS1 measured value 1 input bias FL1 measured value 1 input filter BS2 measured value 2 input bias FL2 measured value 2 input filter RT ratio setting RBS remote input bias RFL remote input filter and W01 W12 control computation constant are available BS1 W12 is valid if the main unit is style number S3 or later are available 01 SP target setpoint 08 D derivative time 15 Off 02 A1 alarm value 1 09 OH High limit of the output limiter 16 Off 03 A2 alarm value 2 10 OL Low limit of the output limiter 17 Off 04 A3 alarm value 3 11 MR manual reset 18 Off 05 A4 alarm value 4 12 PO preset output 19 Off 06 P proportional band 13 Off 20 Off 07 integral time 14 Off 21 Off Select the Item ID from the 21 parameters listed above Item name is a name that can be assigned to each parameter You can use up to 6 alphanumeric characters to specify a name Under initial settings Item name is set to the save character as the item ID Note The tuning parameters for external loops using Green series communications are set using Control gt 8 Exteral loop setting gt 3 Tuning setting External loops have two tuning parameters in addition to those listed above DB and ETC Furthermore
256. below shows the example in which both the final SP and the remaining segment time are changed by changing the final SP using the segment time ramp grade setup method Segment n 1 Segment n Segment n 1 Previous TSP1 t 1 A pnm ps Z Previous TSP2 L 4 1 i a 77 Pia Previous TSP3 7 On 8 22 Time event a Off Change the final SP and remaining segment time when in hold mode Segment n 1_ ee ae Segment n 1 No i NT 1 Previous TSP1_ pee 1 1 1 1 a 1 Y 1 gt 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 i Previous TSP2 i 1 a gt TSP3 after change i i ie 4 4 revi TSP3 j Previous Remaining segment 4 time after change TSP2 after change hesteoidesedeneed oe she Time event 9 a Advancing Segments During program operation you can force the program to advance to the next segment You can advance the program using key operation on the program operation status display using the external contact input or through the communication function When you advance the program at the segment currently in operation the program advances to the next segment However depending on the segment at which this function is executed the following operation may take place When advance is executed at the last segment The program operates according to the switching settings of the segment When set to Local The operation enter
257. ber 0 to 9999 Start information Start date and time and user name up to 16 characters Only when the key login function is used Stop information Stop date and time and user name up to 16 characters Only when the key login function is used Comment information Comment up to 32 characters x 3 lines The date and time when comment was written User name of the user who wrote comment up to 16 characters Only when the key login function is used Identifying Operators Users by using the Key Login Function By using the key login function the users that can log into the CX can be restricted and identified When the batch header is activated the security is enhanced in the following manner as compared with the standard key login function User names that are already registered cannot be specified The combinations of user IDs and passwords that are identical to those that have been registered by any user in the past cannot be specified Changing the Messages When the optional batch function is installed messages 1 through 3 can be changed in the operation mode For the procedure related to changing the messages see section 8 9 Display The following items are displayed The batch number lot number and date time are alternately displayed in the status display section When the STOP key is pressed batch information is displayed in the stop confirmation screen IM 04L31A01 03E 1 101 suono
258. block PV event output time event output only when the program control option is specified Program control end notification only when the program control option is specified Detection Style Number S3 or Later Select whether to display alarms ON or not to display alarms OFF when they occur When turned OFF they are not retained in the alarm summary Setting the Alarm Delay When Type is set to T or t First CH Last CH Select the target channels for setting the alarm delay The target channels also apply to Tag TLOG and Rolling average settings Alarm delay Set the alarm delay using an integer in the range of 1 to 3600 s Note If the scan interval is 2 s and you set an odd value for the alarm delay period it will operate at the specified period 1 s Example If the alarm delay set to 5 s the function will operate at 6 s IM 04L31A01 03E 10 7 uondo uonsuny uonendwos y YUM sjapon UO AjUC suoneiodo pajejoy uolnouny wodey pue uonejndwog 10 4 Setting TLOG Computations This section explains how to set the TLOG computation Procedure Displaying the Operation Display Setting the timer Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Setting mode Control gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 8 soft key select Option The following display appears Timer lt TLOG Number Hode Absolute Interval lh Ref time o 0
259. can be changed during operation as an operation parameter Selectable range OFF no filter or 1 to 120 s initial value is OFF Filter time constant Filter time constant Raw input small large IM 04L31A01 03E 1 21 suon uny jo uoneuejdxg 1 4 PV Input Related Settings Bias This function is used to add a constant value bias value to the PV and use the result in the display of the PV and control PV input value Bias value Process value in the instrument This function can be used in a case when the PV is less than the true value by a constant amount due to the physical circumstances of the detector For example the atmospheric temperature inside a furnace can be measured and substituted for the material temperature This function can also be used to make minute adjustments when the displayed value is within the allowable precision range but small deviation exists between other instruments and you wish to align it Selectable range 100 0 to 100 0 of the measurement span the initial value is 0 0 Ten segment Linearizer Biasing Function This function is used when you wish to correct the input value due to the deterioration of the sensor In the ten segment linearizer biasing function the output value b is the corrected value obtained by adding the bias at numerous arbitrary points up to 11 points can be specified against the
260. can change the operation display according to your needs by carrying out the following procedures A eal Operation v gt M a a display Sub menu I i Display selection menu indicates the DISP ENTER key 4 v gt indicate the arrow keys DISP ENTER key Arrow keys 1 Press the DISP ENTER key to show the display selection menu 2 Select the menu item using the up and down arrow keys 3 Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu To close the sub menu that you opened press the left arrow 4 Select the sub menu item using the up and down arrow keys ESC CONTROL GROUP aa a OVERVIEW L contro Wes STATUS fw trend gt Pl W STATUS ZRS DIGITAL gt CONTROL GROUPI 5 Press the DISP ENTER key The selected display appears To close the menu without switching the display press the ESC key IM 04L31A01 03E 3 5 suoljeiodQ UOWWOZ pue s pon Aejdsiq sed jo soweN el 3 2 Basic Key Operations FUNC Key Operation in Operation Mode Procedure The following operation can be carried out in operation mode Menu Reference Function conditions displayed on the soft key menu Alarm ACK 4 9 7 2 Clears alarm display relay output valid only when the operation of the alarm display or output relay is set to hold Message 8 8 Displays messages 1 to 8 on the trend display and writ
261. ce on media Use another storage medium 202 Media is read only Release the write protection 210 Media has not been inserted Insert a storage medium into the drive 211 Media is damaged or not formatted Use another storage medium or carry out formatting 212 Format error Try formatting again or use another storage medium 213 The file is read only Access another file or write enable the file 214 There is no file or directory See the Communication Interface User s Manual 215 Exceeded the allowable number of files Use another storage medium Delete unneeded files 216 The file or directory name is incorrect See sections 9 1 and 9 3 217 Unknown file type Specify another file 218 Directory exists Delete the directory or change directory neme See section 9 1 219 Invalid file or directory operation Tried to delete multiple directory levels 220 The file is already in use Try again later Wait until the file is accessible Errors Related to the Historical Trend Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 230 There is no setting file Specify another file 231 Abnormal setting exists in file Specify another file 232 There is no available data Appears when displaying historical trends Specify another file 233 The specified historical data do not exist Appears when switching to historical trend from information display See section 8 1 234 The specified channel is not assigned to
262. channel models the setting menu is not displayed Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to the Setting mode Control gt MENU key switch to the Set mode gt 2 soft key select Tag Moving average Alarm delay The following display appears c gt jon 04 2000 19 40 52 80 ME C First CH 61 Last CH a1 Tag BMoon Hoving average Count IM 04L31A01 03E suoleiedg dnjes palejey uolouny juewssnseoyy E 7 1 Settings Related to Measurement Inputs Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note The value is set using the pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Saving the Settings in Basic Setting Mode 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed Setting the A D Integral Time Scan Interv
263. ck release password is incorrect See section 11 2 87 This key is locked See section 11 2 88 This function is locked See section 11 2 89 Press FUNC key to login See section 11 3 90 No permission to enter to the SETUP mode See section 11 3 91 Password is incorrect See sections 11 2 and 11 3 IM 04L31A01 03E 12 1 BunooyseqnoiL R 12 1 Messages Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 92 Press ESC key to change to operation mode Press the ESC key 93 String including space or all space cannot be specified Spaces are not allowed in the Web browser user name and password 94 More than one address cannot be specified Only a single sender is allowed 100 IP address doesn t belong to class A B or C See the Communication Interface User s Manual 101 The result of the masked IP address is all Os or 1s See the Communication Interface User s Manual 102 SUBNET mask is incorrect See the Communication Interface User s Manual 103 The net part of default gateway is not equal to that of IP address See the Communication Interface User s Manual 104 FTP client failed because the memory mode is manual See the Communication Interface User s Manual 120 The start segment number is greater than the end segment number See section 5 6 121 The On time is greater than the Off time See section 5 5 130 The low
264. conditions for switching the segment are available e Switching for continuation initial value Hold on switching Local mode end Reset mode end Switching for Continuation When the segment set to switching for continuation ends the next segment is executed When switching for continuation is specified on the last segment the program operation is the same as when reset end is specified Below is an example of segment switching for continuation PV When SEG n ends the A operation continues i to the next segment i SEG n 1 SEG n SEG n 1 n 1t098 Final SP of segment n gt Time lt soe gt TIMEn TIMEn 1 1 44 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 11 Program Control Related Settings Hold on Switching When a segment set to hold on switching ends the program operation is paused hold operation The hold condition continues until the hold operation mode is cleared through key operation external contact or communication function If the hold operation mode is cleared at the last segment the program operation is stopped reset and each control loop enters the STOP status In addition to releasing the hold mode executing program RUN operation or executing advance during hold operation also clears the hold mode Below is an example of segment hold on switching PV N The hold mode continues Pa until it is cleared SEG n i Dn n 1 to 98 When the segment SEG n to which hold i switching h
265. control operation information in the internal memory Tag name tag comment or pattern name when program operating Pattern name while operation mode is RUN RESET HOLD ON OFF or WAIT ON OFF Operation status Date and time of occurrence Cursor Select a control operation using the cursor and select INFORMATION gt JUMP TO HISTORY from the display selection menu to display the historical trend of the data containing the selected control operation Note The status indicates if an error is occurring on an external loop using the optional Green series communication function With style number S2 or earlier the name is displayed as Tag name tag comment or program while the program is running Control Operation Display gt Program Event Summary Display Only on Models with the Program Control Option Number of the event information displayed on the bottom line Number of the event information in the internal memory Event kind Time event TIME 2 digit event number pattern name PVE 2 digit event number tag name event type or PVE 2 digit event number tag name Event ON time Event OFF time gt TIER Per 10 12 47 Ae Tiree Fer 05 17 28 25 fer 19 49 02 Tiree Fer 17 11 38 Aere6 17 27 35 Tiree Rer 06 15 03 08 Aer65 16 20 58 TIMEZ Fer 14 31 53 Aer 8 14 32 29 Event ON OFF status red ON green OFF Cursor Select an event using the cursor and select INFORMATION gt JUM
266. ction explains how to check the files and the free space on the external storage medium how to delete files and directories and how to format the external storage medium Deleting files and directories and formatting external storage media can be carried out in either Set mode or basic setting mode Displaying the Operation Display Display Operation in Set mode Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt MENU key switch to Set mode 7 soft key select Save Load Clear data After carrying out the steps above select the one of the following soft keys according to your needs Checking files and free space 6 soft key select File list The following display appears GROUP 1 oie ee ree gt LO File list Directory File name Time BC PCL 2002 02 19 28 4 DE PCL 2002 02 19 20 5 free space DO 1348 Kbytes Deleting files 7 soft key select Delete The following display appears GROUP 1 EDIP Feb 19 2002 20 55 59 Ware n ALO Delete Directory File name Time PCL 2002 02 19 20 49 PCL 2002 02 19 20 50 Formatting the external storage medium 8 soft key select format oe OD Format Volume nane a Type Quick Normal IM 04L31A01 03E 9 11 suoleiodg peo anes ed po 9 5 Managing Files and Checking the Free Space on the External Storage Medium Display Operation in basic setting mode MENU key switc
267. ction loop Loop 1 On 7 Repeat action setting END Remaining segments 300 Remaining events 800 1 2 3 4 Next 1 2 V 2 to 7 Esc key 6 1 If you set pattern parameters of other numbers g R after this step all settings up to that point are Change the settings on setting screens cleared 2 to 7 2 If you did not change the settings on the Pattern initial setting screen Note You cannot carry out setup related to program control that is explained in this chapter when communication command FE4 Output setup data file is being executed IM 04L31A01 03E 5 1 suo1e1ado dnjas payejay j01j U0D wesboldg 5 2 Program parameter setting gt Pattern initial setting This section explains how to set basic items for setting program patterns To carry out the following procedure you must set Control gt 1 Control action gt Control mode to a mode other than Off and Program control to On For details on the procedure see section 4 1 Control gt Control action In addition you must carry out Program initial setting before you can set other Program parameter setting items Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt 7 soft key select Program control parameters gt 1 soft key select Program parameter setting gt 1 soft key select Pattern initial setting The following display appears CONTROL G
268. curs during operation in auto mode or cascade mode When a failure occurs in the A D converter during operation in auto mode or cascade mode When the operation of the CX1000 is switched from run to stop The initial preset output value is set to 0 0 However the preset output value can be set to a value in the range of 5 0 to 105 0 regardless of the high and low limits of the output limiter Note ___ When setting changing the preset output value presume the case when the preset output is actually used check the appropriate output value and set the value After confirmation change the preset output only when it is necessary 1 34 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 8 Control Output Suppression Settings Anti Reset Windup Over Integration Prevention There are certain cases in which a large deviation between the SP and PV is present for an extended time such as when control operation is started In such cases the control output may reach the high limit of the output limiter and become saturated due to the integral action In the end an overshoot may occur To prevent this from happening the anti reset windup function is used to pause the integral action when the manipulated output reaches the high limit of the output limiter Stop PID Start PID computation computation ener DAN 100 Upper limit of the output limiter Time SP MENEE AE PETEN ener Time The function can be set automatically or
269. d batch number and lot number are alternately displayed every 5s when Use Batch Header see section 11 6 is being set 4 Data acquisition to the internal memory ON OFF A and B is alternately displayed Data being acquired or waiting for a trigger for event data C Data acquisition stopped D When the control mode is set to a mode other than Off and the program control is ON program control RESET red RUN green status is indicated in addition to the ON OFF status of the data acquisition to the internal memory Note For event data that starts sampling when the trigger condition is met the display indicates that sampling is in progress even in the trigger wait state The trigger wait state can be determined on the bar graph 5 Memory usage of the display data acquisition area in the internal memory Displayed when acquisition of display data is enabled Bar graph Indicates the amount of display data acquisition area that is being used Time display Remaining time of the display data acquisition area When the remaining time becomes short the time is displayed in units of minutes Remaining time Unit 100 days or more Percentage of the remaining area in the display data acquisition area 100 hours or more to Days time unit less then one day is truncated less than 100 days 60 minutes or more to Hours time unit less then one hour is truncated less than 100 hours Less than 60 minutes Minutes time unit less t
270. d 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Note The Cycle time is set using the pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key Saving the Settings 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed IM 04L31A01 03E 4 13 suoljeiadoQ dnjas payejay uoun 017U09 Se 4 5 Control gt Output processing Setting Parameters Related to Output Processing Loop number Setup items of Control output Cycle time and Analog output type are set for each loop When changing these parameters this setting is used to select the target loop number 1 or 2 initial value is 1 Note The following item boxes do not appear if the Control mode box under Control gt 1 Control action Input setting is set to Cascade Control output Select the type of control output from the following Relay Voltage pulse Current output On Off control it cannot be set for loops whose control modes are set to analog retransmission Cycle time Set the cycle time control output cycle for the time proportional PID in the range of 1 s to 1000 s This setting is valid only when Cont
271. d assign a group name to each group for easy identification Setting Measurement Groups for the Measurement Function Measurement channels or computation channels are assigned Up to six groups can be registered The groups are common to the trend digital and bar graph displays On the trend digital and bar graph displays the displayed groups can be automatically switched at 5 s 10 s 20 s 30 s or 1 min intervals For trend display the waveform of all applicable channels can be displayed on a single display rather than in groups Displaying Tags For identifying the control loops and channels tags tag comments can also be assigned to control loops can be displayed in place of numbers Control Operation Display gt Control Group Display Loop selection cursor Tag name Remote REM or local LOC Tag comment Operation running RUN operation stopped STP display section f or auto tuning blinking AT Auto manual o ae og Alarm mark PV input value PV input value inf Upper limit alarm Target setpoint Control a ut aer Red Alarm occurrence f P Green Alarm OFF Red when alarm i ccurrin Scale Target setpoint SP g The value indicates span Red Can be set lower limit or upper limit Yellow Cannot be set Process value PV Red Alarm occurrence Green Alarm OFF Control output value OUT Red Controllable Yellow Not controllable Tag When monitoring When monitoring Ta
272. d by removing the decimal point from the value range specified by Scale Lower and Scale Upper In other words if the Scale setting is 5 to 5 the value is converted to a value within the span of 10 if the Scale setting is 55 0 to 5 0 the value is converted to a value within a span of 100 In this case the resolution of the value converted to a span of 10 is lower than the value converted to a span of 100 If you change any of the parameters Mode Type Range Span Upper Lower limit Scale Upper Lower limit or PV range Lower Upper limit the following setup items parameters set using engineering units EU or EUS related to these settings will be initialized Bias alarm SP ramp down rate SP ramp up rate reference point switching hysteresis reference deviation PID parameters SP relay hysteresis ten segment input ten segment output SP low limit SP high limit alarm hysteresis and boundary of partial expanded display When set to Scale Select the Type input type from DCV TC and RTD Then set the Range Span Lower Upper limit and the Scale Lower Upper limit and Unit after the conversion according to the selected Type The selectable range for TC and RTD is the same as with the other inputs selected by Mode The selectable range of the scale is 30000 to 30000 The decimal place can be set to X XXXX XX XXX XXX XX XX
273. d to Measurement Alarms Setup Node Alarm Reflash Relay AND None Action Energize Behavior Nonhold Indicator Nonhold Rate of change Increase 1 Decrease 1 Hysteresis On On Off When setting the memory alarm Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Set mode gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 11 soft key select AUX Time zone The following display appears AUX Tag Channel Tag Memory alarm Language English Partial Not Time zone Difference from GHT 6 Off ih 2h 5h Next 1 2 Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note The value is set using the pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Saving the Settings in Basic Setting Mode 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operati
274. d to Panel3Load esseeeseereerierrerreerrerren 11 13 partial expanded display wi 1 77 8 22 Parts replacement v ccccsccevssssssssessscasecsesscoecstecsecodesecedaases M PASSWOKG 00 ceeecceecee eee eee cess eeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeaes WAN icc 3 2 ots hee tet etek en od T 6 2 patteri MAIN Ce secsiecececcchste sscadetedoxeeds dexazttdeds re Saa case eers Eai MANAGES NAME o eseseesssesesscssssessssesceseseeceseseeststseeseseeecees 11 16 pattern number Manual Operation c ccsceeecescsssseesessssesesstssssessestsssseseseesees 1 6 periodic inspection manual reset 1 33 4 28 PID constant 0 cess ceeeeetetee este tees tes eeee tees cane cesenescaeecenenenenenees Manual SAMPIe o csseeccsscss cscs tssessessessesessessestesessesesteseanees 11 13 PID control mode manual sampled data 1 87 1 89 PID group number MANUAI SAVE oecccccccccceccceccceccceteceteecesecesevessectacecsettseeteeeeses 1 88 PID initial value Manual tUNING oo ee cscs esses cscs cssesstseestesessestsseetseeeees 1 54 6 8 PID MUMDET 0 ceseceeeteteee tees teeeeneneeceteneeneneeeeneneetees Math ON Off ccccccccccccccccccccececececesceccesceescesecescuecsusteaeveseersess 10 3 PID selection method math reset ve 11 12 PO e measured data clearing Of c ccccccssesesssseseessseecesesteceseane 9 15 power supply wiring of measurement alarm c ccceescsceceseecsesceeesesceseecsecetsceeseeseeess 1 61 pre trigger oe meas
275. d value unit INT 61 OUT 1 6 2 Updating of the Numerical Display Measured computed values are updated every second every 2 s if the scan interval is setto 2 s IM 04L31A01 03E 1 77 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 16 Display Function Control Operation Display gt Bar Graph Display Displays the measured computed and control data using bar graphs Bar Graph Horizontal Display Bar graph displayed using the channel display color INT 01 PU d 28 8 Measured or computed value EENI bs n 0 0 0 INT 01 5P Unit 6 6 0 INT 01 OUT Channel No or tag name 2 000 2 000 ae Alarm that is occurring L 0 166 Specified alarm 2 000 000 02 9 177 2 000 8 187 Alarm setpoint mark Scale Left end value of the scale Right end value of the scale Bar Graph Vertical Display Alarm setpoint mark eb 19 2902 23 45 29 POP INT 01 JNT 01 5 INT 1 0 1 B2 B3 Channel No or tag name _ ___1 _ Specified alarm 198 8 2 000 2 000 2 00 Top scale value Scale 100 0 168 6 _ Page eter a 4 Bottom scale value t e e Pe e a e 28 9 589 8 B B B 178 B 181 B 191 and unit Bar graph Channel display color Measured or computed value Updating of the Bar Graph and Numerical Displays Measured computed values and bar graphs are updated every second every 2 s if the scan interval is set
276. davenesits sues crteepastessiaaaass 1 63 alarm Standby 0 0 eee cee cee eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 1 5 1 39 AlarmMsSUMMANY mrsrsngsesprirnnn nainn 1 79 alarmi Yp se escecscciesecessessccceszcssessacccascaveesseasczssasvesseasaecadterees 1 38 alarm value 1 39 4 24 7 8 10 6 AN AMMA GK sensia aisiara saa 4 23 7 7 11 12 all channel display 0 0 0 0 eee cece eee eeeteeseteeeeeeees 8 7 8 9 analog control input terminal block 2 5 analog input for loop control analog output selection of analog retransmission Analog OUtput type cecceceeeceeceeeceeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeeseeeeeteeaees AND esasan seed tec gece evi ataa tde ASAS Aa odes cesta eee AND OR E a ti reset WINGUD ssrerarinae ai i application NAME sisirin e ASCII file wo AT eenaa ATA flash memory card sri AUT essi ated nde e aanraai a aa araa Zaan Dana aR AUTO INCFEMENE sonjin as aa ii AULO lOGOU sirsa auto message for program run reset auto operation oo eens AULO SAVE NEEE E TTT EEE auto save interval cece cece cee ceeeceeeeeeeeeaeee teat eeteteeeeteeeeeetaes AUTO TUNING sssri auto manual cascade switching between B background Color ccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeaeeeeeeaeeseeeaeenees backlight SAVER siss sisshadectissteedsevnisiovessiveteessessessancdenns bar graph bar graph display basic setting mode DattCh headet ccc 2 lt sccscciseccsccenztsccnsss ccs seessensszacessseence
277. display position setting IM 04L31A01 03E suolouny jo uoneuejdxg 1 2 Control Function Overview Switching Displays Control related settings are entered in basic setting mode and control setting mode In addition settings common to control and measurement are entered in the common and measurement setting mode Power ON Display Transition Diagram Operation mode End soft key gt DISP ENTER key This operation saves the settings made in the basic setting mode Operation display lt MENU key or ESC key MENU key ESC key Control setting mode Common and measurement setting mode Basic setting Setting mode Control Set mode mode MENU key Press the FUNC Menu Press the FUNC Menu key for s Menu key for 3 s Soft keys MENU key or Soft keys MENU key or oft keys ESC key ESC key ESC key Setup display 1 to 8 Setup display 1 to 11 Setup display 1 to 12 1 to 9 when program control 1 to 11 Basic common and is ON measurement settings 12 Basic control settings Basic Control Setup Items in Basic Setting Mode 1 Control action PID number control period zone PID restart mode restart mode program only on models with the control option initial PID auto tuning control mode method only during
278. displayed as follows When Fmin lt Fmax When Fmin gt Fmax Input Range and Measurable Range When the input type is set to DC voltage thermocouple resistance temperature detector or ON OFF input you will select the range to match the input signal For DC voltage select the measurable range select 20mV for 20 00 to 20 00 mV For thermocouple or resistance temperature detector select the type For example the type selections for the thermocouple are R S B K E J T N W L U PLATINEL PR40 20 and W3Re W25Re If R is selected the measurable range is 0 0 C to 176 0 C In addition you will set the measurement span Span lower limit and Span high limit within the measurable range as the actual range for making measurements Burnout Detection When measuring the temperature using a thermocouple you can have the measurement result set to positive overrange or negative overrange when a burnout occurs Burnout can be set on each measurement channel The initial setting is set so that burnout is not detected 1 Positive overrange refers to the condition in which the input signal is exceeding the upper limit of the measurable range of the input range The measured value is show as 2 Negative overrange refers to the condition in which the input signal is less than the lower limit of the measurable range of the input range The measured v
279. displaying various information such as alarm summary message summary memory summary and control summary Procedure Switching Displayed Information 1 Press the DISP ENTER key to show the display selection menu 2 Select INFORMATION using the up and down arrow keys 3 Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu 4 Select the desired item using the up and down arrow keys FF overview i ie MEOR ih MATION Page TREND HISTORY 5 Press the DISP ENTER key to show the display for the selected item Switching to the Historical Trend 1 Select the item for displaying the historical trend alarm message etc using the ea RR Jan G4 19 53 27 eal 2R Jan G4 19 58 23 Jan G4 19 59 26 eo RMR Jan G4 19 57 59 Jan 04 19 53 03 ea 2R Jan G4 195754 Jan G4 19 57 57 ea 2R Jan G4 19 57 47 Jan 04 1995758 ea 2R Jan G4 19 57 43 Jan 4 19 97 44 ea 2R Jan 04 19 97 31 Jan 04 19957233 INT 01 2AL Jan 04 19 97 13 ot 1H Jan 4 19257214 ea 2R Jan 4 19 56 45 Jan 4 19 97 12 ea RR Jan 4 19 56 40 Jan G4 19 56 41 ea 2R Jan G4 19 56 32 Jan 04 19 56 34 2 Press the DISP ENTER key to show the display selection menu 3 Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu 4 Select JUMP TO HISTORY using the up and down arrow keys ERS DIGITAL gt ALARH SUMMARY ul sar FF overview iq INFOR TAE MATION 5 Press the DISP ENTER key to show the historical trend To close the menu without switching the display
280. dition and subtraction Greater than and less than GT LT GE LE Equal and not equal EQ NE Logical product AND Logical sum and exclusive logical sum OR XOR low order of precedence App 8 IM 04L31A01 03E Appendix 2 Supplementary Explanation of the Computation Function Displaying the Computed Data The computed data of computation channels can be displayed in each operation display Rolling Average Alarm Displaying Waveforms and Bar Graphs The data are displayed in the range defined by the upper and lower limits of the span For the procedure in assigning measured data to measurement channels see section 10 1 Assigning Computation Channels and Setting Computing Equations Constants and Tags For the procedure in setting other items related to the display see chapter 8 Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents Numerical Display The range of displayed values of computed data is from 999999999 to 9999999 excluding the decimal point The decimal point position corresponds to the position of the decimal point of the upper and lower limit span of the computation channel On the numerical display values are displayed if the computed data is within the above range regardless of the upper and lower limits of span However special displays are used for cases given in the table below Computed Data Status Computation Status Display When the computed result
281. dition is met The initial value is 0 Trigger Type of Event Data You can set the type when the acquisition mode of event data is set to Trigger or Rotate You can select the type of trigger used to start the acquisition of the event data from the following If you specify multiple trigger types OR logic is applied to the triggers Thus if any of the trigger conditions are met event data acquisition is started Type Description Key trigger The trigger condition is satisfied when the FUNC gt Trigger soft key or the USER key only when the trigger function is assigned to the USER key is pressed External trigger If Trigger is assigned to the remote control terminal the trigger condition is satisfied with a remote input Alarm trigger The trigger condition is satisfied when any of the alarms occur Number of Data Points That Can Be Acquired to the Internal Memory and Sampling Length This section describes the number of display data and event data points that can be acquired to the internal memory and the sampling length The information can be used to estimate the time until the internal memory becomes full or used to determine the number of channels and sampling interval for saving the data For the auto save interval of display data and sampling length of event data a selectable range of values are assigned to the soft keys and displayed based on the information described here Number of Bytes per Channel Di
282. ditions listed below within the relevant time period one hour for hourly reports and one day for daily reports for example status is output to the report Data Condition Status Common to measurement and computation channels Measurement error or computation error E For measurement channels Positive overrange 0 Negative overrange 0 When the input type is voltage over range occurs when the measured value exceeds the measurable range of 5 Suppose the measurement range is 2 V and the measurable range is 2 000 to 2 000 V If the measured value exceeds 2 200 V positive over range results if the measured value falls below 2 200 V negative over range results If the input type is TC thermocouple or RTD resistance temperature detector over range occurs when the measured value exceeds approximately 10 C of the measurable range Suppose the measurement range is R and the measurable range is 0 0 to 1760 0 C If the measured value exceeds 1770 0 C positive over range results if the measured value falls below 10 0 C negative over range results For computation channels Positive computation overflow when the value exceeds 3 4E 38 O Negative computation overflow when the value falls below 3 4E 38 O Power Failure Time Change Status When a power failure occurs P When the time is changed C App 18 IM 04L31A01 03E Appendix 4 Additional Explanation of the Report
283. e 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Auto message for program Run Reset On Off If you select On initial setting a message is automatically written on the trend display when program control is started and when program control is stopped as shown in the figure below If you do not wish to write messages select Off The message upon program operation start is Pattern name top 12 characters space RUN and the message upon program operation stop is Pattern name top 12 characters space RST Program display position Position On the program selection display and program control display the specified patterns and PV waveforms can be displayed in the same display frame full display as well as display data by dividing the display position per loop split display When using split display select the display position number from 1 or 2 for each loop Applicable loops are those set to Control gt 1 Control action gt Control mode to a mode other than Off and Program control to On During cascade control even numbered loops within the same terminal block are not displayed IM 04L31A01 03E 5 10 AUX Auto message Display position Full display example 28 min div 200 0 Setting Loop 1 1 Loop 2 2 28miin div Display position number Operat
284. e Batch header BT1 Option 1 2 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu Press the Message soft key to display a list of messages Write and Set soft keys appear Displaying a message on the trend screen Writing a message to the internal memory Press the Write soft key Eight soft keys for the messages and a window containing a list of messages are displayed Press the soft key corresponding to the message you wish to write A message mark time and the message itself are displayed on the trend display and the information is written to the internal memory Changing message strings Press the Set soft key The Message1 to Message3 soft keys and a window containing a list of messages are displayed Press the soft key corresponding to the message to be changed A window to enter a message string appears Enter the massage using the character number input key Press the DISP ENTER key Setting the Messages Characters Enter the message string using up to 16 alphanumeric characters Up to 8 messages can be entered No 1 to 8 8 12 IM 04L31A01 03E 8 9 Measurement Function gt Changing the Trip Line of the Trend Display This section explains how to set the trip line that can be displayed on the trend display Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt MENU key switch to Set mode
285. e Control Measurement Input Terminal Block There are five input terminals When PV SP computation is OFF the PV inputs PV and RSP inputs RSP are assigned as shown in the following figure depending on the control mode The following figure denotes the three terminals b A B of a single column using a single cell In addition of the 12 columns of terminals the left most column that has no terminal screws because they are not used are omitted Control mode setting gt LOOP2_ gt LOoPt Measurement input terminals During single loop control RSP Pv RSP PV E a a Oo E During cascade control gt PV RSP PV E E E a E E During loop control with gt _Pv2 Pvi RSP Pv2 PV1 a a a a E a PV switching PV PV1 PV2 PV input RSP RSP input not used during program control 0 unused terminal When PV SP is ON the numbers Cl01 Cl02 Cl03 Cl04 and Cl05 are assigned to each control input terminal starting on the right as you face the terminals and the PV SP of each loop is the computed value IM 04L31A01 03E 2 5 Bundi pue uoneyye su D 2 3 Wiring Terminal Arrangements of the Control Output Terminal Block Each block has a control output containing 2 loops of current output voltage pulse output and relay contact output terminals 6 contact input 2 relay contact output and 4 transistor output terminals The f
286. e Description Free Press the START key to start acquiring data to the intemal memory press the STOP key to stop the acquisition Data is overwritten when the event data acquisition area is full or when the number of event data files exceeds 16 Number of event data files In manual save mode a file is created for each data write operation start and stop operations In auto save mode a file is created every specified time data length and at every specified date time Trigger When the acquisition area of the internal memory is not divided A single event data file is created in the internal memory When the START key is pressed the CX1000 enters a trigger wait state After the trigger condition is met a specified time data length of data is acquired and acquisition is stopped Beyond this point no more data is acquired even if the trigger condition is met Data acquisition ZN Trigger wait gt Trigger condition Sto met p When the acquisition area of the internal memory is divided A single event data file is created in each divided area block When the START key is pressed the CX1000 enters a trigger wait state After the trigger condition is met a specified time of data is acquired in a single block and acquisition is stopped The CX1000 enters the trigger wait state If the trigger condition is met again data is acquired to the next block When data is acquired to all blocks no more data
287. e SP and the PV exceeds the reference deviation setting For example when the deviation is large you can increase the proportional gain decrease the proportional band to make the output reach the SP quickly The switching of the PID constant by the reference deviation has precedence over the switching of the PID constant by the zone PID When the actual deviation becomes smaller than the reference deviation setting the CX1000 returns to the operation using the PID constant assigned to the zone corresponding to the PV at that point The previously described switching hysteresis is also applied to the reference deviation Reference point 2 vrs eeepc yee teeter pe geeeeees A Reference deviation value Reference deviation value Reference If the PID ber is 8 and point 1 e group number is 8 an the PV exceeds the reference deviation value the operation switches to the PID constant of PID number 8 regardless of the zone No 1 PID No 2 PID No 8 PID Proportional Band P The proportional band is specified in the range of 0 1 to 999 9 of the measurement span Integral Time I The integral time is set in the range of 0 to 6000 s Derivative Time D The derivative time is set in the range of 0 to 6000 s Control Output Limiter The control output limiter is a function that allows the upper and lower limits of the operation range of the control output output limiter regardless of operation mode Select
288. e alarm ON OFF is slow because the hysteresis width has been widened HY1 5 0 C example lt HY1 15 0 C example Close ON Open Close ON AL 1 setpoint 100 0 C AL 1 setpoint 100 0 C example example lt Alarm ON lt OFF lt ON lt OFF Alarm ON lt ON Time IM 04L31A01 03E 1 39 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 11 Program Control Related Settings Selecting the PID Selection Method When program control is turned ON select segment PID method zone PID selection OFF or zone PID method Segment PID method Segment PID method is a function in which the PID setpoint is switched for each segment according to the program pattern setting during program operation Therefore this method is suitable for control in which the PID constant is changed during ramp up and ramp down in the same PV region If the current operation is at the 5th segment the PID constant of No 1 is used SEGI SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEG5 SEG6 SEG7 i z No 2PID No 1PID No 3PID Zone PID method Zone PID method is a function in which the PID setpoint is automatically switched according to the PV Therefore the same PID constant is used in the same PV region regardless of the ramp up and ramp down program operation This method is used on equipment such as reactors in which the chemical reaction gain varies depending on the temperature As shown in the following figu
289. e cause of error at the remote input occurs at Switching to PRG using PRG LOC When program control is in reset mode Switch to RUN of program control Changing SP During auto tuning remote mode program mode or cascade control when MODE of the secondary loop is CAS Stop auto tuning switch to local mode or switch to auto manual operation Changing OUT When the operation is stopped or when operation mode is not manual MODE is not MAN Switch to manual operation Error messages for the operations above Switching to CAS using MODE Switching to REM using REM LOC Switching to PRG using PRG LOC Changing SP or OUT When the computation of the loop specified in PV SP computed results in an error Cascade mode cannot be selected Remote mode cannot be selected Program mode cannot be selected Can not operate in the present situation 6 6 IM 04L31A01 03E 6 2 Switching Displays on the Overview Display Procedure Since the control overview display cannot show the control status of all groups on a single display two displays overview 1 that displays groups 1 to 4 and overview 2 that displays groups 5 to 8 are used This section explains how to switch between the two For the operations on the control display and common operations such as changing the display style or operation mode on the control overview display see section 6 1 Operatio
290. e control function s hysteresis alarm setting procedure Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt 7 soft key select Detailed setting DIO monitor and operation etc 8 soft key when program control is ON gt 2 soft key Hysteresis Alarm The following display appears fun 10 2003 19 20 31 ex ENO oa Hysteresis Alarm Alarm Loop number Ba Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item box 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note For setup item boxes that require values to be entered a pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key is used 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box IM 04L31A01 03E 4 35 suoljeiadoQ dnjas payejay uoun 017U09 g 4 15 Hysteresis Alarm Hysteresis Settings Alarm Loop number You can enter the alarm setting for each loop When changing these settings select a loop to be changed from 1 to 6 default is 1 Only the number of loops
291. e control mode and whether program operation is enabled IM 04L31A01 03E App 39 xipueddy Appendix 7 Control Function Block Diagram Single Loop Control Program Control Co Oro Expansion contact input Input type selection Program pattern selection Unit selection i i Analog input range conversion Hold operation start Advance oppration start Square root computation Ten segment linearizer approximation N ten segment linearizer bias PV input bias Program operation PV input filter SP 1 to8 4e S uoneado wesbolg joys uonesodo Welbolq Note Does not function i during program control PV event output Time event output Measurement alarm function 566066 PV Meas Meas Time Time bee event alarm alarm event event 1 2 1 2 1 2 Control output Note There are 6 contact input terminals and 6 contact output terminals on a single control output terminal block The functions that can be assigned to each input output terminal vary depending on the control mode and whether program operation is enabled App 40 IM 04L31A01 03E Appendix 7 Control Function Block Diagram Cascade Control Fixed Point Control Contact input PV input Primary loop PV input Secondary loop Input type selection Input type selection Input type selection i i AUT MAN Castade Unit selection Unit selection i H i Unit selection H Ana
292. e data in the internal memory Data That Are Cleared Items that are cleared are display data event data manual sample data TLOG data option report data option and log information 3 14 IM 04L31A01 03E 3 6 Changing the Displayed Language This section explains how to change the language used on the display Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Setting mode Control gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 11 soft key select Aux Time zone AUX Tag Channel Tag Memory alarm lh Language Partial Not Time zone Difference from GMT 4 English Japanese German French Chinese Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the Language box English Japanese German French and Chinese appear in the soft key menu at the bottom of the display 2 Press the English Japanese German French or Chinese soft key The Language box turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Saving the Settings 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation window appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key IM 04L31A01 03E su
293. e for primary control PV1 PV2 v spl PID 4 PID y OUT Loop control with PV switching Single loop control that switches between two PV inputs PV1 and PV2 according to the following conditions PV1 PV2 seo OUT Input Switching Condition Method on the setting display e Auto switching according to the PV range Range on the setting display Switches PV inputs PV1 and PV2 automatically according to the preset PV switching low limit and PV switching high limit as shown in the following figure However PV1 must be less than PV2 PV PV range high limit PV2 Process value according to the equation PV1 PV switching high limit PV switching low limit PV range low limit The PV value is computed using the following equation when PV switching lower limit lt PV1 lt PV switching upper limit and PV switching lower limit lt PV2 lt PV switching upper limit _ __PV input 1 PV switching low limit x PV input 14 f PV input 1 PV switching low limit PV switching high limit PV switching low limit PV switching high limit PV switching low limit e Auto switching according to the PV switching upper limit PVHigh on the setting display The preset PV switching upper limit and PV1 are compared Auto switching is performed according to the following conditions The switching hysteresis is approximately 0 5 of the PV range span When PV1 lt PV switching upper value
294. e internal memory to the external storage medium from Auto and Manual Manual When you insert an external storage medium into the drive and close the operation cover a message Do you want to save measured data appears Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key to save the data In manual save mode set how the data is to be saved Unsave save only the data that has not been saved or All Save all the data at Trend Save interval Message File User key DST setting display gt Save data see page 9 6 Auto By having the external storage medium inserted in the drive at all times data save operation is automatically carried out at specified intervals Data Select the type of data to be acquired to the internal memory from Display display data only E D display data and event data and Event event data only Event only when Data is set to E D or Event Sample rate Select the interval used to save the event data from the following 1s 2s 5s 10s 30s 60s 120s 300s and 600s Mode Select the mode from Free Trigger and Rotate Free appears as a choice only when Data is set to Event When set to Free the following parameters Block Data length Pre trigger and Trigger are not available Block Select the number of blocks when dividing the event data acquisition area into blocks Select from 2 4 8 and 16 Select 1 if you do not wish to divide the area into bl
295. e is displayed in the window DO Automatic and Manual Switching Specified in the DIO Operation Monitoring Function You can switch the output mode for the DO specified in the DIO Operation Monitoring Function When set to AUTO the internal switch status is output When set to MAN you can switch the direct output value between 0 and 1 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired control loop 2 Press the MODE soft key A pop up window switching between auto and manual appears CONTROL GROUP1 poga INT 1 Auto manual switching window 3 Select Select AUTO or MAN using the up and down arrow keys 4 Press DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes To close the window without making any changing press the ESC key Changing the Output Value of the DO Specified with the DIO Operation Monitoring Function MAN must be set for the MODE using the procedure above 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired control loop 2 Press the OUT soft key The Output Value Setting window appears MODE UT OS 3 Change the output value using the up and down arrow keys The currently set control output value is displayed in the window Run Stop Operation The following operations cannot be performed if the operation is started Settings in basic setting mode If you attempt to enter basic setting mode an error message This action is not possible during sampling calculating or controlling appears Contr
296. e program control screen operations only on models with the option Measurement Function Related Setup Operations Describes how to set the PV input of the measurement function and alarms measurement alarms Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents Describes how to change the operating display of both the control function and the measurement function and the display format Data Save Load Operations Describes how to write various data to the internal memory how to save and load from the external storage medium and the file operations on the external storage medium 10 Computation and Report Function Related Operations Only on Models with the Computation Function Option Describes how to set and execute operations related to the computation function and report function of the computation function option 11 Operations of Other Functions Describes the USER key key lock login logout of key operation log display and remote input setting 12 Troubleshooting Describes the error messages and the troubleshooting measures of the CX1000 13 Maintenance Describes periodic inspection calibration and recommended replacement period for worn parts 14 Specifications Describes the specifications of the CX1000 Appendix Describes the acquisition function of measured data to the internal memory additional information on the computation and report functions the ASCII file format and ini
297. e protective grounding before connecting to the item under measurement or to an external control unit Damage to the Protective Structure Operating the CX1000 in a manner not described in this manual may damage its protective structure Exemption from Responsibility YOKOGAWA makes no warranties regarding the product except those stated in the WARRANTY that is provided separately YOKOGAWA assumes no liability to any party for any loss or damage direct or indirect caused by the user or any unpredictable defect of the product Handling Precautions of the Software YOKOGAWA makes no warranties regarding the software accompanying this product except those stated in the WARRANTY that is provided separately Use the software on a single PC You must purchase another copy of the software if you are to use the software on another PC Copying the software for any purposes other than backup is strictly prohibited Please store the original media containing the software in a safe place Reverse engineering such as decompiling of the software is strictly prohibited No portion of the software supplied by YOKOGAWA may be transferred exchanged sublet or leased for use by any third party without prior permission by YOKOGAWA IM 04L31A01 03E iii Checking the Contents of the Package CX1000 Unpack the box and check the contents before operating the instrument If some of the contents are not correct or missing or if there
298. e relay output ON or OFF Number Select relay output terminal numbers from the following DO001 006 SW001 SW018 internal switch style number S3 or later Action Displays the relay output action Energize Deenergize per the settings IM 04L31A01 03E suoljei3ad dnjas payejay jo1j U0D wesbolg fo 5 10 AUX Auto message Display position This section explains the procedures for setting auto message printing during program control and the display position for each loop on the program control display Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Setting mode Control gt 7 soft key select Program control parameters gt 3 soft key select AUX Auto message Display position The following display appears CONTROL GROUP2 8 Gonn ce eal 5 Aux Auto message Display position Auto message for program Run Reset On Off Program display position Position Tag Tag comment Loop 1 1 INT 81 Loop 2 2 INT 82 Auto change to program run display On Off off On Off Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to chang
299. e segment number 1 to 99 to which the event is to be assigned Event kind Select the type of event to be assigned PVEvent or TimeEvent Event No Set the target set number 1 8 or 9 16 1to 16 The time event or PV event number The number of time events and PV events that can be set per segment is 16 each Loop when PVEvent is selected Set the target loop number of the PV event to 1 or 2 Up to 16 events can be assigned Select Off initial setting for the number of the loops to which the event is not to be assigned IM 04L31A01 03E 5 6 Program parameter setting gt Event setting Type when PVEvent is selected Select the type of PV event from the following PV high limit PV H PV low limit PV L deviation high limit Dev H deviation low limit Dev L deviation high amp low limit Dev H amp L deviation within high amp low limits D W H amp L SP high limit SP H SP low limit SP L output high limit Out H and output low limit Out L Value when PVEvent is selected Set the value in the following range according to the type of PV event PV SP event EU 0 0 to 100 0 of the measurement span Deviation high limit event low limit event EUS 100 0 to 100 0 of the measurement span Deviation high amp low limit within high amp low limits EUS 0 0 to 100 0 of the measurement span Output event 5 to 105 of output On1 On2 On3 Off when TimeEvent is selected Set the ON
300. e span See section 8 13 31 Partial expansion display is set ON for a SKIPPED channel See the Communication Interface User s Manual 35 The upper and lower limits of the display band are equal See section 8 11 36 The lower limit of the display band is greater than the upper limit See section 8 11 37 The display band is narrower than 4 of the entire display See section 8 11 40 Incorrect group set character string See sections 6 1 and 8 2 41 There is no specified input channel See the Communication Interface User s Manual 42 Exceeded the number of channels which can be set See the Communication Interface User s Manual 43 A channel number cannot repeat in a group See section 8 2 45 There is no character string saved in the clipboard Copy a character string to the clipboard 46 The character string saved in the clipboard is too long Paste a character string with the specified number of characters 61 There is no channel specified by the MATH expression See section 10 1 62 MATH expression grammar is incorrect See section 10 1 63 MATH expression sequence is incorrect See section 10 1 64 MATH upper and lower span values are equal See section 10 1 70 The range of the MATH constant is exceeded See section 10 1 71 Set range of the MATH constant is exceeded See section 10 1 81 All space or quit string cannot be specified See section 11 3 85 The login password is incorrect See section 11 3 86 The key lo
301. e the AND logic All subsequent relays will be set to OR logic Available selections are None I01 101 only 101 102 101 and 102 101 103 101 to 103 101 104 101 to 104 101 105 101 to 105 and 101 106 101 to 106 Only the relays that can be used on the installed measurement alarm option terminal block A6 A6R A4F or A4FR option are valid Note If the reflash alarm is turned ON AND setting is invalid It is fixed to OR logic operation Action Select whether the alarm output relay is energized Energize or de energized De_energize when an alarm occurs IM 04L31A01 03E 7 9 suoleiedg dnjes palejey uolouny juewssnseoyy a 7 2 Settings Related to Measurement Alarms Behavior Select one of the following output relay behaviors when the alarm condition switches from an alarm activated condition to an alarm released condition normal condition The setting applies to all alarm output relays If the alarm output relay option is not installed the setting is disabled Nonhold initial value Turn OFF output relay when the alarm is cleared Hold Hold the output relay at ON until an alarm ACK operation is performed Indicator Select the alarm indication behavior when the alarm condition switches from an alarm activated condition to an alarm released condition from the following Nonhold initial value Clear the alarm indication when the alarm is cleared Hold Hold the alarm indication u
302. e the value of all the items you wish to change 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Event Display Groups See section 5 6 Program Parameter Setting gt Event Setting for information on event settings Pattern Number Enter a group for each program pattern You can display events registered to pattern groups selected in the program selection screen Detail Select either time event or PV event Number Select numbers of events selected by type 5 16 IM 04L31A01 03E Chapter 6 Operations during Control Operation 6 1 Operations on the Control Group Display Switching Displayed Information and Control Operation Modes This section explains the operations that you can perform on the control group display Similar operations can be performed also on the control overview display On the control display you cannot switch the run reset mode or switch to hold operation for program control These operations are performed on the program control display For details see section 6 4 Operations on the Program Control Display Procedure Switching the Display Group Display Style and Display Screen Using the display selection menu 1 Press the DISP ENTER key to show the display selection menu 2 With Control selected press the right arrow key to display the sub menu Switch to a display other
303. e two control methods PV derivative type PID control method and deviation derivative type PID control method As shown in the figure below the control method is automatically selected In addition the presence or absence of the control output bump at the point of change of the SP is automatically selected When performing program control in standard PID control mode on models with the program control option deviation derivative type PID control is used during operation except during hold and soak and on the secondary loop of cascade control For all other cases PV derivative type PID control is used Type of PID Control Mode Control Method Description of the Control Operation Standard PID control mode PV derivative type PID During operation in local mode or auto mode only the primary side during cascade control With bumps in the control output at the time the SP is changed Employs a PV derivative type PID so that the output reaches the new SP quickly after the target setpoint is changed In PV derivative type PID the proportional terms P that are proportional to the deviation that occurred due to the SP change are output immediately forcing the process value to quickly reach the new SP Initial value Deviation derivative By applying the derivative term eae the an that type PID occurs due to minute changes i A the program pattern the process During operation in remote value q
304. e waveform display range and expands the rest of the section In this function you specify the destination position the new boundary position where a single value boundary point in the display range is moved In the example in the figure 0 V boundary value is moved to the 30 position of the display range new boundary position The 30 below the boundary corresponds to 6 V to 0 V and 70 above the boundary corresponds to O V to 6 V When partial expanded display is not used When partial expanded display is used Percentage with Percentage with Measured respect to the Measured respect to the value display span value display span 6V 100 6V 100 7 8 a Boundary ao N New 2 0 50 boundary position 2 0 30 im Reduced section 6V 0 6V 0 x Time axis Time axis Waveform color and line thickness The waveform color can be set or changed for each channel The waveform color and the bar color in the bar graph display are the same You can select the thickness of the waveform line from 1 to 3 dots The thickness of the line cannot be set separately for each channel Control Operation Display gt Digital Display Displays the measured computed and control data numerically using large numbers 3 o2 qa amo aCA Channel No or tag name Specified alarm 0 P 162 Measured or compute
305. ect scale when scaling the input signal to values with an appropriate unit for the application If you select scale set the lower and upper limits Type setting only when measurement mode is set to scale Select the type of input signal from Volt TC thermocouple and RTD resistance temperature detector Range Set the range thermocouple or resistance temperature detector type that matches the input signal type This setting determines the measurement range measurable range Thermocouple R S B K E J T N W L U PLATINEL PR40 20 and W3Re W25Re Resistance temperature detector Jpt100 and Pt100 Voltage Standard signal 1 5 V when measurement mode is set to 1 5 V Current voltage 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 2 V 6 V 20 V and 50 V Span Set the measurement span the actual range of control upper limit and low limit within the minimum and maximum values of the measurement range Unit You can enter the unit using up to 6 alphanumeric characters Input Filter The input filter can be used to eliminate noise when harmonic noise is included in the PV input such as in current signals and pressure signals The input filter is first order lag computation The larger the time constant parameter setting the stronger the noise elimination function becomes The input filter is also used for the improvement of the controllability and for phase correction The time constant of the input filter
306. ection 4 3 communication error see the Communication Interface User s Manual 721 Program operation cannot be started when auto tuning is activated Contact input error section 4 3 communication error see the Communication Interface User s Manual 722 Program operation cannot be started with PV Contact input error Section 4 3 communication error see the Communication Interface User s Manual 723 Program operation is not activated Contact input error section 4 3 communication error see the Communication Interface User s Manual 724 Can not operate in the present situation Operation error section 6 1 Contact input error section 4 3 communication error see the Communication Interface User s Manual 725 Modbus Communication Error See the Communication Interface User s Manual 726 The specified target is not assigned to the control group Specify another loop 729 Can not operation before the starting time of program pattern IM 04L31A01 03E 12 9 BunooyseqnoiL 12 1 Messages System Errors Servicing is required when a system error occurs Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs Code Message 901 ROM failure 902 RAM failure 910 A D memory failure for all input channels 911 Channel 1 A D memory failure 912 Channel 2 A D memory failure 913 Channel 3 A D memory
307. ed However PV start does not apply to loops in local mode or loops that are stopped In cascade control PV start does not apply if the primary loop is in local mode or the secondary loop is stopped If PV start cannot be carried out starting target setpoint start is carried out 1 50 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 11 Program Control Related Settings Program Operation Start Delay You can set a delay program start time in starting the actual program pattern control after carrying out the procedure for starting the program operation The setting is common to all loops and is valid for a single program operation The delay cannot be specified during program control The control output during program control is a preset value Hold and advance operations cannot be performed while delay is in effect Selectable range of program start time 00 00 00 to 99 59 59 PV J SP x 3 Program operation starts gt Time Program start operation Delay elapses Specifying the Start Segment at the Time Program Operation Is Started Hold Operation You can specify the start segment number that is used at the time program operation is started For example this function can be used when you wish to set the program currently in operation back to the previous segment and restart the operation Below is an example in which the operation is started from segment 3 Process value 4 SEGI SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 When set to time pr
308. ed computed result not the computed PID value PID control and ON OFF control are available The following control modes can be selected for both PID control and ON OFF control Control Mode In PID control the following three control modes are available in relation to the PV input selection Single loop control Basic control consisting of a single system of controller CPU PV 4 SP _PID OUT Cascade control Control consisting of two systems of controller CPUs that use the primary control output as the secondary control SP PV1 PV2 4 SP PID PID v OUT Loop control with PV switching Single loop control that is switched between two PV inputs PV1 and PV2 according to a specified condition PV1 PV2 so OUT In PID control you can also select the PID control mode PID Control Mode Depending on the desired operation at the time the SP is changed you can select the PID control mode from below The selections between the PV derivative type and deviation derivative type as well as the presence or absence of the control output bumps are automatically made according to the PID control mode and operation mode fixed point control or program control Standard PID control Controlled so that the control output reaches the new SP quickly after the SP is changed PV derivative type PID Deviation derivative type PID with output bump with output bump PV an PV OUT SP
309. edecedsstsssiatevsasdeksdesinavsaxtante tezedeaiaieestadeieseseess wait ZONE NUMDETL ceccceceseseeceeeecsseeaeeeeeesesneaeeeeeseeenenees 5 7 Web browser operation 10g c eee cee ceeeeeeeesneeeeeeeees 11 9 Z AAD GIS Kiss sie snina aE ESA S SERES zone display a3 Zone lower upper limit 2 0 eee eect ce eeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees Zone PID method siinne zone PID selection zooming in on the time axis x pul IM 04L31A01 03E Index 5 Index
310. ee the CX1000 CX2000 Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L31A01 17E Communication Errors For information regarding the communication function of the CX1000 see the CX1000 CX2000 Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L31A01 17E e Errors during Setting and Basic Setting Modes Output Communication Command Execution and Setup Data Loading Code Message 300 Command is too long 301 Too many number of commands delimited with 302 This command has not been defined 303 Data request command can not be enumerated with sub delimiter 350 Command is not permitted to the current user level 351 This command cannot be specified in the current mode 352 The option is not installed 353 This command cannot be specified in the current setting 354 This command is not available during sampling calculating or controlling 357 The setup output command cannot be executed in this conditions Memory Access Errors during Setting and Basic Setting Modes and Output Communication Command Execution An English error message is returned via the communication interface It is not displayed on the screen Code Message 360 Output interface must be chosen from Ethernet or RS by using XO command 361 The memory data is not saved for the communication output 362 There are no data to send NEXT or RESEND 363 All data have already been transferred
311. elevant time period one hour for hourly reports and one day for daily reports for example status is output to the report Data Condition Status Common to measurement and computation channels Measurement error or computation error E For measurement channels Positive over range 0 Negative over range O When the input type is voltage over range occurs when the measured value exceeds the measurable range of 5 Suppose the measurement range is 2 V and the measurable range is 2 000 to 2 000 V If the measured value exceeds 2 200 V positive over range results if the measured value falls below 2 200 V negative over range results If the input type is TC thermocouple or RTD resistance temperature detector over range occurs when the measured value exceeds approximately 10 C of the measurable range Suppose the measurement range is R and the measurable range is 0 0 to 1760 0 C If the measured value exceeds 1770 0 C positive over range results if the measured value falls below 10 0 C negative over range results For computation channels Positive computation overflow when the value exceeds 3 4E 38 O Negative computation overflow when the value falls below 3 4E 38 0 Power failure Time change Status When a power failure occurs P When the time is changed C IM 04L31A01 03E 1 93 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 18 Computation and Report Functions Op
312. ement computation internal control external control TLOG data Measurement computation Report data Measurement computation Measurement computation internal control external control Measurement computation internal Alarm occurrence release information of control external control the target CH Event summary data Event occurrence against the system Time PV event occurrence and release System program operation Run stop local remote manual auto cascade For others every internal switching loop controller loop Program hold release wait release Manual save Saves data when the external storage medium is inserted Auto save Saves data through key operation during continuous measurement Save interval 10 minutes to 31 days during free trigger Saves at the end of sampling when trigger is specified Sampling Interval Display data file Synchronized to the waveform update rate Event data file Specify the sampling interval Event data file sampling interval Selectable from 1 and 2 s Measurement data file Display data Min Max in the timeup period Event data Measured value per sampling interval TLOG data value at TLOG timeup CH value in units of hours days weeks months Manual sampled data ASCII format data at key remote input Alarm summary data Control mode summary data Data save method Event data file Saves the instantaneous values at the specified sampling interval Di
313. ement Alarms ecceeececeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeenieeenaeeeneeeea 7 6 Setting the Temperature Unit eecececeeeeceeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeceeseeeeseeesaeeeeeeeceeseeeenaees 7 11 Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents 8 1 Using the Information Display Alarm Summary Message Summary Memory Summary and Control SUMMALY sisiics caste data ediii ed nadia lien ee ieee 8 1 8 2 Measurement Function gt Measurement Group Setup Operation c ceceeteeeeeeeeenees 8 2 8 3 Measurement Function gt Settings Related to Tag Display for Channels eeeee 8 4 8 4 Measurement Function gt Operations When Displaying Trend Digital and Bar Graph DISplayS aici cdaesacehcaacesegsteyonsde cesses e a a o E a aT aaa 8 6 8 5 Measurement Function gt Operations When Displaying the Overview sssseeeeeseeeeee 8 8 8 6 Measurement Function gt Operations When Displaying the Historical Trend 0 8 9 8 7 Measurement Function gt Changing the Display Update Rate of the Trend Display 8 10 IM 04L31A01 03E ix Contents 8 8 8 9 8 10 8 11 8 12 8 13 8 14 Measurement Function gt Settings Related to Messages Displayed on the Trend Display ANd Write Operation dre aea e a sdest ang sdzlduageejazhvsddcatedaigavieg aaa aa ai 8 11 Measurement Function gt Changing the Trip Line of the Trend Display eeee 8 13 Measurement Function gt Changing the Channel Display Color ss sse
314. ence 610 This username is already registered See section 11 3 611 There is no user who can enter to the SETUP mode See section 11 3 620 You must exit setup mode in order for the communications settings to take effect Control Operation Errors Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 700 Specified loop number cannot be selected Contact input error section 4 3 communication error see the Communication Interface User s Manual 701 Manual mode cannot be selected Contact input error Section 4 3 communication error see the Communication Interface User s Manual 702 Cascade mode cannot be selected Operation error section 6 1 Contact input error section 4 3 communication error see the Communication Interface User s Manual 703 Stop mode cannot be selected Contact input error section 4 3 communication error see the Communication Interface User s Manual 704 Run mode cannot be selected Contact input error Section 4 3 communication error see the Communication Interface User s Manual 705 Remote mode cannot be selected Contact input error Section 4 3 communication error see the Communication Interface User s Manual 706 There is no specified target setpoint number Contact input error Section 4 3 communication error see the Communication Interface User s Manual 710 Auto tuning cannot be activated Operation er
315. energize hold De_energize Nonhold Energize Hold and Energize Nonhold Note The behavior of the transistor open collector output corresponding to the energize deenergize setting of the relay action is as follows When set to deenergize Switch from On to Off during output When set to energize Switch from Off to On during output 4 16 IM 04L31A01 03E 4 7 Control gt Tuning setting This section explains the procedures for setting the parameters that are adjusted on the tuning display Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Setting mode control gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 12 soft key select Control 7 soft key select Tuning setting Tuning setting Loop number 1 Item name Item name on EQ 8 0n 0 15 forF 2 9 0n OH 16 0FF 18 0n OL 17 0FF 11 0n HR 18 0FF 12 0n PO 19 0FF 13 0FF 2a oFF 14 0FF 21 0Ft Setup Procedure 1 With the cursor blue located at the Loop number box select the loop number for setting the tuning parameter using the soft keys The selected loop number is displayed in the Loop number box and the cursor moves to the On Off box of 1 2 Using the arrow keys move the cursor to the On Off box of the tuning parameter you wish to change or the Item name box The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the
316. ening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt 5 soft key select Control group setting The following display appears GROUP 1 gt oo A pd 2000 18 40 47 RO ME O Control group Group number ei Group name CONTROL GROUP1 Kind No Tag Tag comment On Int Loop 61 INT 1 On Int Loop 82 INT 82 On Ext Loop 61 EXT 1 On Meas CH G1 G1 Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item box 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Control group setting Group number Select the group number from four group numbers from 1 to 4 Group name Set the group name using up to 16 alphanumeric characters Group name display example CONTROL GROUPA ooga Ag OVERVIEN Qe contro DI DO STATUS Group name fw trenn gt P E55 DIGITAL gt ul BR overview HISTORY IM 04L31A01 03E 4 29 suoljeiado dnjas payejay uoljOUNY 07u09 eS 4 12 Control group setting On
317. ent PV SP Analog Logic type computation computation retransmission computation Measurement data Yes Yes Yes Yes Measurement computed data Yes Yes Yes Yes Control measurement data No Yes Yes Yes Internal external control data Yes Yes Yes Yes Constants for measurement Yes No No No computation Constants for control computation No Yes Yes Yes Communication input data Yes Yes Yes Yes Measurement remote input Yes Yes Yes Yes Control contact input Yes Yes Yes Yes Control expansion contactinput Yes Yes Yes Yes Control contact output No Yes Yes Yes Control expansion contact output No Yes Yes Yes Internal switches No Yes Yes Yes When PV SP computation is OFF Handing of the Unit in Computations The unit corresponding to the measured computed data in the equation is not compensated In computations measured and computed data are handled as values without units For example if the measured data from channel 01 is 20 mV and the measured data from channel 02 is 20 V the computed result of 01 02 is 40 Order of Operations in Equations The order of operators in equations is as follows Operators are listed in a decreasing order of precedence Type Operator high order of precedence Functions ABS SQR LOG EXP TLOG MAX TLOG MIN TLOG P P TLOG SUM TLOG AVE CLOG MAX CLOG MIN CLOG P P CLOG AVE Conditional expression eq eq2 eq3 Power ne Logical negation NOT Multiplication and division bay Ad
318. er E Hysteresis Hysteresis 65 9 6 5 8 6 5 16 4 5 6 58 11 4 5 8 5 12 8 5 8 6 5 8 13 6 5 8 6 5 8 14 6 5 8 6 5 8 15 6 5 8 6 5 8 16 0 5 amp OoaArnnNRoOnNe fa nm Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item box 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note For setup item boxes that require values to be entered a pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key is used 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box IM 04L31A01 03E 4 33 suoljeiadoQ dnjas payejay uoun 017U09 s 4 14 Control Function Settings Loop number You can enter the setting for each loop When changing these settings select a loop to be changed from 1 to 6 default is 1 Only the number of loops specified at the time of purchase appear in the list Target Setpoint Tracking Select whether to turn the Target Setpoint Tracking function ON default or OFF Operation proceeds as follows when turned ON With no program control Tracking when switching from remote to local the local setting value fo
319. er limit is 100000000 excluding the decimal point The decimal point position is the same as that of the span lower limit IM 04L31A01 03E 10 11 uondo uonsuny UOHey NdWOD ay YUM Sapo UO AjUC suoneiodg pajejoy uolnouny wodey pue uonejndwog 10 6 Creating Reports This section explains how to set the report type report creation channels report creation time and other items Measurement channels cannot be assigned to report channels on 0 measurement channel models Procedure Opening the Operation Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Setting mode Control gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 8 soft key select Option The following display appears Setup Mode Report Report set Date 1 Time lt hour gt Report CH R1 OnOff On Channel l Sum scale s D Next 1 2 Operations on the Display 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor retu
320. er span limit is greater than the upper span limit See section 4 6 131 The range of the span is wider than 30000 See section 4 6 132 The lower scale limit is greater than the upper scale limit See section 4 6 133 The range of the scale is wider than 30000 See section 4 6 134 The lower and upper span limits of the PV range are equal See section 4 6 135 The lower span limit of the PV range is greater than the upper See section 4 6 span limit 136 The range of the PV range is wider than 30000 See section 4 6 137 The lower span limit of the PV switching exceeds the PV range See section 4 6 138 The upper span limit of the PV switching exceeds the PV range See section 4 6 139 The lower and upper span limits of the PV switching are equal See section 4 6 140 The lower span limit of the PV switching is greater than the upper See section 4 6 span limit 141 The lower and upper limits of the output are equal See section 4 9 142 The lower limit of the output is greater than the upper limit See section 4 9 143 The lower and upper limits of the target setpoint are equal See section 4 12 144 The lower limit of the target setpoint is greater than the upper limit See section 4 12 145 The setting of the reference point is incorrect n RP gt n 1 RP See section 4 8 146 Incorrect input I O data Set point number lt gt 2 See section 4 11 147 Incorrect input I O data Output n 1 gt Output n See section 4 11 148 Incorrect input I O data
321. erating environment such as ambient temperature and humidity is within the standard operating conditions see chapter 14 3 Apply appropriate input signals corresponding to 0 50 and 100 of the input range and calculate the errors from the readings If the error does not fall within the accuracy range of the specifications contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Note For thermocouple inputs you must measure the temperature of the input terminal and apply a voltage taking into account the reference junction temperature DC Voltage Measurement Power supply terminals ag000g006 LI a 200000 ef OE fot ol Input terminals DC voltage standard 13 2 IM 04L31A01 03E 13 2 Calibration Temperature Measurement When Using an RTD Power supply terminals The resistance of three lead wires must be equal On On On Op On On lowftog fog vj S Ss Input terminals P Decade resistance box Model 2793 01 from Yokogawa M amp C Temperature Measurement When Using a thermocouple Copper wire Thermocouple wires or TC estension wire Power supply terminals
322. erators users by using the key login function Messages User names that are already registered cannot be specified the combinations of user IDs and passwords that are identical to those that have been registered by any user in the past cannot be specified Messages 1 through 3 can be changed in the operation mode Confirming the stored data Batch information can be shown on the memory information display IM 04L31A01 03E 14 15 g suonesio ds 14 8 General Specifications Construction I O Specifications Mounting angle Up to 30 of backward tilt angle allowed no tilt to the left or right Mounting panel thickness Material Color Front panel External dimensions Weight approx Control Output Current output Voltage pulse output Relay contact output Contact Input Number of inputs Input signal Input condition Input format Contact output Relay output Relay contact rating Transistor output Analog Input Section Control PV input Measurement input 2 to 26 mm Case Steel plate Bezel Case equivalent Bezel Polycarbonate Pale cobalt blue Munsell 2 0B 5 0B5 0 1 7 or Charcoal gray light DIC 16 102 or equivalent Water and dust proof based on IEC529 IP65 and NEMA No 250 TYPE 4 except external icing test 144 W x 144 H x 223 6 D mm CX1006 2 8 kg CX1206 3 0 kg Number of outputs Output signal Load resistance Output accurac
323. ered a pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key is used 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box IM 04L31A01 03E 4 27 suoljeiado dnjas payejay uoun 07u09 s 4 11 PID parameters Setting PID Parameters Loop number The setup items of PID parameters are set for each loop When changing these parameters this setting is used to select the target loop number 1 or 2 initial value is 1 Note Some of the following parameter boxes do not appear if Control gt 1 Control action gt Control mode is set to Cascade PID number Specify the PID parameter group number 1 to 8 The maximum selectable number conforms to the Control gt 1 Control action gt PID number setting SP Set the target setpoint SP in the range of O to 100 EU 0 to 100 of the measurement span initial value is 0 However this value is set within the high and low limits of the target setpoint limiter e P Set the proportional band in the range of 0 1 to 999 9 initial value for Temp is 5 0 initial value for Press Flow is 12 0 l Set the integral time in the range of 0 to 6000 s initial value for Temp is 240 s initial value for Press Flow is 20 s D Set the derivative time in the range of 0 to 6000 s initial value for Temp is 60 s initial value
324. ernet Setup Mode Link Basic setting mode 5 6 7 8 Next 274 thernet Setup Mode Link Basic setting mode m Dae Pend Parameter Initial Value Alarm gt Reflash Alarm gt Relay gt AND Alarm gt Action Alarm gt Behavior Alarm gt Indicator Alarm gt Rate of change gt Increase Decrease Alarm gt Hysteresis Off None Energize Nonhold Nonhold 1 On 2 A D Temperature Parameter Initial Value A D Integrate gt Integrate Auto A D gt Scan interval 1s A D gt First CH 01 A D gt Last CH 01 A D gt Burnout set Off A D gt RJC Internal Temperature gt Unit C 3 Memory Parameter Initial Value Memory gt Save Memory gt Data Auto Display IM 04L31A01 03E Appendix 6 Initial Values 4 Memory and trend Memory timeup Parameter Initial Value Memory and trend gt Meas Math Loop CH Meas CH Memory and trend gt First CH 01 Memory and trend gt Last CH 01 Memory and trend gt On Off On Memory timeup gt Timeup type Off 5 Keylock Parameter Initial Value Keylock gt Use Not Not 6 Key login Parameter Initial Value Key login gt Use Not Not 7 Load Initialize Setup Mode Load Initialize 1 Load settings 2 Delete 3 Format 4 Initialize 1 2 3 4 Parameter Initial Value 1 Load settings 2 Delete 3 Format 4 Initialize 8 Option Parameter Initia
325. es them to the internal memory Manual sample 9 2 Acquires instantaneous values of all channels to the internal memory Key lock 11 2 Enables disables key lock only when key lock is used Log out 11 3 Logs out only when logged in using the key login function Trigger 9 1 Trigger used to start acquiring event data to the internal memory valid only when event data is specified to be acquired to the internal memory and the trigger used to start the acquisition is set to key trigger Math START 10 2 Starts stops computation only for models with the computation option Math STOP M1 Math reset 10 2 Resets the computed value of the computation channel to 0 only on models with the computation option M1 while the computation is stopped Math ACK 10 2 Recovers the computation dropout indication icon to normal indication only on models with the computation function M1 when computation dropout occurs Snapshot 9 6 Saves the screen image data to the external storage medium Log 11 4 Displays the log display system display FTP test Communications Executes an FTP test Save Display 9 1 Stores the display data or event data to the external storage medium Save Event only when the display data or event data is being acquired to the internal memory in the free mode E Mail START Communications Enables disables the e mail transmission function E Mail STOP E Mail test Communications Sends test messages to recipient 1 and
326. ess lamp Used when ejecting the external storage medium On a Zip drive the button is also an access lamp It illuminates when data is being written or read Floppy disk access lamp IIluminates when data is being written or read Key Operation Section START key Starts the data acquisition to the internal memory and displays the waveform on the trend display STOP key Stops the data acquisition to the internal memory Also stops the updating of the waveform on the trend display USER key Used to execute the assigned action FUNC key If the key is pressed in operation mode a soft key menu is displayed at the bottom section of the display enabling the execution of various functions The key is also used when switching from setting mode to operation mode ESC key Used when canceling an operation Also used when returning from setting mode to operation mode MENU key Used when switching from operation mode to setting mode Also used when returning from setting mode to operation mode Soft keys When a soft key menu is displayed at the bottom section of the display in operation setting or basic setting mode these soft keys are used to change the operation and setup information The information above explains the basic functions of each key For a description on how to operate the keys see section 3 2 Basic Key Operations IM 04
327. external shunt resistor Input range and measurable range Measurable Range 20 00 to 20 00mV 60 00 to 60 00mV 200 0 to 200 0mV 2 000 to 2 000V 6 000 to 6 000V 20 00 to 20 00V 50 00 to 50 00V R 0 0 to 1760 0 C g 0 0 to 1760 0 C B 0 0 to 1820 0 C Ki 200 0 to 1370 0 C Et 200 0 to 800 0 C J 200 0 to 1100 0 C Te 200 0 to 400 0 C N 0 0 to 1300 0 C w2 0 0 to 2315 0 C L s 200 0 to 900 0 C u s 200 0 to 400 0 C PLATINEL 0 0 to 1400 0 C PR40 20 0 0 to 1900 0 C W3Re W25Re 0 0 to 2400 0 C Pt100 4 200 0 to 600 0 C JPt100 4 200 0 to 550 0 C DCV input OFF 2 4V or less ON 2 4V or more Contact input Contact ON OFF R S B K E J T N IEC584 1 1995 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1995 2 W W 5 Re W 26 Re Hoskins Mfg Co ASTM E988 3 L Fe CuNi DIN43710 U Cu CuNi DIN43710 4 Pt100 JIS C1604 1997 IEC751 1995 DIN IEC751 1996 JPt100 JIS 1604 1989 JIS C1606 1989 5 Measuring current i 1mA Filter function Moving average ON OFF switchable selectable on each channel set the moving average count from 2 to 16 Computation Difference computation Computes the difference between two arbitrary channels Computable range DCV TC RTD Linear scaling Input ranges capable of scaling DCV TC RTD Available range of scaling 30000 to 30000 Decimal place Can be set arbitrarily
328. eys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Setting mode Control gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 7 soft key select Load Initialize gt 4 select Initialize Initialize Kind Initialize contents Clearl Setup settings Settings Measure amp Hath data Clear2 Settings Measure amp Math data Clear3 Measure amp Math data Clear 1 Clear 2 Clear 3 Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change The selections are displayed at the bottom section of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to change The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Saving the Settings 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key Select the type of operation from the following Clear1 Initializes the setup data of basic setting mode and setting mode and clears the data in the internal memory Clear2 Initializes the setup data of setting mode and clears the data in the internal memory Clear3 Clears th
329. f the program pattern being compared against If the segment consists of only an up ramp and the starting PV is greater than the final SP the program control will not start and program control ends In this case SP tracking prcess is not performed If the start segment is a soak this function does not operate and the start condition is the same as with the starting SP start Loops set to ramp prioritized PV start that are in local or stopped mode and are no longer in program operation mode change to starting SP start Below are examples of ramp prioritized PV1 start and ramp prioritized PV2 start Example in which the 2 segment of the 1t loop is a soak segment When set to ramp prioritized PV1 start the ramp rate of the 1 loop is prioritized The program operation start point of the 15 loop will be point C1 D1 or E1 depends on the PV position a to e at that point The program operation start point of the 2 loop one of the other loops is at the same time as that of the 15t loop For example if the program operation start point of the 15t loop is point C1 the program operation start point of the 2 loop is point C2 1 42 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 11 Program Control Related Settings a gt i i 1 Program pattern for c gt the 1st loop d p i i i Program pattern for E EE i the 2nd loop E1 ar 1 1 i i e gt 7 D2 E E2 7 i 7 i 7 gt Time SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEG5 i Exam
330. ff Ev12 off EW 5foff EW13 OFF EV 6 off EW14 OFF EV 7 off EW15 OFF EV aloft EW16 OFF Program end signal Off Input Copy Paste Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item box Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Pe 5 12 IM 04L31A01 03E 5 9 Event Output Settings Event Output Settings Pattern number Version 3 02 or later Displayed when event output is set for each program pattern Select a program pattern number for which to set event output If this item is not displayed the event output is common to all program patterns Event Types Select whether to set event output for PV event or time event Relay Output Turn the relay output ON or OFF Number Select relay output terminal numbers from the following DO001 006 SW001 SW018 internal switches style number S3 or later Action Displays the relay output action energize de energize per the settings Program Pattern End Signal Setting Not Per Pattern but Overall Relay Output Turn th
331. file name of the setup data Precautions to Be Taken When Loading Setup Data As a general rule load setup data of the same firmware version If you must load setup data of different versions note the following points When loading setup data that has been saved on version 3 01 using version 3 02 Event output settings time event PV event and program pattern end signal settings in Setting mode Control are not loaded When loading setup data that has been saved on version 3 02 using version 3 01 Event output setting common or separate in Basic Control Settings is not loaded Event output settings time event PV event and program pattern end signal settings in Setting mode Control are not loaded Setup data is not loaded when the displayed language is set to Chinese IM 04L31A01 03E suoleiedg peo anes ed po 9 4 Loading the Stored Display Event Data Historical Trend This section explains how to load the display data or event data that is stored on the external storage medium and display the trend on the historical trend display For the operations on the historical trend display see section 8 6 Procedure Displaying the Operation Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt MENU key switch to Set mode 7 soft key select Save Load Clear data gt 4 soft key select Load display data 5 soft key select Load event data if event data is to be loaded
332. for the items to be acquired Data type in the settings If display data and event data or event data only is selected you can select the acquisition mode Mode in the settings from Free Trigger or Rotate Refer to the following examples to make the appropriate selection for your application Acquire only the display data at all times Data to be acquired Display data only Acquire display data in normal cases and acquire event data around the alarm occurrence when alarms occur Data to be acquired Display data and event data Acquisition mode Trigger or rotate Acquire event data at all times Data to be acquired Event data only Acquisition mode Free Acquire event data only when alarms occur Data to be acquired Event data only Acquisition mode Trigger or rotate Block segmentation during event data acquisition In the acquisition of event data the acquisition area in the internal memory can be divided into blocks block segmentation The acquisition operation varies depending on whether the acquisition area is divided into blocks for each mode For detailed information see Acquisition Mode of Event Data in appendix 1 Supplementary Explanation of the Acquisition of Display Data Event Data to the Internal Memory You can select the number of blocks from 2 4 8 and 16 Manual sampled data Every time a given key operation is carried out all measured computed control data i
333. g gt Target setpoint gt Loop 1 and 2 200 0 Program pattern setting gt Segment time 00 00 00 Program pattern setting gt Segment PID group No 1 Program pattern setting gt Segment shift action Continue Program pattern setting gt Wait action Off 5 Event setting Event setting gt Segment number 1 Event setting gt Event kind TimeEvent Event setting gt 1 to 16 Off 6 Hysteresis PV event Hysteresis PV event gt PV event 1 to 16 0 5 7 Repeat action setting Repeat action setting gt Repeat action Off lt 2 Event output setting gt Parameter Initial Value Event output gt Pattern number 1 Event output gt Event kind TimeEvent Event output gt EV 1 to EV 16 Off Program pattern end signal Off lt 3 AUX Auto message Display position gt Parameter Initial Value AUX Auto message Display position gt Auto message On for program Run Reset On Off AUX Auto message Display position gt Program display position gt Position gt Loop 1 and 2 Loop 1 and 2 1 and 2 AUX Auto message Display positin gt Auto change to Off program run display lt 4 AUX Event group gt Parameter Initial Value AUX Event group gt Pattern number 1 AUX Event group gt 1 to 5 On AUX Event group gt Kind Time Event AUX Event group gt Number 1 to 5 01 to 05 8 Detailed setting 7 when the program control function is OFF CONTROL GROUP2 Gona o gt EAL 5 Detailed setting 1
334. g comment both DI and DO only DI or DO Displayed using the y CX TEST HOTOR START Displayed using the INT 01 ace specified color when specified color when DO is ON DO or DI is ON Displayed using the Label for ON specified color when DI is ON Displayed using the specified color when l Displayed using the Dispiayed using the Label for OFF DO or DI is OFF Output value specified color when specified color when DO is OFF DI is OFF DIO operation monitoring function Analog retransmission IM 04L31A01 03E 1 71 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 16 Display Function Control Operation Display gt Tuning Display Control status indication section Control parameter setup similar to the display on the display section faceplate control group display me INT 1 PID number Item name Yunun M Setup display AT PID number being auto tuned SP No Current target setpoint number PID No Current PID number Group No PID number of the tuning parameter to be manipulated Time Trend waveform display of PV green SP red and OUT yellow Control Operation Display gt Overview Display Red indication Tag name and tag comment when alarm is Remote REM or local LOC occurring Run RUN Stop STP Loop selection cursor auto tuning blinking AT Auto manual PV input value Target setpoint Wie Control output value OUT RUN STP TUNING When monitoring When monitoring both
335. g display appears 93 41 oe MEETS Huto save interva User key Action Snapshot Imin 2min Smin 18min Next 1 3 Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to Time div A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item Setting the Display Update Rate Time div Select the time corresponding to 1 division of the time axis during trend display from the following 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min 20 min 30 min 1h 2h 4h and 10h 8 10 IM 04L31A01 03E 8 8 Measurement Function gt Settings Related to Messages Displayed on the Trend Display and Write Operation This section explains how to set and write the messages that can be displayed on the trend display Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt MENU key switch to Set mode gt 4 soft key select Message File The following display appears Pe 9 2009 20 19 16 apo EEAO Hessage No Characters 1 2 STOP 3 ABCDE 5 6 T 8 Input Clear Copy Paste Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor b
336. g from 0 0 for the lower limit of the output span to 100 0 for the upper limit and then outputs according to the output format below The output interval is the same as the control output interval Time proportional relay contact output Outputs an ON OFF signal having a pulse width proportional to the time as relay contact point signal according to the computed values Time proportional pulse output Output an ON OFF signal having a pulse width proportional to the time as voltage according to the computed values Current output Continuously output a current analog signal proportional to the computed PID values Note aa iI The output value while initialization occurs after turning the power ON or OFF is 0 mA or 0 V The output value while in setup mode or when closing setup mode and switching to operation mode is 0 mA or 0 V Analog retransmission is handled the same as when control mode is OFF Control functions such as upper lower limit of output value and preset output are not supported The following is a block diagram of analog retransmission Remote input control module relay PV SP control output Eee Aral Control input internal switches Communication data computation input a ir Manual operation Analog retransmission computation section l Manual MAN l A Automatic AUT Output data created IM 04L31A01 03E 1 7 suonoun
337. gh set PV switching Upper only Scale Lower Upper limit Set the value in the range 30000 to 30000 maximum value gt minimum value maximum value minimum value lt 30000 IM 04L31A01 03E 4 21 suoljei3adoQ dnjas pajyejay uoun 017U09 a 4 8 Control input range Unit You can enter the unit using up to 6 alphanumeric characters Square root Set whether to perform square root computation on the PV input On Off initial value Low cut Set the low cut point when the square root computation is On to 0 0 to 5 0 initial value is 1 0 Bias Set bias to On initial setting is Off when adding a constant value bias to the PV input Set the bias value in the EUS range 100 to 100 of the measurement span For example if the minimum and maximum values of the scale are 10 00 and 200 00 respectively the selectable range is 190 00 to 190 00 The selectable range is displayed in a pop up window Note that the bias can be changed during control operation Filter Turn ON OFF the input filter and set the time constant when input filter is ON in the range of 1 to 120 s Note that the time constant of the input filter can be changed during operation Ratio only when Input type is set to RemoteSP To multiply a certain ratio to the remote input set this value to On and set the ratio in the range of 0 001 to 9 999 Note that the ratio can be changed during control operation
338. gt 01 Feb 19 2002 21 15 29 oe a Time div Imin Auto save interval th User key Action Setting a Action to the USER Key 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the Action box under User key 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the action you wish to select 3 Press the DISP ENTER key USER Key Operation Press the USER key once to perform the assigned action in operation mode or Set mode It does not operate in basic setting mode except the Snapshot action which operates in all modes USER key IM 04L31A01 03E 11 1 suolouny 13410 JO suoneado E 11 1 USER Key Assignment and Operation Assigning a Function to the USER Key Select one of the following actions The initial value is AlarmACK Name of Action Reference Action None 7 No operation Trigger 9 1 Supplies a trigger used to start acquiring event data to the internal memory valid only when event data is specified to be acquired to the internal memory and the trigger used to start the acquisition is set to key trigger AlarmACK 4 9 7 2 Clears the alarm indication relay output valid only when the operation of the alarm indication or output relay is set to Hold MathStart Stop 10 2 Starts stops computation only for models with the computation function option M1 MathReset 10 2 Resets the computed data resets to 0 only on models with the computation function option M1 while the computa
339. gt Trip line 2 dot View gt Grid 10 div View gt Scroll 5s View gt Scale digit Normal LCD gt Brightness 4 LCD gt Saver Off App 36 IM 04L31A01 03E Appendix 6 Initial Values lt 5 Control Color gt Parameter Initial Value Select Internal CH101 Red CH102 Green CH103 Blue CH104 Blue violet CH105 Brown CH106 Orange lt 6 Control Zone Graph gt Parameter Initial Value First CH 101 Last CH 101 Zone gt Lower 0 Zone gt Upper 100 Graph gt Division 10 Graph gt Bar graph Normal Graph gt Scale position 1 lt 7 Math Color gt Parameter Initial Value Select Internal CH31 Red CH32 Green CH33 Blue CH34 Blue violet CH35 Brown CH36 Orange CH37 Yellow green CH38 Light blue CH39 Violet CH40 Gray CH41 Lime CH42 Cyan lt 8 Math Zone Graph gt Parameter Initial Value First CH 31 Last CH 31 Zone gt Lower 0 Zone gt Upper 100 Graph gt Division 10 Graph gt Bar graph Normal Graph gt Scale position 1 6 File DST Parameter Initial Value File gt Header Space File gt Directory name DATAO Daylight saving time YY MM DD HH gt Summer Off Daylight saving time YY MM DD HH gt Winter Off IM 04L31A01 03E App 37 xipueddy Appendix 6 Initial Values 5 Save Load Clear data Save Load Clear data 1 Save settings 2 Load settings 3 Save data 4 Load displ
340. gt n 16 The maximum number of event data files that can be written to the internal memory is 16 16 represents this value The value n is the number of event data files in the internal memory In the following cases the event data is overwritten from the oldest file Use caution because the overwritten data is lost forever When there is no more remaining time of the event data acquisition area in the internal memory The status display section shows Overwrite When the number of event data files in the internal memory has exceeded 16 When the mode is Trigger or Rotate Bar graph Displays the acquisition time amount of memory used with respect to the data length of the specified event data When pretrigger is specified and START is pressed causing the CX1000 to enter the trigger wait state data of size equal to the pretrigger amount is acquired to the internal memory At this point the bar is displayed in orange After acquiring the data of size equal to the pretrigger the length of the bar stays fixed However the relevant data is updated until the trigger condition is met When the trigger condition is met the bar turns green Data is acquired to the internal memory after the pretrigger data If data acquisition to all blocks is finished in Trigger mode Full is displayed in the bar When Full is displayed event data is not acquired to the internal memory even if the trigger condition is met IM 04L31A01 03E
341. h to setting mode control gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 5 soft key select Load Initialize After carrying out the steps above select the one of the following soft keys according to your needs The display that appears are similar to those shown in Set mode Deleting files 3 soft key select Delete Formatting the external storage medium 4 soft key select format Operations on the Display Deleting files or directories 1 From the directories listed in the Directory name box select the directory in which the file you wish to delete is located using the up and down arrow keys To delete an entire directory select the directory and proceed to step 4 2 Press the right arrow key to move the blue cursor to the file list section 3 Select the file to be deleted using the up and down arrow keys To move the blue cursor back to the Directory name column press the left arrow key 4 Press the DISP ENTER key A dialog box for confirming the deletion appears 5 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the operation select No using the right arrow key and press the DISP ENTER key Formatting the External Storage Medium 1 Enter the volume name in the Volume name box The following character strings cannot be used in the volume name AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK and strings containing spaces If you are not going to set the volume name move the cursor to the Type box us
342. hannel is 200 0 then 99999999 is output when the value exceeds 99999999 9 and 99999999 is output when the value is below 999999 9 Sum value When all of the data are computation errors or computation Blank overflow When the sum value exceeds approx 3 4E 38 When the sum value is below approx 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 9 999999E 99 Acquiring Report Data to the Internal Memory and Saving Data to the External Storage Medium Report data is stored to the internal memory at the time reports are created Up to 40 report data files can be acquired in the internal memory For the data storage function see section 1 17 Data Storage Function IM 04L31A01 03E App 19 xipueddy Appendix 5 Data Format of ASCII Files This section explains the format of ASCII files The ASCII files that the CX1000 generates are manual sample files report files and setting change log files Manual Sample File Format The manual sampled data is output using numerical values and strings in ASCII format delimited by commas Channel tags units and manual sample values of channels whose input range is set to Skip or computation channels that are turned Off are not output The data is appended to the file each time manual sample operation is performed Format MANUAL SAMPLE DATA CRLF Model Serial No IIIIIIIIIIIIIIII CRLF File Header HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
343. he values can be copied and pasted using soft keys The entry box does not appear if the wait zones of all loops are set to OFF 5 4 IM 04L31A01 03E 5 4 Program parameter setting gt Program start setting Procedure This section explains the procedures for setting the start SP and conditions for starting the operation start code Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt 7 soft key select Program control parameters gt 1 soft key select Program parameter setting gt 3 soft key select Program start setting The following display appears bor br 9002 11 02 17 i0 EELO Pattern start setting Pattern number 1 Start target setpoint Loop 1 Loop 2 200 0 Start code TimePYStart Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Program Start Setting Pattern number Displays the pattern number selected in the pat
344. he adequate tightening torque can cause deformation of the case or damage to the bracket Panel Cut Diagram A single unit Multiple units installed closely Multiple units installed closely left and right up and down up to 3 units 137 Fd 137 i Unit mm T S ya E ow n 5 Yo l 282 tf 426 570 714 858 1002 1146 1290 1434 144xn 6 175 min 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 o 5 IM 04L31A01 03E 2 3 Buum pue uopejesul D 2 2 Installation Panel Mounting Diagram Screw temporarily Panel Mounting bracket Attachment screw In contact with each other J p Torque driver flat blade Attachment screw Front The figure shows the case when the mounting brackets are used on the top and bottom of the case External Dimensions of the CX1000 Unit mm 136 5 23 4 223 6 Dimensions before the mounting bracket is attached Thickness of the attachment panel 2 to 26 YOKOGAWA Dimensions after the mounting bracket is attached 2 4 IM 04L31A01 03E 2 3 Wiring Arrangement of the Input Output Terminals If you specify a model with two i
345. he changed parameter see Note on the next page are initialized when you confirm the change Consequently a message Initialize the settings related to range appears in the confirmation window as shown below Do you really want to change the settings 5 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key and confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box IM 04L31A01 03E 4 19 suoljesiado dnjas payejay uoljOUNY 07u09 s 4 8 Control input range Setting Control Input Range Parameters Loop number control input channel when the PV SP computation function is ON When the PV SP computation function is OFF you can set each setting item of the control input range for each loop When the PV SP computation function is ON you can set each setting item of the control input range for each loop When changing these parameters this setting is used to select the target loop number 1 or 2 initial value is 1 The loop number is displayed for the number of loops you specified at the time of purchase Input type when PV SP computation function is OFF Select the target input for making input range related settings from the following PV1 PV2 RemoteSP and PVrange Items PV2 and PVrange appear only when Control gt 1 Control action Input setting gt Control mode is set to PVSwitching If the measurement range of the two
346. he next item Repeat steps 1 and 2 to set all the colors you wish Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item Setting the Channel Color Select Only when assigning channels of PV SP and OUT of control Select the group of the control loop you wish to set the color from Internal and External Color The colors are initially set in the following order for every six channels Measurement channels 1 Red 2 Green 3 Blue 4 Blue violet 5 Brown and 6 Orange Computation channels 31 Red 32 Green 33 Blue 34 Blue violet 35 Brown 36 Orange 37 Yellow green 38 Light blue 39 Violet 40 Gray 41 Lime and 42 Cyan Internal control channels 101 Red 102 Green 103 Blue 104 Blue violet 105 Brown and 106 Orange External control channels 201 Red 202 Green 203 Blue 204 Blue violet 205 Brown 206 Orange 207 Yellow green 208 Light blue 209 Violet 210 Red 211 Green and 212 Blue To change the color select from the following 16 colors Red green blue blue violet brown orange yellow green light blue violet gray lime cyan dark blue yellow light gray and purple IM 04L31A01 03E s U9 U09 p erds q y BuiBueysy 104 suoije19dO fe 8 11 Measurement Function gt Changing the Zone Display of the Trend Display Procedure This section explains how to
347. he range is set to scale It is applied only on alarms set to upper lower limit alarm on measurement channels and the function can be turned ON OFF Factory default setting Hysteresis ON Upper limit alarm Lower limit alarm Alarm occurrence Alarm Alarm release I setting sz Measured value Hysteresis J Approx 0 5 Alarm release Alarm Measured value Alarm occurrence setting Alarm Relay Output Relay Output ON OFF A relay signal can be output from the alarm output terminal ALARM of the measurement alarm option terminal block and the relay contact output transistor output terminal DIGITAL OUT of the control output terminal block You can set whether to output the relay signal for each alarm setting You can also turn the internal switches ON style number S3 or later Reflash Alarm This function is used to notify alarms occurring after the relay is activated on the first alarm when multiple alarms are assigned to a single alarm output relay When this function is turned ON the output relay is temporarily approx 500 ms released when alarms after the first alarm occur The initial setting is Off not use reflash alarm The reflash alarm function is set only on output relays 101 102 and 103 Channel 1 Alarm Channel 2 ee See Channel 3 a l Alarm output relay Reflash alarm ON h te Approx Approx 500 ms 500 ms Alarm output relay Reflash alarm OFF Note If the
348. he remaining segment time However if the segment indicated in bold is a ramp segment and the segment time ramp setting method is used you cannot change only the remaining segment time If you change the final SP the remaining segment time changes accordingly In addition to releasing the hold mode executing program RUN operation or executing advance during hold operation also clears the hold mode IM 04L31A01 03E 1 51 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 11 Program Control Related Settings When changing the final SP of the segment You can change the SP during the hold operation The ON OFF time of the time event and the segment time is adjusted by the amount of time the operation is held SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEG5 Pattern after the setpoint is changed Target SP changed a Final SP gt laa an Pattern before the i setpoint is changed Time event 2 OFF i H gt i 1 Hold period Delay for the amount of time Timer stopped the timer was stopped Note When changing the final SP with the segment time ramp rate assignment method the segment time is also changed The time event s event timer is not changed When increasing or decreasing the segment time You can increase or decrease the segment time during the hold operation If the segment time is increased or decreased during the hold operation the ON OFF time and segment time is automatically adjusted by the amount of time the operation
349. he trends of measurement channels on the trend display of the measurement function Display Examples Control group INT 82 co Geo RUN STP TUNING RUN STP TUNING Controller style Faceplate style Hybrid style Tuning display Overview display e DI DO status display 1 0H 1 0L 1R 1 P0 oon PID No 1 GRP he PATTERN NO SEGMENT NO SEGHENT TIME a a B a B a a a a a SEL PNL NEXT 1 2 1 14 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 2 Control Function Overview Saving Data Communications Acquisition to the Internal Memory Along with the measurement data the data of SPs PVs and OUT and event information for control are acquired to the internal memory Saving Data to the External Storage Medium You can save the data acquired in the internal memory to an external storage medium floppy disk Zip disk or ATA flash memory card S Floppy disk lt gt Zip disk e Control setup data AS gt ATA flash memory card Measurement setup data 7 Measured data The following communications functions are available For a description on the handling of the communications function and the software DAQSTANDARD for CX that comes with the package see the respective manuals Communications with Controllers The CX1000 can communicate with UT Series Controllers made by Yokogawa M amp C Corporation to transmit receive control parameters and receive PV data Up to four e
350. hen installing the CX1000 make sure it does not tilt to the left or right 0 to 30 degrees of backward tilt angle is allowed Note Condensation may occur if the instrument is moved to another place where the ambient temperature is higher or if the temperature changes rapidly In addition measurement errors will occur when using thermocouple input In this case let the instrument adjust to the new environment for at least an hour before using it The life of the LCD may shorten degradation of the image quality if the CX1000 is used in a high temperature environment It is recommended that the backlight brightness of the LCD be set low if the CX1000 is installed in a hot environment around 40 C or higher For a description on the LCD brightness setting see section 3 4 Setting the Brightness of the LCD and the Backlight Saver Function Do not install the CX1000 in the following places Outdoors In Direct Sunlight or Near Heat Appliances Select a location with the smallest temperature fluctuation as possible near room temperature 23 C Placing the CX1000 in direct sunlight or near heat appliances can cause adverse effects Where an Excessive Amount of Soot Steam Dust or Corrosive Gases Are Present Soot steam humidity dust and corrosive gas can cause adverse effects on the CX1000 Avoid installing the CX1000 in an environment with a high level of such elements Near Magnetic Field Sources Avoid bringing mag
351. hen one minute is truncated 1 68 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 16 Display Function Note 6 Note gt n 16 The maximum number of display data files that can be written to the internal memory is 16 16 represents this value The value n is the number of display data files in the internal memory In the following cases the display data is overwritten from the oldest file Use caution because the overwritten data is lost forever When there is no more remaining time of the display data acquisition area in the internal memory At this point the status display section shows Overwrite When the number of display data files in the internal memory has exceeded 16 Memory usage of the event data acquisition area in the internal memory Displayed when acquisition of event data is enabled When the acquisition mode is Free Bar graph Indicates the amount of event data acquisition area that is being used Time display Remaining time of the event data acquisition area When the remaining time becomes short the time is displayed in units of minutes Remaining time Unit 100 days or more Percentage of the remaining area in the event data acquisition area 100 hours or more to Days time unit less then one day is truncated less than 100 days 60 minutes or more to Hours time unit less then one hour is truncated less than 100 hours Less than 60 minutes Minutes time unit less then one minute is truncated
352. hen the alarm was released Alarm information ool IR Feb 19 23 12 10 selection cursor St IR feila Silo Fable 2 12 eat IR Feb 19 23 12 01 Feb 19 23 12 02 eat IR Feb 19 23 11 57 Feb 19 23 11 58 eat IR Feb 19 23 11 55 Feb 19 23 11 56 eat IR Feb 19 23 11 53 Feb 19 23 11 54 Alarm status mark Select the alarm information using the cursor and select INFORMATION gt JUMP TO HISTORY on the display selection menu to display the historical trend containing the selected alarm information Note You can also display only the control alarms see page 8 1 Alarm type indicates ETC if the alarm is an external loop and the alarm is of a type other than the control alarms that you can specify on the CX1000 Alarm Mark Indication The mark indication varies depending on the hold non hold setting of alarm indication see section 1 6 as follows When indication is When indication is set to non hold set to hold Alarm ACK Alarm ACK Occurrence Alarm Release Blinking Blinking Blinking red green red Haik Red Green indication l indication Green indication Red Green ar Setting the Display Conditions of the LCD The following display conditions of the LCD can be configured Display Attribute Setting Background color of The background color of the display can be set to white or black The initial the operation display setting of the control operation display is Black
353. her to use the report channel On or Off Channel Set the measurement or computation channel to assign to the report channel All measurement and computation channels can be specified However reports are not created for channels that are set to Skip or those that have the computation turned Off Sum scale Select the sum scale from the following Off amp measured computed data every scan interval s X measured computed data every scan interval x scan interval measured computed data every scan interval x scan interval 60 min X h X measured computed data every scan interval x scan interval 3600 day X measured computed data every scan interval x scan interval 86400 IM 04L31A01 03E 10 13 uondo uonsuny UOHey NdWOD y YUM sjapon UO AjUC suoneiodo palay uolnsuny wodey pue uonejndwog 10 7 Starting Stopping the Report Function This section explains how to start stop the report function Procedure The start stop operation of the creation of reports is synchronized to the start stop operation of the data acquisition to the internal memory Starting the Report Function Press the START key The report function starts When the time to create the report arrives the report data is written to the internal memory As shown in the following figure the memory operation indicator icon changes from stop indication to run indication The computation icon is also displayed GROUP 1 Feb 19 2002
354. how to clear the alarms when they occur Procedure Opening the Setting Display When setting the alarm output Alarm settings cannot be entered on 0 measurement channel models An error message will appear if the range or alarm setting screen is selected Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to the Setting mode Control gt MENU key switch to the Set mode gt 1 soft key select Range Alarm The following display appears our EEAS GE Last CH a1 Hode Range Span L Span_U Volt 2V 2 000 2 000 Type Value Rly No Detect o o on 101 on fc 1 000 fon voog on When setting the alarm delay The alarm delay setting cannot be entered on 0 measurement channel models the setting menu is not displayed Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to the Setting mode Control gt MENU key switch to the Set mode gt 2 soft key select Tag Moving average Alarm delay time The following display appears c gt Jan 04 2000 19 42 44 RAPIP C ta First CH 61 Last CH a1 Hoving average Count 2 Alarm delay time 108 When setting the alarm relay output and alarm details Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to the Setting mode Control gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 1 soft key select Alarm The following display appears IM 04L31A01 03E 7 2 Settings Relate
355. ic Key Operations Switching the Operation Mode Display Control Setting Menu and Common and Measurement Setting Menu The display switches each time the MENU key is pressed The ESC key can also be used when switching to the operation display from the control setting menu or common and measurement setting menu Switching to Basic Setting Menu 1 Press the MENU key to display the setting control menu or common and measurement setting menu 2 Press the FUNC key for at least 3 seconds Note You cannot switch to basic setting mode while control operation is running while data is being acquired to the internal memory or while the external storage medium is being accessed Stop the control operation data acquisition to the internal memory and computation before switching to basic setting mode If you change PID number Control period Control mode or Program control setting available only to models with the program control option under 12 Control in basic setting mode settings in setting mode Control are initialized If you change the settings under 3 Memory or 4 Memory and trend Memory timeup excluding memory time up items in basic setting mode save the new settings and return to operation mode the measured computed data in the intemal memory is cleared Save important data to the external storage medium before entering basic setting mode Switching Displays When in Operation Mode Procedure You
356. ic math 3 Constant 1 2 3 lt 1 PV SP math Retransmission gt Parameter Initial Value PV SP math Retransmissin gt Loop number 1to6 PV SP math Retransmissin gt PV SP PV PV SP math Retransmissin gt Mode Off PV SP math Retransmissin gt Calculation expression PV SP math Retransmissin gt Math error Loop number 1 to 6 C101 to C110 Over lt 2 Logic math gt Parameter Initial Value Logic math gt Setting number 1 6 Logic math gt Relay Off lt 3 Constant gt Parameter Initial Value Constant gt W01 to W12 1 App 34 IM 04L31A01 03E Appendix 6 Initial Values Set mode CONTROL GROUPI S CONTROL GROUPI Feb 19 20 26 wep OS Feb 19 21 5 one MEMO Set mode Set mode at Range Alarm Display 42 Tag Moving average Alarm delay time File DST 43 Trend Save interval User key Save Load Clear data cl Message Time 1 2 3 4 Next 1 3 Set mode a Hath setl Expression Alarm SCE Hath set2 Constant Nath set3 Tag TLOG Rolling average Alarm delay time ts 13 A 1 Range alarm Parameter Initial Value First CH 01 Last CH 01 Range gt Mode Volt Range gt Range 2V Range gt Span Upper 2 000 Range gt Span Lower 2 000 Alarm gt 1 to 4 Off 2 Tag Moving average Alarm delay Parameter Initial Value First CH 01 Last CH 01 Tag 01 Moving average gt Count Off Alarm delay Time 1
357. ications Enter the data as C01 to C12 in the equations For a description on how to set the data see the CX1000 CX2000 Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L31A01 17E Range of values through communication input maximum significant digits is 5 9 9999E 29 to 1 0000E 30 0 1 0000E 30 to 9 9999E 29 Status of the Remote Input of the Measurement Alarm Option Terminal Block DI001 to DI006 The status of the contact input or remote input signal can be assigned to 1 and 0 and used in the equations Enter the data as D01 to DO8 the number following the letter D is the remote input number in the equations The correlation between the status of the remote input signal and the value 1 and 0 are shown below Types of Input Signal Status Correlation with 1 and 0 Contact Closed 1 Open 0 Open collector Terminal voltage level is Lo 1 Terminal voltage level is Hi 0 IM 04L31A01 03E App 7 xipueddy Appendix 2 Supplementary Explanation of the Computation Function Control Output Terminal Block Status of Control DIO Expansion Terminal Block s Contact Output DO0001 DO006 You can set each contact output status to 1 or 0 and use them for computation Internal Switches SW01 SW18 You can set each internal switch status to 1 or 0 and use them for computation Data Types That Can Be Used in the Computation Function Computation Measurem
358. ime series data Rolling average Performs rolling average on the computed results Set up to 12 constants Digital input via communications Remote input Control contact input Report function 3 terminal isolated RTD Input N2 A B and b terminals of the RTD are of isolated input type for measurement inputs 24 VDC AC power supply driven P1 Rated supply voltage Can be used in equations other than statistical computation Number of values 12 Use remote input status 0 1 equations Number of inputs 8 Use contact input status 0 1 equations Number of inputs 6 DIO01 to DIO06 Report type Hourly daily hourly daily daily weekly daily monthly Computation type Average maximum minimum and sum Data format ASCII format 24 VDC AC Supply voltage range used Withstand voltage Power consumption Batch Header BT1 Information added to the measured control computed data Displaying information 21 6 to 26 4 VDC Between the power terminal and earth 500 VAC Supply Voltage LCD Saver Mode Normal Max 24 VDC Approx 12 VA Approx 14 VA 23 VA 24 VAC 50 60 Hz Approx 20 VA Approx 23 VA 37 VA Serial number of the CX Application name Supervisor name Manager name Batch number Lot number Comment information Displays the application name supervisor name manager name batch name and comment when data acquisition to the internal memory is stopped Identifying op
359. indefinitely as long as the total number of characters in the equation does not exceed 120 Rules for Writing Equations Common Items Follow the rules below when writing computing equations Measurement equation can be entered using up to 40 characters Control equation can be entered using up to 120 characters The precedence of computing terms can be specified using parentheses Specify the channels in the equation using channel numbers One digit numbers of channels constants K communication input data C statuses of remote inputs of the measurement alarm option terminal block D and statuses of contact inputs of the control output terminal block DI used in equations can be expressed as 01 or 1 Examples 01 1 KO1 K1 C01 C1 D01 D1 The data value for the channel used in the equation and for all channels greater in number than that channel are substituted with data from the previous scan Do not use more than 16 stacks channels K01 to K12 C01 to C12 D01 to D08 in one equation Otherwise a computation error may occur The computed result displays in this case Example The number of stacks in the equation 01 K01 03 04 KOZ2 is five Internal control data data used in PV SP equations is the data prior to 1 skip Note With control computation you can compute using a value from the previous iteration of the same computation For example given a PV for loop 1 of PV 101 W0
360. inearizer Lock Detail setting Free Program Free Note The keylock menu that appears when you first press the 5 soft key select Keylock only shows 1 Keylock1 2 Keylock2 and 3 Keylock3 appear when you set the Use Not box on the 1 Keylock1 setting screen to Use and display the keylock menu again Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Saving the Settings in Basic Setting Mode 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears IM 04L31A01 03E 11 3 suolouny 13410 JO suoneado E 11 2 Key Lock 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed Keylock 1 In operation mode press the FUNC key The soft key menu is displayed The Keylock soft key does not appear if the Keylock Use Not setting is Not i AlarmACK Nessage Manual Keylock ext 173 sample 2 Press the Keylock soft key
361. ing contact input trigger 250 ms or more Computation start stop level Computed data reset trigger 250 ms or more Manual sample trigger 250 ms or more Message write operation set up to 8 points trigger 250 ms or more Load settings up to 3 points trigger 250 ms or more Alarm ACK trigger 250 ms or more Snapshot trigger 250 ms or more FAIL memory end output A4F option or A4FR option Outputs relay contact signals when system errors occur at the specified time before overwriting of the internal memory is to start and based on the remaining free space on the external storage medium Manual save mode Outputs relay contact signals the specified time before overwriting starts select from 1 2 5 10 20 50 and 100 hours Auto save mode Outputs relay contact signals when the remaining free space on the external storage medium falls to 10 14 14 IM 04L31A01 03E 14 7 Options Computation Function M1 Can perform the following computations display the trend or numerical values of the computed data and store computed data Number of computation channels Computation types Constant 12 channels General arithmetic operations Four arithmetic operations square root absolute common logarithm exponential power relational operations lt lt gt logical operations AND OR NOT XOR Statistical computation Average maximum minimum and sum of t
362. ing box for the reference junction compensation voltage that is added to the input is displayed The setting range is 20000 uV to 20000 uV default value is O uV 4 2 Control gt Input setting Burnout and RJC This section explains the procedures for setting PV input burnout and reference junction compensation RJC This is the reference junction compensation setting for thermocouple inputs The setting is entered on the PV inputs of each loop Measure2 is valid only when the control mode is set to PVSwitching Remote is valid only when the PV input is set to remote input This setting is invalid for PV inputs other than thermocouples Measure1 Measure2 Remote Select either Internal or External initial value is Internal Internal Uses the reference junction compensation function of the CX1000 External Uses an external reference junction compensation function If set to External a box for entering the reference junction compensation voltage that is added to the input appears Set the value in the range of 20000 uV to 20000 uV initial value is O uV IM 04L31A01 03E 4 5 suoljeiadoQ dnjas pajyejay uoun 01u09 eS 4 3 Control gt DI DO SW registration This section explains the procedures for registering the contact input information during control selecting remote inputs and setting the alarm mode Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Setting
363. ing the down arrow key 2 Select Quick or Normal using the soft keys 3 Press the DISP ENTER key A format confirmation window appears 4 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the operation select No using the right arrow key and press the DISP ENTER key Note When using storage media formatted by the instrument on a Windows 2000 PC you must change the volume label 9 12 IM 04L31A01 03E 9 5 Managing Files and Checking the Free Space on the External Storage Medium Formatting the External Storage Medium Type Select from the following Quick Performs only a logical format Normal Performs a physical format and a logical format Disk Format Floppy disk 2HD 1 44 MB Zip disk FDISK 1 partition hard disk format ATA flash memory card FDISK 1 partition hard disk format Format Time External Storage Media Type Quick Normal Notes Floppy disk Approx 6 s Approx 1 minute 30 s Zip disk Approx 3 s Approx 10 minutes ATA flash memory card Approx 3 s Approx 1 minute 30 s 24 MB Approx 5 s Approx 6 minutes 160 MB Note Only 100 MB Zip disks can be used with model CX1 2 With model CX1 5 250 MB and 100 MB Zip disks can be used However 100 MB Zip disks must be formatted using quick logical formatting rather than normal physical formatting IM 04L31A01 03E 9 13 suoleiodg peo anes ed po 9 6 Saving the Screen Image Data Procedure This section explains how to
364. ings in Basic Setting Mode 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed Enabling Disabling the Partial Expanded Display Function gt Partial To use the partial expanded display function select Use initial setting is Not NOLO c The partial expanded display settings of all channels are set to Off when the Partial Use Not setting is changed in basic setting mode Detailed Setting of the Partial Expanded Display First CH Last CH Set the target channel common with the Zone and Graph settings Measurement channels 01 to 06 computation channels 31 to 42 internal control channels 101 to 106 external control channels 201 to 212 Off On To use partial expanded display select On initial value is Off If On is selected the Expand and Boundary entry boxes appear Expand Set the position where the boundary value is to be displayed within the display span in the range of 1 to 99 Boundary Set the value that is to be the boundary between the reduced section and the expanded section in the range of minimum span value 1 digit to maximum span value 1 digit However for channels that are set to scaling or square root computation the selectable range is minimum scale value 1 digit to maximum scale value 1 digit Example
365. input signals is different for the loop control with PV switching make sure to select PVrange to determine the PV range Item RemoteSP appears only when Control gt 1 Control action Input setting gt Program control is set to Off and Control gt 4 AUX Alarm mode gt Remote setting is set to Remote For PVSwitching RemoteSP is selectable only on odd numbered loops In addition for cascade control item RemoteSP does not appear for the settings of the loop number of the secondary loop Mode Type Range setting when Input type is set to a type other than PVrange Select the input mode Mode from TC RTD Scale and 1 5V Then set other items such as Range and Span Lower Upper limit according to the selected mode When set to TC thermocouple wv o Ss Q o Selectable Measurement Span Range 0 0 to 1760 0 C 0 0 to 1760 0 C 0 0 to 1820 0 C 200 0 to 1370 0 C 200 0 to 800 0 C 200 0 to 1100 0 C 200 0 to 400 0 C 0 0 to 1300 0 C 0 0 to 2315 0 C 200 0 to 900 0 C 200 0 to 400 0 C PLATI 0 0 to 1400 0 C PR 0 0 to 1900 0 C WRe 0 0 to 2400 0 C crsZz4 mxzaog When set to RTD resistance temperature detector Range Selectable Measurement Span Range Pt100 200 0 to 600 0 C JPt100 200 0 to 550 0 C 4 20 IM 04L31A01 03E 4 8 Control input range Note The CX1000 converts the measured value to a value obtaine
366. input value a as shown in the figure below For definitions of the engineering units EU and EUS see appendix 8 Explanation of Engineering Units EU and EUS Selectable range of input values EU 5 0 to 105 0 of the measurement span the initial value is 0 0 Selectable range of output values EUS 100 0 to 100 0 of the measurement span the initial value is 0 0 A Output b Corrected value sum of the actual input and the ten segment linearizer bias Sy P Fi Actual input F Ten segment linearizer bias n b4 a l Input a n a2 n a4 Ten segment Linearizer Approximation This function is used when the relationship between the input signal value and the value you wish to measure is not linear such as the level meter and the volume of a spherical tank In the ten segment linearizer approximation function you can set the output value b to an arbitrary value with respect to the input value a of an arbitrary point up to 11 points can be specified as shown in the figure below For definitions of the engineering units EU and EUS see appendix 8 Explanation of Engineering Units EU and EUS Selectable range of input value EU 5 0 to 105 0 of the measurement span the initial value is 0 0 Selectable range of output values EU 5 0 to 105 0 of the measurement span the initial value is 0 0 1 22 IM 04L31A01
367. ion Display Automatic Switching Style Number S3 or Later When a program execution command is sent via the communication function you can have it switch to the program operation display ON Switches to the program operation display when a program execution command is sent OFF Does not switch to the program operation display default even if a program execution command is sent IM 04L31A01 03E 5 15 suoljeiad C dnjas payejay j01j U0D weibolg E 5 11 AUX Event Group Settings Style Number S3 or Later This section explains the setting procedure for event groups displayed in the program selection screen and program operation display Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt 7 soft key select Program control parameters gt 4 soft key select AUX Event group The following display appears SYSTEM INFO S Jun 01 2007 15 00 24 wes OP me 0 Event group Pattern number Kind Number On TimeEvent l On TimeEvent G2 On TimeEvent 43 On TimeEvent aq On TimeEvent a5 Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item box 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to chang
368. ion direction defines the direction increase or decrease in which the control output value changes according to the polarity of the deviation between the SP and the PV In reverse action factory default setting the control output value decreases when the PV is greater than the SP and vice versa The control output is varied using direct control or reverse control specified beforehand in sync with the deviation between the SP and the PV at that point Direct action and reverse action can be switched in the middle of operation Reverse action Direct action Condition PV gt SP PV lt SP PV gt SP PV lt SP ON OFF output OFF ON ON OFF Current output Current decrease Current increase Current increase Current decrease wa ON time decrease ON time increase ON time increase ON time decrease Output change direction for the 4 20 mA case SP SP 20 mA y 20 mA y PV Increase Increase 1 t Output Output value i value i i i Decrease Decrease 4mA l PV 4mA Minimum value Maximum value Minimum value Maximum value PV is low PV is high PV is low PV is high IM 04L31A01 03E 1 33 suon uny jo uoneuejdxg 1 7 PID Parameter Settings Preset Output The preset output function outputs a constant value preset output value independently from the control output value present up to that point when the following conditions occur When an input burnout oc
369. ion error failure diagnostics are performed but not output in computation errors Analog Retransmission Settings Loop Number Select the loop number to perform analog retransmission This is valid for the loops set for analog retransmission in the control mode of Control Basic Settings Mode Select whether to activate or deactivate analog retransmission computation When OFF 0 V or 0 mA are output Note When the mode is OFF manual operations in operation mode are not available Equation Follow the instructions in the equation pop up window to enter the equation using 120 characters or less The number of data that can be used in equations is 35 You can also use the control constants W01 W36 in the equation Measurement constants KO1 K36 cannot be used See appendix 3 Meanings and Syntax of Equations for information on how to create equations Upper Lower Limit of Output Span Set in the range 30000 to 30000 upper limit value gt lower limit value upper lower 30000 The upper limit value specified here is 100 the lower limit value is 0 and the computed results are converted Converted results are output according to the control output type see section 4 3 Control gt Output Processing Units Computed result units are set using 6 characters or less IM 04L31A01 03E 4 43 suoljeiadoQ dnjas payejay uoun 017U09 eS 4 18 PV SP Computation and Analog Retransmission Settings Style Number S3 o
370. ioritized TSP3 PV start UZ C Current process value PEE eS When set to f ramp prioritized TSP1 TSEZ B PV1 start A When set to starting target i setpoint start i a Segment time of segment 3 TSP5 gt Time SSP Start program operation from segment 3 If the program operation is started from segment 3 the program operation starts according to the start conditions as follows When set to starting SP start The program operates using point A as the starting SP and progresses towards point C When set to ramp prioritized PV1 start The program progresses from point B to point C When set to time prioritized PV start Program operates from the current PV using the segment time of segment 3 and progresses toward point C You can hold the program progression stop the timer during program operation You can hold the program using key operation on the program operation status display using the external contact input or through the communication function While the program operation is in hold mode you can temporarily change the settings for the current segment When hold mode is cleared the operation continues with the new settings Temporarily means that the changes take effect in the operation of the current segment but the setting itself is not changed The settings that can be changed temporarily are indicated below Change the final SP of the segment Increase or decrease t
371. is acquired even if the trigger condition is met 1st block 2nd block Last block Data acquisition Data acquisition Data acquisition nN i i Trigger wait Trigger wait Trigger wait Trigger condition Trigger condition Trigger condition n gt met gt met Stop Rotate When the acquisition area of the internal memory is not divided A single event data file is created in the internal memory When START is pressed the CX1000 enters a trigger wait state After the trigger condition is met a specified time data length of data is acquired and acquisition is stopped The CX1000 enters the trigger wait state If the trigger condition is met again the data is overwritten Overwriting of the data is repeated each time the trigger condition is met while the CX1000 is in the trigger wait state To stop the acquisition of the event data press the STOP key Data acquisition MN MN AN Trigger wait Trigger condition aN met When the acquisition area of the internal memory is divided A single event data file is created in each divided area block When the START key is pressed the CX1000 enters a trigger wait state After the trigger condition is met a specified time of data is acquired in a single block and acquisition is stopped The CX1000 enters the trigger wait state If the trigger condition is met again data is acquired to the next block If the trigge
372. is inserted during manual save mode and prohibit Zip disk ejection Prohibit Zip disk ejection during auto save mode IM 04L31A01 03E 11 3 Key Operation Login Logout This section explains how to set the CX1000 so that only certain users can operate the instrument and how to log in and log out after the function is enabled Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Setting mode Control gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 6 soft key select Key login The following display appears Setup Node Key login Use Not Auto logout Off UserID Use Not Not Number On Off User name Password S Enter setup Enable Use Not Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item boxes 2 Press the soft key to set the values 3 Press the DISP ENTER key Saving the Settings in Basic Setting Mode 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed Login Operation 1 Press the FUNC key A user name list window and a soft key menu appears User name list Enter setup Userl userl Enable User2 user2 Enable User3 user3 Disable Userd user Disable User5 User6 User Userl User2 User3 Userd 2 Press the
373. it mode Display soft key menu 2 3 DELAY Program pattern Koldits peed ph program selection display controlled being Advance the program delayed Display the window for starting program control and resetting PV waveforms are Soft key menu 2 2 EV ON OFF EV KIND OVERVIEW CTRL GRP NEXT 2 3 displayed when you press the START Display soft key menu 3 3 key to start the data Switch to control group display style number S3 or later acquisition to the Switch to overview display style number S3 or later internal memory Display the selection menu for the event display method style number S3 or later Turn the event display ON OFF style number S3 or later Soft key menu 3 3 NEXT 3 3 Display soft key menu 3 3 Switch tag tag comment display Display the ON OFF selection menu of program pattern display loops Switch full display split display Soft key menu when in hold mode RUN RST ADVANCE HOLD SEG TIHE NEXT 1 4 Display soft key menu 2 4 Display the window for changing the remaining segment time TSP CHG SEL PNL EV ON OFF EV KIND NEXT 2 4 Display soft key menu 3 4 Display the menu for selecting the loop of which the target SP is to be changed OVERVIEW CTRL GRP ALL DIV DSP LOOP n 3 4 Display soft key menu 4 4 TAG CHT NEXT 4 4 Display soft key menu 1 4 Running and Resetting Program Control 1 Press the RUN RST soft key A pop up window for running and resetting the program con
374. ital signal At this point the sampled data is integrated for a certain period to eliminate the noise that is mixed in the input signal You can select the integral time from Auto 50Hz 20ms 60Hz 16 7ms 100ms This setting applies not only to the measurement input of the measurement function but also to the PV input of the control function By setting the integration time of the A D converter to match the time period corresponding to one cycle of the power supply or an integer multiple of one cycle the power supply frequency noise can be effectively eliminated If Auto is selected the recorder will automatically detect the power supply frequency and select 16 7 ms or 20 ms Because 100 ms is an integer multiple of 16 7 ms and 20 ms this setting can be used to eliminate the power frequency noise for either frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz The scan interval is the interval used to sample the input signal You can select 1s or 2s However if the integral time is set to 100ms the scan interval is fixed to 2 s Note When performing four arithmetic operations on models with the computation function M1 this scan interval is used to carry out the computation Input Type and Input Computation Mode There are six channels of measurement input channels measurement channels You can select the type of signal input to each measurement channel from DC voltage thermocouple resistance temperature detector and ON OFF input contact signal o
375. jdxg 1 11 Program Control Related Settings Time prioritized PV Start Program operation is started by prioritizing the segment time to change the SP from the PV at the start of program operation to the final SP of the 1 segment The ten segment linearizer ramp is defined by final SP PV segment time When the 1 segment is a soak segment the start condition is the same as with the starting target setpoint start Example in which the 24 segment is a soak segment The program operation start point of the 15 loop is always one of the points from point a to e Since the program operation start point of the 2 loop is at the same time as that of the 1 loop the program operation start point is one of the points point a2 to e2 TSPn Final SP Program pattern for the ist loop te eee SZ TF OFT FO Oe ee es Program pattern for the 2nd loop 1 1 1 1 1 a d2 mh nen Mecrereenennttiy n Tepe f i e C1 Be e2 gt 1 i 1 i s i i i i i gt Time SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEG5 Note This start method cannot be selected if the segment setting method is set to segment time ramp grade Switching Conditions of Program Segments program operation related setting The operating conditions related to the switching of the segments can be specified for each segment Such conditions include the condition for switching to the next segment and the operating conditions within the segment The following four
376. jo uoneuejdxg 1 2 Control Function Overview The order of processing for PID computation and analog retransmission is as follows Input value data used in computation newest value Previous PV previous SP previous output value PID computation Start control task Previous output value Processing of all analog retransmission control loops computation output v Processing of all Analog retransmission analog retransmission computation loops v Display recording terminal output Stop control task Data that can be used in the analog retransmission equation are as follows Measured input data measured computation data internal external control data and communication input data Constants constants used in measurement computations can not be used Control input data Control output module expansion module DIO and remote input for measurement Internal switches PV SP output value PID computation F Output value analog retransmission output Processing of all loops Computation Error You can specify the output method when a computation error occurs such as when an overrange occurs on the computed results of analog retransmission Over 105 of span Under 5 of span Display Recording of Analog Retransmission The output value of analog retransmission is displayed recorded as the OUT value of the loop specified for analog retransmissi
377. l CX1000 CX2000 Control of IM 04L31A01 91C Gives a description of pollution control Pollution Caused by the Product DAQSTANDARD Manuals All manuals other than IM 04L41B01 66EN are contained in the DAQSTANDARD CD Manual Title Manual No DAQSTANDARD Data Viewer User s Manual IM 04L41B01 63EN DAQSTANDARD Hardware Configurator User s Manual IM 04L41B01 64EN Installing DAQSTANDARD IM 04L41B01 66EN This manual describes the CX1000 style number S3 The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of continuing improvements to the instrument s performance and functions Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without the permission of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is strictly prohibited The TCP IP software of this product and the document concerning the TCP IP software have been developed created by YOKOGAWA based on the BSD Networking Software Release 1 that has been licensed from the Regents of the University of California e vigilantplant DAQSTATION and Dagstation are registered trademarks of Yokogawa Electric Corporation e Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United St
378. l Function Settings 0 eeeeeee eet eeeee cence eae eeeeeeaeeeaaeseeeeceeseeeesieeeeaeeeeeesceeseeeenaees 4 33 Hysteresis Alarm ii sisted eee sai diene nadie ae edad tatiana 4 35 DIO Operation Monitoring Function Settings Style Number S3 or Later 00 4 37 DI DO Label Settings Style Number S3 or Later 0 eee ceccceeeeeeeeeeee esse eters eeeeeeeeneees 4 40 PV SP Computation and Analog Retransmission Settings Style Number S3 or Later 4 41 Logic Computation Settings Style Number S3 or Later eeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 4 45 Control Constant Settings Style Number S3 or Later s ssseeseeeseeee neeese renren reenen 4 47 Settings for Switching the Program Patterns Using Contact Inputs with BCD Codes Version 3 20 Or Later crnini aana aiian aA aE AA AEREA 4 49 Program Control Related Setup Operations 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 Program Pattern Setup Procedure cecceesceceeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeecaeseeeeenaeesaaeenneesiaeeeeeeenaes 5 1 Program parameter setting gt Pattern initial setting ee eeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneereneees 5 2 Program parameter setting gt Wait action Setting snesnsssnesnnnnernernnnnnnrnnrnnnnnnrnnnensrnne 5 4 Program parameter setting gt Program start setting esseesseerrreerssrrrrsrirreerererinsrrrnsrnn 5 5 Program parameter setting gt Program pattern Setting eeeeeeeeeeerreeerresrieerirrernnsrrrnses 5 6 Program
379. l Memory and Saving Data to the External Storage Medium Collectively Saving Data When Data Acquisition to the Internal Memory Is Stopped MENU key switch to setting mode control gt MENU key switch to Set mode 5 soft key select Save Load Clear data gt 3 soft key select Save data Note If the memory is full or the number of files exceeds 16 the newest data overwrites the oldest data file If a power failure occurs the file is closed After the power recovers a new file is created and data is written there The start stop operation of the acquisition to the internal memory also starts stops the report function on models with the computation function option M1 If the computation is stopped you can start the computation by starting the acquisition to the internal memory When you stop the acquisition to the internal memory data is saved to the external storage medium If the external storage medium is not inserted at this point an error message Media has not been inserted appears You cannot perform the operation of collectively saving data when data acquisition to the internal memory is stopped if computation is in progress The procedure for saving all data collectively can only be performed when data acquisition to internal memory is stopped Setting the Memory Acquisition to the Internal Memory and Storage to the External Storage Medium Save Select the mode used to save the data in th
380. l Value 1 Remote Action No 1 to No 8 None 2 Report Report gt Report set Off Report gt Report CH RO1 Report gt Off On On Report gt Channel 01 Report gt Sum scale s 3 Timer TLOG NO Mode Interval Ref time Reset Action 1 Absolute Mode for No 2 and 3 is Off 1h 0 00 Off Off IM 04L31A01 03E App 25 xipueddy Appendix 6 Initial Values 9 Communication Setup Node Communication 1 Ethernet IP Address 2 Ethernet DNS 3 FIP transfer file 4 FTP connection 5 Control Login Timeout 6 Serial Memory out 7 Hodbus master BASIC 8 Hodbus master COMMAND 9 AUX 1 2 3 4 lt 1 Ethernet IP_Address gt Parameter Initial Value Ethernet IP_Address gt IP address 0 0 0 0 Ethernet IP_Address gt Subnet mask 0 0 0 0 Ethernet IP_Address gt Default gateway 0 0 0 0 lt 2 Ethernet DNS gt Parameter Initial Value Ethernet DNS gt DNS On Off Off Ethernet DNS gt Server search order gt Primary 0 0 0 0 Ethernet DNS gt Server search order gt Secondary 0 0 0 0 Ethernet DNS gt Host name Ethernet DNS gt Domain name 7 Ethernet DNS gt Domain suffix search order gt Primary Ethernet DNS gt Domain suffix search order gt Secondary lt 3 FTP transfer file gt Parameter Initial Value FTP transfer file gt Disp amp Event data Off FTP transfer file gt Report Off lt 4 FTP co
381. l is set to the same value as the scan interval all the measured or computed data sampled at the scan interval can be acquired to the internal memory The data is saved in binary format Max value per sampling interval l i g s i Min value per sampling interval Display data yo i i iI i i ir Ps 7 e 3 T r E i T To l T i Event data iI i 7 E 7 T E cl ir fg a Measured computed ilo E 3 _ control data per scan HoT J i O aei S T i 1 interval Sr Dat A A E E a E d Time jt Scari interval ae d Sampling interval of event data Sampling interval of dislay data time equivalent to 1 dot on the display 1 86 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 17 Data Storage Function Internal memory size The size of the internal memory for acquiring display data and event data is 1 2 MB Whe n the measured computed control data is saved using both display data and event data 0 9 MB and 0 3 MB of memory is used for display data and event data respectively CX1000 internal memory When set to display data only When set to event data only When set to display data and event 0 9 MB 1 2 MB 1 2 MB ml 0 3 MB Display data Event data Display data Event data Data to be acquired and selecting the acquisition mode of event data You can select display data only display data and event data or even data on data ly
382. layed are not saved IM 04L31A01 03E 11 13 suoloun 13410 JO suoneado a 11 6 Setting Whether or Not to Use the Batch Header BT1 option This section explains how to be available batch header Opening the Operation Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Set mode gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 11 soft key select AUX Time zone The following display appears Setup Mode AUX Tag Channel Channel Memory alarm lh Language English Partial Not Batch Time zone Difference from GHT 0 Use Not Operations on the Display 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to Batch Use and Not soft keys are displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Saving the Settings in Basic Setting Mode 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed 11 14 IM 04L31A01 03E 11 7 Setting the Batch Information BT1 option This section explains how to set
383. layed for the loop number of the secondary loop Alarm mode Select the condition for disabling the control alarm from the following The characters inside the parentheses are character strings displayed as selections in the soft key menu ALWAYS Enable the alarm at all times STOP Disable the alarm when the operation is stopped STOP MAN Disable the alarm during manual operation mode or when the operation is stopped SP No selection source Set the loop for switching the SP number using contact inputs SPnumberObit to SPnumbersbit see section 1 5 To apply the setting select On initial value is Off for each loop number 1 or 2 PV SP Computation Function This setting determines whether or not the computed result is used for PV SP When set to ON you can specify an equation in the control setting mode to use for PV SP When the PV SP computation function is ON the following settings become active for each control input channel Control input channel range settings Ten segment linearizer approximation settings External RJUC burnout If you change the PV SP computation function all but the following items under setting mode control are initialized Tag tag comment 5 Control group setting 8 Detailed DIO monitor and operation etc gt 3 DI DO monitor and operation setting 8 Detailed DIO monitor and operation etc gt 4 DI DO label setting 9 Control math setting gt 2 Logic math 9 Co
384. le 9 14 IM 04L31A01 03E 9 7 Clearing the Data in the Internal Memory This section explains how to clear all the data in the internal memory including display data event data manual sample data TLOG data optional function data and report data optional function data Procedure Opening the Operation Dialog Box Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt MENU key switch to Set mode 7 soft key select Save Load Clear data gt 9 soft key select Clear data From the operation display use the above keys to open the following display box h Are you sure you want to clear Measure data Operations on the Display Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The data is cleared To cancel the operation select No using the right arrow key and press the DISP ENTER key Note The data acquired in the internal memory is also cleared when memory related settings are changed in basic setting mode In this case the following confirmation dialog box appears Do you want to store and make the new settings take effect EEE No cance IM 04L31A01 03E 9 15 suoleiodg peo anes ed po Chapter 10 Computation and Report Function Related Operations Only on Models with the Computation Function Option 10 1 Assigning Computation Channels and Setting Computing Equations Constants and Tags This section explains how to set computing equations to c
385. le for each channel and the display position IM 04L31A01 03E 1 75 1 16 Display Function Updating the Waveform and Updating the Numerical Display One division on the CX1000 consists of 30 dots along the time axis on the LCD The displayed waveform is updated at an interval corresponding to one dot This interval is determined by the time corresponding to one division referred to as the display update rate The relationship between the display update rate and the speed of movement of waveforms is as follows Measured computed values of the numerical display are updated every second every 2 s if the scan interval is set to 2 s on the Display Update Rate div 1min 2min 5min 10min 20min 30minth 2h 4h 10h Speed of Movement of 594 297 119 59 30 20 10 5 2 5 1 0 Waveforms approximate value mm h O_O The speed of movement of the trend display along the time axis is derived from the following equation given the dot pitch of the LCD 0 33 mm The speed of movement of the trend display along the time axis 30 dots x 0 33 mm x 60 min display update rate min Display Format of Waveforms The data shown on the display consists of maximum and minimum values of the data that is sampled at the scan interval within the time period corresponding to one dot Maximum value fanaa Minimum value aat 2 s 1 dot If the display update rate is set to 1 minute the time corresponding to 1 d
386. leted and the number of segments is decremented by 1 If you select Insert a segment is inserted before the segment corresponding to the number selected by Edit segment number and the number of segments is incremented by 1 Edit segment number Select the number of the segment to be deleted or the position where the new segment is inserted in the range of 1 to 99 within the number of used segments Operating Loop Designation Specify the loop to execute for each pattern The loop for which Program Setting ON under Control Basic Setting was set to ON is displayed However loops on programs being executed cannot be changed IM 04L31A01 03E suoljeied C dnjas payejay j01j U0D weibolg E 5 3 Program parameter setting gt Wait action setting This section explains the procedures for setting the wait action during program control Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt 7 soft key select Program control parameters gt 1 soft key select Program parameter setting gt 2 soft key select Wait action setting The following display appears ber ar 2602 11 01 33 F ERAS Wait action setting Pattern number 1 Wait zone 1 2 3 4 5 Loop iim on fort fort off H 8 1 1 L 8 1 1 Loop2 off otf off off off H t Wait time a0 10 00 00 15 58 On Off Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cu
387. llows the remote setting value During program control Tracking when switching from program control to local control the local setting value follows the program setting value Measured Value Tracking Select whether to turn the Measured Value Tracking function ON default or OFF Operation proceeds in the following cases when the function is turned ON Operates only with local operation during program control When shifting from manual operation to automatic operation When starting automatic operation from the operation stop condition When turning the power ON When changing the target setpoint number Target Setpoint Lower and Upper Limit Set when applying limits to the target setpoint setting range The setting range is EU 0 0 to 100 0 of the measurement span lower limit lt upper limit The available setting range appears in the pop up window Output Velocity Limiter You can turn the velocity limiter of the control output ON or OFF default and set the rate of change in the range from 0 1 to 100 0 s Anti Reset Windup Select whether to activate the anti reset windup function on Auto or Manual If you select Manual select the deviation width of the point at which the PID computation is resumed disengaging from the output saturated status and the deviation width of points that restart PID computation in the range from 50 0 to 200 0 4 34 IM 04L31A01 03E 4 15 Hysteresis Alarm This section explains th
388. lly sets the optimum PID constant When auto tuning is executed the control ouput is temporarily turned ON OFF step wise see the following figure From the hunting period and amplitude of the PV that is generated the optimum PID constant is calculated and set This method is called the limit cycle method Auto tuning is allowed only during auto operation under PID control In addition for cascade control auto tuning on the primary loop is possible only when cascade operation is in progress Setpoint Process __ value Control output lg Auto tuning in progress gt Auto tuning ends Ae the third ey rie gt Time gt Auto tuning on PID control according to the PID control determined by auto tuning Target Setpoint during Auto Tuning Execution Auto Tuning Point The auto tuning point can be limited in the range of 3 to 97 of the measurement span Auto tuning points are indicated below When Zone PID is selected Local operation When specified group is in operation SP specified by the SP number When all groups are in operation Midpoint of each reference point Program operation or remote operation When specified group is in operation SP when auto tuning is executed When all groups are in operation Midpoint of each reference point When Zone PID is not selected Local operation SP specified by the SP number Program operation or remote operation Note SP when au
389. log input range conversion Square root computation Ten segment linearizer approximation ten segment linearizer bias Analog input range conversion Square root computation Analog input range conversion Square root computation Ten segment linearizer approximation ten segment linearizer bias BUIYOUMS Jeoo7 ajouay SSS PV input filter SP 1to8 Remote a Local T5 D n 4 Re eee Secondary loop Control computation section 1 SP 1t0o8 Cascade Q 9 Auto manual Cascade switching _ Tracking signal Manual operation Control computation section 2 Alarm function PETIT Alarm1 Alarm2 Alarm3 Alarm4 Alarm1 Alarm2 Note There are 6 contact input terminals and 6 contact output terminals on a single control output terminal block The functions that can be assigned to each input output terminal vary depending on the control mode and whether program operation is enabled IM 04L31A01 03E App 41 x pu ddy Appendix 7 Control Function Block Diagram Cascade Control Program Control Primary loop PV input PV input Expansion Contact input contact input Input type selection Program pattern selection i Unit selection i Analog input range conversion Square root computation Se Ten segment linearizer approximation Hold opefation start ten segment linearizer bias Advance operation start es uonesado weibolg dos uonesado weibolg Secondary loop
390. loop control with PV switching program control ON OFF only on models with the program control option and PID control mode 2 Input setting Burnout and RJC 3 Contact input registration Contact input registration 4 AUX Remote setting alarm mode and SP number selection source 5 Output processing Control output cycle time and analog output type 6 Relay FAIL ON OFF self diagnosis ON OFF and relay action behavior energize de energize hold nonhold 7 Tuning setting Tuning item selection 8 External loop setting For details on the settings see the CX1000 CX2000 Communication Interface User s Manual Setup Items in the Control Setting Mode 1 Control input range Input type mode type range span scale unit square root low cut bias filter and ratio 2 Control alarm Type standby relay output ON OFF and alarm value 1 12 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 2 Control Function Overview 3 Operation related parameters Zone PID Suppressing function ramp rate time unit SP ramp down rate SP ramp up rate tag tag comment reference point when zone PID is selected switching hysteresis when zone PID is selected and reference deviation when zone PID is selected 4 PID parameters SP PID constant output limit shutdown ON OFF manual reset relay hysteresis only during ON OFF control reverse direct and preset output 5 Control group setting Group name kind internal loop external loop measurement channel
391. lue to one of the Characters boxes under Message A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the Input soft key A message pop up window appears 3 Enter the message using the character number input key 4 Press the DISP ENTER key The message pop up window closes and the cursor moves to the next Characters box 5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 to enter all the messages you wish 6 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Displaying and Writing messages 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2 Press the Message soft key to display a list of messages A soft key menu used to select the message appears 1m E Hessage list Hessagel START Hessage2 STOP Hessage3 Hessaged Hessage5 Hessageb Hessage Hessage8 of essagel Hessage2Nessage3Nessaged Next 1 2 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the message you wish to write A message mark time and the message itself are displayed on the trend display and the information is written to the internal memory Note Step 3 above cannot be carried out if acquisition to the internal memory is stopped s U9 U09 p erds q y BuiBueysy 104 suoneado E IM 04L31A01 03E 8 11 8 8 Measurement Function gt Settings Related to Messages Displayed on the Trend Display and Write Operation For Models with th
392. ly The scales are actually displayed at positions 1 2 and 3 respectively The scale values are displayed according to the following rules If the number of scale divisions is 4 to 7 values are displayed by all the main scale marks If the number is 8 to 12 values are displayed by every other main scale marks Scale upper and lower limits are displayed at the ends of the scale Scale values are displayed up to 3 digits excluding the minus sign However if the integer part of values at the ends of the scale are both 1 digit or the integer part for both is 0 2 digits are displayed Example If the scale is 0 05 to 0 50 the lower limit is 0 0 and the upper limit is 0 5 If the integer part of either end of the scale is 2 or 3 digits the fractional part is truncated Example If the scale is 0 1 to 100 0 the lower limit is O and the upper limit is 100 If the integer part of either end of the scale is 4 or more digits the value is displayed using a 3 digit mantissa and exponent like x10 or x102 Example If the scale is 10 to 2000 the lower limit is 1 and the upper limit is 200 x 10 The unit is displayed near the center of the scale If partial expanded display is used the display position is offset from the center When the trend is displayed horizontally the number of characters that can be displayed is 4 characters or less 6 characters for vertical display IM 04L31A01
393. m mits Deviation pe PV setpoint setpoint SP Hysteresis Hysteresis gt PV low limit Close Open SP high limit i a Alarm PV Setpoint Alarm setpoint setpoint Hysteresis 2 a Hysteresis Deviation Open i Close Te high limit p i SP low limit PV gt Deviation Le SP setpoint Alarm setpoint Setpoint Hysteresis Hysteresis iati Close Open Deviation j Output high limit eS low limit Deviation a A setpoint sp PV Output Alarm setpoint value Hysteresis Hysteresis lt gt lt gt Hysteresis ae Close i Open i Close Deviation k k Output low limit i high amp low Deviation i PV lt _ limit setpoint i Alarm setpoint Output SP value Action When an Alarm Occurs Alarms can be generated at the contact output and on the CX1000 display The alarm contact output can be assigned to the DIGITAL OUT terminal see page 2 6 of the control output terminal block The alarm display can be confirmed by the mark on the control group displays alarm occurrence history on the alarm summary display and the alarm icon on the operation status display section Note You cannot assign the control alarm output to the ALARM terminal of the measurement alarm option terminal block 1 38 IM 04L31A01 03E Control Alarm Related Settings Setting the Alarm Value An alarm is registered for each SP of a single control loop If the SP number 1 to 8 is switched the alarm value switches accordi
394. m operation only on models with the program control option Hold Trigger Holds the program operation only on models with the program control option Advance Trigger Advances the program operation only on models with the program control option Set pattern number 0 to 4 bits Trigger Switches the program pattern number to the specified binary or binary coded decimal value only models with the program control option Input switch contact Edge Switches the PV input PV1 PV2 of each intemal loops 1 and 2 loop during loop control with PV input switching Start Stop Edge Starts stops data acquisition to the internal memory Trigger Trigger Trigger used to start acquiring event data to the internal memory valid only when event data is specified to be acquired to the internal memory and the trigger used to start the acquisition is set to external trigger Alarm ACK Trigger Clears alarm display relay output valid only when the alarm indicator or output relay behavior is set to hold Time adj Trigger Adjusts the internal clock to the nearest hour Math Edge Starts stops computation only on models with the computation function M1 Math reset Trigger Resets computed data of measurement channels Resets the computed value to 0 Only when computation is stopped on models with the computation function option Manual sample Trigger Acquires instantaneous values of all channels to the internal memory Load setup d
395. manually When manually setting the function the point at which the integral computation is resumed is set in terms of a deviation width The deviation width is derived using the following equation Deviation width IPV SPI proportional band x 100 Selectable range of deviation width 50 0 to 200 0 Control Output Suppression You can use the overshoot suppressing function that uses fuzzy logic The overshoot suppression function works only during PID control when all PID constants are specified When the overshoot suppression function is used the deviation is monitored to detect the danger of overshooting If danger is detected the SP is automatically changed to a slightly lower tentative value referred to as the auxiliary SP and the control continues Then when the PV enters a range in which overshooting is no longer a danger the auxiliary SP is gradually returned to the original SP The following cases are examples in which this function is effective When you wish to suppress overshooting When you wish to shorten the rise time When load fluctuation is frequent When the setpoint is changed frequently Auxiliary SP A Original SP PV gt Time Control output Start fuzzy logic suppression function ON IM 04L31A01 03E 1 35 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 8 Control Output Suppression Settings Output Velocity Limiter This function is used to prevent radical changes in the control output
396. measurement remote inputs A4F 4measurement alarm outputs 1 FAIL output and 1 memory end output A4FR 4 measurement alarm outputs 1 FAIL output 1 memory end output and 8 measurement remote inputs The following figure shows the terminal arrangements on each measurement alarm option terminal block Wire the terminals according to the configuration A6 option Alarm output C Common NO Normally Opened 06 05 04 03 02 01 NC Normally Closed NC NC NC NC NC NC c c c c c NO NO NO NO NO NO AGR option Measurement remote input ALARM REMOTE 06 05 04 03 02 01 NC NC NC NC NC NC 6 3 c c c c c c c 7 4 1 NO NO NO NO NO NO 8 5 2 A4F option FAIL output Memory end output
397. memory The first time manual sample is executed a manual sampled data file is created on the external storage medium The data is appended to this file for each successive manual sample operation Up to 50 sets of data can be acquired to the internal memory When 50 is exceeded the data is overwritten from the oldest data The number of manual sample data points in the internal memory can be confirmed using memory summary see section 1 16 For the data format of the manual sampled data see appendix 5 Data Formats of ASCII Files You can assign the manual sample function to the USER key and save the data simply by pressing a single key For the procedure in assigning the function to the USER key see section 11 1 IM 04L31A01 03E suoleiedg peo anes ed po 9 3 Saving and Loading Setup Data This section explains how to save the setup data to the external storage medium and how to change the settings by loading the setup data from the external storage medium Saving of the setup data is possible only in setting mode Procedure Displaying the Operation Display Saving Setup Data Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt MENU key switch to Set mode 7 soft key select Save Load Clear data 1 soft key select Save settings The following display appears lt gt Feb 28 2009 23 00 16 50 ME LC Save settings File name File name Time TEST 1 PCL
398. mer and set back one hour at the date and hour specified for Winter 3 12 IM 04L31A01 03E 3 4 Setting the Brightness of the Display and the Backlight Saver Function This section explains how to set the brightness of the LCD and the backlight saver function used to prolong the life of the LCD backlight Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Set mode Control gt MENU key switch to Set mode gt 5 soft key select Display gt 4 soft key select View Direction LCD The following setting display appears G 1 Leb Brightness ja Direction Trend Vertical Bargraph Vertical Saver On Background i Measure White hae KERT Control Black a Trend line 2 dot Trip line 2 dot Grid 16 div Scroll time 5s Scale digit Normal i 2 Next 1 2 Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the Brightness or Saver The selections are displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to change The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item If Backlight saver On Off is set to On Saver time and Restore entry boxes appear 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed tur
399. n addition to the measurement channels 01 to 6 internal control channels 101 to 106 and external control channels 201 to 212 can be selected for the target channels Assignment of internal control channels channels of internal loops The data of two loops is assigned to channel numbers as follows Loop 1 PV 101 Loop 1 SP 102 Loop 1 OUT 103 Loop 2 PV 104 Loop 2 SP 105 Loop 2 OUT 106 Assignment of external control channels channels of external loops The data of four loops is assigned to channel numbers as follows External loop 1 PV 201 External loop 1 SP 202 External loop 1 OUT 203 eco External loop 4 PV 210 External loop 4 SP 211 External loop 4 OUT 212 Note _ For measurement channels the target channels also apply to Alarm delay time and Moving average settings Tag Enter the tag name using up to 16 alphanumeric characters Note For the procedures of setting tag strings of measurement channels on models with the computation function option see section 10 1 Assigning Computation Channels and Setting Computing Equations Constants and Tags Displaying Tag Names in Place of Channel Numbers Tag Channel Select the Tag Note The tag name specified here is not shown on the control loop display of the control group control overview tuning and alarm summary displays The tag name for control loops is displayed IM 04L31A01 03E 8 5 s u uo p erds q y BuiBueysy 1
400. n from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Display Brightness Select a value from 1 to 8 the initial setting is 4 The larger the value the brighter the display becomes Backlight Saver Function Saver When set to On the LCD backlight automatically dims according to the specified conditions described below Saver time Select a value from 1min 2min 5min 10min 30min 1h factory default setting is 1h If the specified time elapses without any key operation the LCD backlight is automatically dimmed Restore Key The backlight returns to the original brightness on a key operation Key Alm The backlight returns to the original brightness on a key operation or an alarm occurrence Note The degradation of the brightness and the discoloration of the screen become yellowish tend to progress faster as the brightness is set higher Extended use at an unnecessary high setting should be avoided It is also recommended that you use the backlight saver function IM 04L31A01 03E 3 13 suoleiodg uoWWOD pue sepoyy Aejdsiq syed jo soweN e 3 5 Initializing the Setup Data and Clearing the Internal Memory Procedure This section explains how to initialize the setup data in the internal memory to factory default settings initial settings and how to clear the data in the internal memory Fora list of initial settings see appendix 6 Opening the Setting Display Press the k
401. n is used to prevent radical changes in the PV When the PV tracking function is enabled ON the SP is forced to match the PV once in the following cases When powering up When switching from manual MAN operation mode to auto AUTO operation mode When switching from operation stop to operation run When switching the SP number The SP is matched against the PV once and then returns to the original SP according to the target setpoint ramp rate rate of change that is specified separately When using the PV tracking function make sure to set the SP ramp rate rate of change The ramp rate is 0 when it is OFF Consequently the PV tracking function does not operate in this case PV tracking function ON OFF setting ON or OFF the initial value is OFF When PV tracking is OFF A SP PV MAN AUTO Az ma Mode switching Time When PV tracking is ON A Follows the target setpoint ramp rate SP PV MAN i AUTO i gt Mode switching Time When the PV input is a thermocouple or standard signal a burnout action can be specified When a burnout is detected the PV is fixed to positive overrange when the burnout detection action is set to UP or negative overrange when the burnout detection action is set to DOWN and the control output is set to preset output Reference Junction Compensation You can select whether to use the internal reference junction compensation function of the CX
402. ne the operation switches from run mode to wait mode Wait operation does not apply to loops that are in local mode or that are stopped In cascade control if the primary loop is in local mode or if the secondary loop is stopped wait operation does not apply If in hold mode wait operation is not performed because hold mode has precedence Wait at the Time of Segment Switching Wait at the time of segment switching is the wait operation that is performed when the PV has not reached the final SP before changing to the next segment If the PV reaches the wait zone within the wait time the operation moves to the next segment at that point If the PV does not reach the wait zone within the wait time the operation moves to the next segment after the wait time elapses When the operation is switched to hold mode during wait operation the wait time is reset If the PV has not reached the wait zone when the hold mode is cleared the timer is restarted from zero If the remaining segment time is changed when in hold operation wait at the time of segment switching no longer applies and the wait operation is reset Operation when the PV reaches the wait zone within the wait time If the PV reaches the wait zone of the final SP before the wait time elapses after the wait operation is started the operation switches from wait mode to run mode and transits to the next segment 1 46 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 11 Program Control Related Settings SEG n SEG
403. nets or instruments that produce magnetic fields near the CX1000 Using the CX1000 near a strong magnetic field source can cause measurement errors Where the View of the Display Is Poor The CX1000 uses a 5 5 TFT color LCD for the display Therefore viewing of the display from an extreme angle is difficult Install the CX1000 so that the user can easily view the display 2 2 IM 04L31A01 03E 2 2 Installation Installation Procedure Use a 2 mm to 26 mm thick steel plate for the panel on which the CX1000 is to be mounted 1 Insert CX1000 from the front of the panel 2 Using the mounting brackets that came with the package insert the CX1000 to the panel as shown in the following figure Two mounting brackets are used at the top and bottom or left and right of the case remove the seal covering the holes of the mounting brackets on the case beforehand The adequate tightening torque of the screws for the panel mounting brackets is 0 7 to 0 9 N m Mount the CX2000 to the panel according to the procedure below First attach the two mounting brackets and temporarily fasten the attachment screws Next fix the CX in place by tightening the attachment screws with the appropriate torque When the CX is approximately perpendicular to the panel as you fasten the screws press the mounting bracket against the case so that they are in contact with each other CAUTION Tightening the screws with a torque greater than t
404. nge upper limit ower limit value the range related setting items below items set using industrial units EU or EUS are initialized Bias value alarm value target setpoint ramp down target setpoint ramp up reference point switching hysteresis reference deviation PID parameters target setpoint relay hysteresis ten segment linearizer mode SP low limit SP high limit boundary of partial expanded display Input Switching PV Lower Limit Value Upper Limit Value 2 input switching control only Set in the range 30000 to 30000 max value gt min value max min 30000 and within the PV range When Setting Range is selected under Control Basic Setting gt 1 Control operation settings gt Switching condition and when Input switching PV upper limit PV lower limit and Switching condition are PV upper limit only Input switching is set 2 Settings cannot be changed during control operation while writing to memory or during measurement computation 4 42 IM 04L31A01 03E 4 18 PV SP Computation and Analog Retransmission Settings Style Number S3 or Later Units Computed result units are set using 6 characters or less Settings cannot be changed during control operation measurement computation or saving data Ratio Settings only when SP is selected for PV SP When applying a specific ratio to SP turn the setting ON and set the ratio in the range from 0 0001 to 30000 Settings can be changed during control
405. nged from 1 to 99 within the number of used segments Ramp Soak select Select the type of segment to be specified Ramp or Soak 5 6 IM 04L31A01 03E 5 5 Program parameter setting gt Program pattern setting Target setpoint ramp segment only Set the final SP of the ramp segment in the range of EU 0 0 to 100 0 initial value is 0 of the measurement span The values can be copied and pasted using soft keys Only the loops that are set as follows are displayed Control gt 1 Control action gt Control mode to a mode other than Off and Program control to On During cascade control even numbered loops within the same terminal block are not displayed Segment time Set the segment time in the range of 0 00 01 to 99 59 59 0 hour O min 1 s to 99 hour 59 min 59 s This item is displayed at all times during segment time setting method and only when soak is selected during segment time ramp setting method Ramp rate time unit Set the ramp rate time unit for ramps to Hour or Minute This item is displayed only during ramp in the segment time ramp setting method Ramp Set the ramp per unit time in the range of 1 digit to EUS 100 of the measurement span The measurement span and decimal point position of the selectable range vary depending on the smallest numbered loop to be specified This item is displayed only during ramp in the segment time ramp setting method Segment PID g
406. nged turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change The reference junction compensation voltage is set using the pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Setting Input Related Parameters The setting menu differs when the PV SP computation function is ON or OFF Loop number first and last channel when the PV SP computation function is ON Set the Burnout and RJC parameters for each loop When changing these parameters this setting is used to select the target loop number 1 or 2 initial value is 1 The loop number is displayed up to the number of loops you specified at the time of purchase When the PV SP computation function is ON you can set the control input channel number Burnout Sets the burnout action for the PV inputs of each loop Measure2 is valid only when the control mode is set to PVSwitching Remote is valid only when the PV input is set to remote input This setting is invalid for PV inputs other than thermocouples and standard signals IM 04L31A01 03E 4 2 Control gt Input setting Burnout and RJC Measure1 Measure2 Remote Select Off Up or Down initial value is Up according to the description given below Off B
407. ngly Since up to 4 alarm types can be assigned for each control loop four alarm values can be assigned per SP number You can set the alarm value in the following range PV high low limits SP high low limits EU 0 to 100 of the measurement span Deviation high low limits EUS 100 to 100 of the measurement span Deviation high amp low limit deviation within high amp low limits EUS 0 to 100 of the measurement span Output high low limit 5 0 to 105 0 Nole umm The alarm number corresponds to the SP number If you change the SP number the alarm switches to the value of the corresponding alarm number Alarm Stand by Action Alarm Hysteresis Open Yy Time When the PV input reaches the SP at the initial stages of control operation you can put the alarm output on standby PV Normal Normal Failure handling Alarm output a Hysteresis lt Alarm lower limit value Alarm is not output during this period even if thePV is below the alarm lower limit gt Time Power up The alarm hysteresis can be set in the range of EUS 0 0 to 10 0 of the measurement span Below is an example of setting the hysteresis of alarm 1 when the alarm 1 type is set to PV high limit Open and close in the figure indicate the relay contact status Ifthe alarm switching ON OFF is excessive the alarm hysteresis can be widened to lessen the excessiveness In the right figure the switching of th
408. ngs Setting the SP Set the SP as one of the PID parameters for each PID number 1 to 8 in the range of EU 0 0 to 100 0 of the measurement span The PID number in which the SP has been registered is handled as SP number when specifying the setpoint and for other purposes SP Assignment PV The SP is specified using the SP number The operation at the time of SP number switching varies depending on the PID selection method When target setpoint selection method is selected The SP number and PID number are synchronized By switching the SP number the control parameters PID parameters in the settings such as the SP and the PID constant are changed to the control parameters registered to the corresponding PID number SP3 No 3PID Rise according to the setpoint ramp up setting SPn SP number SP2 No 2PID _ Fall according to y the setpoint ramp down setting SP1 No 1PID Rise according to the setpoint x x ramp up setting Time Switch from SP1 to SP3 Switch from SP3 to SP1 Switch from SP1 to SP2 No 1PID When zone PID method is selected The assignment of the SP number and the assignment of the PID number are not synchronized A PID number group number of the PID parameter is registered for each zone beforehand When the PV changes and becomes a value of a different zone the PID number automatically changes but the SP number does not switch Note
409. nnection gt Parameter Initial Value FTP connection Primary FTP connection gt FTP server name FTP connection gt Port number 21 FTP connection gt Login name FTP connection gt Password FTP connection gt Account FTP connection gt PASV mode Off FTP connection gt Initial path lt 5 Control Login Timeout gt Parameter Initial Value Ethernet login gt Use Not Not Application time out gt On Off Off Keep alive gt On Off On App 26 IM 04L31A01 03E Appendix 6 Initial Values lt 6 Serial Memory out gt Parameter Initial Value Serial gt Baud rate Serial gt Data length Serial gt Parity Serial gt RS 232 gt Handshaking Serial gt RS 422 485 gt Address Serial gt RS 422 485 gt Protocol Memory output 9600 bps 8 bit Even Off Off 1 Normal Ethernet lt 7 Modbus master BASIC gt Parameter Initial Value Basic settings gt Read cycle Basic settings gt Timeout Basic settings gt Retrials 2s 2s Off lt 8 Modbus master COMMAND gt Parameter Initial Value Command Settings gt 1 to 8 Off lt 9 AUX gt Parameter Initial Value Recovery status for Comm Buffer gt DO SW Modbus master Ext loop gt Auto recovery Clear Off 10 Web E Mail Setup Mode Web E Mail 1 Web 2 Basic E Mail settings 3 Alarm E Mail settings 4 Scheduled E Mail settings 5 System E Mail setting
410. not performed up to that point When the segment number at that point is between the repeat start segment and repeat end segment If the change is made before the repeat action is performed including a change from repeat OFF or after the repeat action has been finished repeat action is performed from the first repetition using the new settings If the change is made during repeat action the repeat action is performed the number of times specified by the new repeat frequency including the number of repetitions that have been performed before the change If the new repeat frequency is smaller than or equal to the number of repetitions that have been performed already before the change the repeat action is terminated after the current repetition However if the repeat frequency is changed from infinity to a finite value repeat action is started using the new repeat frequency from the change point Only a single period of repeat action can be specified for each program pattern Set the first SP of the repeat start segment the same as the last SP of the repeat end segment If they do not match the start segment pattern will be affected In repeat action all time events that are ON are turned OFF when returning from repeat end segment to repeat start segment If time prioritized PV start or ramp prioritized PV start is specified as a starting condition of the program operation PV start is also performed when repeat operation is start
411. nput lt output Number identifying the connected user Date time the CX1000 was accessed File Transfer Log Using the FTP Client Function Number of the log displayed on the bottom line total number of logs 682 882 Time No Code Flag File Name Jan 31 2081 06 58 08 282 HOSTNAME S 13106580 DHR Jan 31 2001 06 58 08 282 HOSTNAME P 13186588 DHR File name 8 characters FTP connection destination P primary S secondary Error code Date time when file was transferred Web Operation Log 003 003 Time Request No Parameter Jan 31 06 52 38 Key DOWN Jan 31 06 51 21 Screen TREND GROUP 2 Jan 31 06 50 28 Message 155 1 start Operation information Error code See chapter 12 Operation type Date time when the operation was carried out on the Web screen IM 04L31A01 03E 1 97 suolouny jo uoneuejdxg 1 20 Other Functions E mail Transmission Log Number of measurement inputs measurement channels Number of computation channels Number of internal control loops ANALOG 6 MATH 12 LOOP 2 jede 1298082 Internal memory size 2 aa Communication interface reer Oo O External storage medium Program control Green series communications Ladder communications Pame ooo LARGE EXT ADDER SUTUN JERN INAL PROI DUCT HAC eddress 98 80 64 81 4D 28 Tr f terminal block 1 Version 6 82 Graphic B870 ZC 1 B1a ype of te etnies PID Exists Alarm Measurement alarm MAC address Fi
412. nput soft key The cursor blue moves to the YY section 2 Enter the date time using the arrow keys and the DISP ENTER key When you start to press the keys the word Input disappears from the soft key Time set YY MH DD HH MM SS DST P 02 28 00 01 03 6123456789 3 Select ENT on the Time set pop up window and then press the DISP ENTER key to set the time When the time is set the word Input appears on the soft key To cancel the settings and close the Time set pop up window press the ESC key IM 04L31A01 03E 3 11 suoljeiodQ UOWWOZ pue s pon Aejdsiq Sed jo sowenN e 3 3 Setting the Date and Time Setting Daylight Savings Time 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Daylight Savings Time Summer Winter Off On When set to On the daylight savings time is enabled YY MM DD HH Enter the date and hour when the time is to be changed The time is set ahead one hour at the date and hour specified for Sum
413. ns on the Control Group Display Switching Displayed Information and Control Operation Modes Switching the Overview Display Using the display selection menu Perform the following operation with the control overview display showing 1 Press the DISP ENTER key to show the display selection menu 2 With Control selected press the right arrow key to display the sub menu 3 Select Overview1 to show the overview display of groups 1 and 2 or Overview2 to show the overview display of groups 3 and 4 using the up and down arrow keys ESC controL gt contRO fw TREND o gt FF overview ig INFOR b JUMP TO GROUP ON 0 TUNING 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to show the selected display Using the arrow keys Switching is possible by pressing the left or right arrow key for more than 1 s with the control group display showing Switching continues while the arrow key is pressed Switch to Program Selection Screen 1 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired control loop Press the PROGRAM soft key The display switches to the program selection display for the pattern included in the loop selected by the cursor or to the program operation display For operations in the program selection display see section 6 4 Operations in the Program Selection Display Program Operation display Only for Models with the Program Control Option IM 04L31A01 03E uonesedo 01 U05 Bulunp suonesodo fo
414. nstantaneous values at that point is acquired to the internal memory except for measurement channels that are skipped and computation channels that are turned OFF TLOG data only on models with the computation function option All the measured computed data instantaneous data of all channels can be acqu ired to the internal memory at the preset interval However this excludes measurement channels that are skipped and computation channels that are turned OFF Report data only on models with the computation function option The average maximum minimum and sum can be computed for the specified channels at the preset interval and the result can be acquired to the internal mem You can select one hour hourly report one day daily report one hour one day hourly and daily one day one week daily and weekly reports or one day one month daily and monthly reports for the interval ory IM 04L31A01 03E 1 87 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 17 Data Storage Function Saving Data to the External Storage Medium The data acquired to the internal memory can be saved to an external storage medium The following two methods are available in saving the data Manual Save The data in the internal memory is saved to the external storage medium only when the external storage medium is inserted into the drive You can specify whether to save the entire data in the memory or only the data that have not been saved to the external st
415. nternal control loops and six measurement channels CX2106 two terminal blocks are arranged vertically on the rear panel of the CX1000 as shown in the following figure If you specify a model with only six measurement channels CX100 with one of the measurement alarm option terminal blocks the option terminal block is installed in place of the control output terminal block The measurement alarm option terminal blocks include the A6 measurement alarm 6 DOs A6R measurement alarm 8 Dis 6 DOs A4F measurement alarm 4 DOs with FAlL memory end output relay and A4FR measurement alarm 8 Dls 4 DOs with FAlL memory end output relay If the control output terminal block or the measurement alarm option terminal block is not installed according to the specification made at the time of purchase a protection cover is attached in place of the terminal block Control output terminal block or Measurement alarm option terminal block Control measurement input terminal block Note The installation position of each terminal block is fixed and cannot be changed For a description on the connection of communication interfaces such as the serial or Ethernet interface see the CX1000 CX2000 Communication Interface User s Manual IM04L31A01 17E Control Input Assignments of th
416. nterval 20min 20min 20min 20min 30min 30min 30min 30min 1h 1h 1h 1h 1h 1h th 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h iday iday 1day 1day 1day 2day 2day 2day 2day 3day 3day 3day 5day 5day 5day 7day 7day 10day 10day 14day IM 04L31A01 03E suoleiedg peo anes ed po 9 1 Acquiring Measurement Data to the Internal Memory and Saving Data to the External Storage Medium Setting the File Header Directory Name and the Data to Be Saved during Manual Save Operation e File Header Enter the header comment to be written to the display data event data using up to 32 alphanumeric characters The specified header is written to all display data event data manual sample data TLOG data option and report data option files Director name Set the name of the directory for saving the data on the external storage medium All the data excluding the setup data display data event data manual sample data TLOG data report data only on models with the computation function option and screen image data are saved to the specified directory The setup data is saved to the root directory The save destination directory varies depending on how the data is saved Auto save Directory specified here Manual save Directory with a sequence number added to the string specified here Save using key operation Directory with A sequence number added
417. nterval x number of sampled data Delay upper limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured computed value remains above the alarm value for the specified time delay IM 04L31A01 03E 1 61 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 15 Measurement Function gt Measurement Alarm Related Settings Delay lower limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured computed value remains below the alarm value for the specified time delay Delay upper limit alarm example T is the specified delay Measured value or computed value X4 Alarm setting t Alarm occurrence Alarm release Alarm does not occur at T1 because the time is shorter than the specified delay T The input exceeds the alarm value at X2 but the alarm occurs at X3 at which the specified delay period elapses the time when the alarm occurs is the time at X3 The input falls below the alarm value at X4 and the alarm is released Note The following special operations are available for the delay upper lower limit alarm When a delay alarm is set on a computation channel and the computation is stopped If the computation is stopped in a condition in which the computed value is exceeding the alarm setting the alarm is turned ON after the specified period delay period elapses Stop computation Alarm setting Computed values Alarm occurrence Delay alarm when a power failure occurs Alarm detection is reset upon a power failure It restar
418. ntil an alarm ACK operation is performed Note The indicator setting also applies to control alarms Rate of change Increase Select the sampling data count used to determine the interval for the high limit on rate of change alarm from 1 to 15 Decrease Select the sampling data count used to determine the interval for the low limit on rate of change alarm from 1 to 15 Hysteresis Turn On Off the alarm hysteresis If set to On the hysteresis is set to 0 5 of the measurement span or scale span Setting the Memory Alarm Memory Alarm When using the Manual Save procedure to save data in the internal memory to an external storage medium if the time until the internal memory becomes full reaches the entered value for the Memory Alarm Time an e mail report is sent You can output a relay contact signal from the Memory End Output terminal on the terminal block for the memory alarm option Select one of the memory alarm times below You can turn OFF the Memory End Output function when not in use 1 hr initial setting 2 hr 5 hr 10 hr 20 hr 50 hr 100 hr Clearing Alarms AlarmACK If the AlarmACK operation is performed all alarm indications and relay outputs are cleared However this operation is invalid if the alarm indication output relay behavior is set to Nonhold The operation of clearing alarms is also possible using a remote input see section 11 5 Setting the Measurement Remote Inputs
419. ntrol Function PV SP Computation Function Equations for each PV and SP can be set Computation type Allowed data Constants Error processing Logic Computation Function Computation type Allowed data Internal Switches Allowed number Fixed at nonhold Analog Retransmission Function Output format Display recording Computation type Allowed data General purpose computation Arithmetical operations square root absolute value common logarithm exponents power relational operations lt lt gt and logical operators AND OR NOT XOR Within group statistics Average max CLOG min integral values of data within groups Conditional expressions eq1 eq2 eq3 Measured data measurement computation data internal external control data communication input data constants W01 W12 control input channel data control output module expansion module DIO measurement remote input internal switches Up to 12 constants can be set OVER Use the upper limit value of the PV range for the PV and SP value UNDER Use the lower limit value of the PV range for the PV and SP value Relational operations lt lt gt and logical operators AND OR NOT XOR and conditional expressions eq1 eq2 eq3 Same as PV SP computation function 12 SW001 SW12 Current output 4 20 mA 0 20 mA 20 4 mA 20 0A Time proportional voltage pulse output
420. ntrol action status matches the preset status up to 4 points per loop the CX1000 can output a relay contact signal from the control output terminal block or the DIO expansion terminal block and output it to the internal switches Also you can display the alarm status on the CX screen In relay contact output you can select and assign the type of alarm you wish to output at each output terminal of the control output terminal block or the control DIO extension terminal block Alarm Type You can select the alarm type from below For a detailed explanation on each alarm output see section 1 10 Control Alarm Related Settings PV high limit alarm PV low limit alarm deviation high limit alarm deviation low limit alarm deviation high amp low limit alarm deviation within high amp low limits alarm SP high limit alarm SP low limit alarm output high limit alarm and output low limit alarm Alarm Hysteresis You can set a hysteresis to the setpoints used in the activation and releasing of the alarm Example of PV high limit alarm ON OFF Alarm setpoint Hysteresis PV lt Alarm ON lt OFF ON lt OFF Y Time Alarm Standby You can put the alarm output on standby at the initial stage of control operation until the PV input reaches the SP PV Normal Normal Failure handling Hysteresis lt Alarm low limit value Alarm is not output during this period even if the PV
421. ntrol math setting gt 43 Constant Settings for loops set for analog retransmission CLOG Error You can set the method for handling abnormalities in the channel data for CLOG a PV SP computation operator Error Process as a computation error Skip Skip any abnormal data and complete the computation Event output setting Version 3 02 or later Common Set a common event output setting for all program patterns Separate Set the event output for each program pattern 4 12 IM 04L31A01 03E 4 5 Control gt Output processing This section describes the procedures for selecting the control output type cycle time and analog output To perform ON OFF control set Control output to On Off control Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Setting mode control gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 12 soft key select Control 5 soft key select Output processing Output processing Loop number ela Control output Current output Cycle time 39 S Analog output type 4 26mA Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 an
422. ntrol output terminal block DIGITAL IN Relay contact input Measurement remote input REMOTE of the measurement alarm option terminal block A6R A4FR e Relay contact input e Transistor input Relay Contact Input and Transistor Input Specifications Input signal Non voltage contact open collector Input conditions 0 5 V or less 30 mMADC when turned ON leakage current of 0 25 mA or less when turned OFF Input format Photocoupler isolation shared common Withstand voltage 500 VDC for 1 minute between the input terminal and earth Control Output LOOP 1 and LOOP 2 Wiring Current output Voltage pulse output eee 4 to 20 mADC or S PULS X 5 c 0 to 20 mADC e Voltage pulse 12 V Relay contact output NO 250 VAC 3 A or N 30 VDC 3 A c resistive load 2 when set to energized Current Output Specifications Output signal 4 to 20 mADC or 0 to 20 mADC Load resistance 600 Q or less Voltage Pulse Output Specifications Output signal ON voltage 12 VDC Load resistance 600 Q or more Relay Contact Output Specifications Output signal NC NO COM Contact rating 250 VAC 50 60 Hz 3 A or 30 VDC 3 A resistive load IM 04L31A01 03E Bundi pue uoneyye su D 2 3 Wiring
423. nts eaaeeeeeecaeeseaeeeeeeesaeeeeeesaeeeeaeseeeestaeenieeenaees 1 2 Basic Settings of Control 0ceaidce nee eiediniienesie iii iindaienaieie 1 16 PV Input Related Settings c cc eeceeceeseeeeneeceaeeeececaeseaaeeeeecaesseeeesaeeseaeseeeessaeeeeeeenaees 1 21 Contact Input Output Related Settings ceceeseeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesceeeieeenieesiaeeneeeesas 1 25 Target Setpoint Related Settings 2 0 eceeeeeeceeeeeeeeteeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeesieeseeeenieeeeaeeeeeeeaa 1 29 PID Parameter Settings emca a a a a 1 31 Control Output Suppression Settings cececcceseeceeeceeeeeeeeeeneeceaeeeeeessaeeeeeeeeeesieeeeeeenaes 1 35 Settings for ON OFF Control a a aaea a aA a a EA ARAE E O anaa TEE raeno 1 37 Control Alarm Related Settings 0 ccccccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeeeescaeeseeenneesiaeeeeeeenas 1 38 Program Control Related Settings 0 2 00 ccc cece tee eee tee ceee teens see seeeseeeseeteeeteeeeaeeeas 1 40 TUNING ssichere ciel ached rath ch heehee te SU Sal ed Leh te die R AE ee 1 54 Measurement Function Overview cccceceeeececeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeseeesaeeeeeeenaeeseeenaees 1 56 Measurement Function gt Measurement Input Related Settings ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 58 Measurement Function gt Measurement Alarm Related Settings cceeeeeeeeeee 1 61 Display FUNCION Aisi eapi anase Lie ei ei el Biel ee 1 66 Data Storage FUNGON ere cede iion aana ar ai a iaa ee e en 1 86 Computation and Repo
424. number of data points 900 000 2CH x 4 bytes O x 8 bytes 0 x 2 bytes 0 x 2 bytes 112 500 However the maximum is limited to 75 000 data points Therefore the maximum number of data points 75 000 When the display update rate is 30 min div 60 s sampling interval Maximum sampling length 75 000 data points x 60 s 4 500 000 s approx 52 days Event data Maximum number of data points 300 000 2CH x 2 bytes 0 x 4 bytes 0 x 2 bytes 0 x 2 bytes 75 000 However the maximum is limited to 30 000 data points Therefore the maximum number of data points 30 000 When the sampling interval of event data is 1 s Maximum sampling length 30 000 data points x 1 s 30 000 s approx 8 hours Measurement channel 3 computation channel 6 internal control channel 2 external control channel 3 Data Maximum Number of Data Points and Maximum Sampling Length Display data Maximum number of data points 900 000 3CH x 4 bytes 6 x 8 bytes 2 x 4 bytes 3 x 4 bytes 11 250 When the display update rate is 30 min div 60 s sampling interval Maximum sampling length 11 250 data points x 60 s 675 000 s approx 8 days Event data Maximum number of data points 300 000 3CH x 2 bytes 6 x 4 bytes 2 x 2 bytes 3 x 2 bytes 6 250 When the sampling interval of event data is 1 s Maximum sampling length 7 500 data points x 1s 7 500 s approx 2 1 hours IM 04L31A01 03E App 5 xipueddy
425. o 01 min to 59 s Truncates the minutes and seconds Example 10 hours 01 min 50 s becomes 10 hours 00 min 00 s 02 min 00 s to 57 min to 59 s The time is not changed 58 min 00 s to 59 min to 59 s Rounds up the minutes and seconds Example 10 hours 59 min 50 s becomes 11 hours 00 min 00 s MathStart Stop Starts stops the computation The rising edge of the signal indicates start the falling edge indicates stop This is valid only on models with the computation function option M1 MathReset Resets the data on all computation channels Input a signal for at least 250 ms This is valid only on models with the computation function option M1 and while the computation is stopped ManualSample Write the instantaneous values of all channels to the internal memory once Input a signal for at least 250 ms This excludes measurement channels set to skip and computation channels set to Off PaneliLoad to Panel3Load Loads the setup data file named LOAD1 PCL LOAD2 PCL or LOAD3 PCL stored on the external storage medium and activates the settings Input a signal for at least 250 ms Setup data files named LOAD1 PCL LOAD2 PCL or LOAD3 PCL must be created and saved to the external storage medium beforehand Message1 to 8 Displays a message at the position corresponding to the time when the signal was applied on the trend display The displayed message is also written to the internal memory Input a signal for at least 250 ms
426. o 1760 0 C 0 0 to 1820 0 C 200 0 to 1370 0 C 200 0 to 800 0 C 200 0 to 1100 0 C 200 0 to 400 0 C 0 0 to 1300 0 C 0 0 to 2315 0 C 200 0 to 900 0 C 200 0 to 400 0 C PLATI 0 0 to 1400 0 C PR 0 0 to 1900 0 C W WRe 0 0 to 2400 0 C crsZ2zH mxzoogn When set to RTD resistance temperature detector Range Selectable Measurement Span Range Pt100 200 0 to 600 0 C JPt100 200 0 to 550 0 C When set to DI ON OFF input Range Selectable Measurement Span Values Level 0 Less than 2 4 V 1 Greater than or equal to 2 4 V Cont 0 Open 1 Closed IM 04L31A01 03E suoneiedg dnjes palejey uolouny juewessnseoyy a 7 1 Settings Related to Measurement Inputs When set to Delta difference computation Type Range Selectable Measurement Span Range Voltage 20mV 20 00 to 20 00 mV 60mV 60 00 to 60 00 mV 200mV 200 0 to 200 0 mV 2V 2 000 to 2 000 V 6V 6 000 to 6 000 V 20V 20 00 to 20 00 V 50V 50 00 to 50 00 V TC R 1760 0 to 1760 0 C S 1760 0 to 1760 0 C B 1820 0 to 1820 0 C K 1570 0 to 1570 0 C E 1000 0 to 1000 0 C J 1300 0 to 1300 0 C T 600 0 to 600 0 C N 1300 0 to 1300 0 C W 2315 0 to 2315 0 C L 1100 0 to 1100 0 C U 600 0 to 600 0 C PLATI 1400 0 to 1400 0 C PR 1900 0 to 1900 0 C W WRe 2400 0 to 2400 0 C RTD Pt100 800 0 to 800 0 C JPt100 750 0 to 750 0
427. o change the value of all the items you wish to change Note For setup item boxes that require values to be entered a pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key is used 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box IM 04L31A01 03E 4 37 suoljei9adoQ dnjas pajyejay uoun 017U09 eS 4 16 DIO Operation Monitoring Function Settings Style Number S3 or Later DIO Operation Monitoring Function Settings DIO Operation Monitoring Number You can enter settings for each DIO monitoring number There are 36 DIO monitoring numbers DIO Types Select the DIO monitoring method There are 7 types of DIO available DI 1 Displays the input status of the specified DI The status of the internal switches are output DO 1 The status of the internal switches is output to 1 DO 1 ON is output when the internal switches are ON and 0 OFF is output when they are OFF DO 2 You can output the ON and OFF statuses of the internal switches to separate DOs 1 ON is output from the ON output DO when the internal switches are ON and 0 OFF is output from the OFF output DO when they are OFF 0 OFF is output from the ON output DO when the internal switches are OFF and 1 ON is output from the OFF output DO when they are ON DIO 11 The same operation as the DO 1 is performed while displaying the input status
428. o specify the program pattern number when the program pattern was switched using contact inputs a way of specifying the program pattern using binary coded decimal BCD representation has been added Bits Used When Specifying the Program Pattern Number Using BCD Code Program Pattern Pattern Number Designation Bit Number Used 10 s digit 1 s digit Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 1 Y Up to 3 Y Y Up to 7 Yv Y Y Up to 9 Y Yv Y Y Up to 19 Y Y Y Y Y Up to 30 Y Y Y Y A Y For example set PatternNo1bit and PatternNo4bit to ON 10010 to specify pattern number 12 Contact inputs that can be registered to PatternNoObit to PatternNo5bit are DI001 to DI006 of the control output terminal block Switching between BCD and Binary Use the soft keys on the system information display to switch between binary and BCD You cannot make the switch during control operation during data acquisition to the internal memory or during computation the Aux Setting soft key below does not appear Switching from Binary to BCD 1 FUNC key gt Log soft key gt System soft key switch to SYSTEM INFO display gt FUNC key gt AUX Setting soft key ANALOG 6 HATH 12 LOOP 2 MEMORY 1200000 OPTION AUX ae DI BINARY ETHERNET ATA PROGRAM LARGE EXT LOOP LADDER OUTPUT TERMINAL SLOTI PID PRODUCT HAC address 008 00 64 81 4E aC E Mail AUX 4 Graphic B87002
429. o start stop these operations Procedure Opening the Setting Display Setting items other than the auto save interval Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 3 soft key select Memory and 4 soft key select Memory and trend Memory timeup The following display appears 3 Memory Setup Mode Hemory Nemory and trend Save Heas Hath Loop CH Data ED Event First CH l Last CH l Sample rate is Hode Trigger on OFF On Block 1 Data length 30min Hemory timeup Pre Trigger 0 x Timeup type Off Trigger Key on External on Alarm off Hanual Auto Heas CH Math CH Int CH Ext CH Setting the auto save interval file header directory name and the data to be saved during manual save operation Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt MENU key switch to Set mode gt 3 soft key select Trend Save interval User key The following display appears when set to Auto gt i a 3 Pov LENT i Time div EmA Auto save interval th Setting the file header directory name and the data to be saved during manual save operation Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt MENU key switch to Set mode gt 6 soft key select File DST The following display appears when set to Manual 002 04
430. o the averaged value of the m most current data points the number of moving averaged data points acquired using the scan interval The number of moving averaged data points m can be set in the range 2 to 16 The figure below shows an example indicating the operation of the buffer for the moving average computation when the number of moving averaged data points is set to 5 The moving average can be set on each channel The moving average is initially turned Buffer data for the nth Buffer data for the n 1th Buffer data for the n 2th sampling time sampling time sampling time 1 60 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 15 Measurement Function gt Measurement Alarm Related Settings Turning ON OFF the Alarm You can set up to four alarms for each channel You can set alarms not only on measurement channels but also computation channels For each alarm you can set different alarm conditions Alarm Conditions The following eight conditions shown as Type on the setting display are available Upper limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured computed value exceeds the alarm value Lower limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured computed value falls below the alarm value Upper limit alarm Lower limit alarm Alarm occurrence Alarm Process Alarm release value bas Process value Alarm occurrence value Difference upper limit alarm can be set on difference computation channels only An alarm occurs
431. occurred For details on error messages see chapter 12 Troubleshooting Login logout Log Number of the log displayed on the bottom line total number of logs l 003 003 Time I O No User Name Jan 31 2001 07 13 15 In l userl Jan 31 2001 87 12 58 Out Jan 31 2681 07 12 46 In al userl l User name In Key login Out Logout Date time of key login logout IM 04L31A01 03E 11 4 Displaying Logs Checking Operations and System Information Display Checking the System Specifications Communication Command Log Connection status indication of the Ethernet interface Number of the log displayed on Illuminated green Connected electrically the bottom line total number of logs Not illuminated Not connected electrically 002 002 Time ID 1 0 Nessage Link O Jan 31 2001 87 23 33 1 lt Logout Jan 31 2001 07 23 23 1 gt CCB Message up to 20 characters Input output signal gt input lt output Number identifying the connected user Date time the CX1000 was accessed FTP File Transfer Log Number of the log displayed on the bottom line total number of logs 002 002 Time No Code Flag File Name Jan 31 2001 06 58 08 282 HOSTNAME 13106588 DHR Jan 31 2001 06 58 08 282 HOSTNAME P 13106580 DHR File name 8 characters FTP connection destination P primary S secondary Error code Date time when file was transferred Web Browser Operation Log 003 003 Time Request No Parameter Jan 31 06
432. ocks When acquiring both display data and event data the possible selections are 1 2 and 4 IM 04L31A01 03E 9 3 suoleiedg peo anes ed po 9 1 Acquiring Measurement Data to the Internal Memory and Saving Data to the External Storage Medium Data length Set the size data length of a single block of the event data acquisition area in terms of the amount of time data is to be acquired The selectable data length varies depending on the sampling interval sample rate setting as shown in the table below It also depends on the block setting and the number of measurement computation channels Sampling 1 2 5 10 30 60 120 300 600 interval s Data length 3min 3min choices 5min 5min 10min 10min 10min 10min 20min 20min 20min 20min 30min 30min 30min 30min 1h 1h 1h 1h 1h th th th th 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h iday day day day day day day 1day day 2days 2days 2days 2days 2days 2days 2days 2days 3days 3days 3days 3days 3days 3days 3days 5days 5days 5days 5days 5days 5days 5days 7days 7days 7days 7days 7days 7days 10days 10days 10days 10days 10days 10days 14days 14days 14days 14days 14days 31days 31days 31days 31days Pre trigger Select the range when saving the data existing before the trigger condition is met as event data Select the range as a percentage of the da
433. od is common to all loops When the A D integral time is set to 100 ms the control period is fixed to 1 s The scan interval of control PV input is the same as the control period PID Selection Method Zone PID ON OFF Select either one from below When program control is ON on models with the program control option the selection is between the segment PID method zone PID OFF and the zone PID method Target setpoint selection method zone PID OFF initial value In the target setpoint selection method the operator can switch up to 8 SPs as necessary There are two methods in switching the SPs One method is to specify the SP number SPs are registered to PID numbers SP numbers along with PID constants and other parameters using keys on the front panel The other is to use external contact input or communications The SP can be switched at any time During switching the setpoint ramp up rate or setpoint ramp down rate setting is activated In addition when a switch is made control computation is performed using the PID constant group that corresponds to the SP at that point PVA _ SP3 _ Fall according to Rise it No 3PID Je the setpoint e setpoint ramp down setting ramp up setting SPn SP number SP2 No 2PID SP1 Rise according to the No 1PID No 1PID setpoint ramp up setting x i x gt Time Switch from SP1 to SP3 Switch from SP3 to SP1 Switch from SP1 to SP2 1 16 IM 04L31A0
434. of the specified DI DIO 12 The same operation as the DO 2 is performed while displaying the input status of the specified DI DO 2P You can output the ON and OFF statuses of the internal switches to separate DOs A pulse signal having a 1 to 2 second pulse width is output from the ON output DO when the internal switches are ON and from the 0 OFF output DO when they are OFF DIO 12P The same action as the DO 2P is performed while displaying the input status of the specified DI Internal switches DO 1 DIO 11 DO for ON output DO for OFF output DO for ON output 1 to 2 seconds DO 2P a Le DIO 12P DOfororF 1 0N output 0 OFF l 1 to 2 seconds SW Number Set the internal switch for DO output This is not displayed if DI 1 was selected for the DIO type DO Number Set the DO number to be output This is not displayed if DI 1 was selected for the DIO type If DO 2 DIO 12 DO 2P or DIO 12P is selected for the DIO type set the DO for when the internal switches are ON and for when they are OFF Seta different DO number for ON and OFF DO numbers may not overlap with other numbers including DIO operation monitoring numbers 4 38 IM 04L31A01 03E 4 16 DIO Operation Monitoring Function Settings Style Number S3 or Later Note This instrument has several functions for outputting contact signals from DO If output from multiple functions occurs for the same DO the following prioritie
435. oints is less than 11 set the next Input value of the next segmental point to the same value as or a value less than the Input value of the final segment The selectable range is indicated below For ten segment linearizer bias Selectable range of input value EU 5 0 to 105 0 of the measurement span initial value for points other than the second is 0 0 initial value for the second point is 100 Selectable range of output value EUS 100 0 to 100 0 of the measurement span initial value is 0 0 The selectable range is displayed in a pop up window For ten segment linearizer approximation Selectable range of input value EU 5 0 to 105 0 of the measurement span initial value for points other than the second is 0 0 initial value for the second point is 100 Selectable range of output value EU 5 0 to 105 0 of the measurement span initial value is 0 0 The selectable range is displayed in a pop up window 4 32 IM 04L31A01 03E 4 14 Control Function Settings This section explains the setting procedure for the control function Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt 7 soft key select Detailed setting DIO monitor and operation etc 8 soft key when program control is ON gt 1 soft key Control function The following display appears Hysteresis Alarm P event Alarm PY event Loop numb
436. ol action gt Restart mode gt Program Continue Control action gt Initial PID Temp Control action gt Auto tuning Off Control action gt Loop number 1 Control action gt Control mode Single Control action gt Program control Off Control action gt PID control mode Follow up lt 2 Input setting gt Parameter Initial Value Input setting gt Loop number 1 Input setting gt Burnout gt Measure1 up Input setting gt Burnout gt Measure2 up Input setting gt Burnout gt Remote up Input setting gt RJC gt Measure1 Internal Input setting gt RJC gt Measure2 Internal Input setting gt RUC gt Remote Internal lt 3 DI DO SW registration gt Parameter Initial Value DI DO SW registration gt Module CTRL1 2 DI DO SW registration gt DI001 to 006 None DI DO SW registration gt RI001 to 012 None lt 4 AUX Alarm mode gt Parameter Initial Value AUX gt Loop number 1 AUX gt Remote setting Off AUX gt Alarm mode ALWAYS AUX gt SP No selection source gt Loop number AUX gt PV SP math 1and2 1 On 2 Off Off AUX gt CLOG error Error AUX gt Event output setting Common lt 5 Output processing gt Parameter Initial Value Loop number Control output Cycle time Analog output type 1 Current output 30s 4 20mA IM 04L31A01 03E App 29 xipueddy Appendix 6 Initial Values lt 6 Relay gt Parameter Initial Value Relay gt FAIL
437. ol input range of setting mode control You can set the Bias and Filter parameters on the same display If you attempt to change the settings an error message Range cannot be changed during sampling calculating or controlling appears Math Set1 and Math Set 2 in setting mode and Save Load Clear data gt Format and Clear data If you attempt to change the settings an error message Range cannot be changed during sampling calculating or controlling appears IM 04L31A01 03E 6 5 uonesedg 01 U05 Bulinp suonesodo fo 6 1 Operations on the Control Group Display Switching Displayed Information and Control Operation Modes The following behavior results when the operation is stopped Control output Preset value initial value is 0 Event output OFF Display and Operation on the Control Display and Control Mode For internal loops the information that is displayed in the control data display section Dsp in the following table and the possible switching setting operations Opr in the following table vary depending on the control mode as shown in the following figure For a description on the control mode and switching operation of external loops through the optional Green series communications see the CX1000 CX2000 Communication Interface User s Manual MODE Auto AUT manual MAN or cascade CAS REM LOC Remote or local PRG LOC Program or local RUN STP Operation
438. ol output terminal block This setting is not allowed for control output terminal block 3 SPNumber0 to 3 bit Select when registering a contact input for switching the SP Four contact inputs 4 bit binary are used to specify SP numbers 1 to 8 For example set SPnumber1 bit and SPnumber2bit to ON to specify SP number 6 Contact outputs that can be registered to SPnumberObit to SPnumberSbit are D1003 to DIO06 of loop 1 and 2 control output terminal block and R1009 to RI012 of the control DIO expansion terminal block Only the required number of bits can be registered For example if you are switching among SP numbers 1 to 3 register only SPnumberObit and SPnumber1 bit 2 bits If SPnumberObit through SPnumbersbit that corresponds to the MSB is set to D1006 of control output terminal block the required number of bits of contact inputs DI003 to DIO06 for the control output terminal block are automatically registered Note For contact inputs SPnumberObit to SPnumber3bit the loop number for which the SP number is to be switched can be selected For the operating procedure see the explanation for SP No selection source on page 4 12 Only a single system of SP assignment using contact inputs is available on each CX1000 ProgramRun lt selectable only during program control Select to register a contact input for starting the program operation ProgramReset lt selectable only during program
439. oljeiodQ UOWWOZ pue s pon Aejdsiq swed jo sowenN e 3 7 Changing the Time Zone This section explains how to set the time difference with respect to Greenwich Mean Time Make sure to set this value if you are using the Web server function Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Setting mode Control gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 9 soft key select Aux Time zone AUX Tag Channel Tag Memory alarm lh Language English Partial Not Time zone Difference from GHT Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the Difference from GMT box under Time zone Input is displayed at the bottom of the display Press the Input soft key Enter the time difference using the character number input keys and soft keys Press the DISP ENTER key Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes a amp WOW PY Saving the Settings 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation window appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key Set the time difference with respect to Greenwich Mean Time from 1200 to 1200 the upper two digits indicate the hour the lower two digits indicate the minute Example The standard time in Japan is ahead of the Greenwich Mean Time by 9 hours In this case enter 900
440. ollowing figure shows their arrangement Wire the terminals according to the configuration Relay contact output Transistor output Contact input DIGITAL OUT DIGITAL OUT DIGITAL IN LOOP2 LOOP1 2 1 LOOP2 LOOP1 NO LNO NO CNO mA mA 5 3 4 1 NC LNC C C PULS PULS 6 4 5 2 C C C C C C 6 3 CTRL OUT CTRL OUT DIGITAL OUT terminals 1 to 6 are indicated using the following numbers when the control output terminal block is selected in the contact relay output registration setting or alarm relay output setting DO001 to DO006 In addition DIGITAL IN terminals 1 to 6 are indicated using the following numbers when the control output terminal block is selected in the contact input registration setting DI001 to DI006 Note In the contact relay output setting relay contact outputs DO001and DO002 and the numbers of transistor outputs are not distinguished Confirm this before registering the output signals 2 6 IM 04L31A01 03E 2 3 Wiring Terminal Arrangements of the Measurement Alarm Option Terminal Block The measurement alarm option terminal block is the terminal block that you specified as an option at the time of purchase The following four types are available A6 6 measurement alarm outputs A6R 6 measurement alarm outputs and 8
441. omotive force of 0 C reference from the DC voltage standard and perform the calibration IM 04L31A01 03E 13 3 aoueuaqule y a 13 3 Replacement of Parts Recommended Replacement Period To preserve the reliability of the CX1000 and to use the CX1000 in a good condition for an extended time it is recommended that periodic replacements be made on parts The replacement parts may change to accommodate preventive maintenance over extended time Be sure to check with your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer The following table shows the recommended replacement period for expendable parts The replacement period shown here applies when the CX1000 is used under standard operating conditions For the actual replacement period consider the actual conditions of use Replacements will be carried out by a YOKOGAWA engineer or an engineer certified by YOKOGAWA When replacement is required contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Item Replacement Name Specifications Quantity Used Period LCD 5 years Backlight module 1 Battery 10 years Lithium battery 1 Rubber strip 5 years Dust and water proof Panel attachment section 1 of each rubber strip Operation cover Floppy disk drive 5 years 1 Zip drive 5 years 1 Relay 100 000 times Control relay 2 per control output terminal block for 2 loops PWB assembly 5 years Power supply ASSY 2 1 5 years Sub power supply ASSY 2 1 5 years AD ASSY Depends on the specifications made at the time of p
442. omputation The target channels also apply to Tag Rolling average and Alarm delay settings TLOG Timer No Select the timer number from 1 2 and 3 Sum scale Select the sum scale for calculating the sum TLOG SUM from Off s min and h The initial value is Off simply compute the sum You only have to set the channels that are set to sum computation TLOG SUM Note When storing the data to the external storage medium the data is stored to the TLOG data file dtg extension If the timer is specified the TLOG data is written to the internal memory at the interval specified by the timer This operation is executed independent of the setting in the Action box 10 10 IM 04L31A01 03E 10 5 Setting the Rolling Average Procedure This section explains how to set the computed value to the rolling average of the computed results Opening the Operation Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Setting mode control gt MENU key switch to Set mode gt 11 soft key select Math set3 Tag TLOG Rolling average Alarm delay time The following display appears GROUP 1 ee EEAS a Feb 19 2002 21 10 01 a EVE First CH 31 Last CH 31 Tag Booo TLOG Timer No 1 Sum scale s Rolling average Interval Number of samples Alarm delay time 10 s Operations on the Display 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the First CH and
443. omputation channels and how to set tags You cannot set computing equations while data is being acquired to the internal memory or while computation is in progress Equations cannot be used with measurement channels on 0 measurement channel models Procedure Opening the Setting Display Assigning Computation Channels and Setting Equations Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt MENU key switch to Set mode gt 9 soft key select Math set1 Expression Alarm The following display appears ee 2 2716 21 03 41 Ay EVEN Calculation expression Span Lower Span_Upper Unit 200 00 200 00 a 1 oft 2 oft 3 lore 4 fort Assigning Constants Used in Equations of Computation Channels Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt MENU key switch to Set mode gt 10 soft key select Math set2 Constant The following display appears 15a Ree eg Constant Ko TE Kort Ka2 1 Kas 71 Kaa 1 Kas 7 Kad 71 Kia fi Kas 1 Kifa Kab fi K12 1 Setting Tags of Computation Channels Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Setting mode control gt MENU key switch to Set mode gt 11 soft key select Math set3 Tag TLOG Rolling average Alarm delay time The following display appears GROUP 1 oS EAS E Feb 19 2002 21 04 23 Aw cpm 4 Last CH
444. on PV and SP are not displayed or recorded Internal Switches Style Number S3 or Later Internal switches are software switches that are not output externally and are used only for internal processing The switches have the following uses The same output destination as the output relay Control alarm measurement alarm measurement computation alarm time event PV event program pattern end signal logic computation output DIO operation monitoring function Use of computation data in the PV SP computation and the analog retransmission equation Assignment of actions to changes in the status of the internal switches Reads the operation ON OFF and internal switch statuses using the communication function The status of the internal switches is nonhold IM 04L31A01 03E 1 2 Control Function Overview DIO Operation Monitoring Function Style Number S3 or Later Internal Switches and DIO Operation Monitoring Function Since the internal switches are used exclusively for internal processing the status of the switches cannot be confirmed externally With the DIO operation monitoring function you can output the status of the internal switches by assigning a DO to the internal switch You can output the ON and OFF statuses of the internal switches to separate DOs Also you can switch between Auto and Manual operation modes When in Auto mode the status of the internal switches is output When in Manual mode you can
445. on W01 W12 and status of internal switches SW01 SW18 See page App 8 for the data that can be used with control computation and measurement computation You can nest a operations inside the parentheses Equation Examples Power 01 02 Determines the measured value of channel 1 to the power of the measured value of channel 2 Square root SQR 02 Determines the square root of the measured value of channel 2 Absolute value ABS 02 Determines the absolute value of the measured value of channel 2 Common logarithm LOG 01 Determines the common logarithm logio of the measured value of channel 1 Exponent EXP 01 Determines e to the power of the measured value of channel 1 IM 04L31A01 03E App 11 xipueddy Appendix 3 Meaning and Syntax of Equations Note __ You can determine the natural logarithm by setting an equation like the following From logpX log X logap we obtain logeX log1oX logi0e Hence to determine the natural logarithm of channel 1 we set K01 0 43429 log10e and set the equation to LOG 01 KO1 Relational Computation The data that can be used in equations is as follows measurement data 01 06 computation data 31 42 control data 101 106 201 212 constants KO1 K12 communication input data CO1 C12 remote input status of measurement alarm option terminal block DO1 DO8 contact input output status of control output terminal block DI001 DI006 DO001 DO006 control measured
446. on hold set to hold Alarm ACK Alarm ACK Occurrence Alarm Release H i Blinking Blinking Blinking red green red Mark for the Green Red Green Green indication indicationi Green Green indication Red Green specified alarm Alarm Indication on the Digital Display INT 81 PY Measured value Alarm mark H D D E ec When indication is When indication is set to non hold set to hold Alarm ACK Alarm ACK Occurrence Alarm Release Blinking Blinking Blinking red green red Mark forthe Green Red Green Green indication indication Green Greenlindication Red Green specified alarm IM 04L31A01 03E 1 83 suolouny jo uoneuejdxg 1 16 Display Function Alarm Indication on the Bar Graph Display 81 88 Alarm mark 2 00 m Alarm setpoint mark 2 00 E Ul 4 178 Measured value When indication is When indication is set to non hold set to hold Alarm ACK Alarm ACK Occurrence Alarm f Release i Blinking Blinking Blinking red green red Mark forthe Green Red _ Green Green indication indication Green Green indication Red Green specified alarm oe Alarm Indication on the Overview Display Channel No or tag name Measured value Area of channels on which an alarm Cursor is occurring is indicated in red Alarm type 5 8 1708 Y When indication is When indication is set to non hold set to hold Alarm AC
447. on icon 1 70 e mail transmission log j edit segment number sssssssssessiseessrssersesristerriseernsnrrenstes end segment NUMbEF ssssssssssieesrsesriissriterisserrinrrrrernrsesens energize engineering Unit eee eect eee e eee ee ee eect eeteeeeeaeeeeee App 45 Enter Setup sec eon Geet eh eee 11 7 OQUALION tsi heath ao eek 10 3 App 11 error MESSAGE 10 sssseccesescsssssecsesecssersseesseeessssosseeeee 11 8 error messages event data loading of event display 6 15 OVENUOOUD trent eae cnet dann 5 16 OVEN OUTPUL ose ceecne aetna ce deenee e 1 27 5 14 executing several program pattern oo eee cece 6 18 Expand ies external storage Medium eceeceeeeee sete eeeeeeeeeteeeeeetneaees 3 17 external storage medium drive ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteee 3 2 external storage medium formatting of 0 3 19 9 13 external storage medium ICON s s s 1 70 F faceplate Style cccssssesseeesssessessseecssecesesseseeseeesseesseees 1 14 FAIL output 1 5 1 27 1 99 2 7 4 16 fil vith BAe ave ele ar eed ea tera AL 9 6 filoforma sssini arieni 9 14 file management on the external storage medium 9 11 file name oe ec ecc cece cececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeesueeaeenaeeaaeeeaeeaaes 1 90 9 14 filter fixed point control ee eect cee eteeceeeeeeeteaeeeeeaeeeteeaeeetenaees FlOPPY GISK siis ien aeina IKONA ATS IN SEEE AEE EEE T
448. on screen is displayed Clearing Alarms When They Occur The following operation is valid only when Behavior is set to Hold or Indicator is set to Hold 1 In operation mode press the FUNC key A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the AlarmACK soft key Manual Nath sample START NEX 1 3 iarmack Nessage IM 04L31A01 03E 7 7 suoleiedg dnjes palejey uolouny juewssnseoyy E 7 2 Settings Related to Measurement Alarms Note This operation can be assigned to the USER key If itis alarms can be cleared simply by pressing a single key For the procedure in assigning a function to the USER key see section 11 1 USER Key Assingnment and Operation This operation is common with control alarms Setting the Alarm Output Note Set the alarm output after setting the range All alarm settings of a channel are cancelled in the following cases When the input type Volt TC etc is changed When the input range is changed When the upper or lower limit of the span or scale is changed on channels that are set to scale or square root computation including changes in the decimal point position When Range is set to Skip alarm output cannot be specified the alarm entry box is grayed For a description on the alarm setting of computation channels see section 10 3 Setting Alarms on Computation Channels First CH Last CH Set the target channel for setting the ala
449. ontrol Hode on Calculation expression 161 PY range Lower limit 200 0 Upper limit 1370 0 Unit Hath error Over 1 22 Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item box 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note For setup item boxes that require values to be entered a pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key is used 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Do you really want to change the settings m NO 5 With Yes selected press DISP ENTER key to confirm the changed settings The item boxes for the changed items turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the top item IM 04L31A01 03E 4 41 suoljeiado dnjas payejay uoljOUNY 07u09 eS 4 18 PV SP Computation and Analog Retransmission Settings Style Number S3 or Later PV SP Computation Settings Loop number Select the loop number to perform PV SP computation PV SP Select the item for which to set the equation The available settings vary depending on the control mode Single loo
450. ontrol as much as possible If the measurement span is not the same the ramp rate is set using the smallest numbered loop of all loops of which program control is ON Based on this ramp rate the ramp rates of other loops are set proportional to the corresponding measurement spans The segment time during ramping is the maximum time in the specified loops The maximum time is 99 59 59 If this value is exceeded in the calculation the control moves to the next segment Selectable range of ramp rate during ramping is within the control measurement span within PV range span during loop control with PV switching The segment time during soaking the setpoint is constant is the time length of the segment Selectable range of segment time during soaking is 00 00 01 to 99 59 59 During ramp up PV Operation of segment 1 to 99 Final SP L Ramp rate setting Imin cr i Th i Final SP of the previous segment Starting SP at thetime of program operation start gt Time suonoun jo uoneuejdxg IM 04L31A01 03E 1 41 1 11 Program Control Related Settings The segment assignment method applies to all segments constructing the program pattern Note that the contents of program patterns created before are cleared when the segment assignment method is changed Selecting the Start Condition for Program Operation The following four operation start conditions start codes are available for selection Starting SP
451. oops stops when you set reset mode Display Update Rate on the Program Control Display The update rate of the waveform section follows the settings specified by Set mode gt 3 Trend Save interval Message File USER key DST gt Time div The update rate of other information is 1 s Note If the segment time is set considerably smaller than the waveform display update rate such as 30 min div for the waveform display update rate and 10 s for the segment time segments cannot be displayed on the pattern waveform display due to the limitation of the display resolution Use caution when the segment time is set short Displayed Preset Pattern Waveforms and Their Display Color Only the preset pattern waveforms of loops that are set as follows are displayed Control gt 1 Control action gt Control mode to a mode other than Off and Program control to On If cascade control loops are present the secondary loops are not displayed The pattern waveform colors are red and green for loops 1 and 2 respectively Turning ON OFF Preset Patterns and PV Waveforms If viewing is difficult due to overlapping waveforms or if you wish to monitor only certain loops you can turn OFF the display of unneeded waveforms For loops of which the waveform display is turned OFF the background color waveform color of the tag tag comment display in the numeric display section disappears When each waveform display of loop 2 is t
452. option or A4FR option eee 11 11 Setting Whether or Not to Use the Batch Header BT1 option eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 11 14 Setting the Batch Information BT1 Option eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetneeeeeeeeteetaeeeeeeeea 11 15 Setting the Batch Information BT1 Option ceeccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeieeeeeeeeieeetaeeeeeeeea 11 17 Chapter 12 Troubleshooting 12 1 M ssage Sidien inanar ra inated E A dntondins E TERE 12 1 12 2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart ceceeccceceeeeeeeccteeeeee ences ecaeeeeeecieeeseeeneeeseeseeeeeieeeeaeeeneeeaa 12 11 Chapter 13 Maintenance 13 1 13 2 13 3 Periodic INSPOCHOM sninen td aane aa a ondea 13 1 Calibration IEEE EEEE EE E ETE TETTE T ATT 13 2 Replacement Of Parts xcctiea a aa a hin a tubal ence a e E A E 13 4 IM 04L31A01 03E Contents Chapter 14 Specifications 14 1 Input Section Specifications ee ec cece eeteeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeeneesaeseeeesaeteeesneeesiaeeeeeenaes 14 1 14 2 Control FUNGON 00 eee cece c ene eeeeeceeeeeeeeeee cece eeeeeesaeeeeee sees ccaeseaeeeeeesaeseeeesnaeeeaeeeneeeeaes 14 3 14 3 Alarm FUNCHION s c0iseccseeperncees cated eiisees testes ey ae a ade T netic meeps eee 14 5 144 Display FUNCION esia tases sanegsanpl AAS EE A AE 14 6 14 5 Storage FUNCTION aroi e a N a a a a aeai 14 8 14 6 Communication Functions sssseseeeeeeeeeeeserest retrett tentit tentten ttt eeeaaeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeieesiaeseneeeea 14 11 WAST OPUONS aosan a a a
453. orage medium beforehand Auto Save Have the external storage medium inserted in the drive at all times Data storage to the external storage medium is done automatically Note If an external storage medium is not inserted when the data save operation is started during auto save mode the unsaved data is saved the first time the specified interval elapses after an external storage medium is inserted If the acquisition of the display data to the internal memory or acquisition of the event data to the internal memory in free mode is started you can save the display data or event data at any time by operating the FUNC key gt soft key even during auto save mode Display data The display data in the internal memory is closed as a single file at the specified interval or at the specified date and time and saved to the external storage medium in binary format Examples of data save operation to the external storage medium Example 1 Auto save interval or data length 1 day Date and time when data is saved to the external storage medium Not use After starting at 13 10 data is saved every day at 13 10 to the external storage medium 7 19 13 10 7 20 13 10 7 21 13 10 7 22 13 10 I I I d Memory start Saved to the external storage medium Example 2 Auto save interval or data length 1 day Date and time when data is saved to the external storage medium 0 hour every day After starting at 13 10 on July 19th data i
454. ory as display data event data Manual Sample Data The instantaneous values of computation channels are acquired to the internal memory through manual sample operation However this excludes the measurement channels that are turned Off IM 04L31A01 03E App 9 xipueddy Appendix 2 Supplementary Explanation of the Computation Function TLOG Data The instantaneous values of all channels excluding measurement channels set to skip and computation channels set to Off can be saved at intervals specified by a timer Note TLOG computed data and TLOG data are not the same TLOG computed data refers to the result of the TLOG computation TLOG data refers to the instantaneous data of specified channels acquired at specified intervals No of Characters in Equations Measurement computation 40 characters or less Control computation 120 characters or less App 10 IM 04L31A01 03E Appendix 3 Meaning and Syntax of Equations This section explains in detail the meaning and syntax of equations It is a supplement to the information covered in Computation Function in section 1 18 Computation and Report Functions Option and 1 19 Equations for Control Computation Style Number S3 or Later Four Arithmetic Operations The data that can be used in equations is as follows measurement data 01 06 computation data 31 42 control data 101 106 201 212 constants KO1 K12 communication input data CO1 C 1
455. ot sampling interval of display data is 2 s For example 1 minute if the scan interval is 250 ms the input signal is sampled 8 times within a 2 s interval The maximum and minimum values of the data sampled eight times are used as display data 1 division 30 dots The time period corresponding to one dot is called the sampling interval of displayed data The sampling interval of displayed data is determined by the display update interval The relationship between the display update rate and the sampling interval of displayed data is as follows Display Update Rate div 1min 2min 5min 10min 20min 30minth 2h 4h 10h Sampling interval of 2 4 10 20 40 60 120 240 480 1200 displayed data s Zone Display The waveform display range is called a zone You can display channels by setting a zone for each channel Displaying the waveforms in separate zones facilitates reading of the waveform In the example in the figure channel 1 is displayed in the 0 to 30 zone channel 1 in the 30 to 60 zone and channel 3 in the 60 to 100 zone When zone display is not used When zone display is used 100 z 100 CH3 Zone 3 A t 60 a Zone 2 My L 30 CHi Zone 1 0 0 Time axis Time axis 1 76 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 16 Display Function Partial Expanded Display This function compresses a section of th
456. ough the PV input value Time Events Output the progress status of the program pattern using contact output Number of setpoints Up to 16 points per segment Output After a given time elapses after switching segments Elapsed time 0 to 99 h 59 min 59 s PV Events PV and deviation alarm function within the program pattern Number of setpoints Up to 16 points per segment Type PV high limit PV low limit deviation high limit deviation low limit deviation high low limit deviation high and low limits SP high limit SP low limit output high limit and output low limit Control Mode Switching Program RESET Program RUN switching Run stop status of the program operation HOLD HOLD release HOLD release HOLD the progress of the program operation when program is running IM 04L31A01 03E 14 13 z suonesio ds 14 7 Options Measurement alarm A6 A6R A4F A4FR Available only on the CX1006 Number of outputs Number of inputs Relay contact capacity Output type 6 outputs A6 A6R A4F A4FR 8 inputs A6R A4FR 250 VDC 0 1 A resistive load 250 VAC 50 60 Hz 3A NO C NC energized de energized AND OR and hold and non hold switchable Remote control A6R A4FR The following control is possible using contact inputs up to 8 points can be specified Memory start stop level Event data file using external trigger input trigger 250 ms or more Time adjustment adjust the time to on the hour us
457. our on the specified date for monthly reports once a week For example in the case of daily reports the average maximum minimum and sum over a day for the specified channels are computed at the specified time on the hour and the results are acquired to the internal memory This constitutes one report data set Unit of Sum Computation In the sum computation data are summed over the scan interval However for flow values that have units s min h or day a simple summation results in the actual value not matching the computed result because the scan interval and the unit of the input values are different In these cases the unit of the data measured over the scan interval is converted to match the unit of the input values and the computation is performed For example if the scan interval is 2 s and the input value is 100 m min a simple summation would add 100 every 2 s resulting in 3000 after one minute However if the sum unit is set to min then 2 s 60 s is multiplied every scan interval before the value is added giving a result that has an m min unit The following converting equations are used to compute the sum The scan interval unit is in seconds Off measured computed data every scan interval s measured computed data every scan interval x scan interval min measured computed data every scan interval x scan interval 60 h measured computed data every scan interval x scan interval 3600 day meas
458. oves to the next item box 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note For setup item boxes that require values to be entered a pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key is used 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box IM 04L31A01 03E 4 31 suoljeiadoQ dnjas payejay uoun 017U09 s 4 13 Ten segment linearizer I O Ten segment linearizer I O Loop number control input channel number when the PV SP computation function Is ON The setup items of ten segment linearizer output parameters are set for each loop When the PV SP computation function is ON you can set each setting item of the ten segment linearizer I O settings for each control input channel When changing these parameters this setting is used to select the target loop number 1 or 2 initial value is 1 Input type when PV SP computation function is OFF Only during loop control with PV switching select PV1 or PV2 During single loop control and cascade control only PV1 is displayed Mode When using the ten segment linearizer approximation set the mode to Biasing or Approximation If not set to Off initial setting Input Output If you are using the ten segment linearizer approximation set between 2 to 11 points of input output values If the number of segmental p
459. p control PV 2 input switching control PV1 PV2 Cascade control PV SP can be selected when program control is OFF and remote input is ON see section 4 2 Control gt Contact input registration AUX Alarm mode Mode Select whether to activate or deactivate PV SP computation If set to OFF the measured input values of the input terminals on the analog input terminal block for control assigned as default values are PV Equation Follow the instructions in the equation pop up window to enter the equation using 120 characters or less The number of data that can be used in equations is 35 You can also use the control constants W01 W12 in the equation Measurement constants KO1 K12 cannot be used See appendix 3 Meanings and Syntax of Equations for information on how to create equations When the mode is OFF the input terminal numbers of the analog input terminal block for control assigned as default values are input Control Single Loop Cascade 2 Input Switching Mode Control Control Control PV SP PV 1 SP PV1 PV2 SP Loop 1 Clo1 Clo2 Clot Clo2 ClO1 Clo2 C103 Loop 2 Clo4 Cl05 C104 Cl04 Clo5 Clo1 PV Range Lower Limit Upper Limit Set in the range 30000 to 30000 max value gt min value max min lt 30000 Settings cannot be changed during control operation while writing to memory or during measurement computation Note If you change the PV ra
460. pattern setting The following display appears Pattern 1 pr 07 2002 11 04 02 E ez 9 Program pattern setting Pattern number 1 Segment number Ramp Soak select Ramp Target setpoint Loop 1 56 6 Loop 2 200 0 Segment time 00 50 00 Segment shift action Continue Wait action Shift Wait zone number 1 z Move to the event setting display Increment Decrement the segment number Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Note You can change the patterns even when program control is in progress However setting changes are not applied to the segment that is currently being executed In addition you cannot increase or decrease the number of segments or change the segment setting method of the pattern that is in use by program control Program Pattern Setting Pattern number Displays the pattern number selected in the pattern initial settings Segment number Select the number of the segment to be cha
461. pecified when the PID number is set to 2 or greater Can be specified when the PID number is set to 2 or greater 4 26 IM 04L31A01 03E 4 11 PID parameters This section explains the procedures for setting the PID control parameters of the control function or the control parameters of the ON OFF control Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt 4 soft key select PID parameters The following display appears During PID control Fen 042000 13 36 33 OF EEMI 0 PID parameters Loop number PID number 1 SP 200 0 M Reset 56 0 P 5 08 I 246 s D 60 s Output R D Reverse Lower 6 6 Preset 6 08 Upper 100 0 8 Shutdown During ON OFF control when Control gt 5 Output processing gt Control output is set to On Off control GROUP 1 Jan d PID parameters Loop number ES PID number 1 Hysteresis Value 4 0 Pos R D Reverse Preset 6 0 Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item box 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note For setup item boxes that require values to be ent
462. perations removal of the Zip disk and saving of the data to the external storage medium in manual save mode soft key operations on the control operation display and setup operation on the control setting display You must enter a password to release the key lock Key Lock Item The characters in the middle column are the characters of the soft key menu that are displayed on the control operation screen Keylock2 Control gt KeyLock3 Control gt START Free NODE RUN RESET Free Control menu lock STOP Free REN LOC Free HOLD Free Range MENU Free RUN STOP Free ADVANCE Free Alarm Free USER Free SP Free PATTERN No Free Operation Free DISP ENTER Free OUT Free PID parameter Free Alarm ACK Free AUTO TUNING Free Control group Free Hsen Free SP No Free Linearizer Free Write memory Free TUNING Free Detail setting Free Hessage Hail Program Free Manual sample Control math Free Nedia Free Operation during Key Lock All keys except those shown in the following table are disabled Key Lock Item DISP ENTER key External storage medium During manual save mode Saving of data when the external storage medium is inserted is prohibited Zip disk removal prohibited on models with Zip drives During auto save mode Zip disk removal prohibited on models with Zip drives Control menu lock Soft keys that are locked cannot be used on setting mode control menu Operation When Key Lock Is Enabled Swi
463. ple in which the 3 segment of the 2 loop is a soak segment When set to ramp prioritized PV2 start the ramp rate of the 2 loop is prioritized The program operation start point of the 2 loop will be one of the points from A2 to E2 depends on the PV position a to e at that point The program operation start point of the 1 loop one of the other loops is at the same time as that of the 2 loop For example if the program operation start point of the 2 loop is point A2 the program operation start point of the 1 loop is point A1 PV Program pattern for N p 2nd loop Program pattern for E2 r the ist loop e i i E1 i l f gt Time SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 Example in which the segment consists of only an up ramp When set to ramp prioritized PV1 start the ramp rate of the 1 loop is prioritized The program operation start point of the 1 loop will be one of the points from B1 to E1 depends on the PV position a to e at that point If the PV position is at point a program operation will not start The program operation start point of the 2 loop one of the other loops must be at the same time as that of the 1 loop For example if the program operation start point of the 1 loop is point B1 the program operation start point of the 2 loop is point B2 Program pattern for the ist loop Program pattern for the 2nd loop gt Time SEG1 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 43 suonoun jo uoneue
464. pplications include nuclear power equipment devices using radioactivity railway facilities aviation equipment air navigation facilities aviation facilities and medical equipment If so used it is the user s responsibility to include in the system additional equipment and devices that ensure personnel safety Do not modify this product The CX is designed for indoor use IM 04L31A01 03E Safety Precautions Power Supply Ensure that the source voltage matches the voltage of the power supply before turning ON the power Protective Grounding Make sure to connect the protective grounding to prevent electric shock before turning ON the power Necessity of Protective Grounding Never cut off the internal or external protective earth wire or disconnect the wiring of the protective earth terminal Doing so invalidates the protective functions of the instrument and poses a potential shock hazard Defect of Protective Grounding Do not operate the instrument if the protective earth or fuse might be defective Make sure to check them before operation Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors Operation in such environments constitutes a safety hazard Do Not Remove Covers The cover should be removed by YOKOGAWA s qualified personnel only Opening the cover is dangerous because some areas inside the instrument have high voltages External Connection Connect th
465. r TLOG Timer No 1 Sum scale otf Rolling average Off Alarm delay time 10 s 34 31 32 33 Next 1 3 IM 04L31A01 03E 10 1 uondo uonsuny UOHey NdWOD y YUM Sapo UO AjUC suoneiodg pajejoy unsung wodey pue uoneindwog 10 1 Assigning Computation Channels and Setting Computing Equations Constants and Tags Setup Procedure Assigning Computation Channels 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the First CH and Last CH boxes 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the start and end channel numbers for setting the computation channels 3 With the cursor blue at the Math On Off box press the On soft key The Calculation expression Span Lower Span Upper and Unit boxes appear e Calculation expression 1 With the cursor blue at the Calculation expression box press the Input soft key The following expression pop up window appears ee W When pressing the M1 M2 soft key Maximum of 40 character can be entered SAR ABS LOG lt EXPE EQ Ema EOI E Pais EE AND NOT XOR OR TLOG AVEC MAX lt MIN SUN P P Space ENT H2 Over 2 Enter the equation using the soft keys and character number input keys 3 Press the DISP ENTER key The input equation is displayed in the Calculation expression box Span Lower Upper Unit 1 With the cursor blue at the Span Lower Span Upper and Unit boxes press the Input soft key 2 Enter the v
466. r Select Internal Color Red Green Blue B violet Brown Orange Internal Extl Colors of measurement channels Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt MENU key switch to Set mode gt 5 soft key select Display gt 2 soft key select Color The following display appears Color CH Color 1 __Red _ Green Blue B violet Brown Orange monn won Red Green Blue B violetfmmNext 1 4 8 14 IM 04L31A01 03E 8 10 Measurement Function gt Changing the Channel Display Color Colors of computation channels Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt MENU key switch to thetmode gt 5 soft key select Display gt 7 soft key select Math Color CH Color CH Color 31 E Red 37 il green 32 il Green 38 Lightblue 3 E Blue 3 g Violet 4 E B violet 46 i Gray 3 E Brown 41 E Lime 3 E Orange 42 il Cyan Red Green Blue B violet Next 1 4 Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the Color box of the channel you wish to change A soft key menu used to select the color appears at the bottom of the display On the Control Color display you must select the control loop using the Select box before this step Press the soft key corresponding to the color you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to t
467. r Later e Computation Error Set whether to apply an the computed value to the upper limit value over or the lower limit value under if the computed results in an error Over 105 of the value is output for an overrange Under 5 of the value is output for an underrange Note _ _ The following values are output when the computed result is overrange or underrange Overrange 105 Underrange 5 The following are causes of computation errors Error in computation divide by 0 etc The equation is used and a burnout occurs on channels whose burnout is set to ON Trouble occurred with the AD converter on channels using the equation Channels using the equation are set to Skip 4 44 IM 04L31A01 03E 4 19 Logic Computation Settings Style Number S3 or Later This section explains the logic computation setting operation Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt 8 soft key select Control math setting 9 soft key when program control is ON gt 2 soft key Logic math The following display appears Pee GROUP2 oie Pes ete ke Logic math Setting number Relay Calculation expression 1fooaai Frog GT Wal 2 off 3 Off 4 Off 5 off 6 off Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display
468. r condition is met after data has been acquired to all blocks the first block is overwritten IM 04L31A01 03E App 1 xipueddy Appendix 1 Supplementary Explanation of the Acquisition of Display Data Event Data to the Internal Memory Overwriting of the data to the next block is repeated each time the trigger condition is met while the CX1000 is in the trigger wait state To stop the acquisition of the event data press the STOP key 1st block 2nd block Last block Data acquisition Data acquisition Data acquisition i uN i uN Trigger ial Trigger wait Trigger wait 1 i Trigger condition gt Trigger condition ms Trigger condition A met met met Note You can check the event data information in the internal memory using the memory summary If a power failure occurs the event data in the internal memory is closed as a single file Pre trigger of Event Data You can set the pre trigger when the acquisition mode of event data is set to Trigger or Rotate It is a function used to save the data before the point where the trigger condition is met as event data This function is convenient when you wish to view the data before the occurrence of a certain event such as when an alarm occurs Specify the pre trigger as a percentage 0 5 25 50 75 95 or 100 of the acquisition time of the event data If set to 0 the entire data is the data existing after the trigger con
469. r of reference points that can be specified is PID group number 2 As shown in the following figure if the PID group number is 7 the number of reference points is 5 If the number of reference points is 5 there are 6 zones Maximum value of i measurement span gt 7c ttt tres i No 7 PID Reference point 6 If the current PV is here PID N p No 6 PID Reference point 5 f No 5 PID Reference point 4 No 4 PID No 3 PID No 2 PID Reference point 3 5 Reference point 2 Reference point 1 wp Shange in the No 1 PID Minimum value of measurement span Switching Hysteresis You can set the hysteresis used in the zone switching in EUS 0 0 to 10 0 of the measurement span The hysteresis is initially set to 0 5 of the measurement span Reference point n ote gt No 1PID No 2PID No 1PID No 2PID IM 04L31A01 03E 1 31 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 7 PID Parameter Settings Maximum value of measurement span Minimum value of measurement span PID Constant Reference Deviation During control operation the operation can be switched automatically to a preset PID constant PID constant with the largest PID number For example if the PID group number is 8 the PID constant of PID number 8 when the deviation between th
470. r the pattern included in the loop selected by the cursor or to the program operation display For operations in the program selection screen see section 6 4 Operations on the Program Selection Display and Program Control Display Only on Models with the Program Control Option Switching between Automatic and Manual for the Analog Retransmission Loop You can switch the output mode for the control loop specified for analog retransmission When set to AUTO the computed result of analog retransmission is output When set to MAN you can set the direct output value 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired control loop 2 Press the MODE soft key A pop up window switching between auto and manual appears INT 82 moe AT Auto manual switching window 3 Select AUTO or MAN using the up and down arrow keys 4 Press DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes To close the window without making any changing press the ESC key 6 4 IM 04L31A01 03E 6 1 Operations on the Control Group Display Switching Displayed Information and Control Operation Modes Output Value Changes for Analog Retransmission Loops MAN must be set for the MODE using the procedure above 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired control loop 2 Press the OUT soft key The Output Value Setting window appears MODE OUT 2 3 Change the output value using the up and down arrow keys The currently set control output valu
471. r voltage signal In addition difference computation square root computation and scaling can be performed on the measured data and display or save the computed result as measured data On the CX1000 the input type and input computation type is set as a Mode In addition if Mode is set to difference computation square root computation or scaling the input type is set as a Type Mode Notation in Setup Description DC voltage Voltage Measures a DC voltage in the range of 20 mV to 50 V Thermocouple TC Measures temperatures corresponding to the temperature range of each thermocouple type such as R S B K E J T N and W Resistance RTD Measures temperatures corresponding to the temperature detector appropriate range for Pt100 or JPt100 Scaling Scale The input signal can be scaled to a value in the appropriate unit and displayed You Difference ON OFF input Square root computation Skip can select the input type from DC voltage thermocouple resistance temperature detector and ON OFF input Delta Displays the value obtained by subtracting the measured value of another channel called the reference channel from the input signal of the specified channel as the measured value for the specified channel You can select the input type from DC voltage thermocouple resistance temperature detector and ON OFF input DI Displays the contact input or voltage input signals by correlating them to 0 or 100 of the di
472. rating loop However when changing the pattern number by contact input the changes take effect from the point at which the program stops Number of Segments Used The selectable number of segments is as follows Number of segments that can be assigned to a single program 1 to 99 Total number of segments constructing all program patterns 300 max Segment Assignment Method The following two types of segment assignment methods are available for selection Segment time assignment method factory default setting This method sets the action inside the segment using the final SP control setpoint at the end of the segment and the segment time time length from the start of the segment to the end Selectable range of final SP Within the control measurement span within PV range span during loop control with PV switching Selectable range of segment time 00 00 01 to 99 59 59 PV Operation of i segment 1 to 99 _ lt Final SP Final SP of the previous segment ae Starting SP at the time i i of program operation start ee Segment time L gt Time Segment time ramp rate assignment method This method sets the action within the segment using the final SP and the ramp rate value The ramp rate value for ramp up or ramp down SP change is the amount of change in the SP per 1 hour or 1 minute The ramp rate is common to all loops of program control Therefore make the measurement span the same for all loops of program c
473. re see figure below You cannot change this behavior The following figure shows the operation of the FAIL output relay de energized type NO Cc NC NO c NC NO Cc NC During normal operation When a failure occurs When power is turned OFF NO C and NC are names of the relay output terminals NO Normally Opened C Common NC Normally Closed Memory End Output When the remaining free space in the internal memory or external storage medium becomes small a relay contact signal 1 signal is output When a memory end is detected the relay is energized energized on memory end You cannot change this so that it is de energized on memory end When memory end is output save the data to an external storage medium during manual save mode or change the external storage medium during auto save mode The memory end output operates as follows During auto save mode If an external storage medium is inserted in auto save mode the relay is energized when the remaining free space on the external storage medium falls to 10 At this point the icon indicating the status of the external storage medium in the status display section turns from green to red During manual save mode If the type of data to be saved is display data only or display data and event data the relay is energized when the remaining amount of time for acquiring the display data in the internal memory falls to the specified time If the type of data to be saved is even
474. re the measurement span can be divided into up to 7 zones using reference points 1 to 6 An optimum PID constant can be assigned to each zone Therefore even if the PV changes and crosses between the zones the output is controlled automatically using the PID constant that is assigned to each zone If the current process value PV here control using the PID constant of No 6 Maximum value of PV span No 7PID Reference point 6 P No 6PID Reference point 5 No 5PID Reference point 4 No 4PID Reference point 2 No 3PID No 2PID Reference point 1 No 1PID Minimum value of PV span Change in the process value PV 1 40 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 11 Program Control Related Settings Program Pattern Number and Pattern Name From the multiple program patterns available you can switch the program pattern used in the operation by specifying a number according to the conditions Each program pattern can be assigned a pattern name Program pattern number 1 to 30 1 to 4 on the PG1 option Pattern name Up to 16 characters You cannot change the pattern number during program control However if contact input is used to change the pattern number the changes take effect when program control ends With style number S3 or later you can execute a program pattern while a separate program pattern is executing if the operating loops do not overlap You cannot change to an executing program pattern and an overlapping pattern number of an ope
475. re root Off Bias Off Filter Off 2 Control alarm Parameter Initial Value Alarm gt Loop number 1 Alarm gt 1 to 4 Off Alarm gt SP number 1 Alarm gt Alarm value 1 to 4 1370 0 3 Operation related zone PID Parameter Initial Value Operation related zone PID gt Loop number 1 Operation related zone PID gt Suppressing function Off Operation related zone PID gt Ramp rate time unit Hour Operation related zone PID gt SP ramp down rate Off Operation related zone PID gt SP ramp up rate Off Operation related zone PID gt Tag INT 01 Operation related zone PID gt Tag comment xipueddy IM 04L31A01 03E App 31 Appendix 6 Initial Values 4 PID parameters Parameter Initial Value PID parameters gt Loop number PID parameters gt PID Number PID parameters gt SP Target setpoint PID parameters gt P Proportional band PID parameters gt Integral time PID parameters gt D Derivative time PID parameters gt Output gt Lower PID parameters gt Output gt Upper PID parameters gt Shutdown PID parameters gt M Reset PID parameters gt Relay hysteresis gt Value PID parameters gt Relay hysteresis gt Pos PID parameters gt R D Reverse Direct PID parameters gt Preset 1 1 200 0 5 0 240s 60s 0 0 100 0 Off 50 0 7 8 Mid Reverse 0 0 5 Control group setting Parameter Initial Value Control group gt Group number Control gro
476. rement Input Terminal Block Six measurement input terminals are available on each terminal block as shown below Control measurement input terminals 6 5 4 3 2 1 lt Channel number E 8 8 E KSA 4 444 E E E E HA A H H H K e uu u u uE yy A A AHA EK Nole e a e In the terminal arrangement diagram of the standard terminal block shown above b terminals are shorted with each other If you specified the three wire isolated RTD N2 option b terminals are isolated with each other Terminal Cover Labels A label showing the arrangement of the terminals is affixed to the front and back of the terminal cover of each terminal block Label on the Front of the Terminal Cover The terminal numbers for checking the connection not the numbers used in the settings are written on the label on the front of the terminal cover see the following figure For the control output terminal block cati A CTRL OUT_ DIGITAL OUT CTRL OUT DIGITAL OUT _DIGITAL IN 028 025 022 019 016 013 010 007 004 001 029 026 023 020 01 7 014 011 008 005 002 027 oO o o18 015 012 009 006 003 For the control measurement input terminal block
477. rence junction compensation voltage that is to be added to the input appears Set the value in the range of 20000 u V to 20000 u V initial value is O u V 7 2 IM 04L31A01 03E 7 1 Settings Related to Measurement Inputs Setting the Range First CH Last CH Select the range of measurement channels for setting the range from 01 to 06 Range First select the input mode in the Mode entry box from Volt TC RTD DI Delta Sqrt and Scale Then set other parameters such as Range Span Lower Upper according to the selected input mode as described below Set Skip for channels that are not to perform measurements or displays When set to Volt input Range Selectable Measurement Span Range 20mV 20 00 to 20 00 mV 60mV 60 00 to 60 00 mV 200mV 200 0 to 200 0 mV 2V 2 000 to 2 000 V 6V 6 000 to 6 000 V 20V 20 00 to 20 00 V 50V 50 00 to 50 00 V Note For current inputs a shunt resistor is attached to the input terminal to convert the signal to voltage input The following table shows the available shunt resistors For example a 250 Q shunt resistor is used to convert the signal in the range of 1 to 5 V for 4 20 mA input Name Model Resistance Shunt resistor 4159 20 250 Q 0 1 for screw terminals 4159 21 100 Q 0 1 4159 22 10 Q 0 1 When set to TC thermocouple input ps 9 Ss Q o gt Selectable Measurement Span Range 0 0 to 1760 0 C 0 0 t
478. ring specified here the sequence number increments every time the data is saved File Header of Display Data and Event Data You can enter a header comment using up to 32 alphanumeric characters Saving Data via the Ethernet Network The display data event data and report data as described in Data Acquisition to the Internal Memory can be automatically transferred to an FTP server via the Ethernet network for storage Conversely the CX1000 can function as an FTP server The CX1000 can be accessed from a PC and the data in the external storage medium can be retrieved for storage For a description on these functions see the CX1000 CX2000 Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L31A01 17E 1 90 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 18 Computation and Report Functions Option Computation Function You can perform computations by specifying a computing equation and display the results as computed values of a computation channel on various displays such as the trend display numerical display and bar graph display You can use data of measurement channels the data of computation channels the data of control channels constants etc in the computing equation Computed data can be saved similar to measured data of measurement channels Computation is performed every scan interval Explanation of the computation function is also given in appendix 2 Supplementary Explanation of the Computation Function and appendix 3 Meaning
479. rizer bias ten segment linearizer bias i i Expansion PV input bias PV input bias Program operation S S contact i 3 13 in i PV input filter PV input filter ig ig F put Spits 8 as Loop control with PV switching ig ig PV switching Local i2 j 9 io ia is en Senne A EE EET OETA ET Local switching SP ramp rate setting Note Does not function during program control Manual operation Control computation section Control output Geis PV event output Time event output Measurement alarm function PV Meas Meas Time Time event event alarm alarm event event 1 2 1 2 Note There are 6 contact input terminals and 6 contact output terminals on a single control output terminal block The functions that can be assigned to each input output terminal vary depending on the control mode and whether program operation is enabled Analog Retransmission Contact input Control measurement data nalog retransmission computatin section A Manual operation O Manual Control output App 44 IM 04L31A01 03E Appendix 8 Explanation of Engineering Units EU and EUS The CX1000 uses the following two types of engineering units as units for the internal data The PV is indicated using the engineering unit of the measurement span the range used by control within the PV range EU Unit indicating the value using the engineering unit where the low and high limits of
480. rm occurs If de energized is selected the alarm output relay behaves in the same fashion as when an alarm occurs if the power is shut down The setting applies to all alarm outputs The initial setting is Energized O O 0 Energized NO Cc NC NO Cc NC NO Cc NC De energized NO Cc NC NO Cc NC NO Cc NC When power is When alarm is When alarm is shut down not occurring occurring NO Normally Opened C Common NC Normally Closed 1 64 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 15 Measurement Function gt Measurement Alarm Related Settings Hold Non hold Operation of Alarm Output Relays You can select the following behavior when the alarm switches from the activated condition to the released condition reverts to the normal condition Turn OFF the output relay with the release of the alarm non hold Hold the output relay at ON until an alarm ACK operation is performed hold The setting applies to all alarm output relays The initial setting is Non hold When set to non hold Alarm ON F Alarm OFF Relay output ON OFF is for the case when NO Normally Opened terminal is used If a NC Normally Closed terminal is used Relay output ON the ON OFF condition is reversed from the Relay output OFF condition shown in the left figure When set to hold Alarm ON Td Alarm OFF Alarm ACK Relay output ov Relay output OFF Note When the reflash alarm is turned ON 101 to 103 are set to non hold Specifying Hold produces
481. rm output The target channels are common with the range setting Off On Up to 4 alarms can be set to a single channel For each of the alarms 1 to 4 select On to enable an alarm Off to disable it If On is selected Type Value and Relay On Off entry boxes appear Type Select the alarm type conditions for activating the alarm from the following eight types Name Displayed Description Symbol High limit alarm H An alarm occurs when the measured computed value is greater than or equal to the alarm value Low limit alarm L An alarm occurs when the measured computed value is less than or equal to the alarm value Difference h An alarm occurs when the difference in the measured values of two channels is greater than or high limit alarm equal to the difference high limit alarm value Difference I An alarm occurs when the difference in the measured values of two channels is less than or low limit alarm equal to the difference low limit alarm value High limit on R The rate of change of the measured values is checked over a certain interval set using the rate of change alarm Increase entry box of basic alarm settings An alarm occurs if the rate of change of the measured value in the rising direction is greater than or equal to the specified value Low limit on r The rate of change of the measured values is checked over a certain interval set using the rate of change alarm Decrease entry box of b
482. rmware version option NONE None System Display The total number of inputs on the CX1000 the size of the internal memory the communication functions the external storage drive the options and the MAC address and the firmware version number can be displayed Number of measurement inputs measurement channels Number of computation channels Number of internal control loops ANALOG 6 HATH 12 LOOP 2 MEMORY 1280006 Internal memory size RS 422 Se Communication interface ETHERNET _______ External storage medium Program control LADDER Green series communications Het ck Ladder communications ON LAME auu LARGE EXT LOOP PRODUCT MAC address 00 00 64 81 4D 28 Type of terminal block 1 iy 8 62 Graphic BB7G0ZC 1 01 z e fies a PID Exists Alarm Measurement alarm MAC address Firmware version option NONE None Displayed Language The displayed language can be set to English Japanese German French or Chinese Can be selected on a CX of version 3 02 or later 1 98 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 20 Other Functions FAIL Memory End Relay Output A4F option or A4FR option FAIL Output When a failure occurs in the CPU of the CX1000 a relay contact signal 1 signal is output The relay is energized when the CPU is normal it is de energized when a CPU failure occurs de energized on failure Therefore relay output is carried out also when the power is turned OFF including a power failu
483. rns to the first item box Off Hour Day Saving the Settings in Basic Setting Mode 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed 10 12 IM 04L31A01 03E 10 6 Creating Reports Setting the Report Function Report set Select the type of report to be created from the following Hour Create hourly reports Day Create daily reports Hour Day Create hourly and daily reports Day Week Create daily and weekly reports Day Month Create daily and monthly reports Date Day of the week Set the date or day of the week on which the report is to be created If Report set is set to Day Month Date is displayed If Day Week is specified Day of the week is displayed If Hour Day or Hour Day is specified Date is displayed However this setting is void Date for monthly reports Enter the date 01 to 28 You cannot specify 29 30 or 31 Day of the week for weekly reports Select the day of the week Time hour Set the time when the report is to be created The reference time is set in the range of 0 00 to 23 00 at 1 hour steps Report CH Select the report channel R01 to R12 to which measurement computation channels are assigned The data of measurement computation channels are output in order according to this number Off On Select whet
484. rogram Control Worksheets tJ Ramp Soak TSP1 Program pattern and time event setting k L TSP2 Segment time Ramp rate time unit Ramp PID No Shift action Wait No TIM1 ON TIM1 OFF TIM2 ON TIM2 OFF TIM3 ON TIM3 OFF TIM4 ON TIM4 OFF TIM5 ON TIM5 OFF TIM6 ON TIM6 OFF TIM7 ON TIM7 OFF TIM8 ON TIM8 OFF TIM9 ON TIM9 OFF TIM10 ON TIM10 OFF TIM11 ON TIM11 OFF TIM12 ON TIM12 OFF TIM13 ON TIM13 OFF TIM14 ON TIM14 OFF TIM15 ON TIM15 OFF TIM16 ON TIM16 OFF IM 04L31A01 03E App 47 xipueddy Appendix 9 Program Control Worksheets PV event PVE loop number PVE1 event kind PVE1 value PVE2 loop number PVE2 event kind PVE2 value PVE3 loop number PVE3 event kind PVE3 value PVE4 loop number PVE4 event kind PVE4 value PVE5 loop number PVE5 event kind PVE5 value PVE6 loop number PVE6 event kind PVE6 value PVE7 loop number PVE7 event kind PVE7 value PVE8 loop number PVE8 event kind PVE8 value PVE9 loop number PVE9 event kind PVE9 value PVE10 loop number PVE10 event kind PVE10 value PVE11 loop number PVE11 event kind PVE11 value PVE12 loop number PVE12 event kind PVE12 value PVE13 loop number PVE13 event kind PVE13 value PVE14 loop number PVE14 event kind PVE14 value PVE15 loop number PVE15 event kind App 48 IM 04L31A01 03E Appendi
485. rol output is set to Relay or Voltage pulse Analog output type Select the type of output current during current output from below This setting is valid only when Control output is set to Current output 4 20mA 0 20mA 20 4mA and 20 OmA 4 14 IM 04L31A01 03E 4 6 Control gt Relay This section explains the procedures for setting the contact output for FAIL self diagnosis and display hold Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Setting mode control gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 12 soft key select Control 6 soft key select Relay Relay FAIL On Self diagnosis On Relay Action Behavior gt De_energize Nonhold De_energize Nonhold Energize Nonhold Energize Nonhold Energize Nonhold Energize Nonhold De Hold De Non En Hold En Non Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to
486. root computation Ten segment linearizer approximation Ten segment linearizer approximation ten segment linearizer bias ten segment linearizer bias PV input bias PV input bias Remote input filter PV input filter PV input filter Ratio bias computation Loop control with PV switching a anerneenneanenanesne PV switching SP 1to8 Remote Local SP ramp rate setting Control computation section 2 Manual oe Manual Auto switching Preset output Output limiter Q gt Run Stop Run switchi SHO r MOP UN switching Q Alarm function Control output Goin Alarmi Alarm2 Alarm3 Alarm4 Alarm1 Alarm2 Note There are 6 contact input terminals and 6 contact output terminals on a single control output terminal block The functions that can be assigned to each input output terminal vary depending on the control mode and whether program operation is enabled IM 04L31A01 03E App 43 xipueddy Appendix 7 Control Function Block Diagram Loop Control with PV Switching Program Control Expansion A nu na eit Contact input Input Input type selection Input type selection Program pattern selection Analog input range conversion Analog input range conversion Square root computation Square root computation Advance operation start wilt ansann old operation start _ Input type selection _ Unit selection Unit selection Ten segment linearizer approx Ten segment linearizer approx ten segment linea
487. ror section 6 1 Contact input error section 4 3 communication error See the Communication Interface User s Manual 711 Auto tuning is activated already Operation error section 6 1 Contact input error section 4 3 communication error see the Communication Interface User s Manual 712 Incorrect PID group number Contact input error Section 4 3 communication error see the Communication Interface User s Manual 714 Program mode cannot be selected Contact input error section 4 3 communication error see the Communication Interface User s Manual 715 There is no specified pattern number Contact input error Section 4 3 communication error see the Communication Interface User s Manual 716 Pattern number cannot be changed when program operation is activated Contact input error section 4 3 communication error see the Communication Interface User s Manual 717 There are no loops with program operation Contact input error section 4 3 communication error see the Communication Interface User s Manual 718 Program operation has started already Contact input error Section 4 3 communication error see the Communication Interface User s Manual 719 Program operation cannot be started Contact input error Section 4 3 communication error see the Communication Interface User s Manual 720 A disabled start segment number is selected Contact input error S
488. roup No Select the segment PID group number 1 to 8 This item is not displayed when zone PID is selected Only the PID group numbers that can be specified through Control gt 1 Control action gt PID number are displayed Segment shift action Set the segment shifting action to Continue Hold hold after end of segment Local local mode after completing the last segment or Reset reset mode after completing the last segment Note When creating the program pattern data is created so that the segment set to Local or Reset is the last segment of program control Wait action Set the wait action type to Shift or Within To disable the wait action select Off Wait zone number Select the wait zone number from 1 to 5 The entry box appears only when Wait action is set to Shift or Within Method of Confirming the Specified Program Pattern In addition to confirming the settings of each segment on the program pattern setting screen you can also confirm the specified pattern on a line drawing by showing the program control display as shown in the following figure For the procedure in displaying and operating the program control display see section 6 4 Operations on the Program Section Display Program Control Display bor ay 2009 11 15 56 ea ERAS 28 min div REPEAT START SEG DELAY TIME IM 04L31A01 03E suoljeiad C dnjas payejay jo1j U0D wesbolg E 5 6 Program parame
489. rror May occur if a network failure cable problems duplicate addresses network device failure and so on occurs in the middle of the e mail transmission 275 The current image cannot be output to the Web The setting display cannot be shown on the Web browser This message is displayed on the Web browser 276 Image data currently being created Unable to perform key Try again a little later This message is displayed operation on the Web browser 277 Could not output screen to Web Failed to create the image This message is displayed on the Web browser 12 4 IM 04L31A01 03E 12 1 Messages Errors Related to FTP Client For information regarding the FTP client function of the CX1000 see the CX1000 CX2000 Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L31A01 17E The detail code does not appear in the error message on the screen You can view the code on the FTP log display of the CX1000 or using the FTP log output via communications Code Message 280 IP address is not set or FTP function is not available Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 280 Character String and Details HOSTADDR The IP address of the CX1000 has not been specified Check the IP address DORMANT Internal processing error LINK Data link is disconnected Check the cable connection 281 FTP mail box operation error Further details are provided by the character string th
490. rsor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Wait Action Setting Wait zone Off On Turn Off On the wait function Only the loops that are set as follows are displayed Control gt 1 Control action Input setting gt Control mode to a mode other than Off and Program control to On and Setting mode Control gt 7 Program control parameters gt 1 Program parameter setting gt Pattern initial setting gt Action loop to On During cascade control only the odd numbered loops in the specified terminal block are displayed Wait zone values Set the wait zones for 2 number of loops x 5 number of zones in the range of EUS 0 0 to 100 0 of the measurement span The values can be copied and pasted using soft keys The loops that are displayed are the same as those for Wait zone Off On Wait time Set the wait time in hh mm ss format selectable range 00 00 00 to 99 59 59 for all the available zones The setting applies to the same zones in each loop T
491. rsor blue to the item box you wish to change The selections are displayed at the bottom section of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note The CH set is set using the pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box 8 2 IM 04L31A01 03E 8 2 Measurement Function gt Measurement Group Setup Operation Renaming Groups of Trend Digital Bar Graph Displays of the Measurement Function and Registering Channels to Groups Group number Select the group you wish to set from 1 to 6 Group name Enter the group name using up to 16 alphanumeric characters Group name display example fw TREND p GROUP 1 _ GROUP 2 EEE DIGITAL P GROUP 3 GROUP 4 ul BoR k GROUP 5 OVERVIEW GROUP 6 CH set Select up to six channels from measurement channels CH1 to CH6 computation channels CH31 to CH42 and internal control channels CH101 to CH112 Assignment of internal control channels channels of internal loops The data of two loops is assigned to channel numbers as follows Loop 1 PV 101 Loop 1 SP 102 Loop 1 OUT 103 Loop 2 PV 104 Loop 2 SP
492. rt The report data is not created for channels that are set to Skip or those that have the computation turned Off Unit of Sum Computation In the sum computation data are summed over the scan interval However for flow values that have units s min h or day a simple summation results in the actual value not matching the computed result because the scan interval and the unit of the input values are different In these cases the unit of the data measured over the scan interval is converted to match the unit of the input values and the computation is performed For example if the scan interval is 2 s and the input value is 100 m min a simple summation would add 100 every 2 s resulting in 3000 after one minute However if the sum unit is set to min then 2 s 60 s is multiplied every scan interval before the value is added giving a result that has an m min unit The following converting equations are used to compute the sum The scan interval unit is in seconds IM 04L31A01 03E App 17 xipueddy Appendix 4 Additional Explanation of the Report Function Off X measured computed data every scan interval s 2 measured computed data every scan interval x scan interval min measured computed data every scan interval x scan interval 60 h measured computed data every scan interval x scan interval 3600 day 2 measured computed data every scan interval x scan interval 86400 Operation during Power Failure
493. rt Functions Option ceccccceeeceeeeeeeeteeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeenaes 1 91 Equations for Control Computation Style Number S3 or Later s ese eseese eneee 1 95 OMersFUNCUONS EE E r audiniedsssudiedeae feataceasetebaeateneaad imaeaveanbeeeaes 1 96 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 1 Handling Precautions cecccceceseceeceeeceeeececeeeeceeeenseeeeceeesneeeceeaeeseaaesesneaeeneenaesneneeeenaaes 2 1 2 2 WStallations ia sage pebaud aenaa isan E a a a a EEE 2 2 Ae 2S s Wii cece Geis ahs eG 2 5 A 2 4 Connecting the Power Supply c cceccecececeeececeeeeceeceaeceeeeaeceeueeseeseaeseeesensnaeeeseeaeenas 2 17 Chapter 3 Names of Parts Display Modes and Common Operations 3 1 Names and Functions of Sections 2 ecceceeeceecneeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeenieeeseeeneeead 3 1 3 2 Basio Key Operations iriiria i irate a o aaia a a da 3 4 3 3 Setting the Date And Time a e a e a aaa ao a paoa PE E Ea AARAA ROT ne Naia kataia Roi aas 3 11 3 4 Setting the Brightness of the Display and the Backlight Saver Function eee 3 13 3 5 Initializing the Setup Data and Clearing the Internal Memory ccceeeceeetteeteeeeeeeteees 3 14 3 6 Changing the Displayed Language 3 7 Changing the Time ZONE ikna ra a a a aaa a AE Ea aa aaisa 3 8 Inserting and Ejecting the External Storage Medium ssesessseesesseererisrrssirsrrssrrerrsns 3 17 Chapter 4 Control Function Related Setup Operations 4 1 Control
494. rt data file is created on the external storage medium A file is created for each type of report such as daily and monthly The data is appended to this file every time of report The report file is divided at the following times The data is saved in ASCII format For hourly reports When the report at 0 hour every day is created When the number of data points in a single file reaches 25 For daily reports When the report on the 1st day of every month is created When the number of data points in a single file reaches 32 Other Types of Data That Can Be Stored The following two types of data can be stored on the external storage medium Setup data The setup data can be saved to the external storage medium The saved data can be loaded to change the CX1000 settings Image data of the display screen The image data of the display screen can be stored to the external storage medium in PNG format IM 04L31A01 03E 1 89 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 17 Data Storage Function File Name The file name Sampling month day hour minute of the first data extension of display data event data manual sample data TLOG data and report data is automatically assigned Display data file Mddhhmma CDS Event data file Mddhhmma CEV Manual sample data file Mddhhmma DMN TLOG data file Mddhhmma DTG Hourly data file Mddhhmma DHR Daily data file Mddhhmma DDR e Weekly data file Mddhhmma DWR Monthly da
495. running RUN or operation stopped STP SP Target setpoint OUT Control output Operation Status Switching Control Mode MODE REM LOC RUN STP SP OUT Dsp Opr Dsp Opr Dsp Opr Dsp Opr Dsp Opr Single loop Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Cascade Primary Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes No Secondary Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes PV switching Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1 Not displayed on the soft key menu if Remote setting and Program control are set to Off 2 Fixed to auto AUT 3 PRG LOC when Program control is On In addition the following table shows the conditions in which the soft key menu for switching setting appears but operation is not possible Switching Setting Operation Condition in Which Operation Is Not Possible Corrective Action Switching to CAS using MODE MODE When A D error burnout error or Computation Error occurs at the PV input or remote input of cascade control the primary side Resolve the cause of error on Resolve the cause of error on on the primary loop Switching to REM using MODE When A D error burnout error or Computation Error REM LOC the remote input Resolve the cause of error on Resolve th
496. s If a power failure occurs while the report function is in progress the operation after the power recovers is as follows The report function resumes when the power recovers The exact operation will vary depending on whether the power is restored before or after the scheduled time to create a report Time of Recovery Port Operation After the time to create the report Report data is created immediately after power is restored The measured computed data up to the time of the power disruption is used For the next scheduled report data after the power recovery are used Before the time to create the report After power is restored report data are created at the time of the next normally scheduled report The measured computed data excluding the power disruption period is used Handling of Abnormal Data Handling of the measured computed data containing abnormal values is as follows Type of Abnormal Data Report Data Average Value Maximum Minimum value Sum Positive over Not used Used Not used Negative over Not used Used Not used Error Not used Not used Not used Over range for measurement channels or computation overflow for computation channels Displaying the Report Display You can display the report by selecting INFORMATION gt MEMORY SUMMARY on the display selection menu in operation mode Status Display If the data of a measurement or a computation channel enters any of the con
497. s 6 Report E Mail settings Next 1 2 lt 1 Web gt Parameter Initial Value Web gt Use Not Not lt 2 Basic E Mail Settings gt Parameter Initial Value Basic E Mail settings gt SMTP server name Basic E Mail settings gt Port number Basic E Mail settings gt Recipient 1 Basic E Mail settings gt Recipient 2 Basic E Mail settings gt Sender 25 IM 04L31A01 03E App 27 xipueddy Appendix 6 Initial Values lt 3 Alarm E Mail Settings gt Parameter Initial Value Alarm E Mail settings gt Recipient Off Alarm E Mail settings gt Recipient2 Off Alarm E Mail settings gt Alarm1 to 4 Off Alarm E Mail settings gt Include INST Off Alarm E Mail settings gt Include source URL Off Alarm E Mail settings gt Subject Alarm E Mail settings gt Header1 Alarm E Mail settings gt Header2 lt CX gt Alarm_summary lt 4 Scheduled E Mail Settings gt Parameter Initial Value Scheduled E Mail settings gt Recipient1 Off Scheduled E Mail settings gt Interval 24h Scheduled E Mail settings gt Ref time 00 00 Scheduled E Mail settings gt Recipient2 Off Scheduled E Mail settings gt Interval 24h Scheduled E Mail settings gt Ref time 00 00 Scheduled E Mail settings gt Include INST Off Scheduled E Mail settings gt Include source URL Off Scheduled E Mail settings gt Subject Scheduled E Mail settings gt Header1 Scheduled E Mail settings gt Header2
498. s apply FAIL self diagnosis output gt DIO operation monitoring function gt other alarm output etc For the energized de energized status of the DO set as the destination of the DIO operation monitoring function follow the procedure in section 4 4 Control gt Relay For the hold nonhold status of the DO set as the destination of DIO operation monitoring function follow the procedure in section 4 4 Control gt Relay DI Number Sets the DI number displayed on the CX screen This is not displayed if DO 1 DO 2 or DO 2P was selected for the DIO type Tag and Tag Comment Enter a tag and tag comment of the DIO operation monitoring function using 8 characters or less Operation Status Display Set the color and label used when displaying the DO status on the CX screen You can enter settings for both ON and OFF statuses IM 04L31A01 03E 4 39 suoljeiadoQ dnjas payejay uoun 017U09 eS 4 17 DI DO Label Settings Style Number S3 or Later This section explains the control function s DI DO label setting procedure Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt 7 soft key select Detailed setting DIO monitor and operation etc 8 soft key when program control is ON gt 4 soft key DI DO label setting The following display appears DI DO label setting Hodule CTRL1 DI Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow ke
499. s local mode When set to Reset The operation enters reset mode operation stop When set to Continuous or Hold The operation enters reset mode operation stop When advance is executed at the repeat end segment Repeat operation is started When advance is executed at a segment other than those described above The program advances to the next segment regardless of the segment switching settings When advance is executed when the program operation is on hold The hold mode is cleared and the program operates according to the segment conditions described above Program pattern end signal When program control terminates normally excluding forced termination the termination can be notified using contact output also through communication function The contact output is turn ON for 5 s after normal termination IM 04L31A01 03E 1 53 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 12 Tuning Selecting Tuning Parameters Up to 21 tuning parameters can be shown on the tuning display The parameters are initially assigned as shown below The name of the tuning parameters such as SP can be changed using up to 6 characters In addition to the tuning parameters below DR control direction and H relay hysteresis are available SP target setpoint D derivative time BS1 measured value 1 input bias A1 alarm 1 setpoint OH High limit of the output limiter FL1 measured value 1 input filter A2 alarm 2 setpoint OL Low
500. s saved at 0 hour on July 20th and then every day after and at 0 hour every day the same time for both in this example 7 19 13 10 7 20 0 00 7 21 0 00 7 22 0 00 Memory start Saved to the external storage medium Example 3 Auto save interval or data length 12 hours Date and time when data is saved to the external storage medium 0 hour every day After starting at 13 10 on July 19th data is saved at 0 hour on July 20th and then every 12 hours after and at 0 hour every day 0 hour occurs at the same time as the 12 hour timing FAQ 13 10 7 20 0 00 s a 7 21 0 00 12 00 7 22 0 00 a I I I Memory start Saved to the external storage medium Example 4 Auto save interval or data length 2 days Date and time when data is saved to the external storage medium 0 hour every day After starting at 13 10 on July 19th data is saved at 0 hour on July 20th and then every 2 days after and at 0 hour every day the 2 day timing occurs at the same time as 0 hour 7 19 13 10 7 20 0 00 7 21 0 00 7 22 0 00 Memory start Saved to the external storage medium 1 88 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 17 Data Storage Function Trigger wai Event data During the free mode The event data in the internal memory is closed as a single file at the specified interval data length or at the specified date and time and saved to the external storage medium in binary format During trigger or rotate mode After acquiring the dat
501. s yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Repeat action setting Pattern number Displays the pattern number selected in the pattern initial settings Repeat action Select the repeat function from Off On Repeat Repeat frequency Set the number of repetitions when the repeat function is turned ON in the range of 1 to 999 Repeat start segment Repeat end segment Set the repeat start segment number and the repeat end segment number when the repeat function is turned ON or when repeating in the range of 1 to 99 However the selectable range for the maximum value is the value specified for 1 Pattern initial setting gt Segments Set repeat start segment lt repeat end segment IM 04L31A01 03E 5 11 suoljeiad C dnjas payejay jo1j U0D weibolg E 5 9 Event Output Settings This section explains the setting procedure for event output during program control and program pattern end signaling Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt 7 soft key select Program control parameters gt 2 soft key select Event output setting The following display appears Hao 52 2007 14 03 46 eax OF gt t Event output Pattern number Event kind TimeEvent EV 1 on Dogg Energ EV S off EV 2 0n DO B2 Energ EVIB OFF EV 3 0n DO B3 Energ EV11 off EW qfo
502. save the screen image data to the external storage medium 1 In operation mode press the FUNC key A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the Snapshot soft key The position where the Snapshot soft key appears varies depending on the setting If the Snapshot soft key does not appear when you press the FUNC key press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the next soft key menu page Hath Hath a a nap START reset shot 4 89 ext 2 3 Note This operation can be assigned to the USER key If it is screen image data can be saved simply by pressing a single key When using the steps above only the screen image of the operation display is possible However when using the USER key screen images of setting displays can also be saved For the procedure in assigning a function to the USER key see section 11 1 USER Key Assignment and Operation Saving the Screen Image Data File Format The file is in PNG format File name The file name month day hour minute when the save operation of the screen image data was executed sequence number png is automatically assigned to the screen image data files Mddhhmma PNG M Month 1 9 X October Y November Z December dd day hh hour mm minute a the lowest digit of the year 0 to 9 except if the screen image data is saved multiple times within a minute in which case a to z are assigned in order from the second fi
503. se high amp low limits see Cee Process Alarm setpoint lt p Py value setpoint Hysteresis Hysteresis PV low limit Close Open SP high limit L ry Alarm PV Setpoint Alarm setpoint setpoint Hysteresis z ee Hysteresis Deviation Open Close SP low limi high imit TRA a PV Deviation A P SP setpoint Alarm setpoint Setpoint hysteresis Hysteresis P Close Open Deviation TORTEN i low limit Deviation x Output high limit I setpoint P PV Output value Alarm 3 setpoint Hysteresis Hysteresis lt gt lt gt Hysteresis eke Close Open Clos Deviation i i high amp low Deviation PV Output low limit L limit setpoint gt Alarm Output value SP setpoint Note If the setup conditions of PV events are not specified using the same conditions also in the next segment they are reset at the time the operation of the specified program segment ends With cascade control you can set PV events to the primary loop and secondary loop Switching the Program Pattern Using Contact Inputs Contact input is applied at DI001 DI006 of the control output terminal block Before version 3 02 The program pattern is changed using contact inputs of binary representation Version 3 20 and later In addition to the binary representation the program pattern can be changed using contact inputs of binary coded decimal BCD representation You can select Whether to use Binary or BCD The default setting is Binary
504. se settings are possible only when Zone PID under Control gt 1 Control action is set to On Loop number The setup items of zone PID method are set for each loop When changing these parameters this setting is used to select the target loop number 1 or 2 initial value is 1 Reference point Set the reference points for the zone PID method The number of reference points that can be specified is PID group number 2 Reference points can only be specified when PID number is set to 3 or higher For a description on the settings of the number of PID groups see section 4 1 Control gt Control action The selectable range of reference point values is shown using EU 0 0 to 100 0 of the measurement span in a pop up window Reference points set up to 100 are valid Set the reference points so that 1 lt 2 lt 3 lt 4 lt 5 lt 6 Switching hysteresis Set the hysteresis used for switching zones at the reference points and deviation in the range of EUS 0 0 to 10 0 of the measurement span initial value is 0 5 Can be specified when the PID number is set to 3 or greater Can be specified when the PID number is set to 2 or greater Reference deviation Set this value to On initial value is Off when selecting the PID value according to the deviation from the SP program setpoint When set to On set the deviation in the range of 1 digit to EUS 100 0 of the measurement span Can be s
505. sed on the product and in this manual Handle with care To avoid injury death of personnel or damage to the instrument the operator must refer to the explanation in the manual L Functional ground terminal Do not use this terminal as a protective ground terminal Protective grounding terminal SY Alternating current Sara Direct current For the protection and safe use of the product and the system controlled by it be sure to follow the instructions and precautions on safety that are stated in this manual whenever you handle the product Take special note that if you handle the product in a manner that violate these instructions the protection functionality of the product may be damaged or impaired In such cases YOKOGAWA does not guarantee the quality performance function and safety of the product When installing protection and or safety circuits such as lightning protection devices and equipment for the product and control system or designing or installing separate protection and or safety circuits for fool proof design and fail safe design of the processes and lines that use the product and the control system the user should implement these using additional devices and equipment If you are replacing parts or consumable items of the product make sure to use parts specified by YOKOGAWA This product is not designed or manufactured to be used in critical applications that directly affect or threaten human lives Such a
506. select Display gt 3 soft key select Zone Graph The following display appears lt gt AEE Sh 1716 3 First cH 61 Last CH i Zone Lower 10g Upper 70g Graph Division ita Bar graph Normal Scale position 1 4 5 6 Next 1 3 Setting the number of digits displayed for the scale Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt MENU key switch to Set mode gt 5 soft key select Display gt 4 soft key select View Direction LCD The following display appears Feb 19 2002 20 20 1300001 MEAN View LeD Direction Brightness Trend Horizontal Bargraph Vertical Saver Background Neasure White Control Black Trend line 2 dot Trip line 2 dot Grid 10 div Scroll time 5s Scale digit Normal Horizon Wertical Horizon2 Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change The selections are displayed at the bottom section of the display Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box IM 04L31A01 03E s U9 U09 p
507. seseeseeeeeeee eeen 8 14 Measurement Function gt Changing the Zone Display of the Trend Display 8 16 Measurement Function gt Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position Scale Position of Trend Displays ssssesseeseeeessserrsiriesirtttirntintnsinnntintttunttnunninnnknnttnnnntn nannan 8 17 Measurement Function gt Setting the Partial Expanded Display on the Trend Display 8 21 Measurement Function gt Setting the Display Direction Background Color Waveform Line Width Trip Line Width Grid and Scroll Time c c sccceesceeeseeceeeneeeeeeeeeeseueeeesseeesenaes 8 23 Chapter 9 Data Save Load Operations 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 Acquiring Measurement Data to the Internal Memory and Saving Data to the External Storage Medium 2 008 eee nd ee ee ig chests adie ileal idol 9 1 Saving Measured Computed Data at Arbitrary Times Manual Sample eee 9 7 Saving and Loading Setup Data c cecceeeeeteeeeeceeeeceteeeeeeceeeeseaeeeeeesieeseaeeeeeeesieeseeeenee 9 8 Loading the Stored Display Event Data Historical Trend cscceecceeseeeeeeeseeeeeteeeeeees 9 10 Managing Files and Checking the Free Space on the External Storage Medium 9 11 Saving the Screen Image Data eee eecceececeeeeeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeeeeeaeseeeeeneesiaeeeeeeeaas 9 14 Clearing the Data in the Internal Memory e cee cee eee cece eee seer terete tees tent seetaeeeaeea
508. setting the Computation This section explains how to start stop computation how to reset computation and how to clear the computation data dropout indication Procedure Starting Computation Press the START key When the START key is pressed data acquisition to the internal memory also starts While computation is in progress a computation icon is displayed in the operation status display section GROUP 1 Dem 2 16 py Feb 19 2002 21 05 18 ped fais Starting Only the Computations In operation mode press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu and press the Math START soft key This operation can be assigned to the USER key Stopping the Computations 1 Press the STOP key The following dialog box appears for confirmation what do you want to stop HentHath 2 Select Mem Math and press the DISP ENTER key When the DISP ENTER key is pressed data acquisition to the internal memory also stops Stopping Only the Computations In operation mode press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu and press the Math STOP soft key This operation can be assigned to the USER key Note When the computation is stopped the computed data of the computation channel is held at the value that existed immediately before If data is being acquired to the internal memory the value held is written Resetting the Computations 1 In operation mode press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2 Press the M
509. specified at the time of purchase appear in the list Hysteresis Set each of 4 alarms in the range of measurement span of EUS 0 0 10 0 However for the hysteresis for output high limit OTH or output low limit OTL the output range is set from 0 0 to 10 0 The available setting range appears in the pop up window 4 36 IM 04L31A01 03E 4 16 DIO Operation Monitoring Function Settings Style Number S3 or Later This section explains the setting procedure for the control function s DIO operation monitoring function Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt 7 soft key select Detailed setting DIO monitor and operation etc 8 soft key when program control is ON gt 3 soft key DIO monitor and operation setting The following display appears Sond e e os or and operation setting DIO entry number On i DIO 12 SW number svoo DO number ON posal OFF D0gA2 DI number DIOGI Tag Comment test Istart st Label Color H Red Label Color Lime l A 03 ad Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item box 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 t
510. splay data consists of minimum and maximum values for each sampling interval Event data consists of instantaneous values The number of data bytes per channel is shown in the following table Data Type Measurement Channel Computation Channel Display data 4 bytes channel 8 bytes channel Event data 2 bytes channel 4 bytes channel App 2 IM 04L31A01 03E Appendix 1 Supplementary Explanation of the Acquisition of Display Data Event Data to the Internal Memory Example Data size when acquiring the data of channels 1 to 4 measurement channels and channel 31 computation channel to the internal memory Display data 1st scan CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH3 CH3 CH4 CH4 CH31 CH31 min imax min imax min max min imax min max 2nd scan CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH3 CH3 CH4 CH4 CH31 CH31 min imax min max min max min max min max nth scan CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH3 CH3 CH4 CH4 CH31 CH31 min imax min max min max min max min max p max Maximum value 2 bytes binary data min Minimum value Event data 1st scan CH1 CH2 CH3 H CH31 2nd scan CH1 CH2 CH3 cH CH31 nth scan CH1 CH2 CH3 il CH31 WH 2 bytes binary data Internal Memory Size The size of the internal memory used for data acquisition is 1 2 MB Depending on the type of data to be acquired the internal memory is allocated as follows Data Type Internal Memory Size Display data only 1 2
511. splay data file Saves the maximum and minimum values within the display update rate Combinations of files created Event data file trigger only display data file Display data file only Event data file only Binary format Data per channel Display data Data format Control data Measurement data Computation data Event data Control data Measurement data Computation data 4 bytes data point 4 bytes data point 8 bytes data point 2 bytes data point 2 bytes data point 4 bytes data point 14 8 IM 04L31A01 03E 14 5 Storage Function Sample length Per floppy disk during manual save Display data file only When the number of control loops is 2 the number of measurement CH is 6 the number of computation CH is 8 and display update rate is 30 min div data save interval is 60 s Number of data points per CH 1 2000 000 bytes 2 x 4 bytes 6 x 4 bytes 8 x 8 bytes 12 500 data points Maximum number of data points is 100 000 Sampling length per file 12 500 x 60 s 750 000 s Approx 9 days Event data file only When the number of control loops is 2 the number of measurement CH is 6 the number of computation CH is 8 and display update rate is 1 s Number of data points per CH 1 2000 000 bytes 2 x 2 bytes 6 x 2 bytes 8 x 4 bytes 25 000 data points Maximum number of data points is 120 000 Sampling length per file 25 000 x 1 s 25 000 s Approx 7 hours
512. splay range Contact input Closed contact is ON 1 Open contact is OFF 0 Voltage input Less than 2 4 V is OFF 0 Greater than or equal to 2 4 V is ON 1 Sqrt Calculates the square root of the input signal and displays the result as the measured value of the channel The computed result can also be scaled to a value in the appropriate unit and displayed The input type is DC voltage only Skip Disables the channel Characters displayed as selections in the Mode box of the setting display Itis used when setting the measurement channels 1 58 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 14 Measurement Function gt Measurement Input Related Settings Note __ For current inputs a shunt resistor is attached to the input terminal to convert the signal to voltage input The following table shows the available shunt resistors For example a 250 Q shunt resistor is used to convert the signal to 1 to 5 V for 4 20 mA input Name Model Resistance Shunt resistor 4159 20 250 Q 0 1 for screw terminals 4159 21 100 Q 0 1 4159 22 10 Q 0 1 The square root computation method of the CX1000 is indicated below Vx Vmin Fmin Vmax min Fx F max F min Meanings of the symbols are shown below Vmin span lower limit Vmax span upper limit Fmin scale lower limit after conversion Fmax scale upper limit after conversion Vx input voltage Fx scaling value If the value inside the root is negative the computed result is
513. splaying the Historical Trend of the Display Data Using up and down arrow keys you can have the left half of the display lower half if the trend display is vertical show the historical data of the display data and the right half upper half if the trend display is vertical show the display data currently being measured Historical trend Display data only Current trend Current trend information 1 82 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 16 Display Function Control Operation Display gt Alarm Display The measurement alarm status is indicated using an alarm icon on the status display section common with the control alarm and the alarm indication on operation displays such as the trend display The displayed pattern varies depending on the non hold hold mode of the alarm indication In the explanation below Alarm ACK refers to the alarm release operation Alarm Icon in the Status Display Section A BES 03 ED Alarm icon When indication is When indication is set to non hold set to hold Alarm ACK Alarm ACK Occurrence Alarm Release t i Blinking Blinking Blinking red green red None Red None None l indication lindication None None indication Red None Alarm icon Alarm Indication on the Trend Display Alarm type INT O1 PU Measured value 29 3 maa Alarm mark When indication is When indication is set to n
514. ss the DISP ENTER key to start the automatic switching of the groups To disable automatic switching select AUTO SCROLL OFF at step 3 and press the DISP ENTER key 8 6 IM 04L31A01 03E 8 4 Measurement Function gt Operations When Displaying Trend Digital and Bar Graph Displays All Channel Display on the Trend Display 1 Press the DISP ENTER key to show the display selection menu TREND is highlighted 2 Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu 3 Select ALL CHANNEL using the up and down arrow keys To set the display back to group display select GROUP CHANNEL in this step Aw TREND p GRO ZRS DIGITAL gt 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to switch to the all channel display Turning ON OFF the Scale and Numerical Display on Trend Displays 1 Press the DISP ENTER key to show the display selection menu TREND is highlighted 2 Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu 3 Select SCALE ON DIGITAL OFF and so on using the up and down arrow keys fw TREND p GROUP 1 E55 DIGITAL gt DIGITAL OFF AUTO SCROLL ON IM 04L31A01 03E 8 7 s U9 U09 peAe dsiq y BuiBueysy 104 suoneado fe 8 5 Measurement Function gt Operations When Displaying the Overview This section explains the operations that you can perform when displaying the overview Overview cannot be selected on 0 measurement channel models without the calculation option installed Procedure Turning OFF the Cursor 1 Press
515. start initial value Ramp prioritized PV1 start Time prioritized PV start Ramp prioritized PV2 start Starting Target Setpoint Start The starting SP is the SP at the start of the program operation When set to starting SP start the SP is changed from the starting SP to the final SP In this case the change follows the ramp rate defined by final SP starting SP segment time regardless of the PV When segment time ramp rate assignment method is selected the change follows the specified ramp rate i i TSPn Final SP PV SEG SEG2 SSPn Starting SP i TSP2 oe Program pattern for rr ee the 2nd loop SSP2 i Program pattern for the ist loop gt Time Segment time Ramp prioritized PV Start In ramp prioritized PV start the program operation is started by specifying one of the process values PV1 or PV2 of loops 1 and 2 The patterns of other unspecified patterns start according to the PV start pattern of the specified loop The start point varies depending on the comparison between the starting PV of the specified loop and the SP specified by the program pattern The section of the program pattern that is compared is from the starting SP to the first soak point or the first ramp down start point when the start segment is ramp up The start point is the point at which the starting PV value and the setpoint on the program pattern match If this matching point is not found the start point is the end point o
516. stence of the external storage medium appears in the status display section of the display Icon indicating that the operation cover is open External storage medium icon opr E 5 FRR Note Keep the operation cover closed at all times during operation except when inserting or ejecting the external storage medium The operation cover protects the external storage medium and the drive from foreign particles such as dust IM 04L31A01 03E suoljeiodQ UOWWOZ pue s pon Aejdsiq syed jo soweN e 3 8 Inserting and Ejecting the External Storage Medium Ejecting the External Storage Medium Zip disks cannot be removed when the CX1000 is turned OFF Floppy disks and ATA flash memory cards can be removed from the drive regardless of whether the CX1000 is turned ON or OFF 1 If the CX1000 is turned ON check that the external storage medium is not being accessed Note The access lamp illuminates while the external storage medium is being accessed If the data in the internal memory is being saved to the external storage medium the message Data are being saved to the medium appears 2 Open the front cover by pressing down on the knob that is located in the center of the upper section of the cover and pulling it forward 3 Press the eject button and remove the external storage medium 4 Close the operation cover If the CX1000 is turned ON the external storage medium icon in the status display section disappears
517. t 50 60 Hz for one minute Between the voltage pulse output terminal and earth 500 VAC at 50 60 Hz for one minute Between the transistor contact output and earth 500 VDC for one minute Grounding resistance 100 Qor less Standard Performance Measurement accuracy The following specifications apply to operation of the CX1000 under standard operation conditions Temperature 23 2 C Humidity 55 10 RH Supply voltage 90 to 132 or 180 to 250 VAC Power frequency 50 60 Hz 1 Warm up time At least 30 minutes Other ambient conditions such as vibration should not adversely affect the operation of the CX1000 Input Type Max Resolution of Digital Display Measurement Accuracy Digital Display 0 1 of rdg 2digits 0 1 of rdg 3digits 0 15 of rdg 1 C Except R S 0 to 100 C 3 7 C 100 0 to 300 C 1 5B 400 to 600 C 2 C Accuracy at less than 400 C is not warranted 0 15 of rdg 0 7 C Except 0 15 of rdg 1 C at 200 to 100 C D TC 0 15 of rdg 0 5 C Excluding the reference 0 15 of rdg 0 5 C Except 0 15 of rdg 0 7 C at 200 to 100 C junction 0 15 of rdg 0 7 C compensation 0 15 of rdg 1 C accuracy cio S Z Aicl m x vojo 0 15 of rdg 0 5 C Except 0 15 of rdg 0 7 C at 200 to 100 C PLATINEL 0 25 of rdg 2 3 C PR40 20 0 to 450
518. t IR Feb 19 23 06 38 Feb 19 23 05 39 Alarm status indication mark Select a alarm using the cursor and select INFORMATION gt JUMP TO HISTORY on the display selection menu to display the data historical trend containing the selected alarm information Note You can also display only the control alarms see page 8 1 Alarm type indicates ETC if the alarm is an external loop and the alarm is of a type other than the control alarms that you can specify on the CX1000 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 79 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 16 Display Function Control Operation Display gt Message Summary A list of written messages and the time the messages were written is displayed Upto 120 sets of message information can be stored to the internal memory When the number of message information exceeds 120 the information is overwritten from the oldest information By scrolling the screen using up and down arrow keys the message information in the internal memory can be displayed By selecting a message from the list using up and down arrow keys the historical trend of the display data or event data containing the message can be recalled Fora description on the historical trend display see Control Operation Display gt Historical Trend in this section Number of the message displayed on the bottom line Number of messages in the internal memory Date time when message as written Name of the user who wrote the message
519. t be completed within the scan interval Press FUNC gt Math ACK soft key to set the icon back to a white computation icon If computation dropouts occur increase the scan interval or reduce the number of computation channels that are turned on 9 Key lock icon Key icon Key locked No indication No key lock 10 E mail transmission function icon Displayed when the e mail transmission function see the CX1000 CX2000 Communication Interface User s Manual is enabled 11 Alarm icon Displayed when any one of the alarms is occurring Data Display Section The control operation display shows the PV input values SPs and OUT for monitoring the control status tuning information and so on The measurement operation display shows the trend display digital display and bar graph display of the measured and computed data as well as alarm message and file information For details on the displayed contents see the following pages 1 70 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 16 Display Function Setting Groups The control monitoring data and measured computed data on the operation display are shown in groups Therefore control loops and measurement channels must be assigned to groups Setting Control Groups for the Control Function Up to four loops by combining internal and external loops can be assigned to each group In addition to internal and external loops measurement channels can also be assigned You can assign up to four groups an
520. t data only If the CX1000 is in a mode in which data acquisition to the internal memory starts at the same time as the start of measurement the relay is energized when the remaining amount of time for acquiring the event data falls to the specified time If the CX1000 is in a mode in which the data acquisition to the internal memory is started using a trigger such as an alarm occurrence the relay is not energized no memory end output The following figure shows the operation of the memory end output relay energized on memory end NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC During normal operation When memory end occurs When power is turned OFF IM 04L31A01 03E 1 99 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 20 Other Functions Measurement Remote Input A6R option or A4FR option The actions shown in the table can be assigned to the contact signal or open collector signal that is input to the 8 remote input terminals REMOTE of the measurement alarm option terminal block Name of Action Detection Method Action Start Stop Edge Starts stops data acquisition to the internal memory Trigger Trigger Trigger used to start acquiring event data to the internal memory valid only when event data is specified to be acquired to the internal memory and the trigger used to start the acquisition is set to external trigger Alarm ACK Trigger Clears alarm display relay output valid only when the operation of the alarm display or output relay is set
521. t position Unit Standard signal burnout PV input computation Auxiliary input computation Input Section Specifications Detection ON OFF switchable on each channel Burnout up scale down scale switchable Select from 20 ms 50 Hz 16 7 ms 60 Hz 100 ms 50 60 Hz and AUTO automatically switches between 20 ms and 16 7 ms from the power supply frequency Up to 5 inputs depends on the model and control mode 250 500 1000 ms synchronized with the control period 1000 ms when the A D integral time is set to 100 ms DCV DC voltage TC thermocouple RTD resistance temperature detector DCA DC current by adding an external shunt resistor Input ranges capable of scaling TC RTD DCA 30000 to 30000 and the span within 30000 Can be set arbitrarily Can be set arbitrarily using up to 6 characters For control input burnout detection is possible not only on thermocouples but also standard signals Input processing square root computation low cut 0 0 to 5 0 ten segment linearizer approximation ten segment linearizer bias bias addition in the measurement span of 100 0 to 100 0 first order lag computation time constant from 1 to 120 s off Input processing square root computation low cut 0 0 to 5 0 bias addition in the measurement span of 100 0 to 100 0 ratio computation 0 0001 to 30000 first order lag computation time constant from 1 to 120 s off Input Range and
522. ta are being saved to media 504 File is being loaded from media 505 Formatting 506 Memory save to media was interrupted 507 Exchange media to continue the saving operation 508 There is no file or directory 510 Range cannot be changed during sampling or calculating 511 MATH expression cannot changed during sampling calculating or controlling 512 Because memory save is manual mode FTP is not available 520 Connecting to the line 521 The data file is being transferred 530 Setting data cannot be saved during output of setting data 551 FTP test is being executed 560 Range cannot be changed during sampling calculating or controlling 561 The Output calibration value is being writing 562 Control function cannot be changed during sampling calculating or controlling 563 Hysteresis cannot be changed during sampling calculating or controlling 564 Program patameter cannot be changed during FE4 executing 565 Grayed Items cannot be changed during program pattern operation 566 The specified data cannot be loaded during FE4 executing 567 When segment or setting method is changed data in the setting is initialized 568 The specified data cannot be loaded during program operation Warning Messages Code Message Reference 600 Measured data and Settings have been initialized 601 Measured data have been initialized 12 8 IM 04L31A01 03E 12 1 Messages Code Message Refer
523. ta file Mddhhmma DMR M Month 1 9 X October Y November Z December dd day hh hour mm minute a the lowest digit of the year 0 to 9 except if another file with the same month day hour and minute exist in which case a to z are assigned in order Setup data Set the name using up to 8 characters through the save operation A pcl extension is automatically added when the data is saved Screen image data The file name month day hour minute when the save operation of the screen image data was executed sequence number png is automatically assigned Mddhhmma PNG M Month 1 9 X October Y November Z December dd day hh hour mm minute a the lowest digit of the year 0 to 9 except if the screen image data is saved multiple times within a minute in which case a to z are assigned in order from the second file Save Destination Directory All the data excluding the setup data display data event data manual sample data TLOG data report data only on models with the computation function option and screen image data are saved to the specified directory The setup data is saved to the root directory The save destination directory varies depending on how the data is saved Auto save Directory specified here Manual save Directory with a sequence number added to the string specified here Save on the setting display Directory with A sequence number added to the st
524. ta length from 5 25 50 75 95 and 100 If you do not wish to acquire the data existing before the trigger condition is met select 0 Trigger Set the trigger condition used to acquire the event data Key Select On if you wish to activate the trigger using key operation External Select On if you are applying the trigger signal through remote input Alarm Select On if you wish to use alarm occurrences as triggers Setting Memory and Trend Setting the Channels for Saving Data Meas Math Loop CH Select the type of target channels from Meas CH Math CH Int CH PV input of internal control loops Ext CH PV input of external control loops First CH Last CH Set the range of channels to turn On Off depending on the type of target channels Meas CH 01 to 06 Math CH 31 to 42 selectable only on models with the computation function option M1 Int CH 101 to 106 Ext CH 201 to 212 Off On To save the data on the selected channels select On otherwise select Off 9 4 IM 04L31A01 03E 9 1 Acquiring Measurement Data to the Internal Memory and Saving Data to the External Storage Medium Setting Memory Timeup When saving the data to the external storage medium in Auto mode set the time for saving the data when specifying the time using date and time Timeup type Select the time when data is to be saved from the following Select Off if you are not using this function
525. table range of values and the decimal place are as follows Selectable range of values 9999999 to 99999999 Selectable decimal places X XXXX XX XXX XXX XX XXXX X Unit Enter the unit of the computed result using up to 6 alphanumeric characters Constant Set the constants KO1 to K12 that are used in the equations The number of significant digits is 5 excluding the decimal point When specifying the constant using exponential notation the mantissa is less than or equal to 5 digits and the exponent less than or equal to 2 digits The selectable range is as follows 9 9999E 29 to 1 0000E 30 0 1 0000E 30 to 9 9999E 29 Note If the Math On Off calculation expression or span setting is changed the alarms for that channel are turned Off Setting Tags of Computation Channels First CH Last CH You can assign channel numbers 31 to 42 as computation channels The range of numbers here is used to set the range of channels for setting the tag The target channels also apply to Alarm delay TLOG and Rolling average settings Tag Enter the tag name using up to 16 alphanumeric characters Note For the procedure in displaying tags in place of channel numbers see section 8 3 Measurement Function gt Settings Related to Tag Display for Channels IM 04L31A01 03E 10 3 uondo uonsuny UOHey NdWOD y YUM Sapo UO AjUC suoneiodo pajejoy unsung wodey pue uonejndwog 10 2 Starting Stopping and Re
526. tag name Update Rate of the Numerical Display Measured computed values are updated every second every 2 s if the scan interval is set to 2s Control Measurement Common Operation Display gt Alarm Summary Lists the newest control alarms and measurement alarms By scrolling the display using the arrow keys up to 120 incidents can be displayed By selecting an alarm from the list using up and down arrow keys the historical trend of the display data or event data containing the alarm can be recalled For a description on the historical trend display see the section Measurement Operation Display gt Historical Trend Number of the alarm information displayed on the bottom line Number of the alarm information in the internal memory 120 max Control loop name tag name tag comment channel number or tag name Alarm number 1 2 3 4 Alarm type See page 4 24 for the meaning of control alarm symbols See page 7 8 for the meaning of measurement alarm symbols Control alarm PVH PVL SPH SPL OTH OTL DVH DVL DVO DVI ETC see Note below Measurement alarm H L h I R r T t Date and time when Date and time when the alarm occurred the alarm was released Alarm selection p 1R Feb 19 23 06 15 5 eat IR Feb 19 23 06 12 Feb 19 23 06 14 cursor eal IR Feb 19 23 06 05 Feb 19 23 06 11 eat IR Feb 19 23 05 58 Feb 19 23 05 01 eat IR Feb 19 23 05 45 Feb 19 23 05 46 eat IR Feb 19 23 05 41 Feb 19 23 05 43 ea
527. tart the Operation When A D error or burnout error occurs at the input Resolve the cause of the error Error messages for the operations above When auto tuning is in progress Auto tuning is activated already Others Auto tuning cannot be activated IM 04L31A01 03E 6 11 uoneado 01 U05 Bulinp suonesodo fo 6 4 Operations on the Program Selection Display and Program Control Display Only on Models with the Program Control Option This section explains the operations that you can perform on the program control display on models with the program control option The program control display enables you to control programs such as run reset hold and switch the pattern number as well as monitor the control status Procedure Displaying the Program Selection Display On the control group display or control overview display select CONTROL gt PROGRAM from the screen selection menu see page 6 7 Displayed Information and Operations on the Program Selection Display Display of time per division Set mode gt 3 Trend Save interval gt Time div gt Time div setting Program us alu name oaia Tag Tag comment display isplay Repeat frequency Target SP display of the Preset selected segment Maren Unit display of the target SP of the selected segment Segment range to be repeated PATTERN NO REPEAT j Start segment number display SEGMENT NO START SEG SEGMENT TINE DELAY
528. tching of operation displays prohibited 1 96 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 20 Other Functions Key Login Logout You can set the CX1000 so that only certain users can operate the instrument User name user ID and password are used to identify a user Up to 7 users can be registered Log Display A list of phenomena that occurred can be displayed in the order of occurrence for the following types The newest 200 incidents are stored for communication commands the newest 50 incidents are stored for other items Error Message Log 002 002 Time No Message Jan 31 2001 87 23 33 218 Media has not been inser Jan 31 20681 67 23 23 681 Measured data have been t t Error code Error message Date time when the error occurred Key Login Logout Log Number of the log displayed on the bottom line total number of logs l 003 003 Time I O No User Name Jan 31 2001 07 13 15 In l userl Jan 31 2001 87 12 58 Out Jan 31 2081 07 12 46 In al userl l User name In Key login Out Logout Date time of key login logout Communication Command Log Connection status indication of the Ethernet interface Number of the log displayed on Illuminated green Connected electrically the bottom line total number of logs Not illuminated Not connected electrically 882 002 Time ID 1 0 Hessage Link Of Jan 31 2001 07 23 33 1 lt Logout Jan 31 2001 07 23 23 1 gt C Message up to 20 characters Input output signal gt i
529. ter setting gt Event setting This section explains the procedures for setting the events during program control Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Setting mode Control gt 7 soft key select Program control parameters gt 1 soft key select Program parameter setting gt 5 soft key select Event setting The following display appears Pattern 1 _ Apr 07 2002 11 06 15 eas ewag Event setting Pattern number 1 Segment No On time Off time 1font 00 10 00 00 25 00 Event kind 2 0n2 00 30 00 TimeEvent 3 0n3 01 00 00 Event No dott 1 8 5 0ff 6 OFF off afoff Input Pattern Move to the event setting display Increment Decrement the segment number Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Event Basic Setting Pattern number Displays the pattern number selected in the pattern initial setting Segment No Set th
530. tern initial settings Starting target setpoint Set the start SP a starting condition in the range of EU 0 0 to 100 0 initial value is 0 of the measurement span The values can be copied and pasted using soft keys Only the loops that are set as follows are displayed Control gt 1 Control action Input setting gt Control mode to a mode other than Off and Program control to On and Setting mode Control gt 7 Program control parameters gt 1 Program parameter setting gt Pattern initial setting gt Action loop to On During cascade control even numbered loops within the same terminal block are not displayed Start code Select the operation start condition from the following Starting target setpoint start ST SP ramp prioritized PV1 start RampPV1 time prioritized ramp start TimePV not displayed for segment time ramp setting method and ramp prioritized PV2 start RampPV2 IM 04L31A01 03E 5 5 suo 1 do dnjas payejay 01u09 wesbolg E 5 5 Program parameter setting gt Program pattern setting This section explains the procedures for setting the start conditions and other items during program control Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Setting mode Control gt 7 soft key select Program control parameters gt 1 soft key select Program parameter setting gt 4 soft key select Program
531. than p PROGRA the control group display J ZRS DIGITAL gt L GROUPI Wl ear gt OUP2 Switch to a control group T F 5 display of another group OVERVIEW J INFOR p e 2 TION gt Switch the display style ha Um a Switch to the tuning display 3 Select the desired item using the up and down arrow keys 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to show the selected display Switching the display group and display style using arrow keys You can also switch the display through the following procedure with the control group display showing The display group or display style switches when the arrow key is pressed Switching the display group Press the left or right arrow key for more than 1 s right arrow key 12 gt 4 1 left arrow key in reverse order Switching the display style Press the up or down arrow key for more than 1 s down arrow key controller faceplate hybrid controller up arrow in reverse order Run Stop Operation For cascade control the following operations can be performed only when the secondary loop is selected 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired control loop Curosor 3 IM 04L31A01 03E 6 1 uonesedg 01 U05 Bulunp suonesodo fo 6 1 Operations on the Control Group Display Switching Displayed Information and Control Operation Modes 2 Press the RUN STP soft key A pop up window for running and stopping the operation appears IN
532. the power line If an inductive load is used in the alarm output line insert a serge suppressor in the line Are taking measures against noise Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer IM 04L31A01 03E 12 11 BunooyseqnoiL R 12 2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart When the Control Output Is Generated When checking the control output set the preset output first see section 4 9 Then use single loop control with the operation stopped Is the control output type set correctly Select the correct output type See section 4 5 Is the current output range during current output or cycle time for time ratio setting appropriate Set the current output range or cycle time to an appropriate value See section 4 5 You must wait for the specified cycle time to elapse before checking e Wire correctly e Firmly fasten the terminal screws Is the wiring correct See section 2 3 Check the output load condition and set the load correctly See section 14 8 Is the output load appropriate Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer 12 12 IM 04L31A01 03E 12 2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart Measurement Related Problems In the following cases The reading error is large The trend or digital value fluctuates The trend is off the scale on either the 0 or 100 side NO Change the input to meet the specifications See section 14 1
533. the CX1000 CX2000 Communication Interface User s Manual AT Execute auto tuning SP NO Switch the SP number Group NO Switch the PID number of the tuning parameter to be manipulated Dleplay 9perion AT SP NO GROUP NO Control mode Dsp Opr Dsp Opr Dsp Opr Single loop Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Cascade Primary Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Secondary Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes PV switching Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Not displayed in the soft key menu if Control gt 1 Control action Input setting gt Auto tuning is set to OFF IM 04L31A01 03E 6 3 Tuning Operation In addition there are conditions in which certain soft keys appear but their operation is not possible The table below shows the conditions and corrective action specific to the tuning display For the conditions and corrective actions that are common with the control display see Display and Operation on the Control Display and Control Mode on page 6 6 Condition in Which Operation Is Not Possible Corrective Action When auto tuning is already in progress Abort the auto tuning operation in progress Mode other than auto operation mode and loop other than Switch the auto operation mode the primary loop of cascade control Primary loop of cascade control and the secondary loop Switch to cascade mode are not set to cascade mode Operation stopped S
534. the display group Appears when switching to trend or bar graph from overview See section 8 5 IM 04L31A01 03E 12 3 BunooyseqnoiL R 12 1 Messages Errors Related to E mail and Web Server Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 260 IP address is not set or ethernet function is not available The IP address is not specified Check the IP address 261 SMTP server is not found Occurs when the SMTP server is specified by name Check the DNS setting Check the SMTP server name 262 Cannot initiate E mail transmission The host name of the DAQSTATION is not correct Check the host name The port number of the SMTP server is not correct Check the port number 263 Sender s address rejected by the server Check the sender s address 264 Some recipients addresses are invalid Check the recipient s address 265 SMTP protocol error May occur if a network failure cable problems duplicate addresses network device failure and so on occurs in the middle of the e mail transmission 266 Ethernet cable is not connected Check the cable connection 267 Could not connect to SMTP server e Check to see that the SMTP server is connected to the network Ifthe SMTP server name is specified using an IP address check to see that the IP address is correct 268 E mail transmission request failed Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer 269 E mail transfer e
535. the first item box Saving the Settings 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed IM 04L31A01 03E 4 15 suoljeiado dnjas payejay uoljOUNY 07u09 D 4 6 Conirol gt Relay Setting Relay Related Parameters Set the parameters for each contact output terminal DO001 to DO006 of the control ouput terminal block For a description of the terminal arrangement see page 2 6 FAIL This is the setting for the function that outputs a relay contact signal FAIL signal when a failure is detected in the CX1000 CPU When set to On initial setting is Off DO001 of control output terminal block 1 is automatically assigned to de_energize Nonhold Note For the option terminal block with the FAIL output terminal A4F or A4FR option the FAIL signal is output from the FAIL output terminal of the option terminal block Self diagnosis This is the setting for the function that outputs a relay contact signal when an input burnout A D converter failure or reference junction compensation failure occurs When set to On initial setting is Off DO002 of control output terminal block 1 is automatically assigned to de_energize Nonhold Relay Action Behavior Select the relay action type of each contact output from the following De_
536. the function that outputs a relay contact signal when a failure is detected in the CX1000 CPU When FAIL output is turned ON DO001 of the control output terminal block is automatically assigned to de energized hon hold Fault Diagnosis Output This is the setting for the function that outputs a relay contact signal when an input burnout A D converter failure or reference junction compensation failure occurs When fault diagnosis output is turned ON DO002 of the control output terminal block is automatically assigned to de energized hon hold Event Output On models with the program control option PV events and time events can be assigned to contact outputs You can select the output terminal for PV events and time events from DO001 to DOOOE Note You can specify the internal switches SW01 SW18 as the event output destination style number S3 or later Registering the Contents of Contact Output Style Number S3 or Later In the same manner as with contact input you can register actions for contact output and internal switches The actions that can be registered are the same as the actions for the contact input excluding the 0 3 bit target setpoint setting and the 0 4 bit pattern number setting IM 04L31A01 03E 1 27 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 5 Contact Input Output Related Settings DIO Operation Control Function Style Number S3 or Later There are 7 types of DIO available DI 1 DO 1
537. the items that are attached to the data acquired in the internal memory In addition you can set whether or not to use the following functions Automatically increment the lot number at the end of the batch Display the batch number and lot number for each file in place of the date and time the data acquisition ended on the memory summary screen Opening the Operation Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Set mode gt gt MENU key switch to Set mode gt 9 soft key select Batch set The following display appears GROUP 1 a Jun 13 2003 14 45 41 ESF erzak Batch Application name YOKOGAWA Supervisor name CX1000 Hanager name ABCDEF Batch number TEST Lot number 3 Auto increment on Disp information Batch Input Clear Copy Operations on the Display 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to Batch Use and Not soft keys are displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Saving the Settings in Basic Setting Mode 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DI
538. the object under measurement is not a noise source However if this is not avoidable insulate the object under measurement and the measurement circuit In addition ground the object under measurement Shielded wires are effective against noise caused by electrostatic induction As necessary connect the shield to the ground terminal of the CX1000 make sure this does not lead to grounding at two points Twisting the measurement circuit wires at short intervals is relatively effective against noise caused by electromagnetic induction Make sure to ground the protective ground terminal through a small grounding resistance less than or equal to 100 9 IM 04L31A01 03E 2 13 Bulli pue uoNEye SU D 2 3 Wiring Wiring Procedure When using the reference junction compensation of the CX1000 through thermocouple input take measures to stabilize the temperature at the terminal section Always attach the terminal cover Do not use thick wires with high heat radiations effects cross sectional area of 0 5 mm or smaller recommended Keep the ambient temperature consistent Large temperature fluctuations can occur as a result of such things as turning ON OFF a nearby fan To protect the control current output voltage pulse output section from external noise such as electrical serges it is recommended that an external serge protector such as AR SA for current output or AR LP for volrage pulse output by Yokogawa M amp C
539. the remote signal rises when the collector signal voltage level of the remote terminal goes from high to low and falls when the collector signal goes low to high Rising and falling edges Trigger Rising i Falling ed i Ka Ms or more 1 100 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 20 Other Functions Batch Header BT1 Option Batch header is used to include information such as batch numbers and lot numbers along with the data acquired to the internal memory By including information such as batch numbers lot numbers and supervisor names along with the measured control computed data you will be able to manage the stored data By using the key login function in combination with this function the operators that are allowed to store data on the CX can be restricted and identified Adding Batch Information to the Measured Control Computed Data Display Data and Event Data The following information can be added to the display data and event data acquired to the internal memory For the setting procedure see section 11 7 The operator can change the batch number lot number and comment for each lot In addition the lot number can be automatically increased by one when one lot is complete Serial number of the CX the number written on the name plate of the CX Application name up to 16 characters Supervisor name up to 16 characters Manager name up to 16 characters Batch name Batch number up to 16 characters Lot num
540. tial settings Index Note e This users manual covers information regarding CX1000s that have a suffix code for language 2 English e For details on setting the displayed language see section 3 6 vi IM 04L31A01 03E How to Use This Manual Conventions Used in This Manual Unit Kirsin Denotes 1024 Example 768 KB file size Konnan Denotes 1000 Safety Markings The following markings are used in this manual A Danger Refer to corresponding location on the instrument This symbol appears on dangerous locations on the instrument which require special instructions for proper handling or use The same symbol appears in the corresponding place in the manual to identify those instructions WARNING Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause serious CAUTION Note injury or death to the user and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurences Calls attentions to actions or conditions that could cause damage to the instrument or user s data and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences Calls attention to information that is important for proper operation of th instrument Symbols Used on Pages Describing Operating Procedures On pages that describe the operating procedures in Chapter 3 through 11 the following symbols are used to distinguish the procedures from their explanations Procedure Revision History Indicates character s
541. til the PV reaches the wait zone regardless of the wait time setting When the PV returns within the wait zone the operation switches from wait operation to run mode and the program operation is resumed Wait operation is repeated every time the PV falls out of the wait zone Segment n 7 Original SP ee Wait zone IM 04L31A01 03E 1 47 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 11 Program Control Related Settings Event Output This function is used to output an alarm at a preset point in time or turn ON the contact output after a given time elapses The function operates in sync with the progression of the program operation The event action operates at the start time of the segment to which the event action is assigned There are two types of event actions time event and PV event Number of time events PV events that can be assigned to a single segment 16 each Total number of events that can be assigned total of all patterns 800 You can set relay output event output corresponding to an event action You can use one of the following types However only event output for each program pattern is available with versions of the CX earlier than 3 02 Common event output setting for all program patterns Event output for each program pattern Time Event Time event is a function used to turn ON the contact output after a specified time elapses by starting the clock from the time the segment operation is started The O
542. time proportional relay output Displayed as the OUT value recorded to data file With loops set in analog retransmission the PID computation is not performed Same as PV SP computation function Same as PV SP computation function 14 4 IM 04L31A01 03E 14 3 Alarm Function Control Alarms Control alarm types Other alarm types Alarm stand by action Alarm output Number of set alarms Hysteresis Indication Measurement Alarms Alarm types Alarm delay time PV upper limit PV lower limit deviation high limit deviation low limit deviation high low limit deviation high and low limits SP high limit SP low limit output high limit and output low limit Self diagnosis alarm and FAIL alarm Turns off PV SP alarms until operation becomes stable after starting control 6 outputs 2 loop 4 transistor outputs and 2 relay outputs 4 type loop Specifiable for each set alarm Status indication alarm type in the digital display section and common alarm indication when an alarm occurs Hold Non hold switchable High limit low limit difference high limit difference low limit high limit on rate of change low limit on rate of change delay high limit and delay low limit alarm delay 1 to 3600 s 1 hour Time interval for rate of change alarm Alarm output Number of settings Hysteresis Indication Scan interval x 1 to 15 6 outputs option Can also be assigned to control output
543. ting Changes If you change the PID group number or control mode setting the following items under setting mode control are initialized PID number The following items are initialized Segment PID group number Control mode Items other than the following are initialized Tag tag comment 5 Control group setting 8 Detailed DIO monitor and operation etc gt 3 DI DO monitor and operation setting 8 Detailed DIO monitor and operation etc gt 4 DI DO label setting 9 Control math setting gt 2 Logic math 9 Control math setting gt 3 Constant IM 04L31A01 03E suoljei9adoQ dnjas pajyejay uoun j01 u0D 4 2 Control gt Input setting Burnout and RJC This section explains the procedures for setting PV input burnout and reference junction compensation Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Setting mode control gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 12 soft key select Control 2 soft key select Input setting Input setting Loop number Heasurel Heasure2 Remote Heasurel Heasure2 E Remote Internal Setup Procedure Note 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you cha
544. tion Numerical Display The range of displayed values of report data is from 9999999 to 99999999 excluding the decimal point The decimal point position corresponds to the position of the decimal point of the upper and lower limit span or upper and lower limit scale for scaling However special displays are used for cases given in the table below Measurement channel Item Data Condition of Measurement Channels Displayed Output Average value When all of the data are measurement errors or over range Blank Maximum Minimum Value When all of the data are measurement errors Blank e Positive over range 99999 Negative over range 99999 Sum When all of the data are measurement errors or Blank over range When the sum value exceeds 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 When the sum value is below 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 Computation channel Item Data Condition of Computation Channels Displayed Output Average value When all of the data are computation errors or Blank computation overflow Maximum Minimum value When all of the data are computation errors Blank When the maximum value exceeds 99999999 999999999 When the minimum value is 9999999 99999999 The decimal position that was specified when the span for the channel was specified applies to the maximum and minimum values For example if the span setting of the channel is 200 0 then 99999999 is output when the value exceeds
545. tion is stopped ManualSample 9 2 Writes the instantaneous values of all channels to the internal memory once Message to 8 8 8 Displays the message 1 to 8 on the trend display and write it to the internal memory Snapshot 9 6 Saves the current screen image data to the external storage medium IM 04L31A01 03E 11 2 Key Lock This section explains how to disable enable the key operation including Zip disk ejection and data save operation in manual save mode Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Setting mode Control gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 5 soft key select Keylock gt 1 to 3 soft keys select Keylock1 to Keylock3 The following display appears 1 Keylock1 setting screen 2 Keylock2 setting screen Setup Mode ne Setup Mode Keylock Keylock2 Control Use Not START Lock HODE RUN RESET Free Password BC STOP Lock REH LOC Lock HOLD Free MENU Lock RUN STOP Lock ADVANCE Free USER Free SP Lock PATTERN No Free DISP ENTER Free OUT Free SEGHENT TIME Free Alarm ACK Free AUTO TUNING Free Hath Free SP No Free Write memory Free TUNING Free Nessage Mail Hanual sample Hedia Free Use Not 3 Keylock3 setting screen Setup Mode KeyLock3 Control gt Control menu lock Range Alarm Lock Operation Lock PID parameter Lock Control group Lock L
546. tion status indication section data display section and the soft key menu However on the measurement operation display the FUNC key must be pressed to show the soft key menu alili Group Faceplate Style Example Operation status display section Control data display section 22 0 a 2 00 TUNING NEXT 1 2 Soft key menu IM 04L31A01 03E 1 67 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 16 Display Function Operation Status Indication Section The following information is displayed in the status display section during operation mode and setting mode The information is not displayed during basic setting mode Setup Mode is displayed instead When set to display data only 78911 E 10 6 G When set to Free t E sora set to Trigger or Rotate When the internal A p memory is partitioned B into 16 blocks c Data acquisition to the vw internal memory in progress n E Program control in progress 1 User name The user name is displayed when the key login function is used and the user is logged in 2 Group name or display name The display name or group name corresponding to the display shown on the data display section ALL is displayed only when all channels are displayed on the trend display 3 Current date and time The current date and time are displayed On models with the optional BT1 batch header the date and time an
547. to SW018 using the soft keys 7 Press the DISP ENTER key Setting the alarm delay 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the First CH and Last CH boxes 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the start and end channel numbers for setting the alarm 3 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the Time box under Alarm delay 4 Press the Input soft key and set the alarm delay time on the pop up window 5 Press the DISP ENTER key Math alarm Off On Four alarms alarm numbers 1 to 4 can be specified for the selected alarm channel Set the desired alarm to On Type Select the alarm type from the following four types H High limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured computed value exceeds the alarm value L Lower limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured computed value falls below the alarm value T Delay high limit alarm An alarm occurs when the computed value remains above or equal to the alarm value for the specified delay t Delay low limit alarm An alarm occurs when the computed value remains below or equal to the alarm value for the specified delay Value Set the value according to the Type you selected above The selectable range is the range defined by Span Upper Lower that was specified in Assigning Computation Channels see the previous section Relay On Off Select whether to enable On or disable Off the relay output 10 6 IM 04L31A01 03E 10
548. to basic setting mode gt 10 soft key select Control gt 2 soft key select DI DO SW registration The following display appears Setup Mode DI DO SW registration Hodule CTRL1 DI PatternNo bi t PatternNolbit PatternNo2bit thernet PatternNo3bit PatternNodbit When specifying program pattern numbers 20 30 use 6 bits In that case always set the sixth bit located at PatternNo5bit to None see the table on the next page TRL1 DICTRL1 DO INT SW1 INT SW2 INT SW 4 50 IM 04L31A01 03E 4 21 Settings for Switching the Program Patterns Using Contact Inputs with BCD Codes Version 3 20 or Later Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the Module box A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display Press the soft key corresponding to the terminal block to be used The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item Press the soft key corresponding to the program pattern number to be used The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Save the Settings in Basic Setting Mode 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to the basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears
549. to each control input terminal starting on the right as you face the terminals and the PV SP of each loop is the computed value You can apply scale conversion bias input filter ten segment linearizer bias ten segment linearizer approximation and square root computation on the control signal input For thermocouple inputs you can set reference junction compensation In addition ratio setting can be specified against RSP inputs Control Signal Output The terminal provides universal output Two loops can be controlled except cascade control which uses two loops for one control The following types of control output can be selected PID control output Time proportional PID Outputs ON OFF signals with a pulse width that is proportional relay contact output to the time as relay contact signals according to the computed PID value Time proportional PID Outputs ON OFF signals with a pulse width that is proportional to voltage pulse output the time as voltages according to the computed PID value Current output continuous Continuously outputs a current analog signal that is PID control output proportional to the computed PID value On off control relay Outputs on off control relay contact signals according to the contact output polarity positive negative of the deviation between the SP and the PV IM 04L31A01 03E 1 2 Control Function Overview Control Methods Analog Retransmission Outputs the specifi
550. to protect the control element and object of control Since this function negates the derivative action use caution when using this function on derivative type control Selectable range of velocity 0 1 or 100 0 s 1 36 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 9 Settings for ON OFF Control Target Setpoint Relay Hysteresis The target setpoint SP is set on the PID Parameter setting display see page 4 27 in EU 0 0 to 100 0 of the measurement span in the same fashion as the PID control On the PID parameter setting display you select a PID number in the range of 1 to 8 and register one SP for each PID parameter as with other parameters However in ON OFF control the PID number functions as a SP number In ON OFF control output you can set hysteresis to prevent chattering The hysteresis is set using the setpoint 0 0 to 100 0 and the hysteresis activation position center low limit and high limit When the activation position setting is Center A Output ON OFF action point Target setpoint Y ON Hysteresis OFF gt Process value Settings of Other Control Parameters The following control parameters are common with PID control Control action direction Preset output Control alarm mode SP tracking PV tracking Setpoint limiter Target setpoint ramp rate setting Switching Control Parameters by PV Zones When Zone PID is turned ON the following control parameters can be switched
551. to the character string specified here the sequence number is incremented every time data is saved For example if the specified directory name is DATAO the first key operation saves the data to the DATAO A00 directory The second key operation saves the data to the DATAO A01 directory Save data only when Save is set to Manual Set how data is to be saved when the external storage medium is inserted into the drive in manual save mode Select All which saves all the data in the internal memory or Unsave which saves only the data that has not been saved The data that is saved is display data event data manual sample data TLOG data and report data only on models with the computation function option IM 04L31A01 03E 9 2 Saving Measured Computed Data at Arbitrary Times Manual Sample This section explains how to save the instantaneous values of all measurement computation channels excluding measurement channels set to skip and computation channels set to Off at arbitrary times Procedure 1 On the operation dislay press the FUNC key A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the Manual sample soft key AlarmACK Messagy Note Hanual Tri r sample Trigse Next 1 3 When manual sample is executed the instantaneous values of all channels excluding measurement channels set to skip and computation channels set to Off are acquired to the internal
552. to tuning is executed However the secondary loop of cascade control is the SP specified by the SP number If auto tuning is executed when any of the loops set to program control enabled includes the case when program control is enabled on the primary loop of cascade control is in program operation the progress of the program operation is temporarily paused The time event and segment time are prolonged by the amount of time the program operation is paused The program operation is resumed when auto tuning on all loops set to program control enabled is complete When program operation is temporarily paused hole operation advance operation and PV event are valid However wait operation is invalid IM 04L31A01 03E 1 55 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 13 Measurement Function Overview Measurement Input DC voltage thermocouple resistance temperature detector or ON OFF signal contact signal or voltage signal can be measured The input signal is A D converted at a scan interval of 1 s or 2 s and acquired to the internal memory In addition difference computation square root computation and scaling can be carried out on the measured data and acquired to the internal memory Displaying the Measured Data The measured data acquired to the internal memory can be displayed on the operation display using trend waveforms numeric values digital values or bar graphs Trend Display Digital Display 3 09 4a ore Era os
553. trical instruments supplied with power from fixed equipment such as electric switchboards EMC Conformity standards Altitude 2000 m or less CE EN61326 1 Class A Table 2 For use in industrial locations EN61326 2 3 EN55011 Class A Group1 EN61000 3 2 Class A EN61000 3 3 C tick EN55011 Class A Group1 The instrument continues to operate at a measurement accuracy of within 10 of the range during testing Power Supply Supply voltage 100 to 110 VAC 10 200 to 220 VAC 10 Power frequency 50 Hz 2 60 Hz 2 Power consumption 100 VAC Approx 20 VA Approx 23 VA 39 VA 240 VAC Approx 29 VA_ Approx 32 VA 51 VA For the power supply specifications when the CX1000 is driven by the 24 V power supply see 24 VDC AC power supply driven P1 in section 14 7 Options IM 04L31A01 03E 14 17 a suonesio ds 14 8 General Specifications Isolation Insulation resistance Withstand voltage Between each terminal and earth 20 MQ or more at 500 VDC Between the power terminal and earth 1500 VAC at 50 60 Hz for one minute Between the contact output terminal and earth 1500 VAC at 50 60 Hz for one minute Between the measurement input terminal and earth 1500 VAC at 50 60 Hz for one minute Mutually between measurement input terminals 1000 VAC at 50 60 Hz for one minute Between the contact input terminal and earth 500 VDC for one minute Between the current output terminal and earth 500 VAC a
554. trings that appear on the screen Example Space soft key Volt This subsection contains the operating procedure used to carry out the function described in the current section All procedures are written with inexperienced users in mind experienced users may not need to carry out all the steps Describes the details of the settings and the restrictions that exist with the operating procedure It does not give a detailed explanation of the function For details on the function see chapter 1 the function For details on the function see chapter 1 Edition Addition and Change to Functions 5 Added the contents of IM04L31A01 05E the user s manual describing changes to functions with version 3 02 or later to the user s manual and discarded IM04L31A01 05E Added an I O terminal diagram Added example expressions 6 The DAQSTANDARD is revised IM 04L31A01 03E vii Contents A Safety Precautions cccccccccsscesssscssscscsscsscssesessecansssnassasseauscsassaasecsassesecsassessecsacsacaecsecsecaesaeeeeneenes ji Checking the Contents of the Package esessiesesseesissiesiississiretissinetisttnetustnntnntn nennen tennene nentet iv How to Use This Manuall sirini irnia aa i a aE aAa AT AEE aP airaa vi Chapter 1 Explanation of Functions 1 1 1 2 e E a os sa sa sa ia sa i i ia sa sass S CX1000 OVi W sii ic iia Alinta ia eid a Adi Ns 1 1 Control Function Overview eeeceececeeeeceeeceee ce
555. trol On in Basic control settings indicated above Then carry out the following settings in addition to Target setpoint PID parameter settings Settings for program control Section 1 11 Pattern initial setting Set the pattern numbers pattern off on number of segments used segment assignment method edit segment number and loop number v C Wait action setting D Wait action setting Set wait zone off on wait zone settings and timer h d C Pattern initial setting gt x Pattern start setting C Pattern start setting D Set starting target setpoint and start code operation start condition Program pattern setting Program pattern setting Set segment numbers ramp soak final target setpoint 4 segment time ramp rate time unit ramp rate segment C Event settin PID group numbers operation at the time of segment g switching wait operation type and wait numbers 4 Event setting 4 Repeat action setting D Set event types loop number type setpoint only when PV event is selected time event ON OFF ON time 4 OFF time only when time event is selected and hysteresis of C Event output setting D PV event Repeat action setting Set the repeat function number of repetitions start segment number and end segment number Event output setting Set the event type relay output ON OFF and relay output number Auto message printing program
556. trol appears 2 Select RUN or RESET using the up and down arrow keys 3 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes To close the window without making any changes press the ESC key 6 16 IM 04L31A01 03E 6 4 Operations on the Program Selection Display and Program Control Display Only on Models with the Program Control Option Advancing Segments 1 Press the ADVANCE soft key A pop up window for advancing segments appears RUN RST ADWALADVANCE GO NEXT 173 2 Press the DISP ENTER key to execute the advance operation To cancel the operation press the ESC key Executing and Releasing the Hold Operation 1 Press the HOLD soft key A pop up window for executing releasing the hold operation appears RUN RST ADVALHOLD Go S4INEXT 173 2 Select ON execute or OFF release using the up and down arrow keys 3 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes To close the window without making any changes press the ESC key Changing the Remaining Segment Time When in Hold Operation 1 Press the SEG TIME soft key A pop up window for changing the remaining segment time appears The window shows the remaining segment time RUN RST ADVA SEG TINE 00 09 56 S4 NEXT 174 2 Change the remaining segment time using the up and down arrow keys 3 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes To close the window without making any changes press the ESC key Changing the Target SP When in Hold Operation
557. trol direction and H relay hysteresis BS1 measured value 1 input bias FL1 measured value 1 input filter BS2 measured value 2 input bias FL2 measured value 2 input filter RT ratio setting RBS remote input bias RFL remote input filter and W01 W12 control computation constant are available BS1 W12 is valid if the main unit is style number S3 or later For external loops using Green Series communications DB dead band is also available 01 SP target setpoint 08 D derivative time 15 Off 02 A1 alarm value 09 OH output high limit 16 Off 03 A2 alarm value 2 10 OL output low limit 17 Off 04 A3 alarm value 3 11 MR manual reset 18 Off 05 A4 alarm value 4 12 PO preset output 19 Off 06 P proportional band 13 Off 20 Off 07 integral time 14 Off 21 Off Display and Operation on the Tuning Display and Control Mode For internal loops the possible operations that you can perform on the tuning display vary depending on the control mode The table below shows the relationship between the display operations specific to the tuning display and the control mode For the relationship between the display operations that are common with the control display and the control mode see Display and Operation on the Control Display and Control Mode on page 6 6 For a description on the display operations and control mode of external loops through the optional Green series communications see
558. ts that the internal memory can hold 50 TLOG data only on models with the computation function Trigger Timeout of the timer Data format Binary Maximum number of data sets that the internal memory can hold 400 or within 16 files IM 04L31A01 03E 14 9 a suonesio ds 14 5 Storage Function Report data only on models with the computation function Type Hourly daily hourly daily daily weekly daily monthly Data format ASCII Maximum number of data sets that the internal memory can hold 40 Trigger function Event data file Select the mode from FREE TRIG and ROTATE Display data file event data file Select the mode from TRIG and ROTATE Display copy function Copy method Key operation communication command or remote input Data format PNG Destination External storage medium or communication output 14 10 IM 04L31A01 03E 14 6 Communication Functions Ethernet Communications Connection Ethernet 10BASE T Protocol SMTP HTTP1 0 FTP TCP UDP IP ARP and ICMP E mail transmission function Recipient addresses 2 address groups multiple addresses can be specified using up to 150 characters for each group Notification types Notifies the following information through e mail Select notify or not notify for each address group Alarm notification appointed hour notification and report notification Web server function Displays screen images alarm information instantaneous values
559. ts the operation after the power recovers Measured value or computed value Alarm setting T T T Alarm Off On Off On Off _ _ Power failure Power failure occurrence recovery occurrence recovery Operation when the alarm setting is changed When anew delay alarm is set The alarm detection starts at the time the alarm is set It is unaffected by the conditions existing before the alarm is set Ifthe alarm setting of a preexisting delay alarm is changed If an alarm is not occurring at the time of the change alarm detection starts at the new setting If an alarm is occurring at the time of the change and the alarm type is set to delay upper limit alarm the alarm continues as long as the input is above or equal to the new setting If the input is below the new setting the alarm turns OFF If the alarm type is set to delay lower limit alarm the alarm continues as long as the input is below or equal to the new setting If the input is greater than the new setting the alarm turns OFF 1 62 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 15 Measurement Function gt Measurement Alarm Related Settings Alarm Hysteresis You can set a width hysteresis to the values used to activate and release alarms Alarm hysteresis prevents frequent activation and release of alarms when the measured value is unstable around the alarm value The hysteresis is fixed to 0 5 of the measurement span display scale width if t
560. uickly tracks the program pattern mode secondary side during cascade control With bumps in the control output at the time the SP SP gt is changed x PV PV derivative type PID Use this function on continuous fixed point control if you do not During operation in local wish to disturb the PV caused by the sensitive reaction of the mode or auto mode control output OUT at the time the SP is changed only the primary side In the case of PV derivative type PID no control output bumps during cascade control the output value OUT does not drastically change at the time the SP is changed The deviation is gradually eliminated using only the integral term I against the deviationthat occurs Without bumps in the control output at the time the SP is changed SP gt E Fixed point PV OUT control mode PV derivative type PID During operation in remote mode secondary side during cascade control PV With bumps in the control output at the time the SP ae is changed AOE NI AT OUT Use this function on the secondary loop of cascade control A stable control output is achieved without sensitively reacting to the output of the primary loop IM 04L31A01 03E suolouny jo uoneuejdxg 1 3 Basic Settings of Control Control Output Cycle Time Select the type of control output from the following The type can be selected for each loop Time proportional PID relay contact output
561. umber at the end of the batch Display the batch number and lot number for each file in place of the date and time the data acquisition ended on the memory summary screen 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2 Press the Batch soft key to display the Batch setting display Application name YOKOGAWA Supervisor name CX1000 Hanager name ABCDEF Batch name No MEST E 3l Comment _ 3 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 4 Enter the Batch name No and Comments using the character number input key 5 Press the DISP ENTER key Batch number Enter the batch number up to 16 characters Lot number Enter the lot number 0 9999 Comment The comment the name of the user that entered the comment only when the key login function is enabled and the date and time when the comment was entered are written to the internal memory along with the measured computed data The comment is cleared when the data acquisition to the internal memory is stopped You can set three comments IM 04L31A01 03E 11 17 suolouny 13410 JO SuoNeiedO fa Chapter 12 Troubleshooting 12 1 Messages Error messages for communication commands are output in English Errors Related to Parameter Settings Setting Errors
562. un jo uoneuejdxg 1 20 Other Functions Confirming the Stored Data The display data and the event data in the internal memory or the external storage medium can be displayed on the historical trend display When the historical trend of the display data or event data in the internal memory or in the external storage medium is displayed batch information can be shown in the memory information display The batch number and lot number for each file can be displayed in place of the date and time of the file creation on the memory summary screen and on the screen used to select the display data and event data to be loaded from the external storage medium 1 102 IM 04L31A01 03E Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 1 Handling Precautions This section describes the precautions to be taken when using the CX1000 and the external storage medium Make sure to read this section before using the CX1000 Handling Precautions This instrument uses many plastic parts When cleaning wipe using a dry soft cloth Do not use volatile chemicals since this might cause discoloring and deformation Do not bring charged objects near the signal terminals Doing so can lead to malfunction Do not pour volatile agents on the LCD panel keys or other parts of the instrument nor leave them in contact with rubber or PVC products for an extended time Doing so can lead to malfunction Do not apply shock to the instrument When not in use make s
563. up gt Group name Control group gt 1 to 4 gt ON OFF Control group gt 1 to 4 gt Kind Control group gt 1 to 4 gt Number 1 CONTROL GROUP1 1 2 On 3 4 Off 1 2 Int Loop 1 01 2 02 6 Ten segment linearizer I O Parameter Initial Value Ten segment linearizer I O gt Loop number Ten segment linearizer I O gt Input type Ten segment linearizer I O gt Mode 1 PV1 Off Program control parameters 1 Program parameter setting 2 Event output setting 3 Aux Auto message Display position 4 Aux Event group 1 2 3 4 lt 1 Program parameter setting gt Parameter Initial Value 1 Pattern initial setting Program initial setting gt Pattern number 1 Program initial setting gt Segments 0 Program initial setting gt Segment setting method Time Program initial setting gt Pattern name Pattern 1 Program initial setting gt Action loop Off 2 Wait action setting Wait action setting gt Wait zone 1 to 5 Off Wait action setting gt Wait time 00 00 00 3 Pattern start setting Pattern start setting gt Start target setpoint gt Loop 1 and 2 200 0 Pattern start setting gt Start code StartTargetSP App 32 IM 04L31A01 03E Appendix 6 Initial Values Parameter Initial Value 4 Program pattern setting Program pattern setting gt Segment number 1 Program pattern setting gt Ramp Soak select Ramp Program pattern settin
564. urchase 1 Life time under rated load of relay contact The replacment period varies depending on the load conditions and frequency of use 2 Replacement Period at the Upper Limit of the Normal Operating Temperature 50 C The replacement period varies depending on the temperature in which the instrument is operated and the instrument s specifications If the instrument is used in a 30 C environment it may be operational for 10 years or more N t ee l The LCD replacement period indicates the half life of the brightness when the brightness is set to the factory default setting The half life is shortened as the brightness is set higher The deterioration of brightness varies depending on the condition of use and its determination is subjective Consider these facts for determining the actual replacement period The color of the LCD may become yellowish as time elapses The discoloration tends to progress faster as the brightness is set higher Replacement of the Terminal Block Replacements of the terminal block will be carried out by a YOKOGAWA engineer or an engineer certified by YOKOGAWA When replacement is required contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer 13 4 IM 04L31A01 03E Chapter 14 Specifications 14 1 Common to Control and Measurement Thermocouple burnout Control Input A D integral time Number of inputs Period Input type Linear scaling Available range of scaling Decimal poin
565. ure to turn OFF the power If there are any symptoms of trouble such as smoke strange ordors or strange sounds coming from the instrument immediately turn OFF the power and disconnect power supply Then contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer or representative Handling Precautions for the External Storage Medium Insert the card until these edges are nearly flush Use caution in the handling of the external storage medium as it is delicate Write operations to floppy disks and Zip disks may fail in high temperature or low temperature environments If you are using the CX1000 in a low temperature environment around 10 C or less use the CX1000 after the warm up time at least 30 minutes has elapsed If you are using the CX1000 in a high temperature environment around 40 C or more it is recommended that the external storage medium be inserted into the drive when saving the data and be removed after the data storage operation is finished If you are using a commercially available compact flash card on CX1000s in the ATA flash memory card drive be careful of static electricity The CX1000 may not operate properly if you touch the compact flash card that is inserted into the CX1000 when your body is charged with static electricity Handling the CF Card and Adapter Insert the CF card into the adapter as shown in the figure below The card should remain in the adapter when removing it from the card slot on the CX1000 does
566. ured computed data every scan interval x scan interval 86400 1 92 IM 04L31A01 03E 1 18 Computation and Report Functions Option Operation during Power Failures If a power disruption occurred while the report function was in progress the report function will resume after the power is restored The exact operation will vary depending on whether the power is restored before or after the scheduled time to create a report Time of Recovery Port Operation After the time to create the report Report data is created immediately after power is restored The measured computed data up to the time of the power disruption is used For the next scheduled report data after the power recovery are used Before the time to create the report After power is restored report data are created at the time of the next normally scheduled report The measured computed data excluding the power disruption period is used Handling of Abnormal Data Handling of the measured computed data containing abnormal values is as follows Type of Abnormal Data Report Data Average Value Maximum Minimum Value Sum Value Positive over Not used Used Not used Negative over Not used Used Not used Error Not used Not used Not used Over range for measurement channels or computation overflow for computation channels Status If the data of a measurement or a computation channel enters any of the conditions listed below within the r
567. urement alarm option terminal block ccccceeee 2 7 Preset OUTPUT s s ssssesisiesereiesisierertirninnenerrerninneneneernne measurement group program Control 0 sees eeeee tees eee eee teteeeentecnateeeneeey measurement input terminal DIOCK c cccscesesseseeseseeeeseseees 2 8 program control mode Measurement INPUt WIFING ccccescsecesescseseescseesseseeaeeeees 2 14 program control starting measurement SPAN o eeecesesesesescsessessessesestetsscseestsseeseseeeess 1 21 program display position MOA anaana Program pattern NAME e eee cet eeeeeetee eee eeteeeee media save program pattern start segment selection Of 0 0 6 19 MEMORY 0 occcccccccecccecccecececerecereceececetseetseceececerseeateesureeereeusecs program selection display HG MIOPY AA EEE E E proportional Dand sassis memory clearing of 3 14 PIANO radia a icherietaninrsitnenrs es 6 13 memory end output s s s eee 1 99 PV weeesseseane 1 2 1 3 2 5 memory information displaying Of ssseiieeeieeeeiiereeen 8 9 PV event oes 5 8 MEMOFY SUMMALY sscscsseseescsessescssesesscseseescseeceseseecsvseeecaes PV event hysteresis 5 10 MENU key oo ccscscsscssessescescsscssescestesessestesssesestesvsseessstesvsneeess PV Righ liMitiscc sssisseesci aaa 1 38 MESSAGE oeeeeeececeeeees PVIOW IIMIS A ssveseccdeewe ceesicasvisteececeteess eiuevtvesvesevievea S tecteeateeee 1 38 message summary PV range conversion na 1 2
568. urned OFF 26min di No background color REPEAT START SEG DELAY TIME Split Waveform Display on the Program Selection Display and Program Control Display If viewing is difficult due to overlapping waveforms on the full display you can divide the display area into sections The waveform display position of each loop in split display is set using setting mode control gt 7 Program control parameters gt 3 AUX Auto message Display position gt Program display position For the procedure see section 5 9 AUX Auto message Display position The figure below shows an example in which the display area is divided into three sections Setting Loop 1 1 1 Loop 2 2 2 mji nd Display position number Note The scale displayed at the right edge of the waveform display section on the full display is the scale corresponding to the smallest numbered loop On the split display the scale is that of the smallest numbered loop in the divided area 6 20 IM 04L31A01 03E 6 4 Operations on the Program Selection Display and Program Control Display Only on Models with the Program Control Option Changing the Pattern Settings When in Hold Operation You can change the following settings when in hold operation The remaining time of the current segment Target SPs of each loop When in hold operation the soft key menu shows SEG TIME display a window for changing the remaining segment time and T
569. urnout action Off Up When a burnout occurs the measured result is set to positive overrange kkkkk OD Down When a burnout occurs the measured result is set to negative overrange When the PV SP computation function is ON you can turn the buffer for the control input channel ON or OFF When ON the measured results are fixed according to the settings in PV SP computation error For information about PV SP computation error see section 4 16 PV SP Computation and Analog Retransmission Settings Style Number S3 RJC This is the reference junction compensation setting for thermocouple inputs The setting is entered on the PV inputs of each loop Measure2 is valid only when the control mode is set to PVSwitching Remote is valid only when the PV input is set to remote input This setting is invalid for PV inputs other than thermocouples Measure1 Measure2 Remote Select either Internal or External initial value is Internal Internal Uses the reference junction compensation function of the CX1000 External Uses an external reference junction compensation function If set to External a box for entering the reference junction compensation voltage that is added to the input appears Set the value in the range of 20000 uV to 20000 uV initial value is O uV When the PV SP computation function is ON you can select Internal or External default value is Internal for the control input channel If set to External a sett
570. ut making any changes press the ESC key Press the BACK soft key to return to the original soft key menu Starting Program Control 1 Press the RUN soft key A pop up window for starting the program control appears RUN PTNRUN RUN S7INEXT 174 2 Press the DISP ENTER key Selecting the Program Pattern Start Segment 1 Press the NEXT 1 3 soft key 2 Press the ST SEG soft key A pop up window for selecting the start segment appears ST SEG DELAYST SEG 1 S4 NEXT 374 3 Select the segment number using the up and down arrow keys 4 Press the DISP ENTER key Setting the Delay Time for Starting the Program Pattern Control 1 Press the NEXT 1 3 soft key followed by the NEXT 2 3 soft key 2 Press the DELAY TM soft key A pop up window for setting the delay time appears ST SEG DELAY DELAY TH 00 00 00 S4 NEXT 374 3 Change the delay time using the up and down arrow keys 4 Press the DISP ENTER key 6 14 IM 04L31A01 03E 6 4 Operations on the Program Selection Display and Program Control Display Only on Models with the Program Control Option Event Display Operation Style Number S3 or Later 1 Press the Next 1 3 soft key 2 Press the EV ON OFF soft key Time events and PV events are displayed ALL 1370 8 Shows upper and lower limit values when events are displayed aT Pattern display Event names are not displayed 200 0 Time events Event display
571. ve or Absolute When Relative Is Selected Interval Set the time until the end of the interval in hour minute 00 01 to 24 00 Reset Set whether to reset the TLOG computation value at every interval On or Off Action If set to DataSave the instantaneous values of all measurement computation channels are written to the internal memory at every interval Select Off to disable this function When Absolute Is Selected Interval Set the time until the end of the interval from the following 19 types 1min 2min 3min 4min 5min 6min 10min 12min 15min 20min 30min 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12h and 24h Ref time Set the time to be used as the reference The reference time is set in the range of 0 00 to 23 00 at 1 hour steps Reset Set whether to reset the TLOG computation value at every interval On or Off Action If set to DataSave the instantaneous values of all measurement computation channels are written to the internal memory at every interval Select Off to disable this function IM 04L31A01 03E 10 9 uondo uoHoUNY UOHey NdWOD y YUM Sapo UO AjUC suoneiodg pajejoy uolnouny wodey pue uonejndwog 10 4 Setting TLOG Computations Selecting the Timer Number and Sum Scale of the TLOG Computation First CH Last CH You can assign channels numbers 31 to 42 as computation channels Set a range of channel numbers within this range for setting the timer number and sum scale of the TLOG c
572. x 9 Program Control Worksheets Event output Time event 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PV_event P on off no Hr o Program pattern end signal P omon No ee ee O N oo A U N IM 04L31A01 03E App 49 xipueddy Appendix 10 Expression Examples The following are simple application examples using expressions Refer to them when using computation channels CN Counter Function This is a counter that counts from 1 to 15 Expression 31 31 31 LT K02 K01 K01 1 K02 15 Explanation When the value of channel 31 is smaller than 15 the value of 31 LT K02 is 1 The value of channel 31 increments by 1 every scan interval When the value of channel 31 is 15 the value of 31 LT K02 becomes 0 The value of 31 31 LT K02 K01 returns to 1 Note Computation channels are processed in sequence The value of the previous scan is used in the computation for its own channel number and channel numbers greater than its own channel number in the expression In this example a value one scan behind is used for 31 in 31 31 LT K02 K01 HEHEHE EE H Scan interval Resetting and Carrying Over an Excess When the Integrated Value Exceeds a Certain Value Function If the measured values on channel 1 are integrated and the total exceeds 1000 1000 is subtracted from the total and integration continues Scan Interval 1 second Channel 1 Measuring range 0 0 50 0 L M liters per
573. xternal loops can be constructed XX J v Up to four units four loops Communications with PLCs The CX1000 can carry out ladder communications between PLCs Sequencers PLCs such as the FA M3 by YOKOGAWA Up to 32 units Communications with PCs The CX1000 can communicate with PCs Modbus master slave Dedicated protocol communications with the PC Command communications Display settings data of the CX using DAQSTANDARD for CX IM 04L31A01 03E suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 1 3 Basic Settings of Control PID Group Number You can set up to eight groups of control parameters PID parameters on the setting display that you wish to change collectively through control You set the number of groups to be used from 1 to 8 For example if you set a value of 4 the selectable PID numbers will be 1 through 4 The parameters that are included in a single control parameter group vary depending on the control method Control output in the settings During PID control SP PID constant output lower upper limit shutdown ON OFF only when outputting 4 20 mA of current manual reset reverse direct and preset output During ON OFF control SP relay hysteresis reverse direct and preset output Control Period The following control periods can be selected 250 ms initial value 500 ms and 1 s The control peri
574. y Temperature drift Number of outputs Output signal Load resistance Resolution Number of outputs Output signal Contact rating 6 inputs 2 loops 2 outputs 2 loops 4 to 20 mADC or 0 to 20 mADC 600 Q or less 0 1 of measurement span 1 mA or more 200 ppm C output section 2 outputs 2 loops ON voltage 12 VDC 600 Q or more 0 1 2 outputs 2 loops NC NO COM 250 VAC 3 A or 30 VDC 3 A resistive load Non voltage contact or open collector TTL or transistor ON voltage 0 5 V or less 30 mADC Leakage current when turned OFF 0 25 mA or less Photocoupler isolation 2 points common 2 outputs 2 loops 250 VAC 1 Aor 30 VDC 1 A resistive load 4 outputs 2 loops Transistor contact rating 24 VDC 50 mA Up to 5 inputs isolated the number of inputs varies depending on the model and control mode Period 250 500 1000 ms 6 inputs DCV TC and ID are isolated Period 1 sor2s 14 16 IM 04L31A01 03E 14 8 General Specifications Standard Installation Environment Standard operating conditions Ambient temperature 0 to 50 C 5 to 40 C when floppy disk or Zip disk is in operation Ambient humidity 20 to 80 RH at 5 to 40 C Vibration 10 to 60 Hz 0 2 m s Shock Not allowed Magnetic field 400 A m or less DC and 50 60 Hz External noise Normal mode 50 60 Hz Volt The peak value including the signal must be less than 1 2 times the measuring
575. yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Saving the Settings 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed If you change any of the parameters PID number Control period Control mode or Program control a message Initialize setting data appears in the confirmation window When you press the DISP ENTER key setup items of Setting mode Control related to these settings see Note on page 4 3 will be initialized Setting Control Action Related Parameters PID number Set the maximum control parameter group number to be used in the range of 1 to 8 initial value is 8 Control period Select the control cycle from 250ms 500ms and 1s initial value is 250ms However if basic setting mode gt 2 A D Temperature gt A D Integrate in basic setting mode is set to 100ms the control period is fixed to 1s and is not selectable IM 04L31A01 03E 4 1 suoljei3adoQ dnjas pajyejay uoun 017U09 4 1 Control gt Control action Zone PID Set the PID selection method by turning Off On the Zone PID Off initial value Target setpoint selection If program control is ON on models with the program control option this becomes segment PID On Zone PID For the procedure in setting the reference point of the
576. you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item box Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box PD PV event hysteresis only on models with the program control option For each PV event 1 16 set the hysteresis in the range from 0 0 to 10 0 5 10 IM 04L31A01 03E 5 8 Program parameter setting gt Repeat action setting This section explains the procedures for setting the repeat function during program control Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to Setting mode Control gt 7 soft key select Program control parameters gt 1 soft key select Program parameter setting gt 7 soft key select Repeat action setting The following display appears Pattern 1 _ an 3 Apr O7 2002 11 07 26 eos kank Repeat setting Pattern number 1 Repeat action aaa Repeat frequency 1 Repeat start segment 1 Repeat end segment 1 Off On Repeat Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turn
577. ys and displays events You can select an event display method from the following GROUP The 5 events and event names specified for the group are displayed TIME EV All time events and representative event names are displayed PV EVENT All PV events and representative event names are displayed ALL All events are displayed Inthe program operation display time events scheduled from the current time are displayed Inthe program operation display the indicators that show whether events are ON or OFF are displayed ON Displays in red OFF Displays in green When displaying events waveform division display is unavailable Shows upper and lower limit scale values only when events are displayed IM 04L31A01 03E 6 21 uonesedg 01 U05 Bulunp suonesodo fo 6 4 Operations on the Program Selection Display and Program Control Display Only on Models with the Program Control Option Display during Advance When the ADVANCE soft key is pressed the remaining segment time is cleared and the program moves to the beginning of the next segment Accordingly the future section of the displayed preset pattern is shifted by an amount of the lost remaining segment time Remaining segment time that is lost due to advancing H Shift left Executing Multiple Program Patterns You can run a program pattern when another program pattern is running Patterns having overlapping loops may not be run simultaneously 6 22 IM 04L31
578. ys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 11 soft key select Aux Time zone The following display appears AUX Tag Channel Memory alarm lh Language English Partial Not Time zone Difference from GMT a LEE Channel Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note The tag name is set using the pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box 8 4 IM 04L31A01 03E 8 3 Measurement Function gt Settings Related to Tag Display for Channels Saving the Settings in Basic Setting Mode 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed Setting Tag Names to Be Displayed in Place of Channel Numbers First CH Last CH Set the target channels I
579. ys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item box 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note For setup item boxes that require values to be entered a pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key is used 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box DI DO Label Settings Module Select the control output terminal block You can also select the control DIO expansion terminal block Label Enter a label for each terminal using 16 characters or less 4 40 IM 04L31A01 03E 4 18 PV SP Computation and Analog Retransmission Settings Style Number S3 or Later This section explains the control function s PV SP computation and analog retransmission setting procedure Procedure Opening the Setting Display Press the keys in the following sequence MENU key switch to setting mode control gt 8 soft key select Control math setting 9 soft key when program control is ON gt 1 soft key PV SP math Retransmission The following display appears aie EALO 5 PU SP math Retransmission Control mode Single loop c

DAQSTATION CX1000 User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents